Logic

Capital® Logic™ User Guide
Incorporating Capital® Autoview Assist for Logic™ and

Capital® Topology™
Release 2015.1
February 2016
© 2016 Mentor Graphics Corporation

All rights reserved.
This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this
document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire
notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable
effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make
changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the
reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been
made.
The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in
written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation
of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor
Graphics whatsoever.
MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT,
EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS: The software and documentation were developed entirely at
private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to
FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure by or for the U.S.
Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in
the license agreement provided with the software, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable
mandatory federal laws.
TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of
Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior
written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark, as applicable. The use herein of a third-
party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to
indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics’
trademarks may be viewed at: www.mentor.com/trademarks.
The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of
Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.
Mentor Graphics Corporation

8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777
Telephone: 503.685.7000
Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210
Website: www.mentor.com
SupportNet: supportnet.mentor.com/
Send Feedback on Documentation: supportnet.mentor.com/doc_feedback_form

Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Reporting on a Project's Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
User Access Rights in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Object Model Integrity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Launching Capital Library from this Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Launching Capital Symbol from this Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Video Live Drive - Interactive Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Toplogy Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Diagram Language Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engineering Change Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Chapter 2
Projects and Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Opening a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Creating a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Editing the Attributes and Properties of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Deleting a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Importing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Exporting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Closing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Project-Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Edit Project Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Edit Properties Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
New Project Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Open Project Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Project Folders Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Build Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Editing the Information for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Deleting a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Importing a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding a Property to a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Editing a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Deleting a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Properties Dialog Box and Field References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Edit Design Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
New Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Saving the Designs in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting an Active Build List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 3

February 2016
Table of Contents
Setting an Active Build List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Selecting an Alternative Build List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating a New Capital Logic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating a Revision of a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Specifying the Applicable Options for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mapping Equivalent Devices During Design Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Running Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Design Rule Checks Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Design Rule Checks Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Design Rule Check Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Styling Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Refreshing External Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Managing Design Changes When Synchronizing Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Releasing a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Functional Module Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Definition and Management of Module Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Purge Functional Module Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Options and Option Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Creating an Option at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Deleting an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Choose Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Design Wide Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Deleting Design Wide Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Merging of Design Wide Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Example Flow for Using Design Wide Objects to Create a Contactor Configuration . . . . 87
Adding an Instance of a Design Wide Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Place Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Merging Instances of Design Wide Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Merge Into Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Finding Which Designs Use a Shared Object Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Shared Object Usages Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reporting on Shared Object Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Help Button Landing Pages for Project and Designs Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit Project Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit Project Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
New Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Open Project Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents
Project Folders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Edit Design Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
New Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Edit Effectivity Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Edit Effectivity Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Copy Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copy Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Create New Design Revision Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Create New Design Revision Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Applicable Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Applicable Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Edit Option Expression Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Edit Option Expression Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Design Revision/Build List Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Compare Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Compare Designs Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Design Rules Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Choose Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Place Design Wide Object Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Merge Into Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Shared Object Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Chapter 3
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating a New Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Editing the Properties of a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Editing the Name of a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adding a Property to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Deleting a Property From a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Deleting a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Filtering the Objects Displayed in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Effects of Filtering on Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adding a Diagram List Table to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adding a Device List Table to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Changing the Background Color of a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Closing a Diagram Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Deleting an Object from a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Selecting Objects in a Diagram Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Slice Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Copying Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Editing Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Multiple Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

February 2016
Table of Contents
Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Repeating an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to Create a New Instance of the Same Object
132
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to Create a New, Non-Shared Object . . . . . 133
Moving Diagram Objects to the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Deleting an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Select By Name Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Select by Attribute/Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using the Stroke Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Moving Browser Windows Around the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Panning Across a Diagram Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Help Button Landing Pages for Diagrams Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
New Logical Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
New Logical Diagram Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Select By Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Select By Attribute/Property - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 4
Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Adding Pins to an Object Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Usage Example - Preventing Pin Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Adding Pins to an Instance of a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Moving a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Disconnecting a Conductor from a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Overview of Reference Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cross-reference Rules for Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Converting a Non-reference Instance of a Pin to a Reference Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Converting a Reference Instance of a Pin to a Non-reference Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Connecting Selected Overlapping Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Connecting Selected Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Stacked Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating a Stack of Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adding a Pin to a Pin Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing a Pin from a Pin Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Viewing the Pins in a Pin Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Deleting a Stack of Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Viewing the Highway Conductors that Terminate at Stacked Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Edit Stack Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Usages Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Usage Examples - Stacked Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

February 2016
Table of Contents
Help Button Landing Pages for Pins Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Place Pins For Share Object Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place Pins Dialog for Shared Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place Pins for Non-shared Object Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Place Pins Dialog for Non-shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Edit Stack Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Stack Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Chapter 5
Devices and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Creating a Device in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding a Device from Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Preserving Connectivity and Assisting Object Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Preserving Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Preserving Imported Connectivity and Using Assisted Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adding a Shared Device/Connector/Splice to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Adding a Shared Device, Plug, Receptacle, Ring Terminal, or Inline Connector to a Diagram
187
Adding a Shared Splice to a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Editing Shared Devices and Shared Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Joining Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Associating a Symbol with a Shared Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Removing the Association Between a Symbol and a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Adding a Pin to a Shared Pin List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Removing a Pin from a Shared Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Renaming a Pin in a Shared Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Converting a Reserved Pin to an Unrestricted Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Converting an Unrestricted Pin to an Automatic Reservation Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Creating a New Revision of a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Creating a Revision of a Shared Object in Capital Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Swapping Out Shared Objects for a Compatible Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cross-References on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cross-References and Composite Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Setting up Project Preferences for Cross-references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Viewing Another Instance of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Changing the Home Instances of an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Changing an Instance of an Object to a Home Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Changing a Home Instance of an Object to a Normal Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Promoting a Device/Connector/Modular Connector/Ring Terminal/Splice to a Shared Object
206
Promoting a Device/Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Promoting a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Creating a Shared Device Based on a Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Deleting Multiple Unused Shared Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Deleting a Single Unused Shared Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Implementing Ground Wiring in the Generative Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Resizing a Device or Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Resizing a Device or Connector Using the Resize Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

February 2016
Table of Contents
Resizing a Device or Connector by Dragging a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Overview of Device Connectors and Harness Connectors in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Harness Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Device Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Generating Harness Connectors in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Generating Harness Connectors on a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Creating a Harness Connector In a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Converting Connectors to Ring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Converting Pins to Stud Pins and Attaching Multiple Ring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Reverting Stud Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Overview of Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Adding a Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Deleting a Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Sharing a Modular Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Associating a Modular Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Disassociating a Modular Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Overview of Backshells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Adding a Backshell to a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Add Shared Pins Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Scenarios for the Design Rule Check Called Invalid Library Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Direct to Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Capital Interactive Flow using Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Capital Generative Flow using Capital Logic and Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Capital Harness XC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Defining a Footprint Directly on a Device (Generative Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Help Button Landing Pages for Devices and Connectors Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Swap Out Revision Help [1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Swap Out Revision Dialog [1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Swap Out Revision Error Display Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Error Display Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Delete Unused Shared Objects Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Delete Unused Shared Objects Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Chapter 6
Design Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Design Hierarchy Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Adding a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Associating a Block with a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Removing an Association Between a Block and a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Creating New Instances of a Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Viewing Items Related to the Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adding Connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Viewing the Connectivity that Terminates at Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Merging Block Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Adding Pins to a Block Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

February 2016
Table of Contents
Edit Properties: Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Block Conductors Usages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Place Pins Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Chapter 7
Wires, Conductors and Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Creating a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating/Moving/Deleting a Wire Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Creating a Wire Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Moving a Wire Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Merging Wire Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Deleting a Wire Conductor from a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating/Moving/Deleting a Net Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Creating a Net Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Modifying a Net Conductor in a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Merging Net Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adding Multiple Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Deleting a Net Conductor from a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Creating a Notch to Move a Subsegment of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Disconnecting and Moving a Conductor End from a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Poke Home Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Specifying a Poke Home Wire in Capital Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Routing Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Using Orthogonal Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Auto-routing of Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Auto-routing of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Promoting a Conductor to a Shared Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Creating a Splice in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Creating a Single Pin Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Adding a Splice with a Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Converting a Butt Splice to a Center Strip Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Converting a Center Strip Splice to a Butt Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Automatic Splice Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Overview of Multicores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Overview of Overbraids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Creating a Multicore or Overbraid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Creating a Multicore or Overbraid Without a Library Part in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Creating a Multicore with a Library Part in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Splitting Multicore Indicators and Overbraid Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Associating a Comment Symbol with a Multicore or Overbraid Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Replacing a Multicore or Overbraid Indicator with a Comment Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Using Add Wire to Terminate a Wire at a Multicore or Overbraid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Promoting a Multicore or Overbraid to a Shared Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Adding a Shared Conductor to a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Overview of Shared Net Conductor Equivalence Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Creating a Shared Multicore or Overbraid in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Adding a Shared Multicore to a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Creating a Shield Terminator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

February 2016
Table of Contents
Chaining Shield Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Add Daisy Chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Connect Indicators with Daisy Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Adding a Multicore from Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Assigning Wires from Library Multicores to Wires in a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Editing the Module Code for a Wire Conductor, Shield or Multicore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Equipotential Nets at a Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Comparison of Use of Equipotential Attribute, Equipotential Global Attribute and Equivalence
Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Setting the Equipotential Attribute for a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Setting the Equipotential Global Attribute for a Shared Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Adding a Stow Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Converting Net Conductors to Wire Conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Multicore Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Abstraction Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Shield Termination Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Converting Simple Shield Terminations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Daisy Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Shield Cannot be Created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Excluding Net Conductors from the Conversion to Wire Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Highway/Conductor Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Adding a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adding a New Branch to a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Moving a Highway Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Editing a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Deleting a Highway Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Deleting an Entire Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Interfacing a Conductor with a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Routing Existing Conductors into a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Removing a Conductor from a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Unrouting Selected Conductors from a Highway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Unrouting all Conductors from a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Sharing a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Unsharing a Highway Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Edit Properties: Highway Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Chapter 8
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram as a Non-Intelligent Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Updating Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Composite Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Updating a Symbol Block in a Composite Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Replacing Composite Symbols for Shared Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Replacing a Symbol with a Compatible Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Saving Diagram Objects as a Device Symbol (Bookshelf Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Help Button Landing Pages for Symbols Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

February 2016
Table of Contents
Update Symbol - Options Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Update Symbol - Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Map Pins (for Symbol) Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Map Pins Dialog (for Symbol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Chapter 9
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Available Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Chapter 10
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Reporting on Single Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Reporting on a Build List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Saving a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Assembly BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Component BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Custom Logic Wire List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Multicore List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Net List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Shared Object Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Wire List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Configured Wire List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Using the Report Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Chapter 11
Graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Borders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Adding a Border to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Replacing a Border on a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Removing a Border from a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Graphic Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Drawing a Line in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Drawing a Polygon in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Drawing an Arc in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Adding a Picture to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

February 2016
Table of Contents
Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Stretching a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Moving a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Deleting a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Grouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Ungrouping Graphical Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes and Objects . . . . . . . . . . 378
Graphics Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Deleting a Graphics Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Grip Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Adding a Grip Point to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Deleting a Grip Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Graphics Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Edit Border Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Add Text Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Image Selection Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Symbol Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Help Button Landing Pages for Graphics Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Edit Border Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Add Text Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Image Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Symbol Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Fill Pattern Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Chapter 12
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Grouping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Aligning Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Distributing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Flipping Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Rotating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Defining Rotation Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Free Rotation of an Object or Comment Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Pivoting Text about its Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Setting Snap To Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Manual Table Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Using Japanese Text on a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Usage Example - Displaying Wire Color Information in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Chapter 13
Modifying Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Editing the Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Editing an Object's General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

February 2016
Table of Contents
Specifying the Name Property of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Adding a Property to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Updating an Object's Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Unassigning a Library Part from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Defining Specification Attributes for a Conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Specifying the Slot Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Assigning or Editing an Object's Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Foreground, Background and Manual Color Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Editing an Object's Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Using Quick Editing for Object Attribute Displayed on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Editing an Object's Graphical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Changing an Object's Primary or Secondary Graphical Color Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Changing an Object's Graphical Line Style Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Assembly (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating an Assembly from the Part Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Removing an Object from an Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Renaming an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Deleting an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Adding Assemblies Containing Connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Adding Associated Comment Graphics or Comment Symbols to an Assembly . . . . . . . . 433
Adding Objects Within the Associated Comment Graphic Boundary to an Assembly . . . 435
Removing Objects No Longer Within the Associated Comment Graphic Boundary from an
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Extending the Selection of Objects for an Assembly Comment Graphic or Symbol. . . . . 437
Moving Object Label Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Specifying the Harness Attribute for an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Associating Library Cavities with Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Editing Text Attributes for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Editing the Graphical Properties of Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Assigning Connector Positions Using the Modular Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Editing Objects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Adding a Parameter to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Adding a Glyph to a Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Editing Object Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Removing a Parameter or Glyph from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

February 2016
Table of Contents
Fill Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Demoting an Instance of a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Updating the Library Part Information for Devices and Connectors in Capital Library . . . . 449
Selecting the Parent Object of an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Displaying a Conductor Name For Multiple Segments of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Using Advanced Naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Part Selection Management Dialog Boxes and Field References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Part Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Part Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Project Usages Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Details Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Select Details Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Select Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Map Pins Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts for Design Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Chapter 14
Rules and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Rules and Constraints Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Defining a Constraint for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Defining Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Referencing another Rule in a Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Adding Rules to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Using a Constraint to Set Properties and Attributes on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Chapter 15
Interface Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Extending a Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
The Application Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Project Browser Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Design Browser Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Symbol Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Parts Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Shared Objects Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
ICD Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Placing ICDs in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Placing ICDs Containing Shared Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Refreshing ICDs in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Viewing ICD Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Diagram Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

February 2016
Table of Contents
Bridge Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Icons (Glyphs) in Browser Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Displaying Option Names or Option Descriptions in Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Chapter 16
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Overview of Capital AutoView Assist for Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Generating Diagrams for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Generating Filtered Diagrams for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Importing a Project and Generating Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered Connectivity from Multiple Designs . . . . . 503
Specifying Layout Styling when Generating Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic Dialog Boxes and Field References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
AutoView Diagram Generator - Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
AutoView Diagram Generator Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
New Generated Diagrams - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
New Generated Diagrams Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
New Diagram - Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
New Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Edit Diagram - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Edit Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Selection Preview - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Selection Preview Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Import Project and Generate Diagrams - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Import Project and Generate Diagrams Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
AutoView Style Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Parent Folder Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Parent Folder Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Chapter 17
Capital Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Capital Topology Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Enabling Capital Topology Functionality in Capital Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Topology Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
High-Level Flow for Using Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Styling Objects (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Harness Concurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Topology Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Creating a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Editing a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Deleting a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Logical Design Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Build List Association (Managed Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Associating Logical Designs with the Topological Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Replacing a Logical Design Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

February 2016
Table of Contents
Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Locating a Source Physical Object in a Capital Logic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Comparing Capital Topology Design Revisions with Other Design Revisions . . . . . . . . . 567
Topology Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Working with Multiple Diagrams Overview Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Creating a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Editing a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Deleting a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Opening a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Closing a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Flipping Objects in a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Rotating Objects in a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Defining Rotation Increments in a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Free Rotation of an Object or Comment Symbol in a Topology Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Physical Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Specifying the Physical Scale of a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Adding a Skeleton to a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Removing a Skeleton from a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Adding an Empty Slot to a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Adding a Slot with a Device to a Topology Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Editing a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Constraining the Placement of Devices in a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Manually Placing a Device in a Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Manually Unplacing a Device from a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Viewing the Signal Map for a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Creating Multiple Slot Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Slot Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Adding an Unassociated Slot Connector to a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Adding a Specific Harness Connector as a Slot Connector to a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Editing a Slot Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Specifying a Route Code for a Slot Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Moving a Slot Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Constraining the Association of Logical Harness Connectors to Slot Connectors. . . . . . . 588
Device Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for a Device Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Adding a Bundle to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Editing a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Creating Multiple Bundle Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Specifying the Physical Length of a Bundle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Specifying Variant Physical Lengths for a Bundle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Moving a Bundle Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Deleting a Bundle Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Deleting an Entire Bundle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Specifying a Bundle (Harness) as a Poke Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Constraining the Placement of Splices on a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Multiple Harnesses at Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

February 2016
Table of Contents
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Constraining the Routing of Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify the Possible Routes for an Unrouted Wire . . . . . 604
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify all Unrouted Wires that Need to Pass Through a
Selected Inline Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Reporting on All Unrouted Wires that Could Pass Through an Inline Connector . . . . . . . 607
Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Updating Wire Lengths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Annotating Topology Wire Lengths and Harness Attributes Back to Logical Wires and Splices
608
Multicores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Multicore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Splices in Capital Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Specifying the Harness Attribute for a Splice in Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Inline Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Adding an Unassociated Inline Pair to a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Adding a Specific Logical Inline Pair to a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Editing an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Specifying a Route Code for an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector 616
Moving an Inline Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Deleting an Inline Pair from a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Toggling the Inline Plug Connector and Inline Receptacle Connector on an Inline Pair. . 618
Constraining the Automatic Association of Inline Halves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Viewing the Signal Map for an Inline Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Virtual Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Editing a Virtual Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Grouping Wires into Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Usage Example for Grouping Wires into Signals in Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Adding a Hole to a Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Editing a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Constraining the Mapping of Wires to a Hole on a Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Constraints (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Standard Constraints for Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Using a Constraint to Set an Attribute or Property on an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Applying the Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Reports (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Harness Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Creating a Harness Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Material Statistics Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Creating a Material Statistic Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Bundle Wires Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Creating a Bundle Wires Report for a Bundle Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Copying the Bundle Wires Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Clearing the Bundle Wires Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

February 2016
Table of Contents
Applied Constraints Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

Creating an Applied Constraints Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Component BOM Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Creating a Component BOM Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Multicore List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Creating a Multicore List Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Using the Report Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Design Rule Checks (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Running Design Rule Checks in the Design Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Capital Topology Dialog and Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Add Selected Logical Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Associate Wiring Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Concurrency Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Connector Details Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Connector Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Design Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Edit Design (Capital Topology) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Edit Physical Scale (Capital Topology) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Edit Physical Scale Dialog (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Edit Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Edit Diagram Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Edit Properties: Assembly Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Edit Properties: Bundle Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Edit Properties: Device Connector Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Edit Properties: Hole Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Edit Properties: Hole Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Edit Properties: Multicore Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Edit Properties: Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Edit Properties: Slot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Edit Properties: Slot Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Edit Properties: Slot Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Edit Properties: Slot Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

February 2016
Table of Contents
Edit Properties: Wire Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

Edit Properties: Wire Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Edit Skeleton Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Edit Skeleton Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Material Statistics Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Material Statistics Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
New Topology Design Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
New Topology Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
New Topology Diagram Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
New Topology Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Place Device Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Place Device Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Design Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Signal Map for Inline Pair Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Signal Map for Slot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Signal Map for Slot Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Routing Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Status Bar (Topology-Specific Buttons). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Variant Tab (Edit Properties Dialog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Wiring Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Chapter 18
Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Bridges Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Chapter 19
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Troubleshooting Shared Multicores. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Index
Third-Party Information
End-User License Agreement

February 2016
Table of Contents

February 2016
List of Figures
Figure 3-1. Design For Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Figure 3-2. Select One Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 3-3. Drag to Form Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 3-4. Name Text Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 4-1. Example Unrestricted Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 4-2. Diagram Highlighting when Moving a Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 6-1. Example Blocks and Highway Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 6-2. Block and Design Associations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 6-3. Multiple Instances of Block Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 7-1. Poke Home Wire Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 7-2. Select Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 7-3. Indicators Connected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 7-4. Simple Shield - Pre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 7-5. Simple Shield - Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 7-6. Daisy Chain - Pre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 7-7. Daisy Chain - Post. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 7-8. Shield Not Created- Pre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 7-9. Shield Not Created - Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Figure 7-10. Example Highway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 7-11. Example of Multiple Highway/Conductor Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 13-1. Example Assembly Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Figure 16-1. Horizontal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Figure 16-2. Vertical Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Figure 16-3. Enable Connector Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Figure 16-4. Disable Connector Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Figure 16-5. Enable Tree Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Figure 16-6. Disable Tree Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Figure 16-7. Enable Device Stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 16-8. Disable Device Stretching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Figure 16-9. Enable Connector Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Figure 16-10. Disable Connector Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Figure 17-1. Wire Grouping Example - Logical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Figure 17-2. Wire Grouping Example - Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Figure 17-3. Wire Grouping Example - Grouped Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Figure 17-4. Example Material Report by Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

February 2016
List of Figures

February 2016
List of Tables
Table 2-1. Release Level Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Table 2-2. Place Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Table 2-3. Merge Into Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Table 2-4. Edit Effectivity Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Table 3-1. Stroke Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 4-1. Edit Stack Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table 4-2. Usages Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Table 5-1. Scenarios For Invalid Library Footprint DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Table 6-1. Edit Properties: Block Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Table 6-2. Block Conductor Usages Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Table 6-3. Block Conductor Usages Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table 7-1. Edit Properties: Highway Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Table 15-1. Icons (Glyphs) in Browser Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Table 15-2. Capital Logic Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Table 16-1. Auto View Diagram Generator - General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Table 16-2. Auto View Diagram Generator - Component Styling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Table 16-3. Auto View Diagram Generator - Layout Styling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Table 16-4. Auto View Diagram Generator - Prototype Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Table 16-5. New Generated Diagrams - Diagrams Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Table 16-6. New Generated Diagrams - Name Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Table 16-7. New Generated Diagrams - Component Styling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Table 16-8. New Generated Diagrams - Layout Styling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Table 16-9. New Generated Diagrams - Prototype Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Table 16-10. New Diagram Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Table 16-11. Edit Diagram Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Table 16-12. Selection Preview Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Table 16-13. Import Project and Generate Diagrams Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Table 16-14. AutoView Style Editor - Component Styling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Table 16-15. Auto View Style Editor - Layout Styling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Table 16-16. Auto View Style Editor - Prototype Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Table 16-17. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Scope Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Table 16-18. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Design Tab Contents . . . . . 537
Table 16-19. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Filter Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Table 16-20. Query Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Table 16-21. Parent Folder Selection Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Table 17-1. Association Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Table 17-2. Available Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Table 17-3. Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Table 17-4. Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Table 17-5. Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

February 2016
List of Tables
Table 17-6. Connector Details Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Table 17-7. Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology) Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Table 17-8. Edit Physical Scale Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Table 17-9. Edit Diagram Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Table 17-10. Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Table 17-11. Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Table 17-12. Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Table 17-13. Edit Properties: Hole Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Table 17-14. Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Table 17-15. Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Table 17-16. Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Table 17-17. Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Table 17-18. Edit Properties: Slot Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Table 17-19. Edit Properties: Slot Connector Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Table 17-20. Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Table 17-21. Edit Properties: Wire Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Table 17-22. Edit Skeleton Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Table 17-23. Material Statistics Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Table 17-24. New Topology Design Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Table 17-25. New Topology Diagram Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Table 17-26. Place Device Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Table 17-27. Design Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Table 17-28. Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Table 17-29. Signal Map Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Table 17-30. Edit Properties: Variant Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Table 17-31. Wiring Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Table 19-1. Cannot add a Shield Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

February 2016
Chapter 1
Overview
This following sections provide an introduction and overview to using Capital Logic.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Reporting on a Project's Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
User Access Rights in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Object Model Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Launching Capital Library from this Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Launching Capital Symbol from this Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Video Live Drive - Interactive Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Toplogy Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Diagram Language Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engineering Change Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

February 2016
Overview
Introduction
Introduction
Capital Logic is the application that is used to create electrical schematic diagrams for a
project's designs.
A project is usually an automotive or aerospace product line. Projects are top-level 'containers'
for all of the harness designs and data that comprise a specific product line.
Once created, a project can have data added from many of the Capital applications.
The information that is contained within a project is arranged into distinct 'sub-containers'
called Designs. Designs are versional data containers that can have their contents copied as
required. A design is usually created for each sub-system of a product line and contains the
schematic diagrams created in Capital Logic. Designs can be created for a project using Capital
Project.
The following diagram displays the hierarchical relationship between projects, designs and
diagrams.
Once created in Capital Project, a project can be opened into Capital Logic and the required
schematic diagrams created for the designs within that project. The Open Project facility in
Capital Logic, displays the same project list as that in Capital Project (unless project access
restrictions have been imposed on the user using the Capital User application).
Only one user can access a design at a time. If another user needs to access a diagram in the
same design, the first user must close the design.
When a logical design is complete, it can be imported into Capital Harness & Factory where the
data can be used to manufacture harnesses. See the Capital Engineer help system for more
information on accessing Capital Logic designs from Capital Engineer.

February 2016
Overview
Reporting on a Project's Connectivity
The electrical symbols used on the Capital Logic schematic diagrams can be created as required
using the Capital Symbol application.
Note
Capital Logic can be accessed from the Capital Launcher by selecting Capital Logic.
Alternatively, you can select the Capital Design option from the Capital Launcher. The Capital
Design application allows the user to access both Capital Logic designs and Capital Integrator
designs from the same window.
Opening Capital Design will check out a Capital Logic and a Capital Integrator license.
When using Capital Design, you must open a Capital Logic diagram to access the menu options
and functionality for Capital Logic. You must open a Capital Integrator diagram to access the
menu options and functionality for Capital Integrator.
Reporting on a Project's Connectivity

The connectivity information that is contained within a project's designs may be reported upon
using the Capital Enterprise Reporter application. A variety of database queries can be
created to extract specific information from a project. Once created, a report may be saved (as
HTML or PDF) or printed, and the extracted connectivity data may be saved as a new design.
See the Capital Enterprise Reporter help system for more information.
User Access Rights in Capital Logic

The access that a user has to the various aspects of Capital Logic is controlled by the Capital
User application. See your Capital administrator and /or the Capital User help system for more
information on the access controls and levels available.
Related Topics
Video Live Drive - Interactive Flow
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Toplogy Flow
Object Model Integrity

To ensure the integrity of all data within the Capital database, the integrity of data object models
(for example: components, designs, nets, etc.) can be automatically validated as and when
changes are made. Any validation errors will be reported in a warning dialog and written to the
event log, and the action that triggered the validation will be aborted, removing the possibility
that the invalid object model can be written to the database, possibly resulting in data
corruption.

February 2016
Overview
Object Model Integrity
The level of validation is specified in the clientprops.xml file, located in the config sub-directory
of your Capital install directory.
The following line sets the level of validation:
<validation level=”VALUE”/>
Replace VALUE with one of the following options:
• NONE - no validation will be performed.

• LOW - validation will be performed on import, save and design generation. Otherwise,
no validation will be performed unless an exception is raised, in which case validation
will then also be performed on export and load.
• MEDIUM - validation will be performed on import, export, load, save and design
generation. Otherwise, no validation will be performed unless an exception is raised, in
which case validation will then also be performed on object modification.
• HIGH - validation will be performed on load, save, import, export, design generation
and object modification.
A number of optional arguments can be added to the validation level statement in the form:
<validation level="HIGH" failureStopsExportValidation="true"

exceptionIncreasesLevel="true"
exceptionTriggersValidation="true"/>
replacing attribute name with one of the following attributes:
• failureStopsValidation
o false - if a validation failure has been detected, validation will continue to be
performed.
o true - if a validation failure has been detected, validation will no longer be
performed.
• failureStopsExportValidation
o false - if a validation failure has been detected, validation will not be performed on
export operations, thus allowing customers to export projects with invalid data to us.
o true - if a validation failure has been detected, validation will be performed on export
operations.
• exceptionIncreasesLevel
o false - if an exception has been raised anywhere in the code, the validation level will
remain the same.

February 2016
Overview
Launching Capital Library from this Application
o true - if an exception has been raised anywhere in the code, the validation level will
be increased once (from LOW to MEDIUM, or MEDIUM to HIGH).
• exceptionTriggersValidation
o false - when the validation is set to LOW, any exceptions will not force a validation.
o true - when the validation level is set to LOW, any exception encountered will
trigger a validation at level HIGH.
Note
None, any or all of the optional attributes can be added to the validation level
statement, with each attribute being separated by a space.
Launching Capital Library from this

Application
This topic details how to launch Capital Library from this application.
Press Space Bar and enter Capital Library; Capital Library launches in a separate window.
Launching Capital Symbol from this

Application
This topic details how to launch Capital Symbol from this application.
Press Space Bar and enter Capital Symbol; Capital Symbol launches in a separate window.
Video Live Drive - Interactive Flow

The Mentor Leaning Center includes a video in which you learn the basics of interactive
electrical design flow from initial subsystem design, through to creation of a 2D harness layout,
and engineering of the harnesses.
You must have Internet access to view the video and a Mentor.com user account.
The video is available in the Capital learning paths:
• Designer Connectivity (Foundation)

• Designer - Harness
• Administrator - Projects
• Administrator - System & IT

February 2016
Overview
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Toplogy Flow
One way to access the Mentor Learning Center is clicking the On Demand Training symbol on
the launch pane visible in a Capital application when no diagram is open.
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Toplogy

Flow
The Mentor Leaning Center includes a video in which you learn the basic topology and
aerospace design flow - from initial subsystem design through to physical harness topology, and
engineering of the harnesses.
• Designer - Connectivity (Foundation)

Diagram Language Translation

You can display, print and publish diagrams with text rendered in any given language using a
language database stored as part of your system data. This enables you to generate multi-
language service documentation.
See Diagram Language Translation in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide for full details.

February 2016
Overview
Engineering Change Orders

An engineering change order (ECO) is an instruction to make a change to one or more designs
(for example, an instruction to change the backshells on connectors from straight to right-angle
backshells). Once the change has been made, the ECO can be set as completed.
You can:
• manually create ECOs within the Capital design applications.

For detailed information about ECOs, see the Engineering Change Orders section in the
Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide.

February 2016
Overview

February 2016
Chapter 2
Projects and Designs
This following sections explain how to open, create, edit and delete projects from within the
application.
Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Editing the Attributes and Properties of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Deleting a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Importing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Exporting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Closing a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Project-Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Edit Project Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Edit Properties Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
New Project Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Open Project Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Project Folders Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Build Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Editing the Information for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Deleting a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Importing a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding a Property to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Editing a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Deleting a Property for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Properties Dialog Box and Field References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Edit Design Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
New Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Saving the Designs in a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting an Alternative Build List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating a New Capital Logic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

February 2016
Copying a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Creating a Revision of a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Specifying the Applicable Options for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists. . . . . . . . 61
Mapping Equivalent Devices During Design Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Running Design Rule Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Design Rule Checks Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Design Rule Checks Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Design Rule Check Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Styling Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Refreshing External Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Managing Design Changes When Synchronizing Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Releasing a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Functional Module Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Definition and Management of Module Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Purge Functional Module Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Options and Option Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Creating an Option at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Deleting an Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Choose Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Design Wide Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Deleting Design Wide Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Merging of Design Wide Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Example Flow for Using Design Wide Objects to Create a Contactor Configuration . . . . 87
Adding an Instance of a Design Wide Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Place Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Merging Instances of Design Wide Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Merge Into Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Finding Which Designs Use a Shared Object Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Shared Object Usages Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reporting on Shared Object Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

February 2016
Project Browser
Help Button Landing Pages for Project and Designs Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit Project Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit Project Properties Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
New Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Open Project Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Edit Effectivity Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Copy Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copy Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Create New Design Revision Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Applicable Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Design Revision/Build List Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Compare Designs Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Design Rules Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Choose Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Merge Into Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Shared Object Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Project Browser
The Project Browser is located on the upper left side of the application window. It contains the
following:
• Close Project ( ) button
Closes the currently viewed project.

• Project dropdown list
Lists the currently open projects so that you can select the one that you want to view.
• Project browser tree
Lists the designs and diagrams that have been created for the project. To expand a
section of the browser tree, click the plus sign (+). To collapse a section of the browser
tree, click the minus sign (-).

February 2016
Opening a Project
• Enter Filter String ( ) / Clear Filter String ( )
In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of characters. A filter
is applied to the Project browser tree so that only designs with names containing that
series of characters are listed. If you want to use a regular expression character, such as a
bracket, in the filter, you must prefix it with \. For example, \(P.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and view all designs in the
project.
• Design Filter ( )
Click the dropdown list to filter the designs displayed in the Project browser tree
window to those of a particular type, all designs in the project or all designs in the
currently active build list.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Opening a Project
This topic explains how to open an existing project.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Open.
The Open Project Dialog is displayed.
2. Click the project that you want to open and click OK.
The project is added to the Project Browser.
Related Topics
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project

February 2016
Creating a Project
Creating a Project
This topic details how to create a project from within the application. Once a project has been
created, all project-level data can be managed within Capital Project. Refer to the Capital
Project User Guide for more information.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter New Project. The New Project Dialogis displayed.
2. Enter a Name for the project.
3. Click OK. The project is created and added to the Project Browser.
Note
Once a project has been created, it can only be edited in Capital Project.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Editing the Attributes and Properties of a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Editing the Attributes and Properties of a

Project
This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of a project.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the project name in the Project Browser Window and select Edit. The
Edit Project Dialog is displayed.
2. Edit the attributes and properties as required. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project

February 2016
Deleting a Project
Deleting a Project
This topic details how to delete a project from the database.
Caution
The deletion of a project cannot be undone without recourse to a database backup, which
may not be up-to-date.
Procedure
1. Open the project you want to delete.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Delete Project.
3. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to proceed and
delete the project. The project is removed from the database.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Editing the Attributes and Properties of a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Importing a Project
This topic details how to import an existing project (as a Project XML file) that has been
exported from another installation of Capital.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Import Project. A generic file browser is displayed.
2. Navigate to the Project XML (*.xml) file that you want to import.
3. Click Import Project. A progress bar monitors the status of the import and disappears
once complete.
Note
An imported project is not opened by default and must be opened manually.
Related Topics
Opening a Project

February 2016
Exporting a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Exporting a Project
Closing a Project
Exporting a Project
Projects may be exported from, and imported into, the Capital Design databases (as XML files).
The use of XML files as the data-transfer medium enables the exchange of project data between
other data systems and also increases the portability of Capital project data. The data stored in
XML files is readily manipulated manually.
An exported project's XML file contains all of the information (options, object names, designs,
diagrams etc.) that are contained in its original database record.
Note
Even if you do not have Capital Analysis installed, you must have the Analysis permission
assigned to your user account in Capital User if you want to import and export projects that
have Analysis project models attached to them.
Procedure
1. If you want to export the currently open project, press Space Bar and enter Export
Current Project, or right-click on the project and select Export.
If you want to export a project that is not open, press Space Bar and enter Select Project
to Export; the Select Project dialog box is displayed. Select the project to export and
click OK.
The Export Project dialog box is displayed.
2. Specify the folder location and file name for the project's exported XML file.
3. Select the following as required:
• As Copy
Select this if you want the project to be exported with anonymous unique identifiers
(UIDs). This option replaces all of the exported project's database UIDs (within the
exported XML file) with anonymous UIDs so that the project can be imported back
into Capital in the future. A project exported with anonymous UIDs are
automatically assigned new UIDs when it is imported back into Capital.

February 2016
Closing a Project
Note
When a project is exported from Capital, its original record remains in the
database with its original UIDs. Therefore, if the project is exported without
anonymous UIDs, it cannot be imported back into Capital unless its UIDs have been
changed, as its original UIDs are already present in the original project in the
database and are not allowed to be overwritten.
4. Click Export Project; the selected project is exported from the database.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Closing a Project
Closing a Project
This topic explains how to close a project in the application.
Procedure
1. Click the project in the Project Browser and either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Close Project
• Click Close Project ( ) at the top of the Project Browser.
• Right-click on the project and select Close Project

2. A warning prompts you to save any modified designs in the project. Click Yes to save
them and close the project. Click No to not save the modified designs and close the
project.
Related Topics
Opening a Project
Creating a Project
Deleting a Project
Importing a Project
Exporting a Project

February 2016
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design
Applying Scopes to a Project or Design

This topic details how to apply scopes to a project or design.
If scopes are defined at project level and there are no design-level scope definitions, then the
project-level scopes are used for the designs.
If scopes are defined both at project and design level, the design-level scopes are used within a
design.
Only one customer or manufacturing site scope code is allowed per design or project.
Note
You can use extensibility (a plugin) to manage component scoping. If a plugin is available
then it will override the default rules, and will determine part suitability based on project,
design and library scoping but using the business logic defined within the plugin. For more
information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the PluginDevelopment.pdf
file that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation.
Prerequisites
• The required scopes must have been created in Capital Library.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the project name or design in the Project Browser Tree and select Edit;
the Edit Project Information dialog or Edit Design dialog is displayed.
2. Click Properties; an Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
3. Click the Scopes tab; the scope codes that have been created in Capital Library are
displayed in the Available window.
4. Select the scopes that you want to apply to the project or design and click Add; the
selected scopes are added to the Selected window.
5. Click OK.
Results
• The selected scopes are applied to the project or design.
• If a library component has had scopes applied to it, these dictate whether it is available
for selection within the project or design.
• For a design, if you hold your mouse cursor over the design name in the Project Browser
Tree, the applied scopes are displayed.

February 2016
Project-Related Dialogs
Project-Related Dialogs
This section offers a description of all dialogs used to open and create projects. For each dialog,
all fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
“Edit Project Dialog” on page 43
“Edit Properties Dialog” on page 44
“New Project Dialog” on page 46
“Open Project Dialog” on page 47
Project Folders Dialog

February 2016
Edit Project Dialog
Edit Project Dialog

To access: right-click the project name in the Project Browser Window and selecting Edit.
Used to specify attributes and properties for a project.
Objects
• The following fields and objects are available:
o Name
The unique name of the project.
o Properties
Click this to display the Edit Properties Dialog where you can specify properties for
the project.
o Description
A description of the project.
o Domain
The domain for the project. See the Capital Project help system for more information
about domains.
o Path
Enables you to specify a folder structure in which this project will be listed in any
dialog where you select a project from a tree (for example, the Open Project
dialog). You use \ as a separator between the folders in the structure. For example, if
you enter New Projects\October, the projects tree will contain a folder New
Projects with a sub-folder October. The project that you are editing will be listed
under the sub-folder. Maximum path length is 512 characters. You can click the
ellipsis (...) button next to the field to display the Project Folders Dialog where you
can select an existing project folder in which you want to list the project. You can
click the red cross next to the field to clear it. Optional.

February 2016
Edit Properties Dialog

To access: click the Properties button on the Edit Project Dialog.
Used to specify properties for a project.
Objects
o Properties Table
To add a property to the project, click the New button, enter a Property Name in the
New Property Dialog, then click OK. The new property is added to the list. A
property consists of the following fields:
• Name
A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
• Value
The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is not supported
by the selected Type, the Value is displayed in red text and the OK button is
disabled. The following types are available:
o String - a mix of letters, number or special characters
o Integer - a whole number
o Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point
To delete a property from the list, select it and click the Delete button, then click OK
to confirm the deletion.
o Scopes Tab
• Available
Displays a list of available scope codes that can be applied to the project. You
can select scopes in this list.
• Add
Moves the selected scopes in the Available window to the Selected window.
• Add All
Moves all scopes in the Available window to the Selected window.
• Remove

February 2016
Moves the selected scopes in the Selected window to the Available window.
• Remove All
Moves all scopes in the Selected window to the Available window.
• Selected
Displays the names of the scopes applied to the project.

February 2016
New Project Dialog
New Project Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter New Project.
Used to specify the name for a project.
Objects
o Name
Enter a unique identifier for the project. If you enter a name already in use by a
project in the database, upon clicking OK, a message is displayed to warn you and
you are prevented from proceeding.
o Create
Select this if want to create a design in the new project. In the drop-down list, select
the type of design. If you select this, a New Design dialog is displayed when you
click OK. Optional.

February 2016
Open Project Dialog
Open Project Dialog

To access: opened automatically when starting the application for the first time.
Used to select a project to open.
Note
Can also be accessed by pressing Space Bar and entering Open.
Objects
o Create New Project
Select this if you want to create a new project. Optional, displayed only when
starting application for the first time.
o Create
Select this if want to create a design in the new project. In the drop-down list, select
the type of design. If you select this, a New Design dialog is displayed when you
click OK. Optional, enabled only if Create New Project is selected.
o Open Existing Project
Select this if you want to open an existing project. Select the project in the window.
Optional.
o On Startup
Specifies whether a project opens by default the next time that you start the
application. Mandatory.
You can select the following:
• Always open last project
The last project that you opened in the application opens automatically.
• Display Open Dialog dialog
The Open Project dialog is opened automatically.
• Do nothing
No project opens and the Open Project dialog is not opened automatically.

February 2016

To access: click the ellipsis (...) button next to the field on the Edit Project Dialog.
Used to select a project folder in which you want a project to be listed in any dialog where you
select a project from a tree (for example, the Open Project dialog). Also, used to create, delete
or rename project folders.
Objects
To select a folder, click the one in which you want the project to be listed and click OK.
To create a new folder, right-click on a folder node in the tree and select New; a new sub-folder
is created below the selected folder.
To rename a folder, right-click on a folder and select Rename.
To delete a folder, right-click on it and select Delete.
Build Lists
A build list is a container for designs, representing a sub-set of a vehicle’s connectivity and
topology at a single point in the design life-cycle. Any number and configuration of build lists
may be created for a project.
See Build List in the Capital Project User Guide for full details of this concept and links to
related tasks.
Editing the Information for a Design

If the necessary permissions have been set for your user account in Capital User, you can edit
the information (such as design name, revision, abstraction) for a design in Capital Logic,
Capital Integrator or Capital Design.
If you use advanced naming functionality, design properties may be included in the naming
compositions that are set up in Capital Project. This means that the values that you specify for
design properties in this facility may influence the names that are generated. See the Capital
Project help system for more information about setting up naming compositions and see “Using
Advanced Naming” on page 455 for more information about applying advanced naming to
objects in Capital Logic.
This topic describes how to edit design information.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the name of the design in the Project Browser Window on the upper left
of the application window and select Edit from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

February 2016
2. The Edit facility is displayed. You can edit the following properties for the design:
• Name - the name of the design. If valid names for the object type have been created
in Capital Project, you can select a name by clicking the ellipsis button (...) to
display the Name Selection dialog.
• Part Number (Capital HarnessXC design only) - a unique part number for the
design.
• Revision - the revision for the design.
Note
You can click the Properties button to display the Edit Design Properties Dialog
that allows you to add or remove properties for the design.
• Short Description - the short description for the design.

• Description - the long description for the design.
• Release Level - the release level for the design. Select the release level from the
drop-down list. The release levels that you can assign to the design depend on the
permissions that have been set for your user account in Capital User. See the Capital
User help system for more information about setting permissions for a user account.
If the release level of a design is changed and saved in Capital HarnessXC, the
release level will be automatically be transferred when the design is opened in
Capital HarnessXC & Factory.
The release levels will be mapped between Capital Harness & Factory and Capital
HarnessXC as follows:
Table 2-1. Release Level Mappings

H&F HarnessXC
Draft Draft
Pending Checking
Released Released
Obsolete Obsolete
• Abstraction - the abstraction level for the design.

• Domain - the domain for the design. See the Capital Project help system for more
information about domains.
• Applicable Options - the options that can be assigned to the design. Click the
ellipsis (...) button by the Applicable Options field to display the Applicable
Options dialog.

February 2016
Deleting a Design
Note
The Applicable Options field will only display if the project has been configured
to use Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings in the Capital
Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how to configure the
project.
• Applicable Modules - Functional Module Codes that are available to objects in the
design, can be assigned, amended or removed by clicking the ellipsis button, (...),
next to the Applicable Modules field. This will display the Applicable Modules
dialog where you can select the required Functional Module code(s).
Note
The Applicable Modules field will only display if the project has been
configured to use module codes. See Module Codes, Options preference
settings in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of
how to configure the project.
• Option - the option or option expression that you want to apply to the whole design.
You must enter this in the Option Expression field by clicking the ellipsis (...)
button to display the Edit Option Expression dialog.
Note
The Option field will only display if the project has been configured to use
Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings in the Capital Design
Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how to configure the project.
• Effectivity - if using effectivity, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field
to launch the Edit Effectivity Dialog, from where you can specify the effectivity
ranges that apply to the design. See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project
User Guide for an overview of using effectivity.
3. Click the OK button to confirm the changes and to exit the dialog.
Note
If you move a design to release level with Frozen Shared Objects behavior, all
shared objects in a design must be frozen. If any shared objects are not frozen, the
Freeze/Unfreeze Shared Objects facility is displayed automatically when you click the
OK button so that you can freeze them.
Deleting a Design
This topic details how to delete one or more designs from a project.

February 2016
Importing a Design
Note
The ability to delete a design may depend on its release level, and the allowable behaviors
assigned to that release level in Capital Project. Also, when working in a design application,
you can delete only designs that can be authored in that application.
Procedure
1. In the Project Browser Window, select one or more of the following:
• a design
The action will delete all revisions listed below the design.
• a design revision
The action will delete just the design revision.
• a design folder
The action will delete all designs, design revisions and folders contained within the
selected folder.
2. Right-click on a selected object and select Delete; a message asks you to confirm that
you want to delete the objects. When you delete a composite design, you have the option
of deleting both the composite and its derivatives or just the composite.
3. Click Yes.
Note
If a design cannot be deleted, an error message provides details of why it cannot be
deleted.
Importing a Design
Full details of how to import designs from XML files into a project, can be found by using the
following link:
Importing Designs into a Project topic in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Adding a Property to a Design

This topic explains how to add a property to a design when creating a new design or editing the
information for a design.

February 2016
Editing a Property for a Design
Procedure
1. On the Edit Design dialog or dialog for creating a design, click Properties to display
the Edit Design Properties Dialog.
2. Click New to display the New Property Dialog. Enter a name for the property and click
OK.
The property is added to the Edit Design Properties dialog box.
3. Specify the Value and Type for the property and click OK.
Editing a Property for a Design

This topic explains how to edit a property value for a design when editing the information for a
design.
Procedure
1. On the Edit Design dialog, click Properties to display the Edit Design Properties
Dialog.
2. Edit the Value and click OK.
Deleting a Property for a Design

This topic explains how to delete a property for a design when editing the information for a
design.
Procedure
1. On the Edit Design dialog, click Properties to display the Edit Design Properties
Dialog.
2. Click the property and click Delete.
The property is deleted.

February 2016
Properties Dialog Box and Field References
Properties Dialog Box and Field References

Various dialog boxes are available for the property settings. For each dialog box, all fields are
listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Edit Design Properties Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
New Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

February 2016
Edit Design Properties Dialog

To access: click Properties on the Edit Design Dialog, a New Design Dialog or on a Create
New Design Revision Dialog.
Used to add, edit and delete properties for a design.
Objects
o Properties
To add a property to the design, click the New button, enter a Property Name in the
New Property Dialog then click OK. The new property is added to the list. A
• Name
• Value
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is not supported
o Add Rule/Constraint
Allows you to set rules and constraints on the harness design. For information how
to set actual rules and constraint see “Rules and Constraints” on page 469. Optional.
o Scopes Tab
• Available
Displays a list of available scope codes that can be applied to the design. You
can select scopes in this list.
• Add
Moves the selected scopes in the Available window to the Selected window.

February 2016
• Add All
Moves all scopes in the Available window to the Selected window.
• Remove
Moves the selected scopes in the Selected window to the Available window.
• Remove All
Moves all scopes in the Selected window to the Available window.
• Selected
Displays the names of the scopes applied to the design.
ECO Tab
Lists the Engineering Change Orders that impact the design.
o Category
Displays the category of the engineering change order. Read-only.
o Name
Displays the name of the engineering change order. Read-only.
o Short Description
Displays the short description for the engineering change order. Read-only.
o Date Created
Displays the date on which the engineering change order was created. Read-only.
o Date Updated
Displays the date on which the engineering change order was last updated. Read-
only.
o Release Level
Displays the release level for the engineering change order. Read-only.
o Design Status
Specify the status of the change required by the engineering change order: Not
Started, In Progress or Completed. This value dictates the Completion value of
the ECO on the Engineering Change Orders dialog where they are created.
If an ECO is associated with multiple designs, the Completion value of the ECO
only changes to Completed when the Design Status of all associated designs has
been changed to Completed. Mandatory.

February 2016
New Property Dialog
New Property Dialog

To access: accessed from property maintenance dialogs or tabs (click the New button).
Used to enter a name for a component or design property.
Objects
o Property Name
Offers a list of every property configured for the project-level object type
information of the selected object type in Capital Project. Either select a property
from the dropdown list or enter the name of a property to be created later.
Mandatory.
Saving the Designs in a Project

Pressing Space Bar and entering Save commits changes made in the current session to the
database. All of the designs that have been created for the open project are saved into it.
It can take a while for the project to be saved. You can continue to work on the project while the
data is being saved to the database. If you make any changes after the Save action, these are not
saved to the database until the next time you use the Save action. If you attempt to close the
application before the data has been saved to the database, a warning message is displayed.
Whenever you attempt to close a diagram that has been amended since it was last saved in the
current session, you will be asked if you wish to save the changes.

February 2016
Setting an Active Build List

You can set an active build list in Capital Logic or Capital Topology. When a build list is active,
any cross-references in the designs in the build list will list only those instances in designs on
the active build list.
If you have set an active build list and close the project, the build list will not be active when
you next open the project.
When a build list is active and you open a diagram that is not on that build list, the system asks
you to set an alternative build list as active. See “Selecting an Alternative Build List” on
page 57 for more information.
Note
Setting an active build list within a Capital Logic design does not set the analysis scope to
that build list. See the Scoping topic in the Capital Analysis User Guide for more
information.

This topic describes how to set an active build list.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Set Active.
2. The Set Active Build List facility is displayed. Select the build list that you want to set
as active. If it has a description, it is displayed in the Description box. The designs in
the build list are displayed in the Contents box. The Integrator Design field displays
the source topology design from where the Logic build list was generated. This is useful
when Capital Autoview Assist for Integrator is used to create diagrams from a Capital
Logic build list containing multiple logic designs.
Click the OK button.
3. In the Project Browser Window, the designs from the active build list have an orange
indicator next to them.
Selecting an Alternative Build List

This topic describes how to select an alternative build list.
Procedure
1. When you open a diagram for a design that is not in the build list that is currently active,
the Select an Alternative Build List dialog is displayed. It lists the build lists to which
the design belongs.

February 2016
Creating a New Capital Logic Design
2. Select the build list that you want to set as active. If it has a description, it is displayed in
the Description box. The designs in the build list are displayed in the Contents box.
3. In the Project Browser Window, the designs from the active build list have an orange
indicator next to them.

You can create a new design for a project in Capital Logic or Capital HarnessXC and then
create a diagram for the design.
Procedure
1. Either:
• Right-click on the project in the Project Browser and select New Logical Design.
• Press Space Bar and enter New Logic Design:
The New Capital Logical Design facility is displayed.
2. Specify the following for the design:
• Name - The name of the design. This field is mandatory. If valid names for the
designs have been created in Capital Project, you can select a name by clicking the
ellipsis button (...) to display the Name Selection dialog.
Note
You can click the Properties button to display the Edit Design Properties
dialog that allows you to add or remove properties for the design.
• Revision - The revision of the design. This field is mandatory.

• Short Description - A brief description for the design.
• Description - A detailed description for the design.
• Release Level - The release level of the design. Release levels are created in Capital
Project. See the Capital Project help system for more information on creating release
levels.
• Abstraction -The level of abstraction for the design. A level of abstraction is a user-
defined value that is assigned to a design and that indicates what type of design it is.
For example, a top-level overview of a system could be labelled with a level of
abstraction System and a more detailed schematic of the same system could be
labelled with a level of abstraction Schematic. Levels of abstraction are created in
Capital Project. See the Capital Project help system for more information on creating
levels of abstraction.

February 2016
• Domain - The domain of the design. See the Capital Project for more information
about domains.
• Applicable Options - the options that can be assigned to the design. Click the
ellipsis (...) button by the Applicable Options field to display the Applicable
Options dialog.
Note
The Applicable Options field will only display if the project has been configured
to use Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings in the Capital
Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how to configure the
project.
• Applicable Modules - Functional Module Codes that are available to objects in the
design, can be assigned, amended or removed by clicking the ellipsis button, (...),
next to the Applicable Modules field. This will display the Applicable Modules
dialog where you can select the required Functional Module code(s).
Note
settings in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of
how to configure the project.
• Option - the option or option expression that you want to apply to the whole design.
You must enter this in the Option Expression field by clicking the ellipsis (...)
button to display the Edit Option Expression dialog.
Note
Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings in the Capital Design
Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how to configure the project.
• Effectivity - if using effectivity, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field
to launch the Edit Effectivity Dialog, from where you can specify the effectivity
ranges that apply to the design. See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project
User Guide for an overview of using effectivity.
• Create Diagram - Check this box if you want to create a diagram for the design
automatically. If you create a diagram, it is automatically displayed in the diagram
window.
• Name - If you have specified that you want a diagram to be created automatically,
specify the name of the diagram.

February 2016
Copying a Design
Note
You can click the Properties button to display the Edit Diagram Properties
dialog that allows you to add or remove properties for the design. See “Editing
the Properties of a Diagram” on page 119 for more information.
• Style Set - the style set that you want to apply to the diagram. See the Diagram
Styling User Guide for more information about style sets and how to edit them.
3. Click the OK button.
4. A folder for the design is added to the Project Browser Window tree. Under the folder
for the design, the design revision is displayed. If the system has created a diagram
automatically, the diagram is displayed under the design revision in the Project Browser
Window tree and is opened in the diagram window.
Note
If the system has not created a diagram automatically. See “Creating a New
Diagram” on page 118 for information on how to create a diagram manually.
Related Topics
Project Browser Window
Creating a New Diagram
Copying a Design
This topic explains how to copy a design within a project.
Procedure
1. Open the project in which you want to copy the design. See “Opening a Project” on
page 36.
2. Right-click on the design in the Project Browser Window and select Copy. The Copy
Design Dialog is displayed.
3. Enter a Name and click OK. The new design is added to the Project Browser Window.
Creating a Revision of a Design

This topic explains how to create a revision of a design.
Procedure
1. Open the project in which you want to create the design revision. See “Opening a
Project” on page 36.

February 2016
Specifying the Applicable Options for a Design
2. Right-click on the design in the Project Browser Window and select Create Revision.
The Create New Design Revision Dialog is displayed.
3. Enter a Revision and click OK. The design revision is added to the Project Browser
Window.
Specifying the Applicable Options for a Design

A project's variant harness options may be allocated to any of its designs by clicking the ellipsis
(...) button next to the Applicable Options field on an Edit Design dialog. When the applicable
options have been specified for a design in Capital Project, only those options are available for
that design's schematic diagrams in Capital Logic.
The Edit Applicable Options dialog box will contain a list of those (unallocated) options that
are available to be allocated to the selected design.
Note
The options that can be allocated to a design are created for the project as a whole, and not
for each individual design.
If the Edit Applicable Options dialog box contains no options in the Available or Selected
lists, it is likely that no options have yet been created for the project. This is done in Capital
Project. See the Capital Project help system for more information.
To allocate an option to the selected project, click the required option in the Available list and
click the Add button to move the option to the Selected list. If required, all of the options in the
Available list may be allocated simultaneously to the design by clicking the Add All button.
If required, you may remove a mistaken, or previously allocated, option from the design by
clicking the option in the Selected list and clicking the Remove button to move the option to the
Available list.
Click the Apply button to save the allocated options to the design and keep the dialog box open,
or click the OK button to save the allocated options and close the dialog box.
The specified applicable options can now be applied to the various design objects on the
project's schematic diagrams in Capital Logic.
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in

Design Revisions or Build Lists
This topic explains how to compare a revision of a design with any revision of any design in a
project. The comparison looks at what objects appear on the design revisions and, optionally, at

February 2016
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists
what properties and attributes are on those objects. The results can be exported and saved as an
HTML file.
For example, you can compare a junction box wiring design that has been generated from a slot
in Capital Integrator or Capital Topology against a reusable junction box design.
When you compare two build lists, design revisions are compared individually by mapping each
design revision from the first build list to one in the second build list based on BaseUID or
Name.
Procedure
1. Open the diagram for one of the design revisions that you want to compare, press Space
Bar and enter Compare.
The Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog is displayed.
2. Select the project that contains the build lists or design that you want to compare from
the Projects window.
3. Either:
• Select the two build lists that you want to compare from the Build Lists window.
• Select the other design revision that you want to compare from the Design Revisions
window.
4. Click OK.
The Compare Designs Dialog is displayed.
5. Specify the following:
• If you are comparing Capital Logic designs, whether you want to ignore Connectors
and Splices in the comparison. If you compare a Capital Logic design with a Capital
Integrator or Capital Topology design, this applies only to the Capital Logic design.
• Whether you want to compare Attributes and Properties on objects.
• If you are comparing Capital Logic and/or Capital Integrator or Capital Topology
designs, the Comparison Type that you want to perform. Select from:
o Topology Only
Only topological data is considered. None of the connectivity items on the
selected designs appear in the comparison results. Enabled only when comparing
two Capital Integrator or Capital Topology designs.
o Exact
Nets and wires are treated as different types of object, and all objects are treated
as equivalent if they have the same base UID (when comparing revisions of the

February 2016
Mapping Equivalent Devices During Design Comparison
same design) or if they have the same name (when comparing designs that are
unrelated).
o Conductor Equivalent
Nets and wires are treated as the same type of object. Devices are treated as
equivalent if they have the same name. Enabled only when comparing a Capital
Logic design.
Note
If there is a net between two pins on one design revision and two wires
separated by a splice between the same pins on a second design revision,
these are treated as the same.
o Device and Conductor Equivalent

Functions like the Conductor Equivalent comparison type.However, device
names are not used to determine whether devices in design revisions are
equivalent. You must click Map Equivalent Devices to display the Map
Equivalent Devices dialog where you designate devices from the first design as
equivalent to specific devices in the second design revision. Only available when
comparing individual design revisions.
6. Click Compare.
The Differences window lists the results of the design comparison in a tree. The tree
displays each design revision and the objects being compared in each design. If an
object appears on a design revision or build list, the field in the column for that design
revision or build list is selected.
If you are comparing properties and attributes on objects, these are listed under the
appropriate objects. If the property or attribute is set for the object in a design revision or
build list, the field in the column for that design revision or build list is selected.
Note
You can export and save the comparison results in an HTML file by clicking
Export. You can display the differences between the design revisions graphically in
the diagram windows by clicking Show Differences.
Mapping Equivalent Devices During Design

Comparison
If you have selected the Device and Conductor Equivalent comparison type when comparing
designs, you must map devices in the first design to equivalent devices in the second design.
You display the dialog for doing this by clicking the Map Equivalent Devices button on the
Compare Designs facility.

February 2016
Mapping Equivalent Devices During Design Comparison
The Map Equivalent Devices dialog lists the devices from the two designs in separate tables
that list the names, pin counts and part numbers of the devices. You can click on the title of any
column to sort the table according to the contents of that column.
The second design must contain equivalent devices for all of the devices in the first design for
mapping to occur. The second design can contain devices that do not have equivalents in the
first design but not vice versa.
You can select a device in either table and click the Associate button to map them. To unmap
devices, select them in the tables and click the Disassociate button.
If you click the Assist button, the system attempts to map devices automatically. It may be the
case that it cannot map all devices and you may need to map some manually. When you click
the Assist button, the Suggestions box displays any suggested mappings that the system has
identified.
The Clear button clears all mappings.
When you are satisfied with the mappings, you can click the OK button to return to the
Compare Designs facility.
Related Topics
Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

February 2016
Running Design Rule Checks
Running Design Rule Checks

You can run design rule checks in the manually and automatically in the background.
For more information see Design Rule Check Descriptions.
• See Running Design Rule Checks in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions
User Guide.
• See Running Design Rule Checks in Background in the Capital Design Tools - Common
Functions User Guide.
• For a full list of the design rule checks available for use in Capital HarnessXC and
Capital ModularXC, see Design Rule Checks Applicable to Capital HarnessXC/Capital
ModularXC Designs in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide.

February 2016
Design Rule Checks Dialog
Design Rule Checks Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter DRCs.
Used to run design rule checks against designs to identify errors.
Objects
o Build List
Select this tab if you want to run checks against a build list. Select the build list from
the list at the top of the tab. Displayed only in Capital Logic or Capital Design.
Optional.
o Integrator Design
Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital Integrator design. Select
the design from the list at the top of the tab. Capital Integrator or Capital Design.
Optional.
o Logic Design
Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital Logic design. Select the
design from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed only in Capital Logic or Capital
Design. Optional.
o Topology Design
Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital Topology design. Select
the design from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed only if Capital Topology is
enabled in Capital Logic. Optional.
o Harness Design
Select this tab if you want to run checks against a Capital HarnessXC design. Select
the design from the list at the top of the tab. Displayed only in Capital HarnessXC.
Optional.
o Design Rule Checks browser
Displays the checks that you can run and whether a check generates an error ( ), a
warning ( ) or an information message ( ) when it identifies something. See
“Design Rule Check Descriptions” on page 67 for descriptions of checks.
Click a plus sign (+) to expand a section of the browser. Click a minus sign (-) to
collapse a section of the browser.
Select the checks that you want to run and click OK to run them. Mandatory.

February 2016
Design Rule Checks Output Window
Design Rule Checks Output Window

The output window is displayed at the bottom of the application and displays various tabs
depending on the actions performed in a design. When your run design rule checks, the Check
tab displays the results in a tabular form.
You can print the contents of the table as a comma separated variable (CSV) file by clicking the
Save to CSV ( ) button. A dialog is displayed where you specify the file name and where you
want to save it.
The table includes columns in which you can filter the contents by selecting an item from the
dropdown list at the top. You can sort the contents of a column by clicking the column header.
The columns are:
• Severity
Whether the result is an error ( ), a warning ( ) or an information message ( ).
• Category
The category of design rule check to which the particular design rule check belongs (for
example, Connectivity, Naming, and so on).
• DRC
The specific design rule check that has identified something in the design.
• Design
The design in which the check has identified something/
• Object
The specific object for which the check has identified something.
• Message
Detailed message about what the check has identified. You can click an object in the
message to jump to that object in the diagram window.
Design Rule Check Descriptions

You can use the Design Rule Checks facility to check for specific errors in designs.
You can check a single Capital Logic design, a single Capital Integrator design or all of the
Capital Logic designs in a build list.
If you are using Web Services with your Capital applications, you can release a Capital Logic or
Capital Integrator design and send an automatic notification to the Web Services component.

February 2016
Styling Objects
When you release a design this way, it is automatically checked for design errors using the
Design Rule Checks functionality.
If you are using Capital Topology, see “Design Rule Checks (Capital Topology)” on page 641
for descriptions of the available checks.
For a full list of the design rule checks available for use in Capital Logic, see Design Rule
Checks Applicable to Capital Logic Designs in the Capital Design Tools - Common
Styling Objects
You specify the way in which you want to style objects in diagrams by using a style set. Style
sets are maintained at the system level but are applied to individual diagrams. By default,
Capital Logic uses a Default style set.
The creation of style sets beyond the default offered is a licensed operation; if you do not have
the license required, the option to create new style sets is unavailable.
See the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information about style sets and how to edit
them.
Project Preferences
Project preferences are default settings that you specify for the designs and diagrams in a
project.
You specify them in the Project Preference Dialog Box, accessed in the design applications by
pressing Space Bar and entering Project Preferences.
You can also edit them in Capital Project by opening a project, expanding the Project Browser
Tree for that project and double-clicking the Preferences node.
Note
Some preferences work alongside Capital styling to control the appearance of designs. See
the Capital Diagram Styling User Guide for more information about all aspects of Capital
styling.
If a preference (for example, bundle thickness) is specified for an object type, whenever a new
instance of that object type is inserted into a design, it will automatically assume this pre-set
preference setting.
All new and existing designs within a project automatically inherit their project's preferences.

February 2016
Refreshing External Data
Note
Preferences can also be specified at the system level.
Related Topics
Project Preferences for Capital Logic
Project Preferences for Capital Topology
Project Preferences for Design Rule Checks
General Project Preferences Applicable to all Applications
Refreshing External Data

The following options are available to refresh data that has been updated outside of the open
design in which are you working. All options are available from the ribbon.
• Refresh All
Refreshes data for all of the items below:
o Symbol Libraries
Refreshes symbol library data when it has been modified in Capital Symbol.
o Options & Variants
Refreshes option and variant data for a design when they have been modified in
other Capital applications.
o Shared Objects
Refreshes shared object data for a design when it has been modified in other Capital
applications.
o Designs
Refreshes design data for the design in which you are working when it has been
modified in other Capital applications.
o Library Parts
Refreshes cached library part data when it has been modified in Capital Library.
o Cross References
Refreshes cross-reference data when it has been modified in other Capital
applications.

February 2016
Managing Design Changes When Synchronizing Designs
Managing Design Changes When

Synchronizing Designs
When synchronizing design changes between designs in different applications, you can
configure preferences for the data synchronization.
For example, if a wire has changed size in a Capital Logic design, you may want to synchronize
this data in a Capital HarnessXC design. However, you may not want to synchronize the wire
color if Capital HarnessXC is used as the master application for specifying wire colors.
These preferences can be set by using the Design Change Policy Manager functionality in
Capital Project. See the Capital Project help system for more information.
Extensibility Plugins
Extensibility Plugins allow you to create custom actions and functions that are exposed in the
Capital user interface (XC & Logic).
For full details see the Extensibility Plugins section of the Capital Design Tools - Common
Functions Guide.
Releasing a Design
You can release designs and enforce the running of particular design rule checks when doing so.
This action is available for designs created in Capital Logic, Capital Topology, Capital
Integrator, Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC.
See Releasing Designs with Enforced Design Rule Checks in the Capital Design Tools -
Common Functions User Guide.

February 2016
Functional Module Codes
Functional Module Codes

Functional Module Codes are used in Capital ModularXC to represent a feature or capability in
a harness design. Module codes are used in expressions to convey the explicit inclusion of a
module in a particular harness.
Please see the Capital ModularXC documentation for full details of this process
Capital Logic supports the:
• Definition and Management of Module Codes

• Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Designs
• Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Components
The Harness Synchronization process will pass the module codes, assigned to any valid
components, from Capital Logic to Capital ModularXC, allowing them to be used in the Capital
Modular XC Modular Processing.
Definition and Management of Module Codes

Functional and Technical Module Codes can be created and maintained in Capital Logic using
the Project Functional Module Codes dialog. The dialog is accessed by pressing Space Bar and
entering Functional Module Codes. You can specify inclusive and exclusive relationships for
the user defined codes, however, these relationships do not apply to technical module codes.
Please see the Creating a Functional, Production or Technical Module Code at Project Level
section in the Capital ModularXC guide for full details.
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic

Designs
Functional Module codes that are available to a project, (see Definition and Management of
Module Codes), can be assigned to Capital Logic designs using the Applicable Modules dialog.
The dialog is accessed by clicking the ellipsis button next to the Applicable Modules field on
the Edit Design dialog. See Editing Information for a Design for more details on the Edit Design
dialog.
Assigning module codes to a design, makes the codes available to be assigned to components on
any diagram in such a design.
Please see the Applicable Functional Module Codes Dialog section in the Capital ModularXC
guide for full details.

February 2016
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Components
Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic

Components
Functional Module codes that are available to a design, (see Assignation of Module Codes to
Capital Logic Designs), can be assigned to the following Capital Logic harness objects using
the Modules dialog:
• Connectors
• Multicores
• Overbraids
• Ring Terminals
• Shields
• Splices
• Wires
The Modules dialog is accessed by clicking the ellipsis button next to the Modules field on the
Edit Properties dialog. See Editing The Properties of Objects for more details on the Edit
Properties dialog.
The Harness Synchronization process will pass the module codes, assigned to any components,
from Capital Logic to Capital ModularXC, allowing them to be used in the Capital Modular XC
Modular Processing.
See the Applicable Functional Module Codes Dialog section in the Capital ModularXC guide
for full details.
Purge Functional Module Codes

Unused module codes, that is codes that have not been assigned to any object on a module
design, can be removed using the Select Unused Codes for Removal dialog. The dialog is
accessed by pressing Space Bar and entering Purge Functional Module Codes.
Please see the Purge Module Codes section in the Capital ModularXC guide for full details
about this procedure.

February 2016
Options and Option Relationships
Options and Option Relationships

Options and variant options can be created at project level from the design applications. An
option is a code representing a feature or capability in a vehicle. Options are used in expressions
to convey the conditional inclusion of an object in a particular vehicle configuration.
Once created for a project, an option may be applied to any of the designs created within that
project. The options applied to designs are known as applicable options.
There are three ways in which you can define relationships between options at project level:
• Define inclusive and exclusive relationships for individual options.

• Group them within option folders that allow you to specify whether the options in the
folder are mutually exclusive (that is, none of the options within this folder can be
selected together in a vehicle) or mandatory (that is, at least one of the options within
this folder must be selected in a vehicle). At system or project level.
• Create option combinations that allow you to specify valid selections of options.
Option combinations and valid selections allow the representation of complex
relationships between a group of otherwise unrelated options by specifying their allowed
combinations. Option combinations reduce the allowable combinations of a set of
options, which in turn helps to limit the potentially large number of harness levels that
can be generated by the Composite Wiring Synthesis (CWS) procedure in Capital
Integrator.
An option combination is a collection of options that have been arranged into specific,
valid selections.
For example:
If no inclusive or exclusive relationships exist between the 6 options A, B, C, D, E, F,
and they are all optional in a particular vehicle model, then there are 64 possible
combinations. In order to lower the complexity (or for other design reasons), the 6
option can be selected in an option combination and arranged to permit only the
following combinations:
o (A, B, C, D, E, F)
o (B, F)
o (A)
o (F)
Each of the 4 combinations of the original 6 options is known as a valid selection (that
is, there are only 4 valid selections in the option combination).

February 2016
Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
The following considerations apply to option combinations and valid selections:

o An option can exist in either no option combination or just one option combination
(that is, not multiple option combinations).
o An option combination does not have to include a valid selection where all options
are selected.
o Within an option combination, the only limitation on its valid selections is that they
must conform to any normal inclusive/exclusive relationships between the options.
o If it is permitted for none of the options in an option combination to apply to a
vehicle, then an explicit, empty valid selection must be created for that option
combination.

This topic explains how to create options and variant options at a project level. You can specify
inclusive and exclusive relationships for the option.
Procedure
1. With the project open, press Space Bar and enter Options.
The Options Dialog is displayed.
2. Select the node of the Options Browser under which you want to create the option
folder:
• If you want to create an option folder at the top level of the Options Browser outside
of any other folders, select the Options node.
• If you want to create an option folder within another option folder, select that folder.
3. Click Create a new Option Folder ( ); a new option folder is added to the Options
Browser.
4. Specify the Name of the folder and whether it will contain options that are Mutually
Exclusive or Mandatory.
5. Click OK.
Related Topics
Creating an Option at Project Level
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination

February 2016
Deleting an Option

This topic explains how to create options and variant options at a project level. You can specify
inclusive and exclusive relationships for the option.
Procedure
2. Select the node of the Options Browser under which you want to create the option:
• If you want to create an option at the top level of the Options Browser outside of any
other folders, select the Options node.
• If you want to create an option in a particular option folder, select that folder.
3. Click Create a new option ( ); a new option is added to the Options Browser.
4. Specify the Name and Description for the option and whether it is a Variant option.
5. Define any Inclusive or Exclusive relationships for the option.
6. Click OK.
Related Topics
Deleting an Option
Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for

an Option
This topic explains how to define inclusive and exclusive relationships between options at a
project level.
Procedure

February 2016
2. Select the option in the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
The fields on the right of the dialog display the values for that option.
3. Add any Inclusive or Exclusive relationships for the option.
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for each option that you want to add to edit.
5. Click OK.
Related Topics
Deleting an Option

This topic explains how to create an option combination and its valid selections.
Procedure
2. Click Create a new Option Combination ( ).
A new option combination is added to the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
3. Specify the Name for the option combination.
4. Drag and drop an option to be included in the option combination from its location in the
Options Browser tree to the option combination node in the tree.
The option is listed under the option combination as well as in its original location in the
tree.
5. Repeat step 4 for each option that you want to add to the option combination.
6. Select the option combination in the Options Browser.
The options are displayed as columns in the Valid Selections table.
7. Click to add a valid selection row to the table.
The row is added to the table.

8. Specify a unique identifier for the valid selection in the Name column.

February 2016
9. In the row, select the options that are included in the valid selection.
10. Repeat steps 7 to 9 for each valid selection in the option combination.
11. Repeat steps 2 to 10 for each option combination that you want to create.
12. Click OK.
Related Topics
Deleting an Option

This topic explains how to add a valid selection row to the Valid Selections table for an option
combination in the Options Dialog.
Procedure
2. Select the option combination in the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
The Valid Selections table on the right of the dialog displays the existing valid selections
for the option combination.
3. Click to add a valid selection row to the table.
The row is added to the table.

4. Specify a unique identifier for the valid selection in the Name column.
5. In the row, select the options that are included in the valid selection.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each valid selection that you want to add.
7. Click OK.
Related Topics

February 2016

Deleting an Option
Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option

Combination
This topic explains how to delete (remove) a valid selection row from the Valid Selections table
for an option combination in the Options Dialog.
Procedure
2. Select the option combination in the Options Browser on the left of the dialog.
The Valid Selections table on the right of the dialog displays the existing valid selections
for the option combination.
3. Select the row that you want to delete.
4. Click .
The row is deleted from the table and the valid selection is deleted from the option
combination.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each valid selection that you want to add.
6. Click OK.
Related Topics
Deleting an Option
Deleting an Option
This topic explains how to delete an option from the Options Dialog.
Select the option in the Options Browser and click Delete selected objects ( ).
• If the option is used in a combination, an error message is displayed and the option is not
deleted.

February 2016
Deleting an Option
• If the option has been specified as an applicable option for a design, an error message is
displayed and the option is not deleted.
• If the option is not used in a combination, it is removed from the Options Browser.
Related Topics

February 2016
Options Dialog
Options Dialog
To access: Press Space Bar and enter Options with the project open.
Used to define option relationships within a project.
Objects
o Options Browser
Located at the left of the dialog. Blank when no options exist.
Displays a tree of options ( ) and variant options ( ) grouped within option folders
( ). When you edit options at project level, option combinations ( ) are listed too.
When you select an option folder, option combination or option in the tree, details
for the selected item are displayed in fields on the right of the dialog.
You can drag and drop items in the tree to:
• Change their order. Dragging an option or folder to a space between two other
items moves it there. Dropping an option or folder over another folder adds it as
the last child node of that folder. This order of option folders and options
controls the order of options when they are listed in other dialogs in Capital
applications.
• Add an option to an option combination. In this case, the option is copied in the
tree.
o Delete selected objects
Keyboard shortcut: Delete

Deletes the option folders, option combinations and options that are selected in the
Options Browser.
o Create a new option
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+O

Creates a new option in the Options Browser. If a folder or option is selected in the
tree, the new option is added below it. You cannot add an option below an option
combination.
o Create a new Option Folder
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+F

Creates a new option in the Options Browser. If a folder or option is selected in the
tree, the new folder is added below it. You cannot add a folder below an option
combination.

February 2016
Options Dialog
o Create a new Option Combination
Creates a new option combination node in the Options Browser. If a combination is

selected in the tree, the new combination is added below it. Available only at project
level.
o Sort Options / Sort Selected Folders
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+S

Sorts the selected folders and their contents alphanumerically. The resulting order is
presented in all dialogs where the options are displayed.
You can sort all folders and options in the tree by selecting the root Options folder
and clicking this button.
The sorting action behaves as follows:
• Options and variant options are considered equivalent for the purpose of sorting.
• Each selected folder (including the root Options folder) is sorted recursively,
that is, sub-folders in selected folders are also sorted.
• If no folder is selected, the sorting behaves as though the root Options folder is
selected.
• If only options or empty folders are selected, this button is disabled.
• Folders and options (or variant options) are sorted as two groups whereby folders
always appear above options.
• Clicking this when content is already sorted alphanumerically reverses the sort
order.
• When option descriptions are displayed, the sorting is based on those
descriptions and not on the option names. Folders are still sorted by name.
o Name
Specifies the identifier for the selected option folder, option combination or option
in the Options Browser. Mandatory.
o Description
Specifies a descriptive string for the option selected in the Options Browser.
Optional, enabled only for an option.
o Group
Specifies particular relationships between the options in the folder selected in the
Options Browser. Optional, displayed only for an option folder.

February 2016
Options Dialog
The following options are available:

• Mutually Exclusive
Indicates that none of the options within this folder can be selected together in a
vehicle.
• Mandatory
Indicates that at least one of the options within this folder must be selected in a
vehicle.
o Variant
Specifies whether the option selected in the Options Browser is a variant option
(selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory, displayed only for an option.
o Inclusive
Lists the options that are required with the option selected in the Options Browser.
Optional, displayed only for options at project level.
Click to display the Choose Options Dialog where you select the inclusive
options.
To remove an option from the Inclusive window, select it and click .
o Exclusive
Lists the options that cannot be used with the option selected in the Options
Browser. Optional, displayed only for options at project level.
Click to display the Choose Options Dialog where you select the exclusive
options.
To remove an option from the Exclusive window, select it and click .
o Valid Selections
Lists the options in the option combination selected in the Options Browser; each
option is a column in the table. A row represents a valid selection of the options.
Click to add a row to the table. Click to delete a row from the table. Within a
row select the options that you want to be included in that valid selection. The Name
column specifies unique identifiers for the valid selections. Available only for option
combinations at project level.
Related Topics

February 2016
Options Dialog


February 2016
Choose Options Dialog
Choose Options Dialog

To access: click next to a field on the Options Dialog.
Used to select options.
Objects
o Available
Lists the options that are available for selection. Select the options and click Add to
move them to the Selected window. Click Add All to move all available options to
the Selected window.
o Selected
Lists the options have been selected. To remove options from the list, select them
and click Remove to move them to the Available window. To empty the list, click
Remove All.
Related Topics

February 2016
Design Wide Object
Design Wide Object

A design wide object is a non-shared connectivity object that can have multiple, or even no,
instances across multiple diagrams in a Capital Logic design. All pins on a design wide object
are unrestricted.
When the first instance of an object is added to a diagram, you use the menu options as per
normal and it is added to the diagram and to the Design Browser Window. Non-shared objects
with multiple instances use cross-references in the same way as shared objects. See “Cross-
References on Objects” on page 199.
Deleting Design Wide Objects

This topic describes considerations to take into account when deleting design wide objects.
When you delete the final instance of an object from diagrams, you can either:
• select it and delete is as normal; the object no longer exists in the design data.
• select it and press Ctrl + Delete on your keyboard; the object is removed from the
diagram but still exists as a connectivity object in the design. It is moved to an Unplaced
folder for that object type in the Design Browser Window. You can then place that
object in a diagram again. However, when you next save the design, all Unplaced
objects may be deleted from the design data depending on the Purge unplaced objects
on Save setting listed under General Preferences in the Project Preferences. For a short
video illustrating this task see “Deleting a Stack of Pins” on page 163.
When you delete any instance apart from the final instance of an object from a diagram, then the
connectivity is retained. Its pins become unplaced and remain connected to the wires -
following the existing unplace functionality.
If you want to:
1. Disconnect the object - select Disconnect.

2. Delete the instance - you should delete it from the schematic diagram and then delete it
from the design browser.
Merging of Design Wide Objects

You can merge a design object with another design object. This action is available for devices,
plugs, receptacles, inlines, highways, nets and wires.

February 2016
Merging of Design Wide Objects
Example 2-1. Merging Design Wide Objects
In this example, P100 has pins 1, 2 and 3 and P101 has pins 4. Merging P101 into P100 creates
a single object (named P100) that has pins 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Any objects to be merged must be the same type of object (connectors must be the same type of
connector).
A device represented by a symbol can be merged with a parameterized device so that one
instance is a symbol and one is not. Devices represented by different symbols can be merged so
that one device uses different symbols for instances.
This action does not break library part associations so it is not possible to:
• merge objects with different library parts

• merge an object with another object with a library part if the pins are invalid
This action can be used, for example, to build up relay devices by incrementally adding switch
blocks to an existing coil block. At the end of the process, you can select a library part that has a
matching set of pins.
When you merge two devices with different analysis models, the resultant device maintains the
behavior of both blocks. However, you can override this by specifying a new behavior using the
attach analysis model action (right-click on the device and select Analysis > Attach, see
Attaching Component Models in the Capital Analysis for Capital User Guide).

February 2016
Example Flow for Using Design Wide Objects to Create a Contactor Configuration
Example Flow for Using Design Wide Objects to

Create a Contactor Configuration
For a contactor configuration, you can create a new object using devices that are merged.
However, the required configuration may require symbol pins to be renamed beforehand:
Procedure
1. Place a COIL symbol with pin names X1 and X2; default device name is DEV1.
2. Place a CONTACT symbol with pin names 1 and 2; default device name is DEV2.
3. Right-click on DEV2 and select Merge Into; the Merge Into Dialog is displayed where
you select DEV1.
4. DEV2 is merged into DEV1 resulting in one device with pins X1, X2, 1 and 2.
5. Place another CONTACT symbol with pin names 1 and 2; default device name is
DEV3.
6. Rename the pins DEV3 to 4 and 5. To do this, right-click on the pin, select Properties
and edit the value in the Name field.
7. Right-click on DEV3 and select Merge Into; the Merge Into dialog is displayed where
you select DEV1.
8. DEV3 is merged into DEV1 resulting in one device with pins X1, X2, 1, 2, 3 and 4.
9. When you run a design rule check to find whether symbols are up-to-date, no error is
reported.
Related Topics
Adding an Instance of a Design Wide Object
Merging Instances of Design Wide Objects

This topic explains how to add an instance of a design wide object to a diagram.
Procedure
Note
The object must have been added to a diagram already using the standard menu
options.
1. Double-click the top node for that object in the Design Browser Window.
2. If the object does not have pins, skip to step 4.

February 2016
If the object has pins, the Place Dialog is displayed; specify whether you want to create
the object instance as a symbol (Symbol Selection) or to create the object instance as a
parameterized shape (Pin Selection).
3. Either select the symbol to be used (Symbols) or the pins to be included on the
parameterized shape (Available Pins) and click OK.
4. Place the object on the diagram as you would when using menu options.
Note
A wire conductor can be placed on a diagram only if it creates a connection between
two or fewer pins.
5. A new instance of the object is listed below the top node for it in the Design Browser
Window. The instance lists the pins included on it.
Related Topics
Design Wide Object

February 2016
Place Dialog
Place Dialog
To access: Double-click an object with pins in the Design Browser Window.
Use this dialog to select which pins are included on the new instance of an object in the diagram
or which symbol is used when placing a Design Wide Object.
Objects
Table 2-2. Place Dialog Contents

Field Description
Pin Selection Select this if you want to create the object instance as a parameterized
shape (that is, not using a symbol).
Available Pins Select the pins that you want to put down on the instance of the object
and click OK. Mandatory, displayed only if Pin Selection is selected.
Plug Map Displays a symbol for the object. Read-only.
Reference Specifies whether the pins selected in the Available Pins list will be
added as reference pins (selected) or not (unselected). The pins
displayed in the list may change depending on this setting. See
“Overview of Reference Pins” on page 152 for more information
about reference pins. Optional.
Auto-Generate Specifies whether the selected pins are sized and placed automatically
on the object instance in the diagram (selected) or whether you will
place the pins manually (unselected). Mandatory, read-only if Symbol
Selection is selected.
Place as Stack Select this to place all the selected pins on the object as a stack, instead
of having to hold down the CTRL key and placing individually.
Optional.
Symbol Selection Select this if you want to create the object instance as a symbol.
Symbols Lists the symbols that have been used previously for the object. Select
the symbol that you want to use for this instance. When you select a
symbol, it is displayed in the window to the right of this list.
Mandatory, displayed only if Symbol Selection is selected.
Related Topics

February 2016

This topic details how to merge a design object into another design object. This action is
available for devices, plugs, receptacles, inlines, highways, nets and wires. Any objects to be
merged must be the same type of object.
See “Merging of Design Wide Objects” on page 85 for more detailed information about the
conditions for using this action.
Procedure
1. In the diagram window or the Design Browser Window, right-click on the source design
wide object that you want to merge into another target design wide object and select
Merge Into; the Merge Into Dialog is displayed.
2. Select the target design wide object into which the selected object will be merged and
click OK.
Results
• Any pins with the same name in the source object and target object are merged on the
merged object. Any pins with unique names on the source or target object appear on the
merged object.
Note
If the project preference Disallow pin duplication within a design is set, objects
with duplicate pin names can not be merged. Such object names will not be
selectable in the Merge dialog. A tooltip message displays an explanation of this on
hovering over such a row in the Merge dialog.
• Properties and attributes on the objects are merged:

o If the source object has properties or attributes that the target object does not have,
they are kept on the merged object.
o If the source object has property or attribute values that conflict with values on the
target object, the values from the target object are kept on the merged object and the
source object values are lost.
• Cross-references are created on the object instances and obey project preferences and
styling settings. If there is no home condition set on the source or target object before the
merge, it is set on the target object instance.
• If merging two pinlists results in an invalid mating of pins, the pins on the source
instance are disconnected.
• If merging two wires results in more than two terminations for a single wire, the source
wire connections are disconnected.
• If automatic harness connectors generation is enabled, they are generated as required.

February 2016
• When you merge two devices with different analysis models, the resultant device
maintains the behavior of both blocks. However, you can override this by specifying a
new behavior using the attach analysis model action (right-click on the device and select
Analysis > Attach, see Attaching Component Models in the Capital Analysis for
Capital User Guide).
Related Topics
Design Wide Object

February 2016
Merge Into Dialog
Merge Into Dialog

To access: In the diagram window or the Design Browser Window, right-click on a source
Design Wide Object that you want to merge into another target object and select Merge
Into.
Use this dialog to select the target design wide object into which the selected object will be
merged.
Objects
Table 2-3. Merge Into Dialog Contents

Field Description
Filter Filters the object names displayed in the dialog. Enter a series of
characters. Only objects with names containing that series of
characters are displayed.
Object Name Lists design wide objects that are valid for this merge. Select the
target design wide object into which the source object will be
merged and click OK. Mandatory.
Related Topics

February 2016
Finding Which Designs Use a Shared Object Revision
Finding Which Designs Use a Shared Object

Revision
This topic explains how to find (show) which build lists and designs use a shared object
revision.
Navigate to the shared object revision in the Shared Objects Browser Window on the left of the
application window, right-click on it and select Show Usages; the Shared Object Usages Dialog
is displayed and it lists the build lists and designs where the shared object revision is used.

February 2016
Shared Object Usages Dialog
Shared Object Usages Dialog

To access: right-click the shared object revision in the Shared Objects Browser Window on the
left of the application window and selecting Show Usages.
Used to find which build lists and designs use a shared object revision.
Objects
The build lists and designs that use the shared object revision are displayed in a browser tree.
Under a build list, only the designs using the shared object revision are displayed. Designs
which belong to a domain for which you do not have read permissions are not displayed.
Related Topics
Reporting on Shared Object Usage

This topic explains how to generate a report listing the usage of a single shared object, a
selection of shared objects or all shared objects in a project.
For usage of single, or a selection of shared objects navigate to the shared object revision in the
browser tree on the left of the application window, right-click on it and select Report Usages.
To generate at report for all shared object usage in a project, press Space Bar and enter Report
Usages.
A report is generated detailing design name, revision, option expression, part number, type,
abstraction and a description of the shared object including individual pins usage, if connected.
Related Topics

February 2016
Help Button Landing Pages for Project and Designs Dialog Boxes
Help Button Landing Pages for Project and

Designs Dialog Boxes
The following topics are displayed when you click the Help button or press F1 for a dialog box
in the software.
Edit Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit Project Properties Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
New Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Open Project Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Edit Effectivity Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Copy Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Copy Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Create New Design Revision Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Applicable Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Design Revision/Build List Selection Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Compare Designs Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Design Rules Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Options Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Choose Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Merge Into Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Shared Object Usages Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Edit Project Help

What do you need help with?

February 2016
Edit Project Properties Help
• The Edit Project Dialog fields

• Editing the Attributes and Properties of a Project
Edit Project Properties Help

• The Edit Properties Dialog fields
• Editing the Attributes and Properties of a Project
New Project Help

• The New Project Dialog fields
• Creating a Project
Open Project Help

• The Open Project Dialog field
• Opening a Project
Project Folders Help

• The Project Folders Dialog fields
Edit Design Properties Help

• The Edit Design Properties Dialog fields
• Adding a Property to a Design
• Editing a Property for a Design
• Deleting a Property for a Design

February 2016
New Property Help
New Property Help

• The New Property Dialog fields
• Adding a Property to a Design
Edit Effectivity Help

• The Edit Effectivity Dialog fields
• Creating a New Capital Logic Design

February 2016
Edit Effectivity Dialog
Edit Effectivity Dialog

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button next to an Effectivity field on a dialog for creating or
editing a design.
Use this dialog to specify effectivity ranges for the design revision that is being edited.
Note
See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project User Guide for an overview of using
effectivity.
Objects
Table 2-4. Edit Effectivity Dialog Contents

Field Description
Effectivity Table Displays the effectivity ranges that have been specified
already for this design revision.
Start The start value for the effectivity range. See Valid Start
and End Values for Effectivity Ranges in the Capital
Project User Guide for guidance on valid values.
Mandatory.
End The end value for the effectivity range. See Valid Start
and End Values for Effectivity Ranges in the Capital
Project User Guide for guidance on valid values.
Mandatory.
Create new effectivity Adds a new row for an effectivity range to the Effectivity
range Table.
Delete selected effectivity Deletes the selected row in the Effectivity Table.
range
Revisions Lists the existing revisions of the design and the
effectivity ranges that have been specified for those
revisions. Read-only.
For example: if 1[1..10] is listed, this means that the
range 1 to 10 has been specified for revision 1 of this
design.
Related Topics
Creating a Revision of a Design

February 2016
Copy Design Help
Copy Design Help

• The Copy Design Dialog fields
• Copying a Design

February 2016
Copy Design Dialog
Copy Design Dialog

To access: right-click on a design in the Project Browser Window and selecting Copy.
Used to copy a design, to register a new design in the database, and to configure a number of
design-level settings.
Objects
• The following sections and fields are available.
o Design Details
The base design details, used to register the design in the database and to specify the
option codes available to a design.
• Name
A unique label to identify the design. Enter a new name or click the ellipsis (...)
button to the right of the field to select from a list of pre-specified design names
maintained in the project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. The
contents of this field are displayed in red if they are not unique within the current
project. Mandatory.
• Properties
Click this button to access the Edit Design Properties Dialog, from where you
can create properties to associate with the design. Optional.
• Revision
Specifies the version of the design, allowing multiple updated versions of the
same design to exist in the database. Mandatory.
• Short Description
Enter a line of descriptive text to provide more information about the design.
This information is displayed alongside the design name and revision in the
Project Browser Window. Optional.
• Description
This is a free-text field into which you can enter additional comments or notes
relevant to this design. Optional.
• Release Level
This field is used to record the design’s progress through the stages of the design
lifecycle. A number of system-defined release levels are available, but it is
possible to create custom levels in Capital Project (see the Create a Project’s
Release Levels topic in the Capital Project User Guide for more information).

February 2016
Copy Design Dialog
Regardless of the number of custom levels available, they must correspond to

one of the system-defined release levels:
o If no custom levels are configured, the only option available is Draft, which
is selected by default.
o Any custom levels configured must correspond to the Draft system-defined
level, so select the custom level required as dictated by your internal proce-
dures.
In either case, this is field is mandatory.
• Abstraction
If you are using design abstractions, select the abstraction to which this design
belongs, from the dropdown list. Maintained in Capital Project, abstractions
allow you to group related harnesses together for reporting purposes, providing a
“view” of a subset of a vehicle’s wiring. See the Create a Project’s Design
Abstractions topic in the Capital Project User Guide for more information.
Optional.
• Domain
If you are using domains to restrict user access to designs, select the domain to
which this design belongs from the dropdown list. Only users with access rights
to the selected domain are able to access this design. Domains are created and
associated with user accounts in Capital User. See the Domains topic in the
Capital User User Guide for more information. Optional.
• Applicable Options
The options that apply to this design. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
the field to launch the Applicable Options Dialog, from where you can select the
option codes available. Once selected, the available options are displayed in the
field.
These options - created and maintained in Capital Project - can then be applied to
the components on the design. Optional.
Note
The Applicable Options field will only display if the project has been
configured to use Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings
in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how
to configure the project.
• Applicable Modules
Functional Module Codes that are available to objects in the design, can be
assigned, amended or removed by clicking the ellipsis button, (...), next to the

February 2016
Create New Design Revision Help
Applicable Modules field. This will display the Applicable Modules dialog
where you can select the required Functional Module code(s).
Note
settings in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details
of how to configure the project.
• Option
The option or option expression that you want to apply to the whole design.
Click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Edit Option Expression Dialog where
you can select a single option or create an option expression. Optional.
Note
Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings in the Capital
Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how to configure
the project.
• Effectivity
If using effectivity, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to launch
the Edit Effectivity Dialog, from where you can specify the effectivity ranges
that apply to the design. See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project User
Guide for an overview of using effectivity.
o Copy Options
• Retain Generated Names
Specifies whether object names that have been generated using advanced naming
are retained in the copy (selected) or whether object names return to default
naming in the copy (unselected). Mandatory.
Create New Design Revision Help

• The Create New Design Revision Dialog fields
• Creating a Revision of a Design

February 2016
Create New Design Revision Dialog

To access: right-click on a design in the Project Browser Window and selecting Create
Revision.
Used to register a new design revision in the database and to configure a number of design-level
settings.
Objects
o Design Details
The base design revision details, used to register the design in the database and to
specify the option codes available to a design.
• Name
A unique label to identify the design. Read-only.
• Properties
Click this button to access the Edit Design Properties Dialog, from where you
can create properties to associate with the design. Optional.
• Revision
Specifies the version of the design, allowing multiple updated versions of the
same design to exist in the database. Mandatory.
Enter a line of descriptive text to provide more information about the design
revision. This information is displayed alongside the design name and revision in
the Project Browser Window. Optional.
• Description
This is a free-text field into which you can enter additional comments or notes
relevant to this design. Optional.
• Release Level
This field is used to record the design’s progress through the stages of the design
lifecycle. A number of system-defined release levels are available, but it is
possible to create custom levels in Capital Project (see the Create a Project’s
Release Levels topic in the Capital Project User Guide for more information).
Regardless of the number of custom levels available, they must correspond to
one of the system-defined release levels:
o If no custom levels are configured, the only option available is Draft, which
is selected by default.

February 2016
o Any custom levels configured must correspond to the Draft system-defined

level, so select the custom level required as dictated by your internal proce-
dures.
• Abstraction
If you are using design abstractions, select the abstraction to which this design
belongs, from the dropdown list. Maintained in Capital Project, abstractions
allow you to group related harnesses together for reporting purposes, providing a
“view” of a subset of a vehicle’s wiring. See the Create a Project’s Design
Abstractions topic in the Capital Project User Guide for more information.
Optional.
• Domain
If you are using domains to restrict user access to designs, select the domain to
which this design belongs from the dropdown list. Only users with access rights
to the selected domain are able to access this design. Domains are created and
associated with user accounts in Capital User. See the Domains topic in the
Capital User User Guide for more information. Optional.
• Applicable Options
The options that apply to this design. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
the field to launch the Applicable Options Dialog, from where you can select the
option codes available. Once selected, the available options are displayed in the
field.
These options - created and maintained in Capital Project - can then be applied to
the components on the design. Optional.
Note
The Applicable Options field will only display if the project has been
configured to use Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings
in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how
to configure the project.
• Applicable Modules
Functional Module Codes that are available to objects in the design, can be
assigned, amended or removed by clicking the ellipsis button, (...), next to the
Applicable Modules field. This will display the Applicable Modules dialog
where you can select the required Functional Module code(s).

February 2016
Applicable Options Help
Note
settings in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details
of how to configure the project.
• Option
The option or option expression that you want to apply to the whole design.
Click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Edit Option Expression Dialog where
you can select a single option or create an option expression. Optional.
Note
Options. See Module Codes, Options preference settings in the Capital
Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for details of how to configure
the project.
• Effectivity
If using effectivity, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to launch
the Edit Effectivity Dialog, from where you can specify the effectivity ranges
that apply to the design. See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project User
Guide for an overview of using effectivity.
Applicable Options Help

• The Applicable Options Dialog fields
• Specifying the Applicable Options for a Design

February 2016
Applicable Options Dialog
Applicable Options Dialog

To access: click the ellipsis (...) next to the Applicable Options field on the Edit Design Dialog.
Used to select the options that can be assigned to an object.
Objects
o Applicable Options
• Available
Lists the options that are available. Select the options that can be assigned to the
object that you are editing and click Add to move them to the Selected window.
Click Add All to move all available options to the Selected window.
• Selected
Lists the options that can be assigned to the object that you are editing. To
remove options from the list, select them and click Remove to move them to the
Available window. To empty the list, click Remove All.
Edit Option Expression Help

• The Edit Option Expression Dialog fields
• Specifying the Applicable Options for a Design

February 2016
Edit Option Expression Dialog
Edit Option Expression Dialog

To access: click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of an Option or Option Expression field.
Used to assign one or more options to an object.
Objects
o Options
All applicable options assigned to the design. To add an option to the expression,
double-click the option name. Mandatory.
o Operators
The mathematical symbols available from which you can construct an option
expression. Optional.
To add an operator to the expression, double-click the operator. The operators
available are:
• && [and]
The component to which the option expression is assigned appears on only those
derivatives with both options assigned.
• || [or]
The component to which the option expression is assigned appears on those
derivatives with either option assigned.
• ! [not]
The component to which the option expression is assigned appears on only those
derivatives without the option assigned.
• ( and )
An opening and closing parenthesis. Enclosing a subset of an option expression
in parentheses allows you to construct more complex option expressions that
include precedence (the part of the expression in parentheses must be evaluated
separately before being evaluated as part of the complete expression).
• matches
The component to which the option expression is assigned matches the option
expression on the object by parsing the expression.
o Expression

February 2016
Design Revision/Build List Selection Help
Contains the complete expression constructed from the Options and Operators
available. You also have the option to type an expression into this field instead of
selecting from the lists above. Mandatory.
Design Revision/Build List Selection Help

• The Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog fields
• Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists
• Mapping Equivalent Devices During Design Comparison

February 2016
Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog
Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Compare Designs with a diagram open.
Used to select build lists or designs so that the objects and attributes within them can be
compared.
Objects
o Projects
Displays the projects from which you can select designs or build lists. Click on the
project.
o Build Lists
Displays the available build lists that you can compare. Select the two build lists that
you want to compare or do not select any if you want to compare individual design
revisions.
o Design Revisions
Displays the design revisions contained in the selected project in a browser tree. If
you want to compare individual design revisions, click on the design revision that
you want to compare with the currently open design revision. If you are comparing
build lists, do not select a design revision.
o Enter Filter String ( ) / Clear Filter String ( )
In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of characters. A
filter is applied to the Design Revisions window so that only designs with names
containing that series of characters are listed.
project.
o Design Filter ( )
Click the dropdown list to filter the designs displayed in the Design Revisions
Compare Designs Help

• The Compare Designs Dialog fields
• Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists

February 2016
Compare Designs Help
• Mapping Equivalent Devices During Design Comparison

February 2016
Compare Designs Dialog

To access: click OK on the Design Revision/Build List Selection Dialog.
Used to specify settings for a design comparison.
Objects
o Comparison Type
Select one of the following to specify how objects are treated in the comparison.
Displayed only when comparing Capital Logic and Capital Integrator or Capital
Topology designs. Mandatory.
• Topology Only
Only topological data is considered. None of the connectivity items on the
selected designs appear in the comparison results. Enabled only when comparing
two Capital Integrator or Capital Topology designs.
• Exact
Nets and wires are treated as different types of object, and all objects are treated
as equivalent if they have the same base UID (when comparing revisions of the
same design) or if they have the same name (when comparing designs that are
unrelated).
• Conductor Equivalent
Nets and wires are treated as the same type of object. Devices are treated as
equivalent if they have the same name. Enabled only when comparing a Capital
Logic design.
Note
If there is a net between two pins on one design revision and two wires
separated by a splice between the same pins on a second design revision,
these are treated as the same.
• Device and Conductor Equivalent

Functions like the Conductor Equivalent comparison type.However, device
names are not used to determine whether devices in design revisions are
equivalent. You must click Map Equivalent Devices to display the where you
designate devices from the first design as equivalent to specific devices in the
second design revision. Only available when comparing individual design
revisions.
o Traverse
• Connectors

February 2016
Specifies whether connectors are considered in the comparison (unselected) or

are ignored in the comparison (selected). Enabled only when comparing a
Capital Logic design. Mandatory.
• Splices
Specifies whether splices are considered in the comparison (unselected) or are
ignored in the comparison (selected). Enabled only when comparing a Capital
Logic design. Mandatory.
• Devices
Specifies whether the internal connectivity of devices is considered in the
comparison (unselected) or is ignored in the comparison (selected). Enabled only
when comparing a Capital Logic design. Mandatory.
o Compare
• Attributes and Properties
Specifies whether to compare the attributes and properties of objects in the
design revisions (selected) or to ignore the attributes and properties of objects
(unselected). Mandatory.
o Design 1 [D1]
The first design being compared. By default, this is the currently open design
revision. You can click the ellipsis (...) to display the Design Revision/Build List
Selection Dialog again where you can select a different design revision. Displayed
only if you are comparing individual design revisions. Optional.
o Design 2 [D2]
The second design being compared. You can click the ellipsis (...) to display the
“Design Revision/Build List Selection” dialog again where you can select a different
design revision. Displayed only if you are comparing individual design revisions.
Optional.
o BuildList 1 [BL1]
The first build list being compared. You can click the ellipsis (...) to display the
build list. Displayed only if you are comparing build lists. Optional.
o BuildList [BL2]
The first build list being compared. You can click the ellipsis (...) to display the
build list. Displayed only if you are comparing build lists. Optional.
o Compare

February 2016
Runs the comparison. The result for which are displayed in Differences window.
Mandatory.
o Export
Enables you to export and save the comparison results in an HTML file. Click this to
display the Design Compare Report Dialog where you select a location to save the
file and specify the file name. Optional.
o Differences
Lists the results of the design comparison in a tree. The tree displays each design
revision and the objects being compared in each design. If an object appears on a
design revision or build list, the field in the column for that design revision or build
list is selected.
If you are comparing properties and option expressions on objects, these are listed
under the appropriate objects. If the property or option expression is set for the
object in a design revision or build list, the field in the column for that design
revision or build list is selected.
If filtering has been applied to the diagram windows for the designs, (Filter Active)
is displayed in the head for the Differences column.
Note
If you click on an object in the Differences window, the diagram containing that
object is opened and the object is highlighted.
o Show Differences
Displays the differences between the design revisions graphically by fading
(filtering out) objects that are common in the diagram windows. You move the slider
control up and down to control how much the common objects are faded. Objects
that are different between the design revisions are displayed normally. When clicked
this button changes to Hide Differences. Optional, not available when comparing
build lists.
Note
If filtering has been applied to the diagram windows for the design revisions,
(Filter Active) is displayed in the head for the Differences column. This means,
some objects may have been faded in the diagram window as a result of the filtering
and not as a result of showing differences.
o Hide Differences
Displays all objects in the diagram windows normally, regardless of whether they
are common to the design revisions or not. When clicked this button changes to
Show Differences. Optional, not available when comparing build lists.

February 2016
Design Rules Help
o Slider Control
Move the slider up and down to control how much common objects are faded out
(filtered) when Show Differences has been clicked. Optional, not available when
comparing build lists.
Design Rules Help

• The Design Rule Checks Dialog fields
• Running Design Rule Checks
• Design Rule Checks Output Window
• Design Rule Check Descriptions
Options Help
• Options and Option Relationships
• The Options Dialog fields
• Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
• Creating an Option at Project Level
• Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option
• Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
• Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
• Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
• Deleting an Option
Choose Options Help

• Options and Option Relationships
• The Choose Options Dialog fields
• Creating an Option Folder at Project Level
• Creating an Option at Project Level

February 2016
Place Design Wide Object Help
• Defining Inclusive and Exclusive Relationships for an Option

• Creating an Option Combination at Project Level
• Adding a Valid Selection to an Option Combination
• Deleting a Valid Selection from an Option Combination
• Deleting an Option
Place Design Wide Object Help

• The Place Dialog fields
• Adding an Instance of a Design Wide Object
• Merging Instances of Design Wide Objects
• Merging of Design Wide Objects
• Example Flow for Using Design Wide Objects to Create a Contactor Configuration
Merge Into Help

For Capital Logic, see the following links:
• The Merge Into Dialog fields

• Merging of Design Wide Objects
For Capital Systems Capture, see the following links:
• The Merge Into Dialog fields

Shared Object Usages Help

• The Shared Object Usages Dialog fields
• Reporting on Shared Object Usage
• Finding Which Designs Use a Shared Object Revision

February 2016
Shared Object Usages Help

February 2016
Chapter 3
Diagrams
This following sections explain how to open, create, filter and manage diagrams, including the
objects portrayed on them.
Creating a New Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Editing the Properties of a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Editing the Name of a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adding a Property to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Deleting a Property From a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Deleting a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Filtering the Objects Displayed in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Effects of Filtering on Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adding a Diagram List Table to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adding a Device List Table to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Changing the Background Color of a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Closing a Diagram Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Deleting an Object from a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Selecting Objects in a Diagram Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Slice Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Copying Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Editing Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Multiple Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Repeating an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
132
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to Create a New, Non-Shared Object . . . . . 133
Moving Diagram Objects to the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

February 2016
Diagrams
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Select By Name Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Select by Attribute/Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Moving Browser Windows Around the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Panning Across a Diagram Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Help Button Landing Pages for Diagrams Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
New Logical Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
New Logical Diagram Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Select By Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Select By Attribute/Property - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

This topic explains how to create a new logical diagram in a logical design. You can create
multiple diagrams for a single logical design.
Note
If you using Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate filtered diagrams for a design,
see “Generating Filtered Diagrams for a Design” on page 499.
Procedure
1. Either:
• select a logical design in the Project Browser Window, press Space Bar and enter
New Logical Diagram
• right-click on a logical design in the Project Browser Window and select New
Logical Diagram
The New Logical Diagram Dialog is displayed.
2. Specify the name of the diagram and click OK; the diagram is created and placed
beneath the design to which it belongs in the Project Browser Window.

February 2016
Diagrams
Editing the Properties of a Diagram
Editing the Properties of a Diagram

If the necessary permissions have been set for your user account in Capital User, the Diagram
facility allows you to:
• Edit the name of a diagram. See “Editing the Name of a Diagram” on page 119. If you
have accessed this facility when creating a new Capital Logic design, you cannot the
name in this facility.
• Add a property to a diagram. See “Adding a Property to a Diagram” on page 119.
• Delete a property from a diagram. See “Deleting a Property From a Diagram” on
page 120.
You access the Diagram facility by right-clicking on the name of the diagram in the Project
Browser Window on the upper left of the application window and selecting from the pop-up
menu that is displayed.
Editing the Name of a Diagram

This topic describes how to edit the name of an existing diagram.
Procedure
1. In the Diagram facility, enter the name of the diagram in the Name field. If valid names
for diagrams have been created in Capital Project, you can select a name by clicking the
ellipsis button (...) to display the Name Selection dialog.
Adding a Property to a Diagram

This topic describes how to add a property to a diagram.
Procedure
1. In the Diagram facility, click the New button.
2. The New Property dialog is displayed. Enter the name of the property in the Property
Name field and click the OK button.
3. The property is added to the Properties table. In the Type column, click on the row for
that property and select the type of value that the property can have:
• String - a mixture of letters, numbers and special symbols
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a decimal number

February 2016
Diagrams
Deleting a Property From a Diagram
4. In the Value column for that property, enter the value that you want the property to have
and click the OK button.
Deleting a Property From a Diagram

Click on the property name in the Properties table and click the Delete button.
Deleting a Diagram
You can delete a diagram but keep the connectivity that is displayed graphically in it.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the diagram name in the Project Browser Window and select the Delete
option from the pop-up menu.
2. The Delete facility is displayed.
If you want to delete the connectivity that is represented in the diagram, check the
Delete connectivity? box.
If you want to keep the connectivity, ensure that the Delete connectivity? box is
unchecked.
3. Click the Yes button to delete the diagram.
4. The diagram is removed from the Project Browser Window. If you selected not to delete
the connectivity, the connectivity set is still displayed under the design in the Project
Browser Window.
Filtering the Objects Displayed in a Diagram

The Design Filter Dialog enables you to filter the objects displayed in a diagram so that only
the design elements included in particular vehicle options or a vehicle configuration are
displayed. This enables the creation of dynamic evaluated designs.
Option filter settings apply only to individual open diagrams and they are not saved when you
close a diagram. When it is opened again, it reverts to the default setting of no filtering.
Filtering does not change design data. The effect of filtering an object out of the diagram is
limited to the following:
• It is not displayed in the diagram.

• It is not selectable.
• Stretches and manipulations of visible objects never result in a connection to the
invisible object.

February 2016
Diagrams
Filtering the Objects Displayed in a Diagram
• Cross-references to invisible objects are still displayed and following the cross-reference
opens the other diagram but the invisible object is not selected.
Note
See “Effects of Filtering on Object Types” on page 122 for more information per
object type.
Procedure
1. Open the diagram.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Filter design.
The Design Filter facility is displayed.
3. Select one of the following Filter options:
• No Filtering
Display all objects for every possible configuration of the vehicle.
• By Configuration
Display only objects from one configuration. Ensure that you are showing the filter
options (Show Filter Options) and add the configuration to the Selected window.
To select the configuration whose objects you want to display, click on it in the
Available window and click the Add button to move it to the Selected window. If a
configuration is displayed in the Selected window already, it is moved back to the
Available window automatically.
If you wish to remove the configuration from the Selected window, click Remove to
move it to the Available window.
• Graphics by Option / Custom Filter
Display only objects that have been assigned particular options.
Ensure that you are showing the filter options (Show Filter Options) and add the
options to the Selected window.
Caution
When you select an option here, the diagram will still include objects that are not
explicitly set to not be included with that option. For example, when an option A
is selected, then this includes all objects that are not set to !A (for example, B, C,
blank, and so on). You cannot use this filter to display only objects that have option
A. However, you can use the Find and Replace facility to locate only objects with
option A. See “Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and
Symbols” on page 450.

February 2016
Diagrams
Effects of Filtering on Object Types
If you want to display objects with no assigned option expressions, select Show
Non-Optioned Objects. Inlines and interface connectors not connected to a bundle
are filtered (hidden). Otherwise, their visibility depends on the visibility of the
attached bundle. The visibility of slot portals depends on the visibility of the slot.
Note
If no options are in the Included column, only objects with no option expression
are displayed in the diagram.
4. Click the OK button; the filtering is applied and the filtering icon on the Status Bar at
the bottom of the application window displays the icon for the filtering that you have
selected.

This topic explains the effects of filtering on the following objects types:
• Assembly
• Daisy Chain
• Device Connector
• Inline Connector
• Multicore
• Net Conductor
• Overbraid
• Pin
• Shield Termination
• Splice
• Wire Conductor
Assembly
An assembly has no visible representation in a diagram window but it is filtered out of the
Design Browser Window. When an assembly is filtered out, the objects within the assembly
remain visible in the diagram window.
Note
An object in an assembly has two entries in the Design Browser Window; one under the
assembly and one under the node for its object type. Only the entry under the assembly is
filtered out.

February 2016
Diagrams
Daisy Chain
If either multicore associated with a daisy chain is filtered out so is the daisy chain.
Device Connector
If a device is filtered out so are any device connectors on it. If a device is visible, the option
expressions on the device connectors dictate whether they are visible or not.
Inline Connector
Each half has its own option expression that dictates whether that half is filtered out or not.
Multicore
When a multicore is filtered out, its indicators are invisible. The visibility of the inner cores
depends on their own option expressions. When an inner core is filtered out but the multicore
has no option expression, the indicators retain their original size. A multicore is visible in the
Design Browser Window if at least one inner core is visible in the diagram or if it has an
implicit shield termination.
The Add Multicores Dialog displays only multicores associated with visible conductors in the
diagram.
Net Conductor
A net conductor can be filtered out based on its own option expression. It is also filtered out if
the objects to which it connects are filtered out. If the option expression on a pin is currently
filtered out, the pin remains visible but it is disconnected from any net conductor so the net
conductor becomes invisible.
Overbraid
Behaves in the same way as a multicore.
Pin
The visibility of a pin is dictated by the visibility of the pinlist to which it belongs, regardless of
the option expression on the pin. Dialogs that list pins continue to list all pins regardless of
filtering.
Shield Termination
Follows similar rules to a wire conductor. However, a multicore can gain an implicit shield
termination when it is daisy chained to a multicore that has an explicit termination. The implicit
terminations are not visible in the diagram window but are visible in the Design Browser
Window. If the multicore with the implicit shield termination is not filtered out, the implicit
shield termination remains visible even when the explicit shield termination is filtered out.
Splice
Splices are filtered out based only on their own option expressions. Unconnected splices are not
automatically filtered out.
Wire Conductor
Follows similar rules to a net conductor.

February 2016
Diagrams
Moving Objects
Moving Objects
This topic explains how to move objects within a diagram.
Procedure
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Either:
• Drag the objects using the mouse
• Hold Shift and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the objects by:
o One pin grid point if one or more selected objects have pins
o One Drawing Point if no selected objects have pins
• Hold Ctrl and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the objects by:
o One Major Grid Interval if one or more selected objects have pins
o Approximately half of a pin grid point if no selected objects have pins. Note that
when there are less than two Drawing Grid points per pin grid point, objects with
no pins will move a great distance.
Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another

Diagram
It is possible to move objects from one diagram to another diagram within a design.
Procedure
See Moving Objects from a Diagram to Another Diagram in the Capital Design Tools -
Adding a Diagram List Table to a Diagram

You can add a diagram list table to a diagram. The table lists the diagrams in the current design.
The list contents is dynamic and updates automatically as a result of renaming, adding or
deleting diagrams in the design.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Diagram List.
2. The mouse cursor changes to the table placement cursor . Click on the drawing to
place the table. After placement, the table can be repositioned by selecting it and
dragging it across the diagram. You cannot resize the table.

February 2016
Diagrams
Adding a Device List Table to a Diagram
The table contains one column Diagram that lists the diagrams in the design.
Adding a Device List Table to a Diagram

You can add a device list table to a diagram. The table lists the devices in the current design.
The list contents is dynamic and updates automatically as a result of renaming, adding or
deleting devices.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Device List.
2. The mouse cursor changes to the table placement cursor . Click on the drawing to
place the table. After placement, the table can be repositioned by selecting it and
dragging it across the diagram. You cannot resize the table.
The table contains the following columns:
• Device - the device name. For shared devices, each instance is listed as a separate
row.
• Short Description - the short description for the device.
• Zone - the diagram zone where the device is located. This is populated only if a
border is used on the diagram.
• Diagram - the diagram where the device is located.
Changing the Background Color of a Diagram

You can toggle the background color in the diagram window between black and white.
Press Space Bar and enter Invert Colors to select either white or black backgrounds for
diagrams.
Note
The background color change only affects on-screen viewing; printing a diagram is always
executed with a white background.
Closing a Diagram Window

This topic explains how to close a diagram window and whether modifications to the design are
saved automatically or manually after a prompt.
Either click the Close ( ) button at the top right of the diagram window or right-click on the
diagram in the Project Browser Window and select Close.

February 2016
Diagrams
Deleting an Object from a Diagram
If other diagram windows are open for the design, the diagram is closed but any modifications
in that diagram are not saved until you either:
• press Space Bar and enter Save

• close the last open diagram window for the design and click Yes when asked whether
you want to save any design modifications
Deleting an Object from a Diagram

This topic describes how to delete an object from a diagram.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object in the diagram window or in a browser window.
2. From the pop-up menu that is displayed, select Delete.
3. The object is deleted.

February 2016
Diagrams
Selecting Objects in a Diagram Window
Selecting Objects in a Diagram Window

You can select multiple objects in a diagram window by holding down the right-mouse key and
dragging the mouse cursor to form a box around the objects that you want to select. When you
click the mouse to position the opposite corner of the box, the box disappears and all objects
within the area of the box are selected.
If you want to select objects of only one or more particular types, you must click on one
instance of each type of object that you want to select and hold down the SHIFT key on your
keyboard while dragging the mouse to form the box around the area in which you want to select
the objects.
For example:
You have the following design.
Figure 3-1. Design For Selecting Objects
To select only the name text in the design, you click on one instance of name text and then hold
down the SHIFT key on your keyboard and drag the mouse cursor to form a box around the
design.
Figure 3-2. Select One Instance

February 2016
Diagrams
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects in a Diagram
Figure 3-3. Drag to Form Box
When you click to place the opposite corner of the box, the box disappears and the name text in
the diagram is selected:
Figure 3-4. Name Text Selected
Specifying the Highlight Color of Selected Objects

in a Diagram
This topic explains how to select (specify) the color used to display (highlight) selected objects
in a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Selection Color; the Select Color dialog is displayed.
2. Select the color that you want the system to use when highlighting selected objects in a
diagram and click OK.
Note
The color that you have selected will be used in other sessions of Capital design
tools when you start them.
Slice Objects
Certain objects on diagrams can be sliced, simplifying diagram modifications and making
diagrams easier to understand.

February 2016
Diagrams
Copying Objects
The Slice functionality allows you to draw an intersection line across an applicable object, to
create a new instance of that object, retaining connectivity and preserving style. You can use
this to quickly partition diagram content then move it to a new diagrams, or to trim oversized
devices and connectors.
• In Capital Logic: Devices, connectors, blocks, conductors (including multicores,

overbraids and highways) can be sliced
• In Capital Topology: Slots and bundles can be sliced
• Slices can be vertical or horizontal
• Slices can not be made directly across pins or mated edges
• Inline connectors can not be sliced across just one of the inline halves.
• Slices on Devices or connectors must leave at least one pin on each side of the slice. If
not the object will be trimmed to the size of the slice.
See Slice Objects in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for full
details.
Copying Objects
You can copy objects both within a diagram and from one diagram to another.
Procedure
1. Select the objects that you want to copy in the diagram window, press Space Bar and
enter Copy, or right-click on the selection and select Copy from the pop-up menu.
Alternatively, you can use the key combination CTRL + C.
2. Open the other diagram and either right-click on the diagram window and select the
Paste menu option from the pop-up menu or click on the diagram window, press Space
Bar and enter Paste. Alternatively, you can use the key combination CTRL + V. If you
do any of these, the copies of the objects are given unique names.
In addition, you can use the key combination CTRL + SHIFT + V. If you do this, the
copies of the objects retain the same names as the original objects.

February 2016
Diagrams
Editing Actions
Editing Actions
The following topics explain how to perform various generic editing actions.
Multiple Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Undoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Repeating an Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to Create a New, Non-Shared Object . . 133
Moving Diagram Objects to the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Select By Name Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Select by Attribute/Property Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Multiple Selection
A number of the grids and lists in the dialogs support the selection of multiple items. There are
two ways to select multiple items:
• Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard while clicking subsequent, non-adjacent
items. For example, you could select the first, third and fifth items in a list. While
holding the Ctrl key, you can deselect items in the same way, removing them from the
selection.
• Hold down the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking the first and last items of a
subset you want to select. For example, with the first item in a list selected, clicking the
fifth item with the Shift key held down results in items one to five all being selected.
Undoing an Action
This topic explains how to use the undo facility to reverse up to the last 20 actions that have
been performed.

February 2016
Diagrams
Redoing an Action
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Undo.
2. The previous action is undone and is added to the stored list of undone actions.
Note
If you perform a new action after you have undone one or more actions, this empties
the stored list of undone actions.
Redoing an Action
This topic explains how to use the redo facility to re-perform the last actions that were reversed
using the undo facility.
Note
If there are no more actions to redo, the Redo option changes to Repeat... .
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Redo.
2. The previously undone action is redone.
Repeating an Action
This topic explains how to repeat an action. If there are no undone actions that can be redone,
the menu includes an option to repeat the last action that was performed.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Repeat.
2. The application is put in the correct mode to repeat the last action performed.
Cutting and Pasting an Object in a Diagram

This topic explains how to cut and paste an object in a diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the object.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Cut
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Cut

February 2016
Diagrams
• Press CTRL+X on the keyboard

The object is cut from the diagram and pasted to the clipboard.
3. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Paste
• Press CTRL+V on the keyboard
4. Click where you want to place the entity.
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to

Create a New Instance of the Same Object
This topic explains how to copy and paste an object in a diagram to create a new instance of the
same object.
Procedure
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Copy
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Copy
• Press CTRL+C on the keyboard
3. To create a new instance of the selected object:
• Press CTRL+SHIFT+V on the keyboard
A new instance of the same object (both for shared and non-shared objects) is created.
Note
If Disallow pin duplication within a design is selected in your Project Preferences,
then you will not be able to copy and paste shared pins or paste where duplicate pin
instances will be created. In this case, a message is displayed.
If you attempt to paste an object within another design, then the paste will create a new,
non shared object with a new name.
4. Drag the copy to the location where you want to place it.
Note
If you attempt to undo this action, you will clear the clipboard only.

February 2016
Diagrams
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to Create a New, Non-Shared Object
Related Topics
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to Create a New, Non-Shared Object
Copying and Pasting an Object in a Diagram to

Create a New, Non-Shared Object
This topic explains how to copy and paste an object in a diagram to create a new instance of the
same object.
Procedure
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Copy
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Copy
• Press CTRL+C on the keyboard
3. To create a new, non-shared object with a new name:
• Press CTRL+V on the keyboard
A copy of the object is added to the diagram near the original object.
4. Drag the copy to the location where you want to place it.
Note
If you attempt to undo this action, you will clear the clipboard only.
Related Topics
Moving Diagram Objects to the Grid

This topic explains how to move objects that are off the diagram grid onto the grid.
Other design systems (for example, VeSys Classic) may not use a constrained grid in diagram
windows. When migrating data from such a system to Capital Logic, diagram objects may be
placed off grid. A Move To Grid action is therefore available to fix this.
Prerequisites
• In the clientprops.xml in the config directory of your installation, edit the value of
<allowmigrationflow value="no"> to be yes and restart Capital Logic. If you do not do
this, the Move To Grid action will not be visible.

February 2016
Diagrams
Deleting an Object in a Diagram
Procedure
In the diagram, select the objects that you want to move to the grid, press Space Bar and enter
Move To Grid.
Results
• For each selected object:
o Pins snap to the grid.
o Object boundaries snap to the grid. Note that device boundaries only snap to the grid
if the device has attached connectors or if any of the attached connectors are inside
the device.
o Device pins and attached connectors move to device boundaries (attached segments
to connectors move as well).
• For each selected conductor:
o The start and end points of each segment snap to the grid.
Deleting an Object in a Diagram

This topic explains how to delete an object in a diagram.
Procedure
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Delete
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Delete
• Click the Delete key on your keyboard
The object is deleted.
Selecting All Objects in a Diagram

This topic explains how to select all objects in a diagram so that you can perform an action on
all of them at once.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Select All.
All of the objects on the diagram are highlighted.
2. Perform the required action.

February 2016
Diagrams
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Finding and Selecting Objects by Name

This topic explains how to search for an object in a diagram by using its name.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Select by Name.
The Select By Name Dialog is displayed.
2. In the Name field, enter the name for which you are searching and use the Regular
Expression option to specify whether the name string you entered is a full name
(unselected) or a partial string (selected).
3. Click OK.
4. Any objects with matching names are selected in the diagram and in any browser trees
where they appear.
Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or

Property
This topic explains how to search for an object in a diagram by using a value for a particular
attribute or property.
Procedure
1. With the diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Select by Attribute/Property.
The Select by Attribute/Property Dialog is displayed.
• In the Attribute/Property field, enter the property or attribute name
• In the Value field, specify the value for which you are searching.
• Use the Regular Expression option to specify whether the value string you entered is
an exact value to be matched (unselected) or is a partial string that is part of a longer
value (selected).
3. Click OK.
4. Any objects with matching values for the specified attribute or property are selected in
the diagram and in any browser trees where they appear.

February 2016
Diagrams
Select By Name Dialog
Select By Name Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Select by Name.
Used to search for an object in a diagram by using its name.
Objects
o Name
Enter the name for which you want to search. The Regular Expression option
specifies whether the value in this field is treated as a complete name that must be
matched or as a partial string. Mandatory.
o Regular Expression
Specifies whether the string in the Name field is treated as a partial string (selected)
or as a complete name that must be matched (unselected). Mandatory.

February 2016
Diagrams
Select by Attribute/Property Dialog
Select by Attribute/Property Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Select by Attribute/Property.
Used to search for an object in a diagram by using a value for an attribute or property.
Objects
o Attribute/Property
Enter the name of the attribute or property
o Value
Enter the value. The Regular Expression option specifies whether the value in this
field is treated as an exact value that must be matched or as a partial string that is part
of a longer value.
o Regular Expression
Specifies whether the string in the Value field is treated as a partial string that is part
of a longer value (selected) or as an exact value that must be matched (unselected).
Using the Stroke Tool

This topic explains how to use the stroke tool to perform various actions by moving the mouse
in a pre-defined way.
Note
If you do not have a middle mouse button, you cannot use the stroke tool.
Each stroke action maps to a pattern on the following nine part grid:
A stroke is identified by the path of the mouse through the grid. For example, the following
stroke that is a counter-clockwise C pattern is named 3214789 because of the grid squares that it
passes through.

February 2016
Diagrams
Using the Stroke Tool
The following stroke actions are available:
Table 3-1. Stroke Actions

Stroke Action Grid Path
Zoom Area 159
Zoom All 951
Zoom in by 20% 357
Zoom out by 20% 753
Delete 741236987
Undo 1478963
Redo 7412369
Add net (in Capital Logic), Add bundle (in 258
Capital Integrator)
Route selected (in Capital Logic only) 96321

February 2016
Diagrams
Window Controls
Window Controls
The following topics explain how to arrange open diagram windows and browser windows for
viewing and how to use the zoom and pan controls to change what you are viewing in a
window.
Moving Browser Windows Around the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Panning Across a Diagram Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Arranging Diagram Windows for Viewing

This topic explains how to use the window controls to arrange open diagram windows for
viewing purposes. The window controls are available from the Windows menu.
• New
Creates a copy of the active window and its contents. Any changes made in the copy are
also made in the original. This is useful for viewing smaller sections of large diagrams.
• Cascade
Rearranges and resizes the open diagram windows in a staggered fashion, allowing
selection and viewing of a window by clicking on it once.
• Tile Horizontal
Rearranges and resizes the open diagram windows so that they are aligned horizontally.
• Tile Vertical
Rearranges and resizes the open diagram windows so that they are aligned vertically.
• Tabbed Mode
Resizes each diagram to occupy the entire display area, but adds a row of tabs at the
bottom of the display area to switch between open diagrams.
Moving Browser Windows Around the Screen

This topic explains how to display browser windows in separate windows that you can move
around your screen.
Any browser windows and tabs that are displayed at the bottom left of the application window
can be dragged away from that position so that they are displayed in their own separate
windows.

February 2016
Diagrams
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams
Procedure
1. Click on the tab of the browser window and drag it to the location where you want to
display it.
2. Resize the browser window as required.
Note
To return the browser window to the bottom left of the main application window,
close the separate window. It returns to its original position automatically.
Zooming In and Out of Diagrams

This topic explains how to use the zoom controls to zoom in and out of diagram windows.
• Zoom In
Increases the scale of the diagram so that objects appear larger.
Press Space Bar and enter Zoom In.
• Zoom Out
Decreases the scale of the diagram so that objects appear smaller.
Press Space Bar and enter Zoom Out.
• Zoom Selected
Zooms in on the objects that you have selected in the diagram.
Select the objects and either:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom Selected
o Right-click on the diagram and select Zoom Selected
• Zoom Area
Zooms in on a specified area of a diagram.
Press Space Bar and enter Zoom Selected.
The cursor changes to . Click once on the diagram to specify the first corner of the
area and click again to specify the opposite corner of the area.
• Zoom All
Zooms out to display all objects in the diagram.
Either:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom All

February 2016
Diagrams
Panning Across a Diagram Window
o Right-click on the diagram and select Zoom All

• Zoom
Allows you to zoom in or out by moving your mouse.
Either:
o Press Space Bar and enter Zoom
o Right-click on the diagram and select Zoom
To zoom out, move your mouse forwards or to the left. To zoom in, move your mouse,
backwards or to the right. Press the Esc key on your keyboard to turn off the zoom
mode.
Panning Across a Diagram Window

This topic explains how to pan across a diagram window.
Procedure
1. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Pan
• Right-click on the diagram and select Pan
2. The cursor changes to . Hold down the left mouse key and drag the cursor across the
diagram to pan. The diagram moves as you drag the cursor.

February 2016
Diagrams
Help Button Landing Pages for Diagrams Dialog Boxes
Help Button Landing Pages for Diagrams

Dialog Boxes
in the software.
New Logical Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
New Logical Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Select By Name Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Select By Attribute/Property - Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
New Logical Diagram Help

• The New Logical Diagram Dialog fields
• Creating a New Diagram
New Logical Diagram Dialog

To access: select a logical design in the Project Browser Window, press Space Bar and enter
New Logical Diagram. Alternatively, right-click on a wiring design in the Project Browser
Window and select New Logical Diagram.
Used to create a new logical diagram.
• Name
A unique name for the diagram. Mandatory.
• Style Set
Select the style set that you want to apply to the diagram. Mandatory.
• Properties Table
To add a property to the diagram, click the New button, enter a Property Name in the
New Property Dialog, then click OK. The new property is added to the list. Optional.
A property consists of the following fields:
o Name
o Value

February 2016
Diagrams
Select By Name Help
o Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is not supported by
the selected Type, the Value is displayed in red text and the OK button is disabled.
The following types are available:
• String - a mix of letters, number or special characters
• Integer - a whole number
• Float - a number including a decimal (floating) point
To delete a property from the list, select it and click the Delete button, then click OK to
confirm the deletion.
Select By Name Help

• The Select By Name Dialog fields
• Finding and Selecting Objects by Name
Select By Attribute/Property - Help

• The Select by Attribute/Property Dialog fields
• Finding and Selecting Objects by Attribute or Property

February 2016
Diagrams
Select By Attribute/Property - Help

February 2016
Chapter 4
Pins
The following sections describe how to add and edit pins on objects in designs.
Adding Pins to an Object Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Usage Example - Preventing Pin Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Adding Pins to an Instance of a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Moving a Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Disconnecting a Conductor from a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Overview of Reference Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cross-reference Rules for Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Converting a Non-reference Instance of a Pin to a Reference Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Converting a Reference Instance of a Pin to a Non-reference Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Connecting Selected Overlapping Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Connecting Selected Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Stacked Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating a Stack of Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adding a Pin to a Pin Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing a Pin from a Pin Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Viewing the Pins in a Pin Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Deleting a Stack of Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Viewing the Highway Conductors that Terminate at Stacked Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Edit Stack Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Usages Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Usage Examples - Stacked Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Help Button Landing Pages for Pins Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place Pins For Share Object Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place Pins Dialog for Shared Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place Pins Dialog for Non-shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Edit Stack Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Stack Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Adding Pins to an Object Instance

You can add pins to a device or connector.

February 2016
Pins
Adding Pins to an Object Instance
Procedure
1. Select the object in the Diagram Window or in the Design Browser Window and either:
• Right-click on it and select Add Pin; the Place Pins Dialog for Non-shared Object is
displayed where you select whether you want to add existing pins or create a new
one. You can select multiple existing pins.
Press SHIFT when selecting Add Pin to add multiple new pins.
• Press Space Bar and enter Add External; the Place Pins dialog (for non-shared
object) is displayed where you select whether you want to add existing pins or create
a new one. You can select multiple existing pins.
Note
If the project preference Disallow pin duplication within a design is set,
existing pins will not be displayed in the Place Pins dialog (for non-shared
object), as creation of duplicate pin instances will be prohibited. You will only be
able to add duplicate pin instances as reference pins, see Overview of Reference
Pins. To allow the placement of duplicate pins the project preference Disallow pin
duplication within a design should be unset.
Press SHIFT when selecting the Add External action to add multiple new pins.
• Press P (to add one new pin).
2. In the Diagram Window, click on the points of the object where you want to add pins.
As you move the cursor over the object, it changes appearance.
Where a pin can be added, it looks like this: .
Where a pin cannot be added it looks like this: .
In the case of devices, you can add a pin at a grid point on an edge of the device. You
can also add a pin outside of the graphical representation of the device, the device
stretches to include the new pin. For connectors, a broken line indicates the side on
which you can add a pin. If you add a pin at a point on the broken line outside of the
connector symbol, the symbol stretches to include the new pin. For shared objects, a
dialog box appears showing the pins available to add to the object.
3. If adding multiple new pins, press the Esc key on your keyboard to stop.
Note
If you are using a generative flow where you will use Capital Integrator to generate
wiring for the design, you may want to consider the values specified for the
following pin attributes:
Connector Group - specifies the name of the virtual connector to which the pin maps
when it is placed in a slot in a Capital Integrator design.

February 2016
Pins
Usage Example - Preventing Pin Duplication
Connector Cavity - specifies the name of the connector cavity to which the pin maps
when it is placed in a slot in a Capital Integrator design. Normally, the pin will map to a
cavity with a name equivalent to the value of this attribute. However, a connector part
may restrict the matching of the name.
These attributes are read-only if the pin is from a footprint.
Related Topics
Moving a Pin
Disconnecting a Conductor from a Pin
Usage Example - Preventing Pin Duplication

This usage example demonstrates how to prevent pins from being duplicated within schematic
designs. For some organizations, this is an important part of their design process. Using a
project preference Capital is able to ensure that pins do not appear more than once within a
design. This preference enables engineers to tightly control a pins usage, regardless of its shared
status.
Note
The exception to this is stud pins where they can appear multiple times within a design with
each instance typically being used to show mating with a different ring terminal.
Procedure
1. Within Capital Project or Capital Logic, press Space Bar and enter Project Preferences,
select General from the left hand pane and select the Disallow pin duplication within a
design preference.
2. When the project preference is enabled the Place Pins dialog will only show the
following;
a. Non-shared pins that have not been used elsewhere in the design.
b. Shared pins that have not been used by any other design within the active build list.
3. Clicking "Add as Reference Pins" will list all pins and allow the user to place a pin as a
reference instance.

February 2016
Pins
Adding Pins to an Instance of a Shared Object
Note
Reference pins appear on the diagram with a cross, conductors cannot be terminated
onto reference pins.
Should you wish to create a duplicate instance of a pin, this is only possible if the pin
duplication preference is disabled or the pin is shared with an unrestricted reservation
status.
Figure 4-1. Example Unrestricted Pins
4. In Figure 4-1 pin "ACC" has been made "Unrestricted", therefore you can place multiple
instances of the pin within the current or any design within the project.
5. The Design Rule Check "Multiple instances of a pin within the design" will report any
duplicate placed pins (unless the pins are shared as "unrestricted"). Additionally a
custom Design Rule Check can be deployed which report multiple occurrences of any
pin within a design.
Results
The project preference controls pin usage for shared or non-shared objects.
If pin duplication is needed for selective pins then they should be shared with the "unrestricted"
status.
Design Rule Checks can be used to identify pin duplication within existing designs.
Adding Pins to an Instance of a Shared Object

You can add pins to an instance of a shared device, connector or splice. Note that the pin must
exist already in the shared object definition.
See “Editing Shared Devices and Shared Connectors” on page 191.

February 2016
Pins
Moving a Pin
Procedure
1. Select the shared object in the Diagram Window or in the Design Browser Window and
either:
• right-click on it and select Add Pin
• press Space Bar and enter Add External
• press P
The Place Pins Dialog for Shared Object is displayed where you select which existing
pins to add to the instance.
2. Select the pins that you want to add to the instance and click OK.
3. In the Diagram Window, click on the points of the object where you want to add pins.
As you move the cursor over the object, it changes appearance.
Where a pin can be added, it looks like this:
Where a pin cannot be added it looks like this:
In the case of devices, you can add a pin at a grid point on an edge of the device. You
can also add a pin outside of the graphical representation of the device, the device
stretches to include the new pin. For connectors, a broken line indicates the side on
which you can add a pin. If you add a pin at a point on the broken line outside of the
connector symbol, the symbol stretches to include the new pin. For shared objects, a
dialog box appears showing the pins available to add to the object.
4. Press the Esc key on your keyboard to stop adding pins.
Related Topics
Moving a Pin
Moving a Pin
This topic explains how to move a pin to a new position on its device or connector and how to
swap the positions of two pins on an object. Note that if an object has multiple instances in a
diagram, you can move the pin to another instance of that object.
Note
If a device pin on a parameterized device and a connector pin are connected (mated), they
move together. If you do not want to move them together, you must disconnect them before
moving one. If a wire is attached to the pin being moved, it will move with the pin.

February 2016
Pins
Moving a Pin
Procedure
1. In the Diagram Window or Design Browser Window either:
• Click on the pin, hold down the mouse button and drag it.
• Right-click the pin and select Move Pin(s)
• Click on the pin, press Space Bar and enter Move Pin(s)
A circle is displayed around the selected pin and any connected pin. Any valid positions
for the pin are highlighted in green and a broken line indicates any positions outside of
the parent object where you could place it. In this case, the parent object will stretch to
include that position.
Figure 4-2. Diagram Highlighting when Moving a Pin
The cursor changes to:
• to indicate that it is over an invalid position for the pin
• to indicate that it is over a valid position for the pin
• to indicate that it over a pin with which it can swap positions
2. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the pin.
Note
If another pin is connected to the pin that you are moving, a circle indicates the
position the connected pin would take if you moved the pin to the current position of
the cursor.
If you clicked and dragged the pin, release the mouse button.
If you used a menu option to start the action, click once to place the pin.
3. The pin and any connected pin/wire are moved to the new position.
If you are swapping a pin with another pin, the pins swap positions.

February 2016
Pins

This topic describes how to disconnect a conductor from a pin.
Note
If there is no connectivity between a pin and a conductor, a diamond is visible around the
pin in the Diagram Window.
If there is connectivity between a pin and a conductor, there is no diamond shape around the pin
in the Diagram Window.
Procedure
1. In the Diagram Window or Design Browser Window, right-click the pin from which you
want to disconnect a conductor.
2. A pop-up menu is displayed. Select Disconnect Selected from the pop-up menu.
Note
Alternatively, you can click on the pin to select it and select the Actions >
Disconnect Selected menu option. When a pin is selected a blue circle is displayed
around it.
3. A diamond is displayed around the pin to show that there is no longer any connectivity
between the pin and the conductor. The conductor and pin do not move within the
Diagram Window but the pin is no longer displayed under the conductor's folder in the
Design Browser Window.

February 2016
Pins
Overview of Reference Pins
Overview of Reference Pins

Reference pin instances can be added to an instance of a device pin, a connector pin or a splice
for illustration purposes.
You cannot mate to or connect a conductor to a reference pin. On a diagram, a reference pin is
indicated by a cross .
If cross-references have been enabled for pins in the applied style set, then cross-references are
created between the normal pin and their reference pins and other pin instances (It is possible to
have multiple instances).
Non-referenced pins or pin-instances behave differently to referenced pins. See “Adding Pins to
an Object Instance” on page 145.
Cross-reference Rules for Pins

There are a number of rules applicable for the display of cross-references on pins, depending on
whether they are set as a reference pins or pin instances. These are:
• For reference pins
o Cross reference decorations are created on reference pins targeting their real
instance. Home condition settings are disregarded.
• For normal (non-reference) pins
o With no Home Condition set:- no cross reference will exist to either referenced or
pin instances.
o With Home Condition set and only pin-instances:- the normal pin will reference pin-
instances.
o With Home Condition set and only reference pins:- the normal pin will reference all
referenced pins.
o With Home Condition set and both instanced and referenced pins:- the normal pin
will only reference pin-instances.
Reference pins can be added to any object when you first add it to a diagram. Alternatively, you
can convert a normal (non-reference) pin to a reference pin after it has been added to the object
(this is only possible when there are no conductors connected to the pin). See “Converting a
Non-reference Instance of a Pin to a Reference Instance” on page 153. You can also convert a
reference pin to a normal pin. See “Converting a Reference Instance of a Pin to a Non-reference
Instance” on page 153.

February 2016
Pins
Converting a Non-reference Instance of a Pin to a Reference Instance
Converting a Non-reference Instance of a Pin to a

Reference Instance
This topic describes how to change non-reference instances of pins to reference instances.
Procedure
1. Ensure that no conductors are connected to the pin. If you need to disconnect a
conductor, see “Disconnecting a Conductor from a Pin” on page 151 for more
information.
2. Right-click on the pin and select the Make Reference Pin option from the pop-up
menu. Alternatively, click on the pin, press Space Bar and enter Make Reference Pin.
3. The pin changes to a reference instance of the pin. If cross-references have been enabled
on pins, cross-references to the non-reference instances of the pin are displayed next to
the reference instance.
Converting a Reference Instance of a Pin to a Non-

reference Instance
This topic describes how to change a reference instance of a pin to a non-reference instances.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the pin and select the Make Non-Reference Pin option from the pop-up
menu. Alternatively, click on the pin, press Space Bar and enter Make Non-Reference
Pin.
Note
If the project preference Disallow pin duplication within a design is set, the Make
Non-Reference Pin menu option will not be available for selected Reference Pins
where there is already a non Reference Pin of the same object, as creation of duplicate
pins will be prohibited. To allow the conversion of such Reference Pins the project
preference Disallow pin duplication within a design should be unset.
2. The pin changes to a non-reference instance of the pin. If cross-references have been
enabled on pins, any cross-references next to the instance disappear.
Connecting Selected Overlapping Pins

If you place an object with pins (a device or connector) over another object with pins, you can
connect any overlapping pins with wire conductors or net conductors.

February 2016
Pins
Procedure
1. For example:
You have devices DEV213 and DEV214:
You drag DEV214 so that 4 pins on DEV214 overlap 4 pins on DEV213:
You keep DEV214 as a whole selected, specify that you want to connect the devices
with net conductors and drag DEV214 so that it no longer overlaps DEV213:
The pins that were overlapping are now connected by net conductors.
2. Instead of selecting entire objects, you can select specific instances of overlapping pins.
3. For example:

February 2016
Pins
4. In the above example, the red circles indicate which instances of overlapping pins have
been selected. Any other overlapping pins are ignored when creating connections.
5. You must consider the following when using this functionality:
• If more than two pins (that is, on more than two objects) are overlapping at one point
in the diagram, connections are created from each pin to every other overlapping pin
at that point.
If a pin already has a connection to a second pin and you overlap it with a third pin,
any connection between the first and third pins must use the same type of conductor
as used between the first and second pins.
For example:
DEV213 and DEV214 are connected by a wire conductor. DEV216 has no connection
to anything.
DEV214 is dragged to overlap DEV213 and DEV216 is dragged so that two pins are
overlapping pins on the other devices.
You keep DEV216 selected as a whole, specify that you want to create connections
using net conductors and drag the devices apart.

February 2016
Pins
No new connections are created for the pins connected by the wire conductor.
Connections with net conductors are created between the other overlapping pins.
• If an instance of overlapping pins on the selected objects already has a connection,
this connection remains unchanged when using the functionality to create new
connections between other overlapping pins on the selected objects.
For example:
DEV213 and DEV214 are connected by two net conductors.
DEV214 is dragged over DEV213 and kept selected as a whole.
You specify that you want to create connections with wire conductors between the
overlapping pins and drag DEV214 so that it no longer overlaps DEV213.

February 2016
Pins
Connecting Selected Pins
The net conductors remain unchanged but wire conductors are added between the other
pins that were overlapping.
Connecting Selected Pins

This topic describes how to create connections between pins.
Procedure
1. Drag the objects in the diagram so that the appropriate pins are overlapping.
2. Select either entire objects that you want to connect or specific overlapping pins. Right-
click on a selected object and select the Connect > By Wire or Connect > By Net
option from the popup menu. Alternatively, select the appropriate objects in the
diagram, press Space Bar and enter Connect overlapping pins by Wire or Connect
overlapping pins by Net.
3. Drag the objects to appropriate locations in the diagram. The new conductors are visible
in the diagram and in the Design Browser Window.

February 2016
Pins
Stacked Pins
Stacked Pins
You can stack (or group) pins within a single grid location. Such stacked pins support the
creation of single-line block diagrams (also known as interconnect diagrams). You can create
these block diagrams as alternative, or companion views/representations of connectivity
diagrams (wiring or system diagrams).
Note
You cannot stack the pins on a symbol and you cannot use the Update Symbol action for
any pinlists with stacked pins. This applies when any actions attempt to Update Symbol
(that is, assigning a library part, bulk update of library parts, or Find and Replace).
Interaction with these stacked pins support the routing of conductors within highways. Any pin
that is removed from the stack will maintain its connectivity and the conductor is drawn
automatically. Therefore, you can define the connectivity of your block diagrams directly
within the wiring or system view, or by making connectivity edits to an unstacked pin prior to
its insertion into a stack.
Stacked pins can be used on shared and non-shared pinlists (devices and connectors). No single
device pin can be mated to more than one connector object and restricted-usage pins can only be
placed in stacks on diagrams where the pin can be used. Within the stacked pin, or block
diagram, a highway can be used to represent an interconnect (these represent a grouping of
wires or nets). You can manually terminate a highway at a stack of pins. Alternatively, a
highway is created automatically if a pin with a conductor is added to a stack or if you manually
connect a conductor to a stack.
If you draw a conductor between two stacks of pins that are already connected by a highway:
• the conductor is added to the highway and the first un-terminated pin from each stack is
selected
• if there is no un-terminated pin at one end, the conductor is still added to the highway
but standard design rule checks will indicate that conductors are unterminated
• if both stacks have no un-terminated pins, you will not be allowed to complete the action
You can select multiple pins and add them to a single stack or select multiple pins from a stack
for placement outside of it. A stack of pins can contain only one instance of a normal pin. For
example, if a connector has four pins, with multiple instances of PIN4, only four pins are listed
when they are all added to a stack. You cannot add a reference pin to a stack.

February 2016
Pins
Creating a Stack of Pins
Note
When using Capital AutoView Assist for Logic or Capital AutoView Assist for Integrator,
stacked pins are not rendered and you cannot paginate existing designs (using AutoView
Generate Diagrams) if the source diagrams have stacked pin representations. Also, it is not
possible to use a design with stacked pins as a template/prototype for any generated designs or
diagrams.
Within the Design Browser, the stack of pins is named using the number of pins in the stack and
the total number of pins on the object. For example, if two pins are in the stack and there are six
pins in total on the object, the stacked pin is named 2 of 6. In the Design Browser Window,
stacked pins are represented as a collection of pins listed under the device. For example:
In this example, DEV304 has three pins. Two of the three pins (1 and 2) are stacked. Pin 3 is not
stacked.
The appearance of stacked pins can be styled. See the Diagram Styling User Guide for more
information about style sets and how to edit them. There are three default attributes for a stack
of pins that you can use in styling:
• Name
The name of the stack of pins.
• Num Pins
The number of pins in the stack.
• Total Num Pins
The total number of pins on the device/connector.

This topic details how to create a new stack of pins (connected, mated, or neither). You can
select one or more pins when doing this.
Prerequisites
• The pins to be included in the stack must be visible on the object instance.

February 2016
Pins
Adding a Pin to a Pin Stack
Procedure
1. Select the pins to be included and either:
• Right-click on a selected pin and select Create Stack.
• Press Space Bar and enter Create Stack.
The mouse cursor changes and possible locations for the stack of pins are indicated by
circles.
2. Click the location where you want to position the stack of pins.
Results
• The selected pins are no longer displayed on the diagram.
• If no conductors are connected to the selected pins, the stack of pins is displayed as a
diamond shape .
• If conductors are connected to the selected pins, they maintain their connectivity and are
placed in a new highway that interfaces with the stack of pins.
• If a pin with a shield termination is added to the stack, the shield termination disappears
from the diagram but the pin retains the connectivity to the shield termination.
• The stack of pins is named using the number of pins in the stack and the total number of
pins on the object. For example, if two pins are in the stack and there are six pins in total
on the object, the stacked pin is named 2 of 6.
Related Topics
Stacked Pins
Removing a Pin from a Pin Stack
Viewing the Pins in a Pin Stack
Deleting a Stack of Pins
Viewing the Highway Conductors that Terminate at Stacked Pins

This topic details how to add one or more pins to an existing stack of pins.
Video
Stacking Existing Pins - This video illustrates how to perform this task. Click to view it.
Prerequisites
• The pins to be added to the stack must be visible on the object instance.

February 2016
Pins
• The stack of pins must exist. See “Creating a Stack of Pins” on page 159.
Procedure
1. Select the pins to be added and either:
• Right-click on a selected pin and select Add to Stack.
• Press Space Bar and enter Add to Stack.
The mouse cursor changes and the available stacks of pins are indicated by circles.
2. Click the stack of pins to which you are adding the selected pins.
Results
• The selected pins are no longer displayed on the diagram.
• If conductors are connected to the selected pins, they maintain their connectivity. If a
highway already interfaces with the stack, they are added to that highway. If there was
no existing highway, the conductors are placed in a new highway that interfaces with the
stack of pins.
• If a pin with a shield termination is added to the stack, the shield termination disappears
from the diagram but the pin retains the connectivity to the shield termination.
Related Topics
Stacked Pins

This topic details how to remove one or more pins from a stack of pins.
Video
Unstacking Pins — This video illustrates how to perform this task. Click to view it.
Procedure
1. Select the stack of pins in the diagram window or Design Browser Window and either:
• Right-click on it and select Edit Stack.
• Press Space Bar and enter Edit Stack.

February 2016
Pins
The Edit Stack Dialog is displayed.

2. Select the pins to be removed from the pin and click either:
• Delete - Deleting a pin from a stack, removes it both from stack and the design.
• Un-Stack - Un-placing a pin from a stack maintains its connectivity and any
connected conductor is drawn from the unstacked pin.
3. If deleting a pin, it is deleted from the stack and the design.
If un-stacking a pin from a stack, the mouse cursor changes and possible locations for
the pins are indicated by circles. When you move the mouse cursor over a circle, the
name of the pin being placed is displayed. Click the location where you want to place
the pin. Do this for each pin being un-stacked.
Results
• Deleted pins are no longer visible anywhere.
• Un-stacked pins are now visible on the diagram.
• If conductors are connected to the un-stacked pins, they maintain their connectivity.
They are removed from the highway interfacing with the stack of pins and are connected
to the now visible pins.
Related Topics
Stacked Pins

This topic details how to view which pins are included in a stack of pins.
Procedure
1. Select the stack of pins in the diagram window or Design Browser Window and either:
• Right-click on it and select Edit Stack.
• Press Space Bar and enter Add to Stack.
2. The Edit Stack Dialog is displayed; the dialog lists the pins in the stack.

February 2016
Pins
Related Topics
Stacked Pins

This topic details how to delete a stack of pins from a diagram. When doing this, you can delete
both the stack and the individual pins from the design or just the stack.
Video
Unplacing Pins — This video illustrates how to perform this task. Click to view it.
Procedure
Select the stack of pins in the diagram window or Design Browser Window.
• To delete both the stack and individual pins, click the Delete button on your
keyboard.
• To delete only the stack and to retain the pins in the design, click CTRL + Delete on
your keyboard.
Results
• If you deleted both the stack and pins, the stack is removed from the diagram and the
pins are removed from the Design Browser Window.
• If you deleted only the stack, it is removed from the diagram. The pins remain listed as
Unplaced Pins under the device in the Design Browser Window.
Related Topics
Stacked Pins

February 2016
Pins
Viewing the Highway Conductors that Terminate at

Stacked Pins
This topic details how to view which conductors from a highway terminate at which pins in a
stack.
Procedure
1. Select the stack of pins or highway in the diagram window or Design Browser Window
and either:
• Right-click on it and select View Usage.
• Press Space Bar and enter View Usage.
2. The Edit Stack Dialog is displayed; the dialog lists the pins in the stack.
Related Topics
Stacked Pins
Edit Stack Dialog

To access: Select a stack of pins in the diagram window or Design Browser Window and either:
Right-click on it and select Edit Stack, or press Space Bar and enter Edit Stack.
Used to view the pins included in the stack of pins.
Table 4-1. Edit Stack Dialog Contents

Field Description
Pin Name Table Lists the pins in the stack of pins.
Related Topics

February 2016
Pins
Usages Dialog
Usages Dialog
To access: Select a stack of pins or highway in the diagram window or Design Browser Window
and either: Right-click on it and select View Usage, or press Space Bar and enter View
Usage.
Used to view which conductors from a highway terminate at which pins in a stack.
Table 4-2. Usages Dialog Contents

Field Description
Pin Name The name of the pin in the stack.
Conductor The conductor that terminates at the pin.
Target The object and pin where the conductor(s) terminates at its other
end.
Related Topics
Usage Examples - Stacked Pins

These usage examples demonstrate how to create a stacked pin, how to view the composition of
the stacked pin, how to view the conductors in the highway that terminate at the stacked pin and
how to amend elements of the styling associated with the stacked pin.
The examples use a Quick Start - Aerospace Interactive project. If you want to re-create the
steps in Capital Logic, import the Quick Start - Aerospace Interactive.xml project file from
here.
Video
Creating and Styling Stacked Pins— This video illustrates how to perform the usage
example. Click to view it.
Prerequisites
Project Quick Start - Aerospace Interactive has been imported and design Logical 2, diagram
Diagram1 is open in Capital Logic
The following Usage Examples are available below- note that each example builds on the
previous one.
• Creating a Stacked Pin

• Viewing the Composition of a Stacked Pin

February 2016
Pins
• Viewing the Conductors in the Highway

• Styling the Displayed Names of Stacked Pins
Creating a Stacked Pin
This section of the usage example runs through the steps for creating a stacked pin.
Procedure
1. In the following steps you will create a stacked pin using Pins +28V DC and GND on
device DEV10.
2. Right-click on Pin +28V DC and select Create Stack from the popup menu.
3. The available pin positions to create the stacked pin display in green. Click the desired
position to place the stacked pin.

February 2016
Pins
Place the stacked pin at the available space below pin +28 DC.
Pin +28 DC is added to newly created stacked pin 1/5 (the name denoting that this
stacked pin contains one of the five pins on this device) and is no longer displayed.
Conductor COND100 has been placed in the automatically created Highway HW202.
Add Pin GND to the stacked pin 1/5 by selecting it and then right-clicking Add to Stack
from the popup menu.

February 2016
Pins
Place by clicking on the stacked pin 1/5.

Pin GND is added to stack and is no longer displayed. Pin 1/5 has been renamed 2/5
denoting that this stacked pin now contains two of the five pins on this device.
Conductor COND101 has now been added to Highway HW202.
.
Viewing the Composition of a Stacked Pin
This section of the usage example runs through the steps for viewing the composition of a
stacked pin.
Procedure
1. To view the composition of the stacked pin: right-click on the stacked pin 2/5 and select
Edit Stack.

February 2016
Pins
The Edit Stack dialog displays as below. Pin Names +28 DC and GND display in the
Pin Name
column.
Viewing the Conductors in the Highway

This section of the usage example runs through the steps for viewing the conductors that
comprise a highway.
Procedure
1. To view the conductors in the highway: right-click on the highway HW202 and select
View Usage. Note the Usages dialog displays the conductors COND100 & COND101
present in the

February 2016
Pins
Highway
Styling the Displayed Names of Stacked Pins

This section of the usage example runs through the steps for styling the displayed name of a
stacked pin.
Procedure
1. In the following steps you will change the displayed name of the stacked pin 2/5 via
Styling. This is done via Composite Text.This will change the naming format on all
stacked pins
2. Highlight stacked pin 2/5 and select Shift +E (this command opens the styling dialog of
the currently selected object type, in this case Stacked Pin

February 2016
Pins
3. Expand the tree view to the Composite Texts level as below and click NumPins + “/” +
TotalNumPins
4. The Style Sets Basic Tab displays
Click the Ellipsis [...] button In the Composite Text Panel

February 2016
Pins
5. The Edit Composite Text dialog displays. This dialog is used to configure the
displayed name format of the styled stacked pin (2/5) you have been working with. The
format is built up in the Entries panel and is defined from the Attributes and free
text
6. In the Text field add the word StackedPin and click the Add button

February 2016
Pins
7. The Text is added to the Entries panel. Select the text and move it to the top of the list
with the Up button and Press OK
8. The basic tab displays with the revised name updated in the Composite Text panel. Press
OK
The diagram is updated, the name of the stacked pin displays in the new format
StackedPin 2/5. Note this new name format will only be applied to any other stacked

February 2016
Pins
pins when styling is next
applied

February 2016
Pins
Help Button Landing Pages for Pins Dialog Boxes
Help Button Landing Pages for Pins Dialog

Boxes
in the software.
Place Pins For Share Object Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place Pins Dialog for Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Place Pins Dialog for Non-shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Edit Stack Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Stack Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Place Pins For Share Object Help

• Adding Pins to an Instance of a Shared Object
• The Place Pins Dialog for Shared Object fields
Place Pins Dialog for Shared Object

To access: select a shared object in the Design Browser Window or Diagram Window, press
Space Bar and enter Add External, or by right-clicking a shared object and selecting Add
Pin.
Used to add pins to an instance of a shared object.
• Available Pins
Lists the pins available for selection. Select the pins that you want to add to the instance
and click OK. Mandatory.
• Plug Map
Displays the plug map for the object is one is available. Read-only.
• Add as Reference Pins
Specifies whether the pins selected in the Available Pins list will be added as reference
pins (selected) or not (unselected). The pins displayed in the Available Pins list may
change depending on this setting. See “Overview of Reference Pins” on page 152 for
more information about reference pins. Optional.

February 2016
Pins
Place Pins for Non-shared Object Help
Place Pins for Non-shared Object Help

• Adding Pins to an Object Instance
• The Place Pins Dialog for Non-shared Object fields
Place Pins Dialog for Non-shared Object

To access: select an object in the Design Browser Window or Diagram Window, press Space
Bar and enter Add External, or by right-clicking an object and selecting Add Pin.
Used to add existing pins or new pins to an instance of an object.
• Select Pins
Lists existing pins available for selection. Select any pins that you want to place on the
instance of the object and click Place. Click on the locations where you want to place
the pins on the object in the Diagram Window. If a pin symbol is grayed-out, that pin is
not currently placed anywhere. Mandatory if object has library part, otherwise optional.
• Place
Returns you to the Diagram Window where you can click on the object instance to place
any pins selected in the Select Pins list. Optional.
• Create
Returns you to the Diagram Window where you can click on the object instance to
create and place a new pin. Not displayed if the object has a library part.
• Add as Reference Pins
Specifies whether the pins selected in the Select Pins list will be added as reference pins
(selected) or not (unselected). The pins displayed in the Select Pins list may change
depending on this setting. See “Overview of Reference Pins” on page 152 for more
information about reference pins. Optional.
Edit Stack Help

• Usage Examples - Stacked Pins
• The Edit Stack Dialog fields
• Creating a Stack of Pins
• Adding a Pin to a Pin Stack

February 2016
Pins
Stack Usages Help
• Removing a Pin from a Pin Stack

• Viewing the Pins in a Pin Stack
• Deleting a Stack of Pins
• Viewing the Highway Conductors that Terminate at Stacked Pins
Stack Usages Help

• Usage Examples - Stacked Pins
• The Usages Dialog fields
• Viewing the Highway Conductors that Terminate at Stacked Pins

February 2016
Pins
Stack Usages Help

February 2016
Chapter 5
Devices and Connectors
The following sections describe how to create, add and manage devices and connectors,
including shared devices and connectors in designs.
Creating a Device in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding a Device from Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Preserving Connectivity and Assisting Object Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Preserving Imported Connectivity and Using Assisted Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adding a Shared Device/Connector/Splice to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
187
Adding a Shared Splice to a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Editing Shared Devices and Shared Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Joining Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Associating a Symbol with a Shared Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Removing the Association Between a Symbol and a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Adding a Pin to a Shared Pin List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Removing a Pin from a Shared Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Renaming a Pin in a Shared Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Converting a Reserved Pin to an Unrestricted Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Converting an Unrestricted Pin to an Automatic Reservation Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Creating a New Revision of a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Creating a Revision of a Shared Object in Capital Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Swapping Out Shared Objects for a Compatible Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cross-References on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cross-References and Composite Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Setting up Project Preferences for Cross-references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Viewing Another Instance of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Changing the Home Instances of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Changing an Instance of an Object to a Home Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Changing a Home Instance of an Object to a Normal Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Promoting a Device/Connector/Modular Connector/Ring Terminal/Splice to a Shared
Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Promoting a Device/Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Promoting a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Creating a Shared Device Based on a Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

February 2016
Deleting Multiple Unused Shared Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Deleting a Single Unused Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Implementing Ground Wiring in the Generative Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Resizing a Device or Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Resizing a Device or Connector Using the Resize Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Resizing a Device or Connector by Dragging a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Overview of Device Connectors and Harness Connectors in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . 214
Harness Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Device Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Generating Harness Connectors in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Generating Harness Connectors on a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Creating a Harness Connector In a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Converting Connectors to Ring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Converting Pins to Stud Pins and Attaching Multiple Ring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Reverting Stud Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Overview of Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Adding a Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Deleting a Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Sharing a Modular Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Associating a Modular Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Disassociating a Modular Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Overview of Backshells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Adding a Backshell to a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Add Shared Pins Facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Scenarios for the Design Rule Check Called Invalid Library Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Direct to Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Capital Interactive Flow using Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Capital Generative Flow using Capital Logic and Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Capital Harness XC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Defining a Footprint Directly on a Device (Generative Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Help Button Landing Pages for Devices and Connectors Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Swap Out Revision Error Display Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Error Display Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Delete Unused Shared Objects Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

February 2016
Creating a Device in a Diagram
Creating a Device in a Diagram

A device is an object into which connectors and conductors can plug. Capital Logic does not
recognize a device as having a particular function. A conductor can act as an interface object
between a conductor and a device or a conductor can plug directly into a device.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Device Without Pins.
2. Position the mouse cursor over a grid point where you want to place one corner of
the device.
3. Drag the mouse away to place the opposite corner of the device. A gray rectangle is
displayed, along with the dimensions of the device and the number of pins that will be
added. Drag the mouse until the rectangle is the size that you want the device to be and
click the grid point where you want to place the opposite corner. If you hold CTRL
during the second click, the device is fully populated with pins.
4.
Note
If you place a device across the path of a conductor, pins are automatically created
where the conductor enters and exits the device. The conductor is broken and a new
conductor with the same properties is created on one side of the device. The two
conductors are attached to the pins.
This also applies to multicores and overbraids. They are split and retain their structure
on both sides of the new device. If there are shields and daisy chains attached, they
remain connected to the same pins but may belong to the newly created multicore or
overbraid. If the existing multicore or overbraid belongs to an assembly, the newly
created multicore or overbraid also belongs to that assembly.
If you place a device so that it lies across a shared/ported conductor, multicore or

overbraid, one half of the split becomes a completely new shared/ported conductor,
multicore or overbraid.
Tip
If you wish to create a horizontal connector (top/bottom pin location) instead of the
vertical (left/right pin location) then, after the first click of the mouse which places
the first corner of the connector, press R on the keyboard to rotate the direction of the
connector, before performing a second click of the mouse to set the opposite corner and
place the horizontal connector. This command can also be used to rotate the drawing of
ring terminals, inline connectors and devices.

February 2016
Adding a Device from Capital Library
Related Topics
Editing the Properties of Objects
Resizing a Device or Connector

The Add Device from Library action enables you to add a device from Capital Library to a
Capital Logic diagram. You can add a device regardless of whether it has a symbol or not. If
you add a device without a symbol, you select which pins you want to be visible on the diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Device from Library to display the Part Selection
facility. Enter some data to refine the search for the part that you want to add and click
the Search button.
2. A list of parts matching your search is displayed in the browse box. Click on the part that
you want to add.
3. The details for the part are displayed in the fields on the tabs.
4. Click the Insert button to add the device to the Capital Logic design.
5. If the device has a symbol, skip to step 6.
If the device does not have a symbol, the Add Device from Library Part dialog is
displayed. Select the pins that you want to be visible in the diagram. If the Auto-
Generate box is checked, the selected pins will be placed on the device automatically. If
the Auto-Generate box is not checked, you will place the selected pins after you place
the device.
If the Reference box is checked, the selected pins will be placed as reference pins. See
“Overview of Reference Pins” on page 152 for more information about reference pins.
Click the OK button to place the device.
6. If the device has a symbol, the symbol is displayed to help you place it when you move
the mouse cursor over the diagram window. Click once on the diagram to place it.
Note
When placing a symbol in a diagram, you can rotate the symbol by pressing the R
key on your keyboard and you can flip it by pressing the F key on your keyboard.
If the device does not have a symbol, the mouse cursor has a little device symbol next to
it. Click once to place the first corner of the device and then move the cursor to where
you want to place the opposite corner of the device and click once.

February 2016
If you are auto-generating the pin placement, the pins are added to the device
automatically. If you are placing the pins manually, the cursor changes so that it has a
little pin symbol next to it.
As you move the cursor over the device, it changes appearance. Where a pin can be
added, it looks like this: .
You can add a pin at a grid point on an edge of the device. You can also add a pin
outside of the graphical representation of the device, the device stretches to include the
new pin.
Click once to place each pin.
7. The device is added to the diagram and to the Design Browser Window. In the Design
Browser Window, a normal device is indicated by the icon and a symbol for a ground
device is indicated by the icon . Any device that has a part number from Capital
Library assigned to it also has a red tick by the symbol.

February 2016
Preserving Connectivity and Assisting Object Placement
Preserving Connectivity and Assisting Object

Placement
This functionality enables you to import connectivity and preserve its original design definition,
without selecting the Autoview Diagram Generation option on the Import Connectivity dialog
box. It automatically retains connectivity information and populates the design browser with all
connectivity objects, ready for placing on the diagram. As the objects are placed on to the
schematic diagram any connections defined in the connectivity can be seen as ghosted lines and
are automatically added once the pins are placed.
Preserving Imported Connectivity and Using Assisted Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Preserving Connectivity
The system allows you to import connectivity from other MCAD designs and retain the
connectivity for the objects, including devices, connectors and so on, as it was originally
specified. This methodology automates the connectivity process and enables an accurate
representation of the imported design.
Further functionality assists the optimal layout of the design when you place the imported
connectivity objects onto the diagram. Shadow graphics display the proposed connectivity
between options enabling you to easily view the originally defined routing and tweak this where
required. This assisted placement is also available when unplacing objects.
Tip
User CTRL-DEL to remove (unplace) object from the diagram into the Unplaced folder
then use the process to optimally place them back on the diagram.
Preserving Imported Connectivity and Using

Assisted Placement
The system allows you to import connectivity from other MCAD designs and retain the
connectivity for the objects, including devices, connectors and so on, as it was originally
specified. This methodology automates the connectivity process and enables an accurate
representation of the imported design.
Prerequisites
• Design data containing connectivity information.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Import Connectivity to use the Import Connectivity dialog
box to select the information you wish to import. See the Bridging Data In and Out of

February 2016
Preserving Imported Connectivity and Using Assisted Placement
Capital User Guide for further information. Note: Do not select the Autoview Diagram
Generation option.
2. Once the Import process completes, imported components are added to the “Unplaced”
folder of the relevant object.
3. Place objects from these folders on to your diagram using the Place Dialog. If the object
already has a symbol defined in the Capital Symbol library then click Symbol Selection
on the Place dialog to use it on the diagram.
4. Continue adding objects to the diagram. As more objects are added ghost connection
graphics (including any multicore connectivity) are added between connected objects
reflecting the original imported design definition and to assist in optimizing diagram
layout.
Results
Once all imported objects have been placed and the connectivity rendered save the design.
Tip
It is possible to reuse connectivity by selecting the required objects and pressing CTRL-
DEL to remove them from the diagram back into the Unplaced folder. You can then
optimally place them back on the diagram using the method described above.

February 2016
Adding a Shared Device/Connector/Splice to a Diagram
Adding a Shared Device/Connector/Splice to a

Diagram
This topic describes how to add a shared device, connector or splice to a diagram.
Note
Shared items must be defined (either in Capital Project or by using the Share dialog box,
see “Promoting a Device/Connector/Modular Connector/Ring Terminal/Splice to a Shared
Object” on page 206). If no shared items are defined for the project, the Add menu items for
shared items will return an error.
Under certain circumstances, an object (a net, wire, multicore, device, connector, inline, ring
terminal, overbraid or splice) on a design's schematic diagram must share its connectivity across
more than one design in a project.
For example:
It may be necessary for two separate harnesses (from separate designs in a project) to connect to
one device. You would therefore create the device as a shared device.
Shared devices and connectors (including shared ring terminals) behave differently than
standard devices and connectors; in addition to placing the component, the pins to be reserved
for that instance of the device or connector must be specified. Because the device / connector is

February 2016
shared, any instances of it in any other diagram may only choose from the remaining available
pins, unless the pins in the shared object are specifically designated as Reusable Pins. You can
also add reference pins to an instance of a shared object. See “Overview of Reference Pins” on
page 152 for more information about reference pins.
If a shared object has symbols associated with it, you can add a symbol as an instance of the
object. In any case, you can select pins from the pin list for the shared object and add those to an
instance of the shared object as a parameterized object. See “Adding a Shared Device, Plug,
Receptacle, Ring Terminal, or Inline Connector to a Diagram” on page 187 for information
about adding those shared objects to a diagram.
Shared splices can be created in Capital Project either with or without a plugmap. A shared
splice without a plug map is a shared pin list that has a single unrestricted pin. You cannot
reserve the pin for a design. A shared splice with a plug map can have multiple unrestricted
pins. See “Adding a Shared Splice to a Diagram” on page 189.
When shared pin lists, conductors and multicores are created in Capital Project, they can be
assigned an abstraction level. The Shared Objects Browser Window displays all shared
objects in all abstractions.
Note
If a shared object is frozen, a blue snowflake is displayed on the icon for the shared object.
See “Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects” on page 447 for more information about
frozen shared objects.
Adding a Shared Device, Plug, Receptacle, Ring

Terminal, or Inline Connector to a Diagram
This topic describes how to add a shared device, plug, receptacle, ring terminal or inline
connector to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Shared Device; press Space Bar and enter Add Shared
Plug, Add Shared Receptacle, Add Shared Ring Terminal, or Add Shared Inline to
create a shared plug, receptacle, or inline connector.
Alternatively, double-click on the shared object in the Shared Objects Browser
Window.
Video
A short example detailing how to add ring terminals and assign library parts to them
is contained within the video link in “Generating Harness Connectors on a Device”
on page 218.

February 2016
2. The Add Shared Object facility is displayed. If you have used the menu options to
access the facility, you must select the shared object that you want to add from the
Current Shared Object box.
3. You must select whether you want to add particular pins to the instance of the object or
whether you want to add an instance as a symbol (if a symbol is associated with the
shared object).
If you want to add the instance as a symbol, skip to step 4. If you want to add particular
pins and not use a symbol, continue with this step.
Select the Pin Selection option. The plug map for the shared object is displayed in the
Plug Map window. The pins currently available for that device / connector (if any)
appear in the Available Pins box.
Note
If you want to add a shared device with reference pins, check the Reference box. All
pins for that device are then displayed in the Available Pins window. You can only
add reference instances of pins or non-reference instances of pins to the object when you
first add it to a diagram. You can, however, convert non-reference instances to reference
instances and vice versa later. See “Overview of Reference Pins” on page 152.
Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and select pins in the Available Pins
window to allocate them to this instance of the shared object.
Tip
If you want to place all the selected pins on the object as a stack, check the Place as
Stack box instead of having to hold down the CTRL key. The placed, stacked pins
can be styled using the Styling dialog.
If you want the pins to be sized and placed automatically on the instance in the diagram,
check the Auto-Generate box. If you want to place the pins manually, do not check the
Auto-Generate box.
Go to step 5.
4. If you want to add the instance using a symbol, select the Symbol Selection option. Any
associated symbols are displayed in the Symbols window. The Symbol Selection option
is grayed out if there are no symbols associated with the shared device.
If the shared object has been created using a composite symbol, the available symbol
blocks are listed in the Symbols window. See Overview of Composite Symbols in the
Capital Symbol User Guide for more information about composite symbols.
Select the symbol or symbol blocks that you want to use for the instance of the diagram.
If a symbol is not available it is grayed out.

February 2016
Adding a Shared Splice to a Diagram
Note
A symbol or symbol block can contain more than one pin. When you select a symbol
or symbol block, you automatically select all of the pins on it.
If you want to add a shared device with reference pins, check the Reference box. When
you add the symbol or symbol blocks to the diagram, all of the pins will be reference
pins. You can, however, convert non-reference instances to reference instances and vice
versa later. See “Overview of Reference Pins” on page 152 for more information.
5. After you have finished making your selections, click the OK button to close the dialog
box.
6. You are adding the instance with a symbol, click on the position where you want the
symbol to be placed. If you have selected multiple symbol blocks, you place each block
separately.
Otherwise, draw the shared component on the diagram in the desired location by
clicking once to place one corner, then dragging the mouse to define the object's shape.
If you did not check the Auto-Generate box, Capital Logic will prompt you to place
each of the pins (in numerical order that you selected for this instance of the shared
object. You can place a pin on any side of a shared object, but not a corner or inside the
object. The shared object will be set when the last pin is placed.
Examples
When you create more than one instance of a shared object, cross-references are displayed next
to the instances in the diagram. See “Cross-References on Objects” on page 199 for more
information about cross-references.
If you abort placement of a shared object during pin placement, all the pins placed thus far are
added to the object, but the remaining pins are not placed (and are also unreserved for that
object instance). You can use the Pin action to add pins to a shared device. Any properties
created on the shared object and its pins are also transferred to each instance of the shared object
in the diagram(s).

This topic describes how to add a shared splice to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Double-click on the shared splice in the Shared Objects Browser Window or right-
click on the shared splice and select the Add Shared Splice option from the pop-up
menu.
Alternatively, press Space Bar and enter Add Shared Splice to display the Add Shared
Splice facility. Click on the shared splice that you want to add and click the OK button.
If you want to add a reference instance of the shared splice, check the Reference box.

February 2016
See “Overview of Reference Pins” on page 152 for more information about reference
pins.
2. Position the mouse cursor over the position where you want to place the splice and click
once to place it. If the shared splice has been created with a plug map, the grayed-out
symbol is displayed to help placement.
3. The shared splice is added to the diagram and to the browser tree in the Design Browser
Window.
Note
When you create more than one instance of a shared object, cross-references are
displayed next to the instances in the diagram. See “Cross-References on Objects”
on page 199 for more information about cross-references. If you copy a shared splice,
the instance that you then paste is not shared. However, you can promote it to a shared
splice.
Related Topics
Cross-References on Objects

February 2016
Editing Shared Devices and Shared Connectors
Editing Shared Devices and Shared

Connectors
This topic describes how to edit shared devices and connectors.
Note
When a shared object is frozen, you can only view the information for it. You cannot edit it
apart from changing its appearance in a design. If the object has pins, you can also add or
remove pins, and change their reservation status. See “Freezing and Unfreezing Shared
Objects” on page 447 for more information about freezing shared objects.
Modular connectors are displayed as a separate node in the Shared Objects Browser window
containing all modular connectors and associated sub-connectors. The modular tab is available
by right-clicking on the modular connector and selecting Edit Shared Plug. See “Assigning
Connector Positions Using the Modular Tab” on page 443.
You can edit a shared device or connector/modular connector/ring terminal in the following
ways:
• Associate a symbol with the shared object and associate the pins from the symbol with
the pins on the shared pin list. See “Associating a Symbol with a Shared Object” on
page 192.
• Remove the association between a symbol and a shared object. You can do this only if
none of the pins mapped to that symbol have been used. See “Removing the Association
Between a Symbol and a Shared Object” on page 194.
• Add or remove pins from the shared pin list for the shared object. See “Adding a Pin to a
Shared Pin List” on page 194 or “Removing a Pin from a Shared Pin List” on page 195.
• Convert reserved pins (automatic reservation or manually reserved) to unrestricted pins
and vice versa. See “Converting a Reserved Pin to an Unrestricted Pin” on page 195 or
“Converting an Unrestricted Pin to an Automatic Reservation Pin” on page 196.
Joining Objects
This topic describes how to select and join together pin lists of the same name and object type,
thereby speeding up design modification and clean up.
It is used to rejoin in-line connector, device and connector pin lists which have either been
manually split, or after a CAVAI or CAVAL operation.
Restrictions and Limitations

There are a number of considerations when using the Join action.

February 2016
Associating a Symbol with a Shared Object
• The first object selected becomes the anchor point for the unified object.
• If any graphical properties are assigned to object instances and that instance is the first
selected then, the properties will be ascribed to the newly unified object.
• The action works on both normal oriented and rotated objects.
• To select multiple objects, draw a square around the objects on the diagram that you
wish to join together.
Procedure
Right-click on the instance or instances of the object that you wish to join together and select the
Join option from the pop-up menu. Alternatively select the objects use the keyboard shortcut J.
Results
The selected pin lists are joined together.
Note
There are a number of reasons why the Join action could fail:
• Selected instances must be of the same type.

• If the Join action results in colliding pins then the action is disabled.
• You cannot join objects rotated in opposing axis

This topic describes how to associate a symbol with a shared object.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the shared object and select the Edit Shared Object option from the pop-
up menu or select the shared object and click the Edit Shared Object ( ) toolbar icon
in the Shared Objects Browser Window.
2. The Edit Shared Object facility is displayed. Click the Symbols tab. In the browser
tree, click on the symbol that you want to associate with the shared object.
Note
For shared devices, the symbol is added to the symbols associated with the shared
device. For shared connectors, the symbol becomes the single symbol associated
with the shared connector and replaces the existing associated symbol if there is one.
For shared connectors, the symbol must have at least as many pins as the shared
connector. For shared devices with library parts, the symbol must have exactly the same
number of pins as the shared device.

February 2016
A symbol can be associated multiple times with a shared object for the purpose of
mapping multiple sets of pins to the same symbol.
If there are no symbols that can be added to the shared device or connector, the Symbols
tab is not displayed.
3. On the Associate Pins tab, you must associate pins from the symbol with pins on the
shared pin list. Note that if you have not selected a symbol on the Symbols tab, the Pins
tab is displayed instead of the Associate Pins tab.
The Symbol window lists the pins on the symbol. The Shared window lists the pins in
the shared pin list.
You can either associate all of the pins from the symbol with pins on the shared object
by clicking the Associate All button or you can associate one pin at a time. To do this,
select the pin in the Symbol window, select the shared pin in the Shared window and
click the Associate button.
All pin from the object instance must be associated with pins on the shared pin list if you
want to continue with promoting the object.
You can disassociate all of the pins for the current instance by clicking the Disassociate
All button or you can disassociate one pin by clicking on the shared pin in the Shared
window and clicking the Disassociate button.
You can remove a pin from the shared pin list by clicking on it in the Shared window
and clicking the Delete button.
You can rename a pin in the shared pin list by clicking on it in the Shared window and
clicking the Rename button.
You can add pins to the shared pin list by clicking the New button. This displays the
Add Shared Pins facility. You must specify the following:
• Pin Name Prefix - a prefix that will be displayed at the start of the pin names on the
new pins.
• Start Index - the number that you want the first new pin to have in its name after the
prefix. The other new pins will follow on from this number.
• No of Pins - the number of new pins that you want to add.
Click the OK button to add the pins and to return to the Shared Object facility.
4. Click the OK button to save your changes and to exit the Shared Object facility.

February 2016
Removing the Association Between a Symbol and a Shared Object
Removing the Association Between a Symbol and a

Shared Object
This topic describes how to remove the association between a symbol and a shared object.
Note
You can do this only if none of the pins mapped to the symbol have been used.
Procedure
2. The Edit Shared Object facility is displayed. Click the Symbols tab. In the browser
tree, click on the symbol that you want to remove. Click the Remove button.
3. The symbol is removed from the tree. Click the OK button to exit the facility.
Adding a Pin to a Shared Pin List

This topic describes how to add a pin to a shared pin list.
Procedure
2. The Shared Object facility is displayed. Click the Add Pins tab and click the Add
button.
3. The Add Shared Pins facility is displayed. You must specify the following:
new pins.
Click the OK button to add the pins and to return to the Shared Object facility.
4. Click the OK button to exit the Edit Shared Object option.

February 2016
Removing a Pin from a Shared Pin List
Removing a Pin from a Shared Pin List

This topic describes how to remove a pin from a shared pin list.
Caution
You can remove only pins that you have just added to a shared pin list. If a pin was added in
an earlier editing session, you cannot remove it, even if the pin is unused.
Procedure
1. In the Shared Object facility, click the Pins tab or Associate Pins tab, click on the pin
and click the Delete button.
2. The pin is removed from the shared pin list. Click the OK button to exit the Shared
Object facility.
Renaming a Pin in a Shared Pin List

This topic describes how to rename a pin in a shared pin list.
Procedure
2. The Edit Shared Object facility is displayed. Click the Pins tab or Associate Pins tab,
click on the pin name and click Rename.
The Rename Pin Dialog is displayed
3. Enter the new name for the pin and click OK.
The pin is renamed.
Converting a Reserved Pin to an Unrestricted Pin

This topic describes how to convert a reserved pin to an unrestricted pin.
Procedure
2. The Shared Object facility is displayed. Click the Pin Reservations tab, click on the
pin in the Automatic Reservations window and click the Add button. Note that the Pin

February 2016
Converting an Unrestricted Pin to an Automatic Reservation Pin
Reservations tab is not available if the shared object has a library part and if all of its
pins are already unrestricted.
If you want to convert multiple pins, you can hold down the Control key on your
keyboard and click them to select them.
Note
If you want to convert all of the pins in the shared pin list to unrestricted pins, you
can click the Add All button without selecting any pins.
3. The pin is added to the Unrestricted Pins window. Click the OK button to exit the
Shared Object facility.
Converting an Unrestricted Pin to an Automatic

Reservation Pin
This topic describes how to convert an unrestricted pin to an automatic reservation pin.
Procedure
2. The Edit Shared Object facility is displayed. Click the Pin Reservations tab, click on
the pin in the Unrestricted Pins window and click the Remove button. Note that the
Pin Reservations tab is not available if the shared object has a library part and if all of
its pins are already unrestricted.
Note
If you want to convert multiple pins, you can hold down the Control key on your
keyboard and click them to select them. If you want to convert all of the unrestricted
pins in the shared pin list to reserved pins, you can click the Remove All button without
selecting any pins.
3. The pin is added to the Automatic Reservations window. Click the OK button to exit
the Shared Object facility.

February 2016
Creating a New Revision of a Shared Object

When a design is released, shared objects are frozen. However, the design may be revised
resulting in the need to make changes to shared objects. In order to change attributes and
properties for a shared object in this scenario, you must create a new revision to which you can
make changes.
You can create a revision of a shared object both in Capital Project and in Capital Logic.
See the Capital Project help system for more information about creating a revision in that
application.
Note
If you have a shared device with shared harness connectors, you can create revisions for the
device and the connectors separately.
Special conditions apply for editing shared modular connectors, see “Sharing a Modular
Connector” on page 226 for further information.
Creating a Revision of a Shared Object in Capital

Logic
This topic describes how to create a revision of a shared object in Capital Logic.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the shared object and select the Create Revision option from the pop-up
menu. Alternatively, click on the object, press Space Bar and enter Create Revision, or
click the Create Revision ( ) toolbar icon in the Shared Objects Browser Window.
2. The Create Revision facility is displayed. You must enter a unique name and revision
combination. You can either keep the previously used name, enter a new name or click
the ellipsis (...) button to select a name that has been defined in Capital Project.
If you enter a combination that is already in use, the text changes to red. You cannot edit
the Short Description field.
If you want to swap out the original shared object revision for the new revision in
designs, select Swap Out Revision.
3. Click the OK button to exit the facility. The new revision is listed under the original
shared object revision in the Shared Objects Browser Window. If you selected Swap
Out Revision, the Swap Out Revision Dialog [2] is displayed where you select the
design revisions in which you want to swap out the shared object revisions. See
“Swapping Out Shared Objects for a Compatible Revision” on page 198 for more
details.

February 2016
Swapping Out Shared Objects for a Compatible Revision
Related Topics
Swapping Out Shared Objects for a

Compatible Revision
This topic details how to swap out (replace) a shared object revision in designs for a compatible
revision.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the shared object revision that you want to replace in the Shared Objects
Browser Window on the left of the application window. Right-click on it and select
Swap Out Revision; the Swap Out Revision Dialog [1] is displayed.
2. Select the shared object revision that you want to replace the revision currently used in
designs and click OK; the Swap Out Revision Dialog [2] is displayed.
3. Select the design revisions for which you want to either:
• Swap the shared object revisions within that design revision (Update)
• Create a new design revision based on that design revision and swap the shared
object revisions in the new design revision (Up-Revision)
4. If you have selected Up-Revision for any design revisions, specify the New Revision.
5. Click OK; new design revisions are created as specified and the shared object revisions
are swapped in the appropriate design revisions. If the swapping out is prevented for
some reason, the Error Display Dialog lists the errors preventing it.
Related Topics

February 2016
When you create more than one instance of a shared object or design wide object, cross-
references are displayed next to the instances in the diagram by default. Cross-references can
also be displayed for re-usable pins on a pin list but they are not by default. The display and
styling of cross-references is controlled using style sets, see the Capital Diagram Styling User
Guide for further information.
You can also use Project Preferences to control whether cross-references are displayed for pin
lists, conductors and pins, however this is to support legacy user-flow cases and the
recommended best practice is that the style set control method should be used. See “Setting up
Project Preferences for Cross-references” on page 201 for more information.
Note
If you release a design, then close the project in Capital Logic and then re-open the project
and design, the cross-reference text becomes invisible.
If you want to override the Project Preferences related to the display of cross-reference text, you
can edit the cross-reference properties for an instance of an object. To do this, right-click on the
instance of the object in the diagram and select the Properties option from the pop-up menu.
See “Editing the Graphical Properties of Cross-References” on page 441 for more information
about the properties on the Cross-references tab of the Edit Properties facility.
The first instance of an object that you created is the home instance by default. The locations of
all other instances of the object are displayed next to the home instance.
The location of the home instance is displayed next to all other instances of the device. You can
have more than one home instance and change which instances are home instances. See
“Changing the Home Instances of an Object” on page 204 for more information.
By default, each cross-reference both for the home instance or other instances are in the format:
/{DESIGN.NAME}:{DIAGRAM.NAME} {ZONE}
For example:
/Audio:Audio_1 3-D
In this example, the cross-reference indicates that there is an instance of the device in the
diagram Audio_1 of the design Audio. In the diagram Audio_1, the instance is in the zone 3-D.
A zone is only displayed if the diagram has a border that uses zones. See Adding Zone Areas
to a Border in the Capital Symbol User Guide for more information.

February 2016
Cross-References and Composite Symbols
When a build list is active, any cross-references in the designs in the build list will list only
those instances in designs on the active build list. Cross-references in designs not in the active
build list show all instances. If there is no active build list, cross-references show all instances.
If a net conductor is part of an equivalence set, the cross-reference text lists the designs and
diagrams names in which any of the other shared net conductors in the same equivalence set
have been placed. Therefore, the cross-reference text also includes the name of the other net
conductor.
For example:
/Audio:Audio_1 3-D:Net-2
In this example, the net conductor Net-2 is in the same equivalence set as the net conductor by
which the cross-reference is displayed. The cross-reference indicates that there is an instance of
the net conductor Net-2 in the diagram Audio_1 of the design Audio. In the diagram Audio_1,
the instance of Net-2 is in the zone 3-D.
See “Overview of Shared Net Conductor Equivalence Sets” on page 292 for more information
about equivalence sets.
See “Cross-reference Rules for Pins” on page 152 for further information on the rues that apply
for pins.
If you are viewing an instance of an object, you can jump to another diagram where another
instance of an object is. See “Viewing Another Instance of an Object” on page 203.
Note
When you create, move or delete instances of the shared object, the cross-references refresh
automatically. However, if somebody is working on the project in a separate session of
Capital Logic, any changes to instances of the shared object that they make will not be refreshed
automatically in your session. You can manually update cross-references by pressing Space Bar
and entering Refresh Shared Objects.
Cross-References and Composite Symbols

This section explains how cross-references work when a composite symbol is used for a device.
The following rules apply:
• If the composite symbol or any blocks within it have cross-reference placeholders in
Capital Symbol, then these placeholders are always used (regardless of the Override
Symbol Styling setting in the style set that is applied).
• The first placed instance of the composite symbol for a connectivity object is set as the
home instance. All later instances of the composite symbol for the connectivity object
are not set as home instances. However, the home instance can be changed manually.

February 2016
Setting up Project Preferences for Cross-references
• By default, any instance of a block from a composite symbol is not set as a home
instance.
• If a connectivity object has been placed on the diagram using instances of the complete
composite symbol, instances of blocks from the composite symbol, and instances of
parameterized devices (that is, instances drawn without using a symbol), all of these
instances reference each other.
• A composite symbol can have additional cross-reference placeholders on the symbol
blocks in it. If such placeholders exist, the references pointing to other instances of the
same block are grouped together and listed at those placeholder locations. If no such
placeholders are available, these references appear at the location of the cross-reference
placeholder for the composite symbol.
• If a composite symbol or block does not have cross-reference placeholders defined in
Capital Symbol, the cross-reference is created based on either Project Preferences or the
applied style set (depending on the Project Preference setting: Project Preferences >
Capital Logic > Diagram node > Use Style-Set Cross-reference).
• If a block within the composite symbol does not have a cross-reference placeholder
defined in Capital Symbol, no new placeholder for that block is created when the block
is placed in a diagram (irrespective of the Project Preferences or the applied style set).
Setting up Project Preferences for Cross-

references
This topic describes how to create project preferences for cross-references.
Procedure
1. Access the Project Preferences functionality in Capital Project or Capital Logic.
2. The Project Preferences facility is displayed. Expand the browser tree below the object
type (conductor, pin or pinlist) for which you want to set up cross-references. Click on
the Cross-Reference branch.
3. The following settings are displayed:
• Show - check this box if you want cross-references to be displayed for this object
type.
• Limit references per line
Check the box to enable the field. Specify the maximum number of cross-references
that can be displayed on one line when there are multiple cross-references for an
object. By default, this is 1.
• Limit Lines per block

February 2016
Setting up Project Preferences for Cross-references
Check the box to enable the field. Specify the maximum number of lines that can be
in a block of cross-references in a diagram. If the number of cross-references for an
instance of a shared object is greater than this value, the cross-references are
displayed in multiple blocks. If you move a cross-reference in a block to another
location in a diagram, all of the cross-references in that block move with it. Cross-
references in other blocks for that instance do not move.
• Template - specify the format of the cross-references. The format is specified as a
string that combines text with references to variables. The system interprets text
encased by curly brackets as a variable. This will be replaced by the appropriate
value in a cross-reference. Valid variables are as follows:
o DESIGN.* where * is the name of a design attribute
o DIAGRAM.* where * is the name of a diagram attribute
o ZONE - the x, y coordinates of the zone where the other instance is located
o ZONE.X - the x coordinate of the zone where the other instance is located
o ZONE.Y - the y coordinate of the zone where the other instance is located
o EQUIVALENTNET - if a net conductor is part of an equivalence set and you
specify this variable in the format, the cross-reference text will also include the
name of the other net conductor from the equivalence set.
For example, you could have the format:
/{DESIGN.NAME}:{DIAGRAM.NAME} {ZONE.X}:{EQUIVALENTNET}
If a net conductor Net-2 is in the same equivalence set as the net conductor by which
the cross-reference is displayed and if Net-2 is in the zone with an X coordinate of 3
in the diagram Audio_1 of the design Audio, the cross-reference would be:
/Audio:Audio_1 3:Net-2
If a variable is undefined in the cross-reference, the variable name is replaced with

an empty string.
• Delimiter
If the References per line setting is greater than 1, specify a text string to place
between cross-references on the same line.
4. If you have selected to display cross-references for the object type, expand the Cross-
reference branch in the tree and click on the Text branch below it.

February 2016
Viewing Another Instance of an Object
The following settings are displayed:

• Name - from the drop-down list, select the name of the font that you want to use for
the cross-references. Use the drop-down list next to this to specify whether it should
be plain, bold or italic text.
• Height - specify the height of the text. Use the drop-down list next to this to specify
the unit of measurement for the height.
• Justification - click on the box that represents the location in relation to the object
instances where you want to display the cross-references.
Note
The Preview box displays how the text will appear but not to scale.
5. Click the OK button to exit the Project Preferences facility.
Viewing Another Instance of an Object

This topic describes how to view items related to the selected object.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the instance of the object that you are viewing and select the View
Related Items option from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, press Space Bar and enter
View Related Items.
2. If there is only one cross-reference listed for the instance that you have been viewing,
the diagram in the cross-reference opens automatically.
If there is more than one cross-reference listed for the instance that you have been
viewing, the Related Items dialog box is displayed. Click on the cross-reference for the
instance that you want to view and click the OK button.
3. The diagram containing the instance that you have selected opens in the diagram
window.

February 2016
Changing the Home Instances of an Object
Changing the Home Instances of an Object

When you create more than one instance of a shared or design wide object, cross-references can
be displayed next to the instances in the diagram.
See “Cross-References on Objects” on page 199 for more information on setting up cross-
references.
The first instance that you created is the home instance by default. The locations of all other
instances of the object are displayed next to the home instance. The location of the home
instance is displayed next to all other instances of the device.
You can have more than one home instance and change which instances are home instances. If
you have more than one home instance, the locations of all other instances (both home instances
and other instances) are displayed next to a home instance. All home instances are displayed
next to other instances.
If you are viewing an instance of an object, you can jump to another instance in another
diagram. See “Cross-References on Objects” on page 199 for more information about how to do
this.
Changing an Instance of an Object to a Home

Instance
This topic describes how to change an instance of an object to a home instance.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the instance in the diagram and select the Indicate Home Object option
from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, select the instance in the diagram, press Space Bar
and enter Indicate Home Object.
2. The instance changes to a home instance and the locations of all other instances are
displayed next to it.
Changing a Home Instance of an Object to a

Normal Instance
This topic describes how to change a home instance of an object to a normal instance.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the home instance and select the Remove Home Condition option from
the pop-up menu. Alternatively, select the instance in the diagram, press Space Bar and
enter Remove Home Condition.

February 2016
Changing a Home Instance of an Object to a Normal Instance
2. The instance changes to a normal instance and the locations of all home instances are
displayed next to it.
Related Topics
Cross-reference Rules for Pins

February 2016
Promoting a Device/Connector/Modular Connector/Ring Terminal/Splice to a Shared Object
Promoting a Device/Connector/Modular
Connector/Ring Terminal/Splice to a Shared
Object
Capital Logic supports the promotion of an existing, non-shared device, connector, modular
connector, ring terminal or splice to be defined as shared. The shared objects, once promoted,
can be shared with other diagrams in the same design (but not across designs). The properties of
the instance will also be migrated onto the shared object, as well as the symbol if an existing
symbol map is used.
When you promote an object, you can either create a new shared object or promote the object
into an existing shared pin list.
You can promote a device that has been added to a diagram using a symbol into an existing
shared pin list. When you promote it, the symbol is added to the shared device's set of symbols.
If a library part description is assigned to the object, the following applies:
• If the number of pins on the shared pin list is greater than the number of pins on the
library part, the library part association is removed.
• If both the shared pin list and the object instance have valid library part descriptions, the
library part description on the object instance is removed.
You can also create a shared device based on a symbol. See “Creating a Shared Device Based
on a Symbol” on page 209
Promoting a Device/Connector
This topic describes how to promote a device or connector.
Procedure
1. First create a device or connector (including modular connector or ring terminal) as
normal. See “Creating a Device in a Diagram” on page 181, “Adding a Modular
Connector” on page 224 or “Creating a Harness Connector In a Diagram” on page 219.
2. Select the new device or connector, then press Space Bar and enter Share. Alternatively,
right-click on the object and select the Share option from the pop-up menu.
3. The Share dialog box appears, which is a multi-tabbed dialog. On the Shared Device
tab, you must specify the following:
• Create New - Select this if you want to create a new shared object. You must also
specify a name and revision for the object. If you want the name to be fixed check
the Fixed box.

February 2016
Promoting a Device/Connector
• Share Into - Select this if you want to promote the object into an existing shared
object. You must select the existing shared object by clicking on it in the window
below the Share Into option.
Note
The Share Into action is not available when sharing modular connectors.
4. On the Associate Pins tab, you must associate pins from the object instance that is being
promoted with pins on the shared pin list.
The Instance window lists the pins on the object instance that is being promoted. If you
are creating a new shared object with a new shared pin list, the Shared window lists the
same pins as on the instance that is being promoted. If you are promoting the instance
into an existing shared pin list, the pins from the existing shared pin list are listed in the
Shared window.
Pins that are reserved to this design or are not reserved to any design are displayed in
bold and can be associated with a pin on the diagram. Once a pin (that is not
unrestricted) is associated with a pin on an instance, it becomes reserved to this design
and it is grayed out. Unrestricted pins are displayed in bold and in italics.
You can either associate all of the pins from the instance with pins on the shared object
select the pin in the Instance window, select the shared pin in the Shared window and
and clicking the Remove button.
You can add pins to the shared pin list by clicking the Add button. This displays the
new pins.
Click the OK button to add the pins.

February 2016
Promoting a Splice
5. Optionally, you can use the Pin Reservations tab to set one or more of the pins to be
unrestricted. The automatic reservation pins from the shared pin list are displayed in the
Automatic Reservations window. Click on the pin that you want to make unrestricted
and click the Add button. If you want to make all of the pins unrestricted, click the Add
All button.
The new unrestricted pins are displayed in the Unrestricted Pins window.
6. Press OK to promote the instance and save it as a shared object / connector. The shared
object / connector can now be selected with the appropriate Add Shared ribbon actions.
Note
on page 199 for more information about cross-references.
Promoting a Splice
This topic describes how to promote a splice.
Note
An instance of a splice symbol on a diagram can be promoted to a shared splice. A splice
using a symbol can only be promoted into a shared splice if it has the same symbol as the
shared splice. A shared splice cannot have pins or a symbol added to it after it has been
promoted.
Procedure
1. First create a splice as normal. See “Creating a Splice in Capital Logic” on page 277.
2. Click on the splice in the Design Browser Window or in the diagram window, press
Space Bar and enter Share. Alternatively, you can right-click on the splice and select the
Share Splice option from the pop-up menu.
3. The Share Splice dialog box is displayed.
If you are creating a new shared splice, select the Create New option and enter a name
for the shared splice in the Name box and click the OK button. Note that you can check
the Fixed box if you want the name to be fixed.
If you want to promote the splice instance into an existing shared splice, select the
Share Into option and select the shared splice in the window below the option.
4. The splice is promoted to a shared splice. If you have created a new splice, it is added to
the Shared Objects Browser Window.

February 2016
Creating a Shared Device Based on a Symbol
Note
Creating a Shared Device Based on a Symbol

This topic describes how to create a shared device based on a symbol.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the symbol in the Symbol Browser Window at the bottom left of the
application window and select the Create Shared Object option from the pop-up menu.
2. The Create Shared Device dialog box appears, which is a multi-tabbed dialog. On the
Shared Device tab, you must specify the following:
• Create New - Select this if you want to create a new shared object. You must also
specify a name and revision for the object. If you want the name to be fixed check
the Fixed box.
• Share Into - Select this if you want to promote the symbol into an existing shared
object. You must select the existing shared object by clicking on it in the window
below the Share Into option.
3. On the Associate Pins tab, you must associate pins from the symbol with pins on the
shared pin list.
The Instance window lists the pins on the object instance that is being promoted. If you
are creating a new shared object with a new shared pin list, the Shared window lists the
same pins as on the instance that is being promoted. If you are promoting the instance
into an existing shared pin list, the pins from the existing shared pin list are listed in the
Shared window.
Pins that are reserved to this design or are not reserved to any design are displayed in
bold and can be associated with a pin on the diagram. Once a pin (that is not
unrestricted) is associated with a pin on an instance, it becomes reserved to this design
and it is grayed out. Unrestricted pins are displayed in bold and in italics.
You can either associate all of the pins from the instance with pins on the shared object
select the pin in the Instance window, select the shared pin in the Shared window and

February 2016
Deleting Multiple Unused Shared Objects
You can add pins to the shared pin list by clicking the Add button. This displays the
new pins.
Click the OK button to add the pins.
4. Optionally, you can use the Pin Reservations tab to set one or more of the pins to be
reusable. The automatic reservation pins from the shared pin list are displayed in the
Automatic Reservations window. Click on the pin that you want to make unrestricted
and click the Add button. If you want to make all of the pins unrestricted, click the Add
All button.
The new unrestricted pins are displayed in the Unrestricted Pins window.
5. Press OK to create the shared device and place the symbol on the diagram to create the
first instance of it.
Related Topics
Deleting Multiple Unused Shared Objects

This topic explains how to delete multiple unused shared objects (devices, connectors, inlines,
splices, conductors, multicores and overbraids) from a project.
Procedure
1. In the Shared Objects Browser Window, click the Delete Unused Shared Objects ( )
toolbar icon.
The Delete Unused Shared Objects Dialog is displayed.
2. Select the shared objects that you want to delete in the Delete? column and click OK or
Apply.

February 2016
Deleting a Single Unused Shared Object
The shared object is deleted from the project.
Deleting a Single Unused Shared Object

This topic explains how to delete a single unused shared object (device, connector, inline,
splice, conductor, multicore and overbraid) from a project.
Procedure
1. In the Shared Objects Browser Window, select the object.
2. Either:
• right-click on the object and select Delete Shared Object
• click the Delete Shared Object ( ) toolbar icon.
The shared object is deleted.
Implementing Ground Wiring in the Generative

Flow
There are two flows for implementing the design of ground wiring when using Capital Logic
and Capital Integrator in the Generative flow:
• Flow 1: Use Ground Design functionality in Capital Integrator
In Capital Logic, rather than specify exactly where in the vehicle each device is
grounded, you specify only that a device needs to be grounded. You do this by adding
unique ground devices and also usually specifying some further properties for them that
Capital Integrator uses to drive the placement and combination of ground points.
• Flow 2: Use shared devices in Capital Logic before placing them in Capital Integrator
In Capital Logic, each ground point in the vehicle is represented by a device (usually
shared because it will appear on many different system design). These grounds are used
in the system designs like normal devices. Note that they are not normally created as
ground device symbols because such symbols cannot be shared. The grounds are
connected to a single, shared net that represents the entire ground signal connected to
this ground point.
In Capital Integrator, the grounds are placed and routed just like a normal device.
In order to use this flow, you must know exactly where in the vehicle each device will be
grounded. This, in turn, means that you must take into account the physical placement of
each device while editing logical system designs. This limits the re-usability of the
system designs since, if the same devices are placed into a different vehicle, the ground

February 2016
Implementing Ground Wiring in the Generative Flow
points and normal device positions may change. Therefore, you would have to change
all of the ground connections in your system schematics.
Related Topics
Ground Wiring Flow Using Ground Design Functionality
Ground Wiring Flow Using Shared Objects

February 2016

Once placed, a device or connector can be resized according to the following rules:
• Resizing a device moves the attached connectors with the side of the device they are
attached to.
• An attached connector's attached side is not movable.
• Resizing an inline connector resizes both the plug and the receptacle; their widths are
independent, but their heights are dependent. The middle of the inline connector is
movable and will resize both the plug and the receptacle.
• Changing the size of an object moves pins on that object along with the side being
moved. Pins on a corner are left in position, and are considered pins on the side not
being moved.
• Pins are not added or removed when a device is resized.
• Changing the size of an object cannot orphan any pins. If a pin is on a corner of an
object, it cannot be resized smaller on the two dimensions for that corner, even if there is
space to do so.
• The behavior of corner pins depends on the pin list; a pin list rotated 90 degrees will
behave as if the sides are the top and bottom. A corner pin thusly moves up and down,
instead of left and right.
Resizing a Device or Connector Using the Resize

Option
This topic describes how to resize a device or connector using the resize option.
Procedure
1. In the Diagram Window, right-click any part of the line on the desired side of the object
to select it.
2. A pop-up menu is displayed. Select Resize from the pop-up menu. The device or
connector is highlighted in grey, and the side you clicked is attached to the mouse
pointer.
3. Click to place the side and resize the object.
Resizing a Device or Connector by Dragging a

Corner
In the Diagram Window, click the corner of the device or connector and drag it; the object
resizes as you drag.

February 2016
Overview of Device Connectors and Harness Connectors in Capital Logic
Overview of Device Connectors and Harness

Connectors in Capital Logic
When a footprint is defined for a device in Capital Library, you can specify whether the
connector type for the footprint is a device connector or a harness connector. See the Capital
Library help system for more information on defining footprints.
You can add a device with a footprint to a Capital Logic diagram in the following ways:
• By adding a device with a footprint and a symbol directly to a Capital Logic diagram.
See “Adding a Device from Capital Library” on page 182 for more information on how
to do this.
• By assigning a library description to a device that has been created in the diagram. See
“Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406 for more information on how to do
this.
Harness Connectors
In addition to adding a device with a harness connector footprint to a Capital Logic diagram,
you can add a harness connector directly to a Capital Logic diagram.
See “Creating a Harness Connector In a Diagram” on page 219 for more information about
doing this. If you do this, you are able to see the harness connector in the diagram.
If you add a device with a harness connector footprint to a Capital Logic diagram, whether
harness connectors are generated automatically or not depends on a setting for the design
abstraction of the design.
If the design has an abstraction for which the Allow auto-creation of harness connectors
option has been selected in Capital Project, harness connectors are created automatically
according to device library definitions. If this option has not been selected for the design’s
abstraction, no harness connectors are generated automatically.
If they are not generated automatically, you can generate the harness connectors manually for
any unmated pins after you have added pins to the device. See “Adding Pins to an Object
Instance” on page 145 for more information about adding pins to an object and see “Generating
Harness Connectors in Capital Logic” on page 217 for more information about generating
graphical representations of the harness connectors on a device with a footprint.
Device Connectors
You can add a device connector to a Capital Logic diagram by:
• Adding a device with a device connector footprint directly to the diagram (see “Adding
a Device from Capital Library” on page 182).

February 2016
Device Connectors
• Assigning a library description to a device that has been created in the diagram (see
“Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406.
When you add a device with a device connector footprint to a Capital Logic diagram, the device
connectors are graphically represented inside the symbol for the device and are listed under the
device in the Design Browser Window.
The placement of the graphical representation of the device connectors in a device follow these
rules:
• Pins on the same side of the device symbol are separated into groups based on the device
connector of which they are part.
• If there are multiple groups per side, there are multiple device connectors on that side.
• If a device connector is split into multiple groups, all connectors that are part of the
larger group are drawn 'broken'.
Capital Logic will always create the correct set of device connectors for a footprint. The
appearance depends on the symbol that is used for the device. You can set Project Preferences
in Capital Project to limit the width of the device connectors in the diagram window.
The names of the device connectors do not have to be unique in a diagram. For example, a
connector J1 on a device DEV1 is different to a connector J1 on a device DEV2.
The pin types for each pin on the connector are taken from the library part definition for the
device and not from the connector.
Conductors connect to the device pin and therefore keep the internal mapping separate to the
external mapping.
You can move pins and swap their positions on the device symbol in the Capital Logic diagram.
See “Moving a Pin” on page 149 for more information on how to do this.
You can select a device connector and move it but the device moves with it. You cannot move
the device connector itself within a device.
You can add properties to a device connector (and to device connector pins) but there are
restrictions because there is no graphical representation of the device connector pin:
• The properties may not be made visible.

• Selecting the Properties option from the pop-up menu in the browser tree in the Design
Browser Window is the only way to edit the properties of the device connectors and
device connector pins.
• Any changes to the footprint result in the loss of the properties.

February 2016
Device Connectors
• Any properties that have come from the Capital Library definition of the device are
fixed.
If the footprint for the device is changed in Capital Library, the instance in Capital Logic is
updated only if you right-click on the instance in the Capital Logic diagram and select the
Update Instances option from the pop-up menu.
If the library part for the device connector or the footprint is changed in Capital Library, an
update in Capital Logic is possible only if the symbol for the devices library part is the same.
Devices that currently have a library part with a symbol will restrict the selection of a new
library part to only those library parts that use the same symbol.
There is a project preference to define whether the device pin names or the device connector pin
names are displayed graphically in Capital Logic. This cannot be defined individually for each
device instance. See “Project Preferences” on page 68 for more information on defining project
preferences.

February 2016
Generating Harness Connectors in Capital Logic
Generating Harness Connectors in Capital

Logic
If you add a device with a harness connector footprint to a Capital Logic diagram, whether
harness connectors are generated automatically or not depends on a setting for the design
abstraction of the design.
If the design has an abstraction for which the Allow auto-creation of harness connectors
option has been selected in Capital Project, harness connectors are created automatically
according to device library definitions.
Note
The system will only generate harness connectors on designs that have the same abstraction
and are within the same build list.
If the Allow auto-creation of harness connectors option has not been selected for the design’s
abstraction, no harness connectors are generated automatically.
If they are not generated automatically, you can generate the harness connectors manually after
you have added pins to the device. See “Adding Pins to an Object Instance” on page 145 for
more information about adding pins to an object.
Note
Automatically generated harness connectors cannot be edited manually (for example, pin
changes and plug deletion). Only manually generated connectors can be edited.
When you generate them manually, the harness connector graphics are generated around the
pins that have been added to the device and are labelled with the harness connector name.
For example:

February 2016
Generating Harness Connectors on a Device
Pins 1 and 2 on the device should be mated with harness connector conn01 of the device
footprint, pins a, b and c should be mated with harness connector conn02 of the device
footprint.
Harness connector graphics are generated as follows:
Where possible, the system generates one harness connector graphic for multiple pins from one
harness connector (as in the case of pins 1 and 2 or pins b and c in this example).
Note
If conductors have been connected to pins on the device, they will connect automatically to
the harness connectors after they have been generated. If you have two devices with the
same library part and generate harness connectors, then this can result in two shared connectors
with the same name.
Generating Harness Connectors on a Device

This topic describes how to generate harness connectors on a device.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the device and select the Generate Harness Connectors option from the
pop-up menu. Alternatively, click on the device, press Space Bar and enter Generate
Connectors.
2. The harness connectors are added around the pins of the device.

February 2016
Creating a Harness Connector In a Diagram
Note
If you generate harness connectors for a device, then add more pins to the device and
generate harness connectors again, any existing harness connector graphics remain
the same. They do not extend to include new pins. Instead, the new pins have their own
separate harness connector graphics. If you want groupings of previously existing and
new pins to share the same harness connector graphic, you must delete any existing
harness connector graphic for those pins before generating harness connectors again.
If you are using Generate Harness Connectors to automatically mate ring terminals to a
stud pin the system selects the desired ring terminal based on the device’s housing
definition information, as well as considering the connected wire(s) (gauge and multi-
termination), whilst honoring scope and material drivers and factor - a priority number
specifying selection order where more than one ring terminal is available. For further
information see Ring Terminal Groups in the Capital Library User Guide.
Video
Ring Terminals — This video details how to use the Generate Harness Connectors
action to assign the correct ring terminal for wire and stud specifications, as well as
how to add symbols and ring terminals, assign library parts to ring terminals and convert
pins to studs. Click to view it.
Related Topics

A harness connector is an object that is an interface between devices and conductors. A harness
connector can be added as part of a footprint on a device, in which case it is represented
graphically as part of the symbol.
See “Adding a Device from Capital Library” on page 182 for more information. Otherwise, you
can add a harness connector manually. See “Overview of Device Connectors and Harness
Connectors in Capital Logic” on page 214 for more information about the use of harness
connectors in Capital Logic.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Plug, Add Ring Terminal, or Add Receptacle.
Note
You can only mate a plug or ring terminal with a device.
2. Position the mouse cursor over a grid point where you want to place one corner of the
device.

February 2016
displayed, along with the dimensions of the device and the number of pins that can fit on
the device. Drag the mouse until the rectangle is the size that you want the device to be
and click the grid point where you want to place the opposite corner.
Note
If you hold CTRL during the second click, pins are automatically added to the
connector. If the connector touches a device, matching pins are added to the device
as required and the connector is plugged in. If you place a plug connector so it attaches
to a device, any conductors previously attached to that device covered by the plug
connector are broken and reconnected to the plug connector if they can be attached to
parallel pins on the plug connector.
4. If you are creating an inline connector, drag the mouse again to place the final corner of
the second inline half.
Note
If you place an inline connector across the path of a straight conductor, pins are
automatically created where the conductor enters and exits the inline pair. The
conductor is broken and a new conductor with the same properties is created on one side
of the inline pair. The two conductors are attached to the pins. If you hold CTRL during
the third click, the inline pair is fully populated with pins.
This also applies to multicores and overbraids. They are split and retain their structure
on both sides of the new inline. If there are shields and daisy chains attached, they
remain connected to the same pins but may belong to the newly created multicore or
overbraid. If the existing multicore or overbraid belongs to an assembly, the newly
created multicore or overbraid also belongs to that assembly.
If you place an inline connector such that it lies across a shared/ported conductor,
multicore or overbraid, one half of the split becomes a completely new shared/ported
conductor, multicore or overbraid.
Functionality has been introduced to enable the mating of more than one plug to any
given receptacle connector, or vice versa. This allows the representation of complex
mating configurations within wiring designs and can also be used with modular
connectors. The can also be represented in downstream tools such as Capital Topology
and Capital HarnessXC.
Related Topics

February 2016
Converting Connectors to Ring Terminals
Converting Connectors to Ring Terminals

This topic explains how to convert single pin connectors, individually, or collectively via multi-
selection to ring terminals in a single design.
Procedure
1. With a single pin connector selected on the design, press Space Bar and enter Convert to
Ring Terminal.
2. The process:
• Converts single pin connectors to ring terminals.
• The part number remains the same, but can be manually updated if required.
Converting Pins to Stud Pins and Attaching

Multiple Ring Terminals
This topic describes how to convert a device pin to a stud pin and attach multiple ring terminals
to the same stud pin. This is designed to support the common practice of mating multiple ring
terminals to one stud pin, for example where an earthing point is required.
You can specify stud pins on device library parts in Capital Library and on devices in Capital
Logic. Normal pins on devices can be converted to stud pins at design time in Capital Logic.
Note
Stud pins are specifically excluded from the Disallow pin duplication within a design design
rule check, as they can be placed a number of times to facilitate the mating of multiple ring
terminals.
Defining pins in Capital Library allows for assistance via automated ring terminal selection,
based on library housing definition and connected wires. The stud pin is rendered differently
from a normal pin in the Design Browser and Place Pins dialog and is represented by the
icon to assist correct assignation.
When assigning a library part to a device during the design process, the Part Selection Dialog
(PSD) guides the selection of and, also automatically matches the number of stud pins and
checks ring terminal suitability, then when the Generate Harness Connectors is run the action
selects the correct ring terminal based on the connected wires. For further information see
“Generating Harness Connectors in Capital Logic” on page 217.
For further information on defining stud pins, ring terminals and managing associated Ring
Terminal Groups in Capital Library see Stud Pins Ring Terminals and Ring Terminal Groups in
the Capital Library User Guide.

February 2016
Reverting Stud Pins
When a device with a stud pin is placed in a slot in Capital Integrator, you can see it in the signal
map. For information on mating multiple ring terminals to the same stud pin using Signal
Mapping see Stud Pins and Ring Terminals in the Capital Integrator User Guide.
Video
A short example detailing how to convert pins to studs is contained within the video link in
“Generating Harness Connectors on a Device” on page 218.
Procedure
1. With a single pin connector selected on the design, right click and select Convert To
Stud Pin from the context menu.
2. The process:
• Converts a single device pin to stud pin. This allows the mating of multiple ring
terminals to a single stud pin. The stud pin is rendered differently from a normal pin
in the Design Browser and Place Pins dialog and is represented by the icon.
Additionally, on the design diagram, the pin style changes from a diamond ( )to a
circle ( ) to indicate the type of pin connected.
Note
For shared stud pins, the Convert To Stud Pin action remains disabled if there
are other designs with these pins and:
- they are opened elsewhere
- they are released
- if the shared device is frozen.
Reverting Stud Pins

This topic describes how to convert a stud pin back into a normal pin.
Procedure
1. With a stud pin selected on the design, right click and select Convert To Normal Pin
from the context menu.
2. The process:
• Converts a single stud pin back to a normal pin.

February 2016
Reverting Stud Pins
Note
The Convert To Normal Pin action is disabled if there is more than one ring
terminal still connected to the selected stud pin. A tooltip provides information
on the number of ring terminals still connected. You must remove all these before
proceeding with the conversion.
The Convert To Normal Pin action is also disabled if the project preference
Disallow duplicate pins on diagram is ON and the selected stud pin has multiple
representations in the design as this can result in multiple normal pin instances
violating the preference.
For shared stud pins, the Convert To Normal Pin action remains disabled if there
are other designs with these pins and:
- they are opened elsewhere

- they are released
- if the shared device is frozen.

February 2016
Overview of Modular Connectors
Overview of Modular Connectors

It is possible to represent modular connectors in Capital Logic as part of the interactive flow.
You can now create hierarchically structured connectors within Capital Logic. The modular
connectors are seen as a single virtual connector in Capital Topology and are available for
synchronization into Capital HarnessXC. Defining modular connectors earlier in the design
flow minimizes miscommunication and the potential for downstream errors.
Modular connectors comprise an outer shell that collects and fixes together a number of sub-
connectors, at which wires have already been terminated. Modular connectors also include
connectors designed to comply with ARINC specification standards for aerospace industries.
The completed modular connector can then be plugged into its receptacle during manufacture in
a single step.
• “Adding a Modular Connector” on page 224

• “Associating a Modular Insert” on page 226
• “Disassociating a Modular Insert” on page 227
Adding a Modular Connector

This topic details how to place a modular connector onto a design by associating a parent
connector (also known as a modular housing or modular shell) from the library and selecting the
sub-components (also known as sub-connectors or modular inserts) to be assigned. There are
two methods of adding a modular connector onto a design.
The first method is by adding a modular connector directly to the diagram from Capital Library.
Follow the steps detailed in “Adding a Device from Capital Library” on page 182.
Alternatively perform the following:
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Plug or Receptacle.
2. Position the mouse cursor over a grid point where you want to place one corner of the
device.
displayed, along with the dimensions of the device and the number of pins that can fit on
the device. Drag the mouse until the rectangle is the size that you want the device to be

February 2016
Deleting a Modular Connector
Note
If you hold CTRL during the second click, pins are automatically added to the
connector. If the connector touches a device, matching pins are added to the device
as required and the connector is plugged in. If you place a plug connector so it attaches
to a device, any conductors previously attached to that device covered by the plug
connector are broken and reconnected to the plug connector if they can be attached to
parallel pins on the plug connector.
4. Right-click on the newly created connector and select Properties.

5. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Library Part field. The Part Selection
Dialog is displayed allowing you to search for and insert a modular connector from the
library. The associated modular connector will be displayed in the Library Part field.
6. Select the modular tab, (see “Assigning Connector Positions Using the Modular Tab” on
page 443
7. The tree menu on the left-hand side of the tab shows every position configured against
the modular connector, with an icon ( ) indicating that a position is empty. Click on a
position to select it, then click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Library Part field.
The Part Selection Dialog is displayed, showing only those optional sub-components
available to the selected position. Select and insert the required sub-component; the
associated sub-component will be displayed in the Library Part field.
8. The filled position in the tree menu shows a connector icon ( ) with the part number of
the assigned sub-component displayed to the right. If by assigning the sub-component,
any other positions have become blocked, those positions display a ( ) icon. It is not
possible to assign a sub-component to a blocked position.
9. Click OK. The modular connector is placed onto the design. The modular connector
(housing) is added to the Design Browser Window and all assigned sub-connectors are
displayed, nested beneath it.
Related Topics

This topic details how to remove a modular connector from a design.
Procedure
1. Select one the connector to be deleted.

February 2016
Sharing a Modular Connector
2. Either:
• Press the Delete key
3. The connector is removed from the design and from the Design Browser Window.
Note
If you delete a modular connector (housing) the associated sub-connectors remain in
the design browser in an Unplaced Connectors folder.
Related Topics
Sharing a Modular Connector

The entire modular connector can be shared in one operation.
This is achieved by following the flow detailed in “Promoting a Device/Connector/Modular
Connector/Ring Terminal/Splice to a Shared Object” on page 206.
Note
The Share Into action is not available when sharing modular connectors.
When modular connectors are shared, the modular tab becomes read-only in the Design
Browser. Modular connectors are displayed as a separate node in the Shared Objects Browser
window. The modular tab can still be accessed for editing purposes by right-clicking on a
modular connector and selecting Edit Shared Plug. See “Assigning Connector Positions Using
the Modular Tab” on page 443 and “Editing Shared Devices and Shared Connectors” on
page 191.
Associating a Modular Insert

This topic details how to assign a connector on a design to one of the positions specified for a
modular connector housing, or parent, as a sub-connector.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the connector to be associated as a sub-connector (either on the diagram
or in the Design Browser Window) and select Associate Connector. The Associate
Connector dialog displays all connectors on the design with one or more modular
positions defined.

February 2016
Disassociating a Modular Insert
2. Expand the modular connector with which the selected sub-connector is to be associated
by clicking the plus (+) symbol to the left.
3. Click to select the position into which the sub-connector should be inserted.
4. Click OK. A message is displayed asking you to confirm that the sub-connector should
be moved to a new position on the bundle configuration.
5. Click Yes to confirm. The sub-connector is repositioned according to the settings
configured for the currently applied style set (see the Diagram Styling User Guide for
more information).
Related Topics

This topic details how to break the association between a sub-connector and its modular parent,
leaving the sub-connector as an independent connector on the design.
Right-click on the sub-connector to be disassociated (either on the diagram or in the Design
Browser Window) and select Disassociate Connector. The connector is now no longer
associated with the modular parent.
Related Topics
Associating a Modular Insert
Overview of Backshells
You can add one backshell to a connector in Capital Logic. You can specify terminations on the
backshell to which wires or shield conductors can connect.
When you share the connector, you also automatically share the backshell. However, the
backshell is only shared across instances of that connector. You cannot share a backshell across
connectors. There is no specific functionality for adding a shared instance of a backshell
termination because you can add multiple instances of a termination and this implies that the
termination is shared.
Procedure
1. A typical workflow for using a backshell is as follows:
2. Create a backshell symbol in Capital Symbol.

February 2016
Adding a Backshell to a Connector
The symbol is used in Capital Logic to represent a backshell termination.

For example:
If you draw a backshell symbol as follows:
When you add a backshell termination with the name BS1 to a conductor and use that
symbol, it will look like this:
The symbol relates to one backshell termination so you can add only one pin to it. If you
add a library part to an instance of a backshell, the library part can have an infinite
number of backshell termination connections.
If you add a pin, the pin is used as the insertion point marker when the symbol is added
to a Capital Logic diagram. If you do not add a pin to the symbol, the normal insertion
point marker is used.
See Creating a New Symbol in the Capital Symbol User Guide for more information
about how to create a symbol.
3. Add a backshell to a connector in Capital Logic and define backshell terminations on the
connector. See “Adding a Backshell to a Connector” on page 228 for more information.
4. Associate a library part description with the backshell in the diagram. See “Editing an
Object's General Properties” on page 406 for more information about this. The library
part description must have been defined in Capital Library first. See the Capital Library
help system for more information about defining library parts.

In Capital Logic, you can add a backshell to a connector and define backshell terminations to
which wires and shield conductors can connect. The backshell terminations are added to the
connector in the diagram window and are indicated by a backshell symbol.
Before you can add a backshell to a connector, a backshell symbol must have been created in
Capital Symbol. See “Overview of Backshells” on page 227 for more information about
creating a backshell symbol.

February 2016
Procedure
1. Right-click on the connector and select the Add Backshell menu option. Alternatively,
click on the connector, press Space Bar and enter Add Backshell.
2. The Backshell facility is displayed. Specify the following for the backshell:
• Name - Enter the name of the backshell in the Name field.
• Library - From the drop-down list, select the symbol library that contains the
backshell symbol that you want to use.
• Symbol - From the drop-down list, select the backshell symbol that you want to use
for the backshell terminations. The selected symbol is displayed in the window
below the Symbol field.
3. Specify the backshell terminations on the connector by typing the name of the
termination in the Name field of the Terminations section and clicking the Add button.
The termination is listed in the window below the Name field.
4. Click the OK button to add the backshell to the connector. In the Design Browser
Window, the backshell is listed below the conductor and has the backshell indicator
next to it.
If you have defined terminations, a broken line indicates where you can add the
termination to the connector in the diagram window. Click on the point on the broken
line where you want to add a termination. The line extends beyond the connector
drawing. If you add the termination at a point outside of the connector, the connector
drawing extends accordingly. If you have defined multiple terminations, you must place
each termination. The backshell symbol is displayed at each termination and the
terminations are listed under the backshell in the Design Browser Window.
If you have not defined any terminations, the backshell is not visible in the diagram
window.
Note
A backshell termination can appear at multiple locations on the connector. This is
because the backshell symbol represents an available termination location but does
not define the physical location of that termination. Therefore, if a termination name is
displayed multiple times, it represents the same physical termination.
To add a termination symbol for a termination multiple times, right-click on the
connector and select the Edit Backshell menu option. In the Backshell facility, click on
the termination and click the OK button. You can then add the termination as described
above. To delete a backshell termination, right-click on it in the diagram window or in
the Design Browser Window and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

February 2016
Add Shared Pins Facility
Add Shared Pins Facility

The Add Shared Pins facility enables you to add shared pins to an object when you promote an
object to a shared object or when you edit a shared object. It is accessed by clicking the Add
button on the Associate Pins tab or the Pins tab of the Shared Object or Edit Shared Object
facility.
Procedure
1. Access the Add Shared Pins facility.
• Pin Name Prefix - the prefix that you want at the start of the pin names
• Start Index - the number from which you want the pin names to start. The pin
names consist of the pin name prefix and a number.
• No of Pins - the number of pins that you want to add.
The pin names consist of the pin name prefix and a number.
For example:
If you specify a pin name prefix of P, a start index of 7 and 3 pins. The system will add
three pins: P7, P8 and P9.
3. Click the OK button to exit the facility.
Scenarios for the Design Rule Check Called

Invalid Library Footprint
The design rule check Invalid library footprint identifies devices that have library parts with
footprints where the footprint data on the device instance is out of sync with the footprint data in
Capital Library. The following table lists the scenarios that this check identifies and the
corresponding message that is displayed:
Table 5-1. Scenarios For Invalid Library Footprint DRC

Scenario Displayed Message
Device instance has no pins, but is Device xxx has no Device Pins defined
associated with a library part with a
footprint.
Device instance has fewer pins than are Device xxx has fewer Device Pins than
specified in the footprint. required by the footprint

February 2016
Scenarios for the Design Rule Check Called Invalid Library Footprint
Table 5-1. Scenarios For Invalid Library Footprint DRC (cont.)

Scenario Displayed Message
Device instance is associated to library part Device xxx references a Footprint that no
that has had a footprint removed. The longer exists
library data on the instance is out of date
with the library.
Device instance has more pins than are Device xxx has Device Pins unmapped in
specified in the footprint. Footprint definition
Device instance has a different number of Device xxx has a different number of
device connectors than the footprint. The Device Connectors than that in Footprint
with the library.
Device instance has a pin mapped to a Device xxx has a Pin mapping inconsistent
device connector cavity that is no longer with the Footprint
valid. The library data on the instance is out
of date with the library.
Device instance has one or more device Device xxx has a Device Connector(s) with
connectors with different pin names than different Pin names than the Footprint
those defined in the footprint. The library Connector(s)
data on the instance is out of date with the
library.
Device instance has one or more device Device xxx has Device Connector(s) with
connectors with a different number of pins different number of Pins than the Footprint
than those defined in the footprint. The Connector(s)
with the library.
Device instance has one or more device Device xxx has Device Connector names
connectors whose names no longer match inconsistent with the Footprint Connector
those defined in the footprint. The library names
data on the instance is out of date with the
library.
Device instance has one or more device Device xxx has Device Connector(s) that
connectors which no longer match those do not reference the correct Footprint
defined in the footprint. The library data on connector(s)
the instance is out of date with the library.

February 2016
Direct to Device Connections
Direct to Device Connections

This topic provides an overview of how to model wires connected directly to devices across the
Capital applications. Such connections are referred to as direct to device connections or D2D
connections.
Capital Library
A direct to device connection must be modeled as part of a device footprint.
Procedure
1. Create a connector for which the Include on BOM option on the Base tab of the
Component Maintenance Dialog is unselected.
2. Add the connector to a device connector footprint for the device for which you want to
create the direct to device connection. See Update/Edit Device Footprint in the
Capital Library User Guide.
Capital Interactive Flow using Capital Logic

The Capital interactive flow is where you manually define wiring in Capital Logic.
Procedure
1. Add the device with the footprint to a logical diagram. See Adding a Device from
Capital Library in the Capital Logic User Guide.
2. Connect the device to wire conductors in the logical diagram. See Creating /Moving/
Deleting a Wire Conductor in the Capital Logic User Guide.
3. Specify the harness attribute for any wire conductors that you want to synchronize with
a harness design in Capital HarnessXC. See Specifying the Harness Attribute for an
Object in the Capital Logic User Guide.
4. In Capital HarnessXC, synchronize the logical design with the harness design. See
Harness Synchronization in the Capital HarnessXC User Guide.
Note
If a footprint connector is defined as included on BOM, it is ignored during the
synchronization and all of the connected wiring is ignored too. If a footprint
connector is defined as not included on BOM, it is included in the synchronization and
so is any connected wiring.

February 2016
Capital Generative Flow using Capital Logic and Capital Integrator
Capital Generative Flow using Capital Logic and

Capital Integrator
The Capital Logic generative flow is where you use Capital Logic to design the logical
connections in a harness and use Capital Integrator to synthesize the wiring.
Procedure
1. Add the device with the footprint to a logical diagram. See Adding a Device from
Capital Library in the Capital Logic User Guide.
2. Connect the device to net conductors in the logical diagram. See Creating/Moving/
Deleting a Net Conductor in the Capital Logic User Guide.
3. Place the device in a slot in a Capital Integrator design. See Placing a Device in a Slot
in the Capital Integrator User Guide. Capital Integrator detects the connector in the
footprint that is set as not included on BOM and maps the connector to a hole with a
name using the format [DeviceName]:[DeviceConnectorName]. If a hole with a
matching name already exists, that hole is used. If a hole with that name does not exist, a
new hole is created.
4. Synthesize wiring for the Capital Integrator design. See Synthesizing Wiring in the
Capital Integrator User Guide.
5. In Capital HarnessXC, synchronize the harness design with the topological design. See
Harness Synchronization in the Capital HarnessXC User Guide.
Capital Harness XC
When you synchronize a logical design with a harness design, Capital HarnessXC detects the
device connector that is set as not included on BOM, selects the relevant part from the library
and places it on the harness diagram.
When you synchronize a topological design with a harness design, Capital HarnessXC detects
where a hole has been used for a device connector that is set as not included on BOM, selects
the relevant part from the library and places it on the harness diagram.
Defining a Footprint Directly on a Device

(Generative Flow)
This topic details how to define (create) a footprint directly on a device in Capital Logic rather
than assigning a part number with a footprint from Capital Library.
You may not want to use a part number if you are adding a new device to the design and that
device does not yet have accurate library information.

February 2016
Defining a Footprint Directly on a Device (Generative Flow)
In this case, you can set attributes directly on device pins in Capital Logic to define a footprint.
When you synchronize the logical design with a Capital Integrator design in the generative
flow, this footprint data is passed on to the Capital Integrator design (just like library footprint
data).
Note
The system treats footprints created using attributes as harness connector footprints. When
you define a harness connector footprint in Capital Library, you can assign part numbers to
the footprint connectors. When you define a harness connector footprint directly on a device in
Capital Logic, you cannot assign part numbers to the footprint connectors. In the latter case, you
should assign part numbers to the slot connectors in Capital Integrator.
Procedure
1. Create the device and add the required pins to it. See “Creating a Device in a Diagram”
on page 181 and “Adding Pins to an Object Instance” on page 145.
2. Edit the attributes of each pin as follows:
a. Right-click on the pin in the diagram window and select Properties; the Edit
Properties dialog for the pin is displayed.
b. On the General tab, specify the following attributes for the pin:
o Connector Group
Specify a footprint connector to which the pin should map. You can use
placeholder names for connectors, such as C1 and C2. Capital Integrator gives
you the option of renaming them later.
o Connector Cavity
Specify a footprint connector cavity (such as 1, 2 and so on) to which the pin
maps.
Note
Mapping the Pin to a Hole rather than a ConnectorIf you want the pin to
map to a hole in Capital Integrator, do not use the Connector Group and
Connector Cavity attributes. Instead, use the Pin Group attribute for the pin to
specify a placeholder hole name, such as H1. You can specify different holes for
different pins on the device, but typically you have only one.
c. Click OK to exit the Edit Properties dialog for the pin.

Results
When the device is placed in a slot in Capital Integrator, the system creates:
• slot connectors with names based on the Connector Group values

February 2016
Defining a Footprint Directly on a Device (Generative Flow)
• holes with names based on the Pin Group attribute

These names can be changed.
The system also maps the device pins to the specified slot connector cavities.

February 2016
Help Button Landing Pages for Devices and Connectors Dialog Boxes
Help Button Landing Pages for Devices and

Connectors Dialog Boxes
in the software.
Swap Out Revision Dialog [1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Swap Out Revision Dialog [2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Swap Out Revision Error Display Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Error Display Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Delete Unused Shared Objects Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Swap Out Revision Help [1]

• The Swap Out Revision Dialog [1] fields
• Swapping Out Shared Objects for a Compatible Revision

February 2016
Swap Out Revision Dialog [1]

To access: right-click the currently used revision in the Shared Objects Browser Window on the
left of the application window and selecting Swap Out Revision.
Used to select a shared object revision that you want to replace a revision currently used in
designs.
Objects
Displays the revisions that are compatible with the currently used revision. Select the revision
that you want to use as a replacement and click OK to display the Swap Out Revision Dialog
[2].
Related Topics
Swap Out Revision Help [2]


February 2016

Displayed when you click OK on the Swap Out Revision Dialog [1].
Used to select design revisions where you want to swap out shared object revisions.
Objects
o Designs
Lists the build lists and design revision that use the shared object revision being
replaced in a tree. Under a build list, only the design revisions using the shared
object revision are displayed. Designs that belong to a domain for which you do not
have read permissions are not displayed. Designs that belong to a domain for which
you have read but not write permissions are grayed out.
Positioning the mouse cursor over a design revision, displays a tool tip with its
release level and effectivity setting (if used).
If a design revision has a release level that does not allow modifying it, the design
revision is grayed out, you must select Up-Revision and create a new design revision
if you want to swap the shared object revision in it.
o Update
If selected for a design revision, this specifies that the shared object revision will be
swapped for the new one in that design revision.
If you select a build list or design, all design revisions belonging to it are selected
automatically. You can unselect individual design revisions.
You cannot select both Update and Up-Revision.
o Up-Revision
If selected for a design revision, this specifies that a new design revision will be
created for that design revision and the shared object revision is swapped in the new
design revision.
If you select a build list or design, all design revisions belonging to it are selected
automatically. You can unselect individual design revisions.
Note that the creation of a new revision applies only to the individual designs in a
build list. Build lists themselves do not have revisions.
If selecting this, you must specify a revision number in the New Revision column for
each new design revision. You can also specify a New Short Description for each
new design revision. Other attributes (such as Description and Abstraction) on the
new design revision are given the same values as the original design revision and the
release level will be set to Draft.

February 2016
Swap Out Revision Error Display Help
You cannot select both Update and Up-Revision.

o New Revision
Used only when you have selected Up-Revision. Double-click on the field to
activate it and enter a revision number for the new design revision. The combination
of this and New Short Description must be unique. If not unique, the values are
displayed in red. Mandatory if Up-Revision selected, otherwise disabled.
o New Short Description
Used only when you have selected Up-Revision. Double-click on the field to
activate it and enter a short description for the new design revision. The combination
of this and New Revision must be unique. If not unique, the values are displayed in
red. Optional if Up-Revision selected, otherwise disabled.
o Effectivity
If the project uses effectivity, this column displays the effectivity ranges assigned to
the build lists and designs. See Managing Effectivity in the Capital Project User
Guide for an overview of using effectivity. Read-only, displayed only if effectivity is
enabled for the project. Not displayed for signals.
Related Topics
Swap Out Revision Error Display Help

• The Error Display Dialog fields

February 2016
Error Display Dialog
Error Display Dialog

Displayed when you click OK on the Swap Out Revision Dialog [2] when something prevents
the swapping out of the revision.
Used to view errors that prevent the swapping out of shared object revisions.
Objects
o Design Name
The name of the design in which the swapping out cannot take place.
o Revision
The revision of the design in which the swapping out cannot take place
o Short Description
The short description for the design in which the swapping out cannot take place.
o Error
The error that is preventing the swapping out.
Related Topics
Delete Unused Shared Objects Help

• The Delete Unused Shared Objects Dialog fields
• Deleting Multiple Unused Shared Objects
• Deleting a Single Unused Shared Object

February 2016
Delete Unused Shared Objects Dialog

Accessed by clicking the Delete Unused Shared Objects ( ) toolbar icon in the Shared
Objects Browser Window.
Used to list unused shared objects in a project so that you can select those that you want to
delete.
Objects
o Delete? column
Specifies whether a shared object will be deleted (selected) or not (unselected) when
you click OK or Apply on this dialog. Mandatory.
o Name column
Displays the name of the shared object. Read-only.
o Revision column
Displays the revision of the shared object. Read-only.
o Type column
Displays the object type of the shared object. Read-only.
o Generated column
Displays whether the shared object was generated automatically or was user-defined
(blank). Read-only.
o List Type
Specifies what types of shared object are displayed in the dialog. Optional.
• All
User-defined shared objects and automatically generated shared objects
• Generated
Automatically generated shared objects only
• User Defined
User-defined shared objects only
o Select All
Click this to select all of the listed shared objects in the Delete? column. Optional.
o Clear All

February 2016
Click this to unselect all listed shared objects. Optional.

February 2016
Chapter 6
Design Hierarchy
Design hierarchy can be represented using blocks that provide an instant portrayal of objects
and devices that eventually will comprise multiple inter-related systems. It is possible to use
these blocks to create hierarchical documentation of how system designs within a platform
(such as a complete vehicle or aircraft) are interconnected. This is achieved by associating
designs to blocks which are connected together using highways. Navigation allows you to go
from a block to a design and back again. Reporting on highways lists all the shared connectivity
between the connected designs.
Design Hierarchy Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Adding a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Associating a Block with a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Removing an Association Between a Block and a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Creating New Instances of a Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Viewing Items Related to the Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adding Connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Viewing the Connectivity that Terminates at Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Merging Block Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Adding Pins to a Block Instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Edit Properties: Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Block Conductors Usages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Place Pins Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Design Hierarchy Overview
Design Hierarchy Overview

Blocks, and their highway connections are used to represent an overview of multiple inter-
related systems. Unlike tangible objects such as devices, connectors, wires and multicores,
blocks exist for documentation and navigational purposes and to show connectivity (shared
conductors) that traverse logical designs. The block design and its hierarchical designs must
exist within the same active build list for navigation to occur.
Adding blocks to Capital Logic designs enables you to create a hierarchical representation of
how designs are interconnected. This is achieved by associating designs to blocks, which are
connected together using highways. You can also place unmated receptacle pins and
unconnected device pins from associated child designs to the hierarchical block pins. This
further enhances the bottom-up and top-down design flow enabling connectivity engineers to
utilize detail from the child design and visualize it in the top level system view.
Design rule checks identify any connections between blocks that do not have a valid highway.
Additional checks identify where a block is not associated with a design or the design is not part
of an active build list. The integrity of the connectivity is also automatically subject to design
rule checks, see “Design Rule Check Descriptions” on page 67.
It is possible to navigate from a block to its associated design, and back again. While reporting
on the highway lists all the shared connectivity between the connected blocks and designs, See
“Viewing Another Instance of an Object” on page 203.
Figure 6-1. Example Blocks and Highway Hierarchy

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Adding a Block
Figure 6-1 shows a design comprising three blocks, connected via two highways, referencing
three designs. You can use the View Related Items functionality to view the design that the
block is associated with (see “Viewing Another Instance of an Object” on page 203).
A block appears both graphically in a diagram and also under a Blocks node in the Design
Browser Window. Any highways that connect with the block are also listed under the same
node.
Blocks on diagrams can be sliced, simplifying diagram modifications and making diagrams
easier to understand. See “Slice Objects” on page 128.
Copy and pasting a block creates a new block. Using the key combination CTRL + SHIFT + V
creates a new instance of the block. This method results in the copies of the block retaining the
same name as the original block. See “Copying Objects” on page 129.
Reporting on highways lists all the shared connectivity between the connected blocks and
designs. For further information see “Reports” on page 349.
The appearance of blocks can be styled. See the Diagram Styling User Guide for more
information about style sets and how to edit them. There are two default attributes for block
styling:
• Name
The name of the block.
• Associated Design
The design which the block has been associated with.
Note
From 2013.1 the defaultStyle.xml includes new shape parameters to support
hierarchical blocks in Capital Logic. If you copy your pre-v2013.1 defaultStyle.xml
file to the new installation, you must manually add the sections needed to represent
blocks in your designs to ensure that blocks are styled correctly.
Adding a Block
This topic details how to add (create) a new block in a diagram.
Video
Adding a Block — This video illustrates how to perform this task. Click to view it.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Block.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Associating a Block with a Design
2. Position the mouse cursor over a grid point where you want to place one corner of
the block.
3. Drag the mouse away to place the opposite corner of the block. A gray rectangle is
displayed. Drag the mouse until the rectangle is the size that you want the block to be
Results
• A new block is added to the Design Browser Window.
Related Topics
Design Hierarchy
Creating New Instances of a Block
Viewing Items Related to the Block
Edit Properties: Blocks Dialog Box

This topic details how to associate a block to a design, in order to create a hierarchical
representation of how multiple Capital Logic designs are connected.
Note
If you associate a block to a design that is already associated with another block on the
diagram, the system merges the blocks, making two instances of the original. See “Creating
New Instances of a Block” on page 248.
Video
Associating a Block — This video illustrates how to perform this task. Click to view it.
Prerequisites
• A build list must be active in order to view a list of available designs (see “Setting an
Active Build List” on page 57). Only designs in the active build list can be selected.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
• Select the block, press Space Bar and enter Properties
• Right-click on the selected block and select Properties
• Double click on the selected block
• Select the block and press ALT + Enter
The Edit Properties: Blocks Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify a name for the block, or accept the default.
3. Click the ellipsis (...) button in the Associated Design field to select from a list of
available target designs to which you wish to associate the block. You can also type in
the first few characters of the required design and the system will auto-complete the rest.
Alternatively you can use wildcards, for example .* lists all available target designs. For
further information see “Design Revision/Build List Selection Help” on page 108.
Note
The Select Design dialog box only displays designs available within the active build
list.
4. Make any other changes required to the block attributes and/or properties.
5. Click OK.
Results
• Once a block is associated to a target child design its icon changes to show the block/
design association ( ). The difference between associated and unassociated block icons
is shown in Figure 6-2. Additionally positioning the mouse cursor over the block in the
Design Browser Window displays a tool tip with details of the design to which it is
associated.
Figure 6-2. Block and Design Associations
Related Topics
Design Hierarchy
Design Rules Help
Removing an Association Between a Block and a Design

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Removing an Association Between a Block and a Design
Removing an Association Between a Block and a

Design
This topic details how to remove the association between a block and a design in order to then
associate it with another design.
Procedure
• Select the block, press Space Bar and enter Properties
• Right-click on the selected block and select Properties
• Double click on the selected block
• Select the block and press ALT + Enter
The Edit Properties: Blocks Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click the icon in the Associated Design field, to disassociate the block and design.
3. Click OK.
Results
• The block and design association is removed and the Block icon reverts to ( ) in the
Related Topics
Design Hierarchy

This topic details how to create multiple instances of a block allowing users to reference the
same design from multiple locations within the project.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Procedure
Do one of the following:
• Associate the new instance of the block to a design that is already associated to
another block, within the current design.
• Double click on a block in the Design Browser and specify a target design that is
already associated to another block within the current design.
• Copy the block and press CTRL + SHIFT + V to create a new instance of the block.
If you do this, the copies of the block retain the same name as the original block.
Note
If you copy and paste a block on its own, you will create a new block, not
another instance of the same block. See “Copying Objects” on page 129.
Results
• A new instance of the selected block is displayed on the design. It has a broken glyph
graphic to indicate that more than one instance of this block exists, as shown in
Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3. Multiple Instances of Block Indicator
Related Topics
Design Hierarchy

This topic details how to select a block, then view and navigate to designs associated to it.
Procedure
1. Either:
• Right-click on the instance of the block that you are viewing and select the View
Related Items option from the pop-up menu.
• Right-click on the instance, press Space Bar and enter View Related Items.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Adding Connectivity
2. If there is only one cross-reference listed for the block that you have been viewing, the
diagram in the cross-reference opens automatically.
If there is more than one cross-reference listed for the instance, the Related Items
dialog box is displayed. Click on the cross-reference for the design that you want to
view and click the OK button.
Results
• The diagram for the design that you have selected opens in the diagram window. If the
design is locked, a read-only version is displayed.
Related Topics
Design Hierarchy
Adding Connectivity
This topic details how to add (create) connectivity between blocks in a diagram by using
highways.
For full information on creating and using Highways, see “Highways” on page 316.
Note
When a highway is connected to a block it is added as an “empty stack” of pins in order to
provide a representation of the connectivity of the block. If you connect a highway to an
empty stack and subsequently delete the highway, the stack is also deleted. It is possible to hide
the Stacked Pins decoration through styling if required. For further information see “Stacked
Pins” on page 158.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Highway.
2. Position the mouse cursor over the point on the block where you want to place the first
end of the new highway.
3. Click and drag the mouse cursor to define highway segments.
4. Double click on the destination block or highway to complete the connection.
Results
• If the highway is not attached to an existing highway, a new highway is added to the

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Viewing the Connectivity that Terminates at Blocks
• If the new highways segments are attached to an existing highway, they become part of
the existing highway. No new highway is created.
Note
To view the conductors in the highway: either right-click on the highway and select
View Usage, or press Space Bar and enter View Usage. See “Viewing the
Connectivity that Terminates at Blocks” on page 251.
Tip
For further information on adding connectivity between block see “Wires,
Conductors and Nets” on page 261.
Related Topics
Design Hierarchy
Adding a Highway
Deleting an Entire Highway
Stacked Pins

Highways portray connectivity at a high level. Lower level designs use shared wires to link the
connectivity. At block level the highways can be interrogated to display the wires or nets
running between the blocks.
Video
Viewing Block Usage— This video illustrates how to perform this task. Click to view it.
Procedure
1. Select the highway in the diagram window and either:
2. The Block Conductors Usages Dialog Box is displayed; the dialog lists the conductors
and any connected blocks.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Merging Block Instances
Merging Block Instances

This topic details how to merge a block object into another block, on the same design.
Procedure
1. In the diagram window or the Design Browser Window, right-click on the block that
you want to merge into another target block and select Merge Into; the Merge Into
Dialog is displayed.
2. Select the target block into which the selected block will be merged and click OK.
Results
• The selected blocks are merged together. Properties and attributes on the blocks are also
merged.
o The merged blocks display broken glyph graphics to indicate that more than one
instance exists, as shown in Figure 6-3.
o If the source object has properties or attributes that the target object does not have,
they are kept on the merged object.
o If the source object has property or attribute values which are the same as the target
object, the values from the target object will overwrite the source object.
Related Topics
Design Wide Object
Adding Pins to a Block Instance

This topic describes how to add unmated receptacle pins and unconnected device pins from
associated child designs to the hierarchical block pins in your top-level design. This allows
system designers to denote which pins are the designated interface to other systems, allowing
connectivity engineers to concentrate solely on this task without having refer to the lower level
system designs.
The block pins are representations of the child pin below; they are proxy pins in that they are not
the actual pin itself, instead they are a reference to the child design pin. Using the functionality
allows you to depict signal flow between different systems and provides connectivity into
downstream tools, including Capital Integrator, Capital Topology as well as using Capital
Analysis to provide verification of the proposed design.
Design rule checks identify unassociated pins and invalid associations on the block, navigation
to which is then provided in order to correct any issues. See “Design Rule Check Descriptions”
on page 67.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Prerequisites
• Child designs have been created and associated with the top-level design.
• Unmated receptacle pins or unconnected device pins must have been created on the
associated child design.
Procedure
1. Select the block in the Diagram Window or in the Design Browser Window and either:
• right-click on it and select Add Pin
• press Space Bar and enter Add External
• press P
In all cases, the Place Pins Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Diagram Window, click on the points of the block where you want to add pins.
As you move the cursor over the block, it changes appearance. Where a pin can be
added, it looks like this: .
3. You can add multiple pins from the Place Pins dialog box by pressing SHIFT and
selecting the required pins.
4. Click OK.
Results
• The requisite pins are added to the selected hierarchical block.
Related Topics
Place Pins Dialog Box

February 2016
Design Hierarchy

To access: In the Design Browser Window or diagram window, select the block to be edited and
either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Properties
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Properties
• Double-click on the block (in the diagram window only)
Use this dialog to edit the attributes and properties of a block.
Objects
Table 6-1. Edit Properties: Block Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the block, which defaults to Block
appended with an incrementing number. Enter a new name or
click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to select
from a list of pre-specified block names maintained in the
project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. Select
Fixed if you want the name to be fixed. The contents of this
field are displayed in red if they are not unique within the
current project. Select the Visible option to display the name
next to the block on the diagram. Click to display the Edit
Name Text Attributes dialog where you can specify how the
name is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text Attributes
for an Object” on page 439). Mandatory.
Short Description Descriptive text that provides more information about the
block. This information is derived from the object type
information (OTI) driven name for the block. Read Only.
Associated Design Allows you associate the block to another design in order to
create a hierarchical representation showing how different
Capital Logic designs are connected. Enter a design name or
from a list of available designs displayed in the Select Design
dialog box. Only designs in the active build list can be selected.
Mandatory.
Click the icon to disassociate the target design from the
block.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Table 6-1. Edit Properties: Block Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Attributes This section enables you to edit the values for the attributes of
the block. For further information “Editing an Object's
Attributes” on page 423.
The Show All Attributes option is selected by default. Unselect
this option to display only the editable attributes on this tab.
Read-only.
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the block graphic to appear on the
diagram.
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the block. Select the color from
the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the right of
the field. As well as color names, the list contains the following
options:
• Default
The default color used for the object by the system.
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The
color changes when the background color is toggled.
• Foreground
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and
vice versa.
• Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy

Field Description
Thickness Specify the thickness of the lines of the graphical shape.
Mandatory.
To use the default thickness, select Default from the dropdown
list.
To use a different thickness, select Override from the first
dropdown list and select the type of thickness from the final
dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of
measurement. They provide a logical progression of
thickness with a default of 1. A line with thickness 2 is
displayed twice as thick as a line with thickness 1, and so
on. When you zoom in or out of a diagram, the line
thickness does not appear any different.
You select the thickness from the middle dropdown list.
• Physical (unit of measurement)
The physical unit of measurement that has been specified as
the Unit in the style set applied to the diagram. The line
thickness is displayed in relation to the grid size of a
diagram. When you zoom in or out of a diagram, the line
grows or shrinks to stay in scale with the grid.
When you select a unit, the middle dropdown list changes to
a free text field where you specify the thickness. The value
can be any floating-point number up to three decimal
places.
See Physical Line Thickness in the Capital Design Tools -
Common Functions User Guide for a definition and links to
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the block. To use the default
style, select Default from the dropdown list; to use a different
style, select Override from the dropdown list and select the
style from the second dropdown list that is displayed.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy

Field Description
Fill Color Specify the block’s fill color. It can be used, for example, to
highlight the function of a connectivity object, such as a block
when producing service documentation.
Note: The fill color for an object type can also be controlled
by the style set applied to the diagram. See the Fill Color
option in the Styling Options - Graphics section of the Capital
Diagram Styling User Guide.
• Default
The default color defined within the style set applied to the
diagram.
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
The Choose Object Color dialog box is displayed, where
you can select a color.
Properties Tab Specify the values for block properties.

February 2016
Design Hierarchy

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the block, click the New button, enter a
Property Name in the New Property Dialog, then click OK.
The new property is added to the list. A property consists of the
following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value
that is not supported by the selected Type, the Value is
displayed in red text and the OK button is disabled. The
following types are available:
• String
A mix of letters, number or special characters.
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
A number including a decimal (floating) point.
To delete a property from the list, select it and click the Delete
button, then click OK to confirm the deletion. Optional.
Parameters Tab
Parameters This section enables you to alter the instance shape of the block
by manipulating its parameters. For further information
“Editing Objects Parameters” on page 444.
Related Topics
Design Hierarchy
Adding a Block
Design Rule Check Descriptions
Slice Objects
Copying Objects
Editing Objects Parameters

February 2016
Design Hierarchy
Block Conductors Usages Dialog Box
Block Conductors Usages Dialog Box

To access: Select a highway in the diagram window and either:
Use this dialog to view which conductors from a highway terminate at which blocks.
Objects
Table 6-2. Block Conductor Usages Dialog Contents

Field Description
Conductor The wire or net that terminates at the block.
Connected Block The block(s) where the conductor(s) terminates.
Related Topics

February 2016
Design Hierarchy

To access: select a block in the Design Browser Window or Diagram Window, then press Space
Bar and enter Add External, or right-click an object and select Add Pin.
Used to add unmated receptacle pins and unconnected device pins from associated child designs
to the hierarchical block.
Objects
Table 6-3. Block Conductor Usages Dialog Contents

Field Description
Select Pins Lists available pins, including their Type, Name and Pin Name
that are available for selection. Select any pins that you want to
place on the instance of the block and click Place. Click on the
locations where you want to place the pins on the block in the
Diagram Window.
Show Used Pins Displays already placed pins on the block and honors the project
preference 'Disallow pin duplication within design'. Note with this
preference turned on the Add Pin dialog will not show used pins.
Place Returns you to the Diagram Window where you can click on the
block instance to place any pins selected in the Select Pins list.
Related Topics

February 2016
Chapter 7
Wires, Conductors and Nets
The following sections describe how to add, edit and manage wires, conductors and nets in
designs.
Creating a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating/Moving/Deleting a Wire Conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Creating a Wire Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Moving a Wire Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Deleting a Wire Conductor from a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating/Moving/Deleting a Net Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Modifying a Net Conductor in a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Merging Net Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adding Multiple Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Deleting a Net Conductor from a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Creating a Notch to Move a Subsegment of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Disconnecting and Moving a Conductor End from a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Poke Home Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Specifying a Poke Home Wire in Capital Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Routing Conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Using Orthogonal Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Auto-routing of Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Auto-routing of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Promoting a Conductor to a Shared Conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Creating a Splice in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Creating a Single Pin Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Adding a Splice with a Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Converting a Butt Splice to a Center Strip Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Converting a Center Strip Splice to a Butt Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Automatic Splice Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Overview of Multicores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Overview of Overbraids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Creating a Multicore or Overbraid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Creating a Multicore or Overbraid Without a Library Part in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Creating a Multicore with a Library Part in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

February 2016
Splitting Multicore Indicators and Overbraid Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Associating a Comment Symbol with a Multicore or Overbraid Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 288
Replacing a Multicore or Overbraid Indicator with a Comment Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Using Add Wire to Terminate a Wire at a Multicore or Overbraid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Promoting a Multicore or Overbraid to a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Adding a Shared Conductor to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Overview of Shared Net Conductor Equivalence Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Creating a Shared Multicore or Overbraid in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Adding a Shared Multicore to a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Creating a Shield Terminator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Chaining Shield Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Add Daisy Chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Connect Indicators with Daisy Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Adding a Multicore from Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Assigning Wires from Library Multicores to Wires in a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Editing the Module Code for a Wire Conductor, Shield or Multicore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Equipotential Nets at a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Comparison of Use of Equipotential Attribute, Equipotential Global Attribute and Equivalence
Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Setting the Equipotential Attribute for a Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Setting the Equipotential Global Attribute for a Shared Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Adding a Stow Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Converting Net Conductors to Wire Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Multicore Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Abstraction Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Shield Termination Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Converting Simple Shield Terminations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Daisy Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Shield Cannot be Created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Excluding Net Conductors from the Conversion to Wire Conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Highways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Highway/Conductor Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Adding a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adding a New Branch to a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Moving a Highway Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Editing a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Deleting a Highway Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Deleting an Entire Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Interfacing a Conductor with a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Routing Existing Conductors into a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

February 2016
Creating a Conductor
Removing a Conductor from a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Unrouting Selected Conductors from a Highway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Unrouting all Conductors from a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Sharing a Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Unsharing a Highway Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Edit Properties: Highway Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Creating a Conductor
You can add the following types of conductors to a design:
• Net Conductors
This is a logical object that you use to represent a connection between objects. A net
conductor can be a shared object.
See “Creating/Moving/Deleting a Net Conductor” on page 267.
• Wire Conductors
This is a physical object that is a wire creating connectivity between objects. A wire can
be a shared object.
See “Creating/Moving/Deleting a Wire Conductor” on page 264.
• Shield Termination Conductors
This is a logical object that you use to represent a connection between a shield and other
objects.
See “Creating a Shield Terminator” on page 296.

February 2016
Creating/Moving/Deleting a Wire Conductor

This section describes the management of wire conductors on designs.
Creating a Wire Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Moving a Wire Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Deleting a Wire Conductor from a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating a Wire Conductor in a Design

This topic describes how to create a wire conductor in a design.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Wire.
2. Click on the location in the design where you want the conductor to start and use the
mouse to drag the line.
You can define sections in the conductor by clicking once to place a segment end-point
and then continuing to drag the line. You can continue the line in the same direction or
continue it at a 90 degree angle.
Note
By default, Auto Routing is enabled in the application. Auto Routing means that the
Route Selected action is performed automatically on a conductor when it is created
between two points (pins or empty space) without clicking to create segments between
those two points. See “Routing Conductors” on page 274.
3. To place the end-point of the conductor, double-click on the location where you want
the conductor to end. Alternatively, left-click once with the mouse on the location and
then right-click to display a pop-up menu and select Commit. The line changes to
purple and the conductor is added to the list in the Design Browser Window.
You can create connectivity between a wire conductor and the following objects:
• Device
• Splice
• Connector
A circle is displayed around a pin when you drag the end-point of a wire conductor over
it. This indicates that placing the wire conductor there creates connectivity. After you
place the end-point, the diamond around the pin disappears. This indicates that the wire
conductor is connected.

February 2016
Moving a Wire Conductor in a Design
You can connect more than one wire conductor to a pin.

You cannot create connectivity between a wire conductor and a net conductor or shield
conductor.
Note
You can indicate a wire is a poke home using an attribute in the Properties dialog
box.
Related Topics
Automatic Splice Creation
Moving a Wire Conductor in a Design

This topic describes how to move a wire conductor in a design.
Procedure
1. Click on the section of the conductor that you want to move.
2. The section changes to blue and the conductor to which it belongs is highlighted in the
lower browse box on the left side of the screen.
You can move or stretch a section.
To move the section, click on the line and drag and drop it to a new location. The four-
way move symbol is displayed while you do this. Connected objects move to maintain
the connectivity. You can disconnect the section from another object by right-clicking
on the end-point square where the connection is to display a pop-up menu and selecting
Disconnect Selected.
To stretch the section, click on an end-point and drag and drop it to a new location. The
two-way stretch symbol is displayed while you do this. Connected objects move to
maintain connectivity. You can disconnect the section from other objects by right-
clicking on the section to display a pop-up menu and selecting Disconnect Selected.
Note
If you move or stretch a conductor end to a pin, it will connect to it. If you move or
stretch it to a point on a pinlist where there is no pin, a pin is created.
Merging Wire Conductors

Drag the end-point of a wire conductor on to the end-point of another wire conductor. A larger
square is displayed around the square of the end-point to indicate that a connection will be
created if you place the end-point at this location.

February 2016
Deleting a Wire Conductor from a Design
Note
You cannot merge a wire conductor with another wire conductor by placing the end-point of
one on a mid-point of another.
Deleting a Wire Conductor from a Design

Right-click on the conductor in the lower browse box on the left side of the screen to display a
pop-up menu and select Delete Selected.
Alternatively, right-click on a section of a conductor in the design to display a pop-up menu and
select Delete Selected to delete that section of the conductor.

February 2016
Creating/Moving/Deleting a Net Conductor
Creating/Moving/Deleting a Net Conductor

This topic describes the management of net conductors conductor in a design.
Modifying a Net Conductor in a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Merging Net Conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adding Multiple Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Deleting a Net Conductor from a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Creating a Net Conductor in a Design

This topic describes how to create a net conductor in a design.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Net.
Note
A net junction is at the end of a segment that is connected to another segment. Any net
junction where three or more net sections meet is displayed as a solid square.
then right-click to display a pop-up menu and select Commit. The line changes to teal
and the conductor is added to the list in the Design Browser Window.
You can create connectivity between a net conductor and the following objects:
• Device
• Connector
• Another net conductor

February 2016
Modifying a Net Conductor in a Design
In the case of devices and connectors, a circle is displayed around a pin when you drag
the end-point of a net conductor over it. This indicates that placing the net conductor
there creates connectivity. After you place the end-point, the diamond around the pin
disappears. This indicates that the net conductor is connected.
You can connect more than one net conductor to a pin. The net conductors are treated as
different design objects.
In the case of shield conductors and other net conductors, a larger square is displayed
around the square of the end-point when you drag it over a point on the other conductor.
This indicates that placing the end-point there creates connectivity.
A net junction is created whenever you end a net conductor at a segment of another net
conductor. The net junction is displayed as a solid square placed at the junction point.
You cannot create connectivity between a net conductor and a wire conductor.
Modifying a Net Conductor in a Design

This topic describes how to modify a net conductor in a design.
Procedure
1. Click on the section of the conductor that you want to modify.
2. The section changes to blue and the conductor to which it belongs is highlighted in the
lower browse box on the left side of the screen.
You can move or stretch a section.
To move the section, click on the line and drag and drop it to a new location. The four-
way move symbol is displayed while you do this. Connected objects move to maintain
the connectivity. You can disconnect the section from another object by right-clicking
on the end-point square where the connection is to display a pop-up menu and selecting
Disconnect Selected.
To stretch the section, click on an end-point and drag and drop it to a new location. The
two-way stretch symbol is displayed while you do this. Connected objects move to
maintain connectivity. You can disconnect the section from other objects by right-
clicking on the section to display a popup menu and selecting Disconnect Selected.
Note
If you move or stretch a conductor end to a pin, it will connect to it. If you move or
stretch it to a point on a pinlist where there is no pin, a pin is created.

February 2016
Merging Net Conductors
Merging Net Conductors

Drag the end-point of a conductor on to another conductor. A larger square is displayed around
the square of the end-point to indicate that a connection will be created if you place the end-
point at this location.
Note
Connecting two net conductors to a single pin on a device or connector also merges the net
conductors.
Adding Multiple Connections

This topic describes how to create either multiple wire or multiple net connections between
pins.
The facility to add multiple connections massively improves productivity by speeding up the
connectivity process, as well as helping to reduce errors during the actual connect operation.
Mass selection of pins is supported on both source and target by drawing a box around the pins
which are to be connected. Connection can also be made on a pin by pin basis, by holding the
CTRL key once the Multiple Connection action has been invoked.
Procedure
1. Press either CTRL + SHIFT + W to add multiple wires or CTRL + SHIFT + N to add
multiple nets.
2. Select the pins for which you wish to create multiple connections. Colored (red and
green) numbers are displayed against pins in the sequence they are selected so it is
possible to quickly match the source and target pins. Additionally shadow connections
are depicted by dashed lines indicating the proposed connectivity.
3. Double click on the target pins, or press the Enter key to commit the action
Incorrect selections on source pins can be amended if the CTRL key remains pressed
and you reselect previously selected pins. Incorrect selections of target pins can be
amended by either pressing Backspace or right-clicking and selecting Backspace from
the context menu. Pressing the Esc key cancels the operation.
Results
Once connections have been committed, the dashed lines change to solid. The adding of
multiple wires onto a stacked pin is supported as is multi-pin terminations. If there is not a target
pin on your selected object, the system adds a pin as required. Selecting on free space adds
dangling connections which can be joined to pins in future operations.

February 2016
Deleting a Net Conductor from a Design
Deleting a Net Conductor from a Design

Right-click on the conductor in the lower browse box on the left side of the screen to display a
popup menu and select Delete Selected.
Alternatively, right-click on a section of a conductor in the design to display a popup menu and
select Delete Selected to delete that section of the conductor. If you delete a conductor segment
that has segments connected to both end-points, the conductor is split into two separate
conductors.
Creating a Notch to Move a Subsegment of a

Conductor
This topic describes how to move a subsegment of a net conductor or wire conductor in a
design.
Procedure
1. Once placed, a net or wire conductor can be broken in the middle and a subsegment
extended from the middle of a conductor.
2. Right-click a wire to select it.
3. In the pop-up menu that appears, select Notch.
4. Click two points on the conductor to define the section of the conductor that will be
extended. The length of that section turns grey and is attached to the mouse pointer.
5. Drag the segment to the desired location and click to place it. Notice that Capital Logic
automatically draws right-angle conductor segments to connect your extruded segment
to the rest of the conductor.
Disconnecting and Moving a Conductor End

from a Pin
This topic details how to use the Move End action to disconnect a conductor end from a pin and
place the end either at another pin or in free space.
Procedure
1. Click on the conductor near the end to be moved and either:
• press Space Bar and enter Move End
• select Actions > Conductor > Move End from the menu
The mouse cursor changes appearance.

February 2016
Disconnecting and Moving a Conductor End from a Pin
2. Click on the pin or free space where you want to place the conductor end.
Results
• The conductor end is disconnected from the original pin.
• If you place the conductor end on a new pin, it is connected.
• If you use the Auto Routing action, the conductor is re-routed.

February 2016
Poke Home Wire
Poke Home Wire

A poke home wire is a wire that is connected during installation and not during manufacture. It
terminates in a hardware that belongs to another harness assembly. Poke home wires are
identified automatically (based on harness attributes) when Capital Logic design data is
synchronized with a Capital HarnessXC design.
In the following example, the red objects (Device A, connector P01 and wires 001 and 002)
have a harness attribute of H1. The blue objects have a harness attribute of H2.
Figure 7-1. Poke Home Wire Example
This means that wires 001 and 002 are poke homes where they terminate at connector P02.
When this design is synchronized with Capital HarnessXC designs for a harness H1 and harness
H2:
• Only H1 objects are synchronized with the H1 design, although the connector P02 also
appears in it but is treated as “not on BOM”.
• Only H2 objects are synchronized with the H2 design.
• The system recognizes the wires 001 and 002 in the H1 design as poke home wires.
Caution
The Treat Wires Terminating On A Different Harness As Poke Home project
preference for Capital Logic must be selected for this to work. See “Project
Preferences” on page 68.

February 2016
Specifying a Poke Home Wire in Capital Logic
Specifying a Poke Home Wire in Capital Logic

This topic details how to specify (create) a poke home wire in a Capital Logic diagram.
Prerequisites
• The Treat Wires Terminating On A Different Harness As Poke Home project
preference for Capital Logic must be selected. See “Project Preferences” on page 68.
• A Poke Home Prefix general project preference must have been specified. This
specifies a prefix that is added to the names of poke home wires when a report is
generated for the design.
• A Poke Home Arrow Style project preference for Capital Logic must be specified. This
specifies the appearance of poke home wires (arrows at the end of the wire) in Capital
Logic.
Procedure
1. In the Capital Logic design containing the poke home, specify a harness attribute for
each of the objects. This attribute is used for mapping Capital Logic objects to Capital
HarnessXC harnesses during data synchronization.
Caution
Although it is possible to enter multiple harnesses as a comma-separated list, you
should not do so when working with poke homes. This is because a poke home wire
only ever belongs to one harness.
2. Right-click on objects in the diagram window or Design Browser Window and select
Edit Harness Attribute; the Edit Harness Attribute dialog is displayed.
Note
If you use Capital Topology, you can specify a bundle as a poke home in that. See
“Specifying a Bundle (Harness) as a Poke Home” on page 598 of the Capital
Topology chapter.
3. Enter the name of the harness or the harness group that the object is to be synchronized
to. If harness names or harness groups have been created in Capital Project, you can
select one from the drop-down list in the Harness field.
Results
When the design is synchronized with Capital HarnessXC designs:
• The Capital Logic objects are synchronized with the appropriate harness designs in
Capital HarnessXC.
• The system recognizes wires that are poke homes (that is, they terminate on a different
harness design). When you generate reports for the Capital HarnessXC designs, the
specified Poke Home Prefix is added to those wire names.

February 2016
Routing Conductors
Note
The wires in Capital HarnessXC all need to terminate, so connectors not belonging
to that harness still get created with “Poke Home” set against the connector. It is also
set as “not on BOM”.
Related Topics
Poke Home Wire
Routing Conductors
If conductors are following complicated paths in the Diagram Window, you can re-route the
conductors to more direct paths.
Procedure
Select one or more conductors to be routed and either:
• right-click on a selected conductor and select Route Selected

• press Space Bar and enter Route
• press CTRL + R
Results
• The selected conductors are re-routed to follow a more direct path.
• Styling is applied to the conductors.

February 2016
Using Orthogonal Routing
Using Orthogonal Routing

When drawing a conductor, diagonal conductors are allowed in a diagram. To limit the drawing
to orthogonal (only vertical or horizontal lines) vectors, press Space Bar and enter Orthogonal
Routing. Lines previously drawn are not affected.
Auto-routing of Nets
Auto-routing means that the Route Selected action is performed automatically on connected
conductors when:
• devices / symbols / connectors are moved
• pins are repositioned on devices / connectors
• devices / symbols / connectors are rotated
• devices / symbols / connectors are flipped
• a symbol is selected for a parameterized device
• a symbol is reselected for a device
• a symbol is updated for a device
• a wire / net / shield is created between two points (pins or empty space) without clicking
to create segments between those two points
Auto-routing can be enabled or disabled by pressing Space Bar and entering Auto-route Net, or
by pressing Ctrl+Shift+R on your keyboard. The Auto-route: ON/OFF Indicator on the
Status Bar indicates whether it is enabled or disabled, and which mode is currently active.
Auto-routing of Signals
When the Auto-route Signal mode is enabled, conductors and in-line connectors placed along
the signal path are re-routed and relocated in the case of the in-lines. The in-lines are placed in
an optimal position for their connections and may rotate through 90 degrees to provide an
optimized diagram.
Note
The Auto-route Signal functionality routes from end to end, including in-line connectors
and splices. In-line connectors must have one pin pair, and each pin must be connected to a
single wire. Splices must also have at least two wires connected.

February 2016
Promoting a Conductor to a Shared Conductor
Auto-route Signal can be enabled or disabled either by pressing Space Bar and entering Auto-
route Signal, or by clicking the Auto Route icon on the Status Bar. The icon changes to
indicate whether it is enabled or disabled, and which Auto Route mode is active:
• - Auto-routing is off.
• - Auto-route Net is on.
• - Auto-route Signal is on.
Promoting a Conductor to a Shared Conductor

This topic explains how to share a conductor.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the conductor in the Logical Designs Browser Window or diagram and
select the Share option from the popup menu. Alternatively, click on the conductor,
press Space Bar and enter Share.
2. If the conductor has the same name as an existing shared conductor, a message asks to
decide whether you want to create a new shared conductor with that same name,
whether you want to use the existing shared conductor or whether you want to cancel the
promotion.
3. After you promote an object, it is added to the Shared Objects Browser Window and can
be used elsewhere.

February 2016
Creating a Splice in Capital Logic

You can either add a single pin splice or a multiple pin splice to a diagram in Capital Logic.
See “Creating a Single Pin Splice” on page 277 for information about creating a single pin
splice.
There are a number of ways in which you can create a multiple pin splice but it must use a splice
symbol created in Capital Symbol. See the Capital Symbol help system for more information
about creating a splice symbol.
If splice symbols have been created, you can either add a shared splice with a plug map (see
“Adding a Splice with a Library Part” on page 278), add a symbol (see “Adding a Symbol to a
Diagram” on page 335), or add a splice with a library part that has an associated symbol (see
“Adding a Splice with a Library Part” on page 278).
You can add a splice from the component library even if it does not have an associated symbol
(see “Adding a Splice with a Library Part” on page 278).
On a normal conductor, the splice style is a butt splice by default. On a conductor that has been
converted to a port, the splice style is a center strip splice (the wire's insulation is stripped at a
midpoint and passed through a splice) by default.
If a butt splice does not use a symbol, it can be converted to a center strip splice (see
“Converting a Butt Splice to a Center Strip Splice” on page 278). A center strip splice can be
converted to a butt splice (see “Converting a Center Strip Splice to a Butt Splice” on page 278).
Stretching a wire so that its end touches a midpoint of a shared wire results in a center strip
splice on the shared wire, and a butt splice on the stretched wire.
Note
Splices are automatically created if you insert a wire that attaches its terminating end to the
middle of another wire.
If you connect a conductor to a conductor that has been converted to a port, a center strip splice
is created automatically.
The instructions on this page detail manually placing a splice symbol.
Creating a Single Pin Splice

This topic describes how to create a single pin splice.

February 2016
Adding a Splice with a Library Part
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Splice, and click on the conductor at the point that you wish to
insert the splice.
2. The splice appears in the browser tree as a child of the conductor in addition to being
listed in the Devices list.
Adding a Splice with a Library Part

This topic describes how to a splice using a part number.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Splice from Library.
2. The Part Selection facility is displayed. See “Selecting a Component Part Number in
the Part Selection Dialog” on page 458 for more information about selecting a library
part. Once you have selected a library part, click the Insert button.
3. Click on the location where you want to place the splice.
4. The splice appears in the browser tree as a child of the conductor in addition to being
listed in the Devices list.
Converting a Butt Splice to a Center Strip Splice

This topic describes how to convert a butt splice to a center strip splice.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser Window, select the two wires that you want to make the center
strip in the splice, press Space Bar and enter Convert to Center Stripped.
2. The wires become one wire that has the name of the first wire that you selected. The
splice is now center-stripped.
Converting a Center Strip Splice to a Butt Splice

This topic describes how to convert a center strip splice to a butt splice.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser, select the center strip wire that you want to split and the splice.
Press Space Bar and enter Convert to Splice Terminated.
2. A new wire is added to the Design Browser Window and the splice is converted to a butt
splice.

February 2016

When a wire conductor is terminated on another wire conductor between the second conductor's
endpoints, a splice is automatically inserted, and the conductor is broken at the splice, with both
resulting conductors connected to the splice.
This automatic splice creation also applies to shield conductors; creating or stretching a shield
conductor so that one of its ends touches a splice (or vice versa) will connect the shield
connector to the splice.
Splices are represented in the diagram by a filled circle. There are two splice styles:
• Butt Splices - The default splice style is a butt splice (one end of the wire connected to
the splice pin). Butt splices appear in the browser tree as a child of the conductor in
addition to being listed in the Devices list.
• Center Strip Splices - A butt splice can be converted to a center strip splice (the wire's
insulation is stripped at a midpoint and passed through a splice). Wires attached to
center stripped splices appear in the browser tree as a child of the splice in addition to
being listed in the Devices list.
Related Topics
Overview of Multicores
A multicore cable is a single cable comprised of multiple wires. If it is a coax or oval multicore
it has a shield that can be grounded with a shield terminator.
On a Capital Logic diagram, the graphical representation is similar to an overbraid but an
overbraid is not the same as a multicore.
An overbraid can contain other overbraids and multicores but a multicore cannot contain an
overbraid.
There are the following ways of adding a multicore to a design in Capital Logic:
• Create a multicore in Capital Logic (this can be promoted to a shared multicore later).
See “Creating a Multicore or Overbraid” on page 282.
• Create a shared multicore in Capital Logic. See “Creating a Shared Multicore or
Overbraid in Capital Logic” on page 293.
• Add a shared multicore that has been created in Capital Project. “Adding a Shared
Multicore to a Design” on page 295.

February 2016
Overview of Overbraids
• Add a multicore that has been created with a part number in Capital Library. See
“Adding a Multicore from Capital Library” on page 301.
Shared multicores can be added to multiple diagrams across a project.
If you want to display the name of a multicore on the diagram. You can either:
• Select to make the name visible when creating a multicore or shared multicore in Capital
Logic. This displays the name next to every indicator on the multicore.
• Edit the general properties for an indicator on an existing multicore and make the name
visible. See “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406 for more information.
This displays the multicore name next to that indicator only.
Note
If a multicore or a conductor has a Capital Library part number assigned to it, a tick
is displayed next to its symbol in the Browser Windows.
Note
If the conductors in a multicore connect to different pin lists you can specify whether the
individual indicators on the multicore stretch across all of the conductors or whether they
are split so that there is part of the indicator on each of the conductors. See “Splitting Multicore
Indicators and Overbraid Indicators” on page 285 for more information.
An overbraid is a sheath that is applied to the outside of a harness primarily to address electrical
noise concerns. On a Capital Logic diagram, the graphical representation is similar to a
multicore but an overbraid is not the same as a multicore.
An overbraid can be applied over another overbraid but a multicore cannot contain an
overbraid.
There are the following ways of adding an overbraid to a design in Capital Logic:
• Create an overbraid in Capital Logic (this can be promoted to a shared overbraid later).
See “Creating a Multicore or Overbraid” on page 282.
• Create a shared overbraid in Capital Logic (you cannot create a shared overbraid in
Capital Project). See “Creating a Shared Multicore or Overbraid in Capital Logic” on
page 293.
Shared overbraids can be added to multiple designs across a project.
You can add a library part to an overbraid. When you do this, the color, material and wire spec
attributes are applied to the overbraid.

February 2016
If you want to display the name of an overbraid on the diagram. You can either:
• Select to make the name visible when creating an overbraid or shared overbraid in
Capital Logic. This displays the name next to every indicator on the overbraid.
• Edit the general properties for an indicator on an existing overbraid and make the name
visible. See “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406 for more information.
This displays the name next to that indicator only.
Note
If an overbraid has a Capital Library part number assigned to it, a tick is displayed
next to its symbol in the Browser Windows.
If the conductors in an overbraid connect to different pin lists you can specify whether
the individual indicators on the overbraid stretch across all of the conductors or whether
they are split so that there is part of the indicator on each of the conductors. See
“Splitting Multicore Indicators and Overbraid Indicators” on page 285 for more
information.

February 2016
Creating a Multicore or Overbraid

The Generic Multicore/Overbraid dialog enables you to create multicores or overbraids in a
Capital Logic design and to edit these objects.
These objects can be promoted to a shared object. See “Promoting a Multicore or Overbraid to a
Shared Object” on page 290.
Note
You cannot add shared conductors to a multicore or overbraid that has been created in
Capital Logic but has not been promoted to a shared multicore and placed in the diagram.
The Generic Multicore dialog allows you to create a multicore either with or without a library
part:
• “Creating a Multicore or Overbraid Without a Library Part in a Diagram” on page 282

• “Creating a Multicore with a Library Part in a Diagram” on page 283
Creating a Multicore or Overbraid Without a Library

Part in a Diagram
This topic discusses the steps required to create a multicore or overbraid without a library part in
a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Multicore or Overbraid.
2. In the Generic Multicore or Overbraid dialog, click the Add a new Multicore/Add a
Overbraid ( ) button on the right part of the dialog.
3. In the Edit Multicore or Edit Overbraid dialog, name the new conductor group and
click the indicator types that apply to it. Coax and oval multicores are shielded. Twist-
commercial, twist-military and twist-z are not shielded.
You use the Project Preferences functionality in Capital Project or Capital Logic to
specify the line style that is used for an overbraid. By default, they have dashed-oval
indicators.
If you do not want to use the name that the system uses by default, uncheck the Default
Name box and enter a new name in the Name box. If you want to display the name next
to each indicator for that multicore or overbraid on the diagram, check the Visible box.
If you want to deselect an indicator, hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and
click the indicator.
Click OK to close the Edit Multicore or Edit Overbraid dialog.

February 2016
Creating a Multicore with a Library Part in a Diagram
4. On the Generic Multicore/Overbraid dialog, the multicore or overbraid is added to the

Multicores/Overbraids window. It has the appropriate indicators listed below it. Click
on the multicore or overbraid in the Multicores/Overbraids column to make it active,
and click on a wire, multicore or overbraid in the Available Conductors column to
select it. Click Add ( ) to put the wire, multicore or overbraid into the new multicore or
overbraid.
Note
A multicore or overbraid that has been created in Capital Logic and has not been
shared cannot contain a shared conductor or overbraid.
5. Click OK to accept your changes. An indicator symbol of the type you have selected
appears near each end of the multicore or overbraid. If a multicore or overbraid is
between more than two connectors and/or devices, one indicator appears near each
connected end. Each indicator can be moved independently of the others, but changes to
one affect the whole set.
The multicore or overbraid is also added to the Multicore folder or Overbraid folder in
the Design Browser Window.
Note
A wire, multicore or overbraid can belong to only one multicore or overbraid at a
time (it is removed from the Available Conductors column). However, any time
you create a new multicore or overbraid, that object is added to the Available
Conductors column.
If an indicator cannot be drawn across two parallel wires, the indicator will be drawn on
the single wire.
You can add a shield termination to coax and oval multicores and to overbraids. See
“Creating a Shield Terminator” on page 296 for more information.
You can also assign a part number from Capital Library to a multicore or overbraid. See
If the conductors in a multicore or overbraid connect to different pin lists you can
specify whether the individual indicators on the multicore or overbraid stretch across all
of the conductors or whether they are split so that there is part of the indicator on each of
the conductors. See “Splitting Multicore Indicators and Overbraid Indicators” on
Creating a Multicore with a Library Part in a

Diagram
This topic discusses the steps required to create a multicore with a library part in a diagram.

February 2016
Creating a Multicore with a Library Part in a Diagram
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Multicore. The Generic Multicore facility is displayed.
2. In the Available Conductors window, select the diagram conductors to be included as
inner cores in the multicore and click the Add From Library ( ) button on the right part
of the dialog box, the Part Selection Dialog is displayed.
3. Click the Search parts using criteria specified ( ) button; multicore library parts
with an equal or greater number of inner core wires are displayed.
4. Select a multicore library part and click Insert; the library multicore structure is added
to the Multicores window in the Generic Multicore facility.
Note
You can change the name of the multicore by clicking the Edit () button.
5. Associate the diagram conductors to be included in the multicore with library inner
cores:
a. In the Available Conductors window, select a conductor to be included.
b. In the Multicores window, select the library inner core.
c. Click Assign ( ); the library inner core changes name to the diagram conductor and
an association is created.
6. Click OK; the multicore is added to the Multicore folder in the Design Browser
Window and, where appropriate, multicore indicators are added to the diagram window.
Note
You can add a shield termination to coax and oval multicores. See “Creating a
Shield Terminator” on page 296 for more information.
If the conductors in a multicore connect to different pin lists you can specify whether the
individual indicators on the multicore stretch across all of the conductors or whether
they are split so that there is part of the indicator on each of the conductors. See
“Splitting Multicore Indicators and Overbraid Indicators” on page 285 for more
information.
Related Topics
Creating a Shield Terminator
Promoting a Multicore or Overbraid to a Shared Object

February 2016
Splitting Multicore Indicators and Overbraid Indicators
Splitting Multicore Indicators and Overbraid

Indicators
If the conductors in a multicore or overbraid connect to different pin lists you can specify
whether the individual indicators on the multicore or overbraid stretch across all of the
conductors or whether they are split so that there is part of the indicator on each of the
conductors.
For example:
You have 3 devices and 2 wires as follows:
The two wires are put in a multicore. By default the indicator at the right end of the wires is split
as shown (Note that for overbraids, the indicator would not be split by default. These default
settings can be changed in the Project Preferences in Capital Project or Capital Logic):

February 2016
You can right-click on one of the split indicators and select the Toggle Indicator option from
the pop-up menu. The indicator changes as follows:
If you want to split an indicator again, right-click on it and select the Toggle Indicator option
from the pop-up menu. The indicator reverts to its original form.
Considerations When Splitting Indicators

The system considers the distance from the pinlist end. For an indicator placed at a non-default
location as shown below, since the combined distance of the indicators from right end of the
segment (where they are connected to different pinlists) is less than the distance from left end,
they would be considered nearer to the multiple pinlists side and, following the project
preference setting, would be split as shown below.
However, if the combined length of both the indicators from the left end of the segment (where
they are connected to a single pinlist) is less than the combined distance of the indicators from
the right end of segment (where they are connected to multiple pinlists), the system considers
these closer to a single pinlist and they are NOT split, as in the following example.

February 2016
Considerations When Splitting Indicators Containing Foreign Segments
There may be cases where individual indicators on a multicore overlap with conductors that are
not part of the same multicore. This can happen when an additional “foreign” segment is
connected to a device, appearing to join with an existing multicore. To avoid creating confusion
the multicore indicator will not stretch across all the conductors, instead two separate indicators
are generated on the diagram.
This can be seen in the example below, where WIRE30 is marked as one group, and WIRE31
and WIRE32 as another. WIRE33 and WIRE34 are not part of the multicore and are not tagged
with an indicator.
If a group of multicore wires are split by drawing a foreign segment, removing this foreign
segment would automatically stretch the indicator back, as shown below.
If you have explicitly toggled an indicator (as shown in number 1) so it has stretched (as shown
in number 2), adding a foreign segment (as in number 3) would not split the explicitly stretched
indicator.

February 2016
Associating a Comment Symbol with a Multicore or Overbraid Indicator
By default, the 'Split indicators' project preference setting is off for overbraids. Therefore if an
overbraid is created with this default option, the adding a foreign segment would not split the
overbraid indicators.
The systems stores this setting when the indicators are created and continues to honor them, as
shown below.
For further information see the Split Indicator Project Preferences setting.
Associating a Comment Symbol with a

Multicore or Overbraid Indicator
This topic explains how to add a comment symbol to a diagram so that it is associated with a
multicore or overbraid indicator.
If the indicator is moved, the comment symbol moves to maintain its orientation to the
indicator.
Note
In addition to associating a comment symbol from a symbol library with an indicator, you
can associate graphical objects created in the diagram. You do this by clicking the indicator
before drawing a graphic. See the individual task flows under “Graphic Drawing Tools” on
page 369.
Prerequisites
• The comment symbol must exist in the symbol library.

February 2016
Replacing a Multicore or Overbraid Indicator with a Comment Symbol
Procedure
1. Right-click on the indicator in the diagram and select Add Comment Symbol; the
Symbol Selection Dialog is displayed.
2. Select the comment symbol and click OK; the comment symbol is displayed next to the
cursor.
3. Move the cursor to position the symbol and click to place it.
Results
The symbol is associated with the indicator. This association will be lost if the indicator is
regenerated and if you stretch, split or individualize the indicator.
Replacing a Multicore or Overbraid Indicator

with a Comment Symbol
This topic explains how to add a comment symbol to a diagram so that it replaces a multicore or
overbraid indicator. Shield terminations can be hooked up to datums on the comment symbol.
Procedure
1. In Capital Symbol, create a comment symbol that you want to use as the indicator.
Ensure that you specify a Symbol Type of Comment when creating it.
2. Add two attribute datums to the symbol that you want to use as indicator hookups (that
is, where a shield would connect in the diagram). In the Add Attribute Datum dialog
when doing this, select an Object Type of Indicator and the Name attribute.
3. Save the symbol.
4. In Capital Logic, ensure that you have refreshed the symbol library data by pressing
Space Bar and entering Refresh Symbol Libraries.
5. Right-click on the indicator in the diagram and select Add Comment Symbol; the
Symbol Selection Dialog is displayed.
6. Select the comment symbol that you created and click OK; the comment symbol is
displayed next to the cursor.
7. Move the cursor to position the symbol and click to place it.
8. Remove the old indicator manually by doing the following:
a. Right-click on it and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
b. Click the Parameters tab and expand the Shield body node.
c. Delete the Param: top, Param: center and Param: bottom parameters by right-
clicking on them and selecting Remove.

February 2016
Using Add Wire to Terminate a Wire at a Multicore or Overbraid
d. Click OK to exit the dialog.

Results
The original indicator is removed from the diagram, the comment symbol now functions as the
indicator and the datums function as the indicator hookups.
Using Add Wire to Terminate a Wire at a

Multicore or Overbraid
This topic details how to use the Add Wire function to terminate a non-shield wire at a
multicore or overbraid hookup. The system automatically splices the wire to the indicator
hookup and creates a shield termination of zero length.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Wire.
Note
3. To place the end-point of the conductor, double-click on the multicore indicator hookup
where you want the conductor to end.
Results
• The wire is added to the diagram and the Design Browser Window.
• The system creates a splice and a zero-length shield termination at the hookup.
Promoting a Multicore or Overbraid to a

Shared Object
If a multicore or overbraid that is not shared has been created in Capital Logic, you can promote
it to a shared object.

February 2016
Adding a Shared Conductor to a Diagram
See “Creating a Shared Multicore or Overbraid in Capital Logic” on page 293 for more
information about creating a new shared multicore.
Note
If a Shield Termination is required on the Multicore then it should be defined before the
Multicore is shared. See “Creating a Shield Terminator” on page 296 for more information.
Procedure
1. Click on the multicore or overbraid in the Design Browser Window, press Space Bar
and enter Share.
Alternatively, right-click on the multicore or overbraid and select the Share Multicore/
Overbraid option from the pop-up menu.
2. The multicore or overbraid becomes a shared object and is added to the list of shared
multicores on the Shared Objects Browser Window.
Note
If a multicore has a daisy chain attached, the shared object replicates the local
connectivity. For example, if the multicore has a daisy chain attached but this does
not result in a shield (because the attached multicore does not have a shield, or the shield
does not end at a pin), then the shared object will not have a shield. In addition, the
redundant daisy chain is removed.
Related Topics
Creating a Shared Multicore or Overbraid in Capital Logic
Adding a Shared Multicore to a Design
Adding a Shared Conductor to a Diagram

To enable a conductor (a net or wire) to be connected to objects present on more than one
design, Capital Project enables the creation of shared conductors, which can be connected to
circuits on more than one design within a project. You can create shared conductors with or
without a part number in Capital Project. See the Capital Project help system for more
information about how to do this.
If any shared conductors exist for the project that is open in Capital Logic, they are displayed in
the Shared Objects Browser Window and you can add them to designs. See this topic.

February 2016
Overview of Shared Net Conductor Equivalence Sets
Note
A shared net conductor can be part of an equivalence set. See “Overview of Shared Net
Conductor Equivalence Sets” on page 292 for information about equivalence sets.
If a shared object is frozen, a blue snowflake is displayed on the icon for the shared object .
See “Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects” on page 447 for more information about frozen
shared objects.
Procedure
1. Double-click on the conductor in the Shared Objects Browser Window or right-click on
it and select the Add Shared Net or Add Shared Wire option from the pop-up menu.
and then continuing to drag the line.
then right-click to display a pop-up menu and select Commit.
Note
Overview of Shared Net Conductor

Equivalence Sets
To enable a conductor (a net or wire) to be connected to objects present on more than one
design, Capital Project enables the creation of shared conductors, that can be connected to
circuits on more than one design within a project.
Equivalence sets enable the grouping of those shared net conductors in a project that are to be
treated as electrically identical (i.e. electrically equivalent). For example, if 3 shared net
conductors; net-1, net-2 and net-3 are present on 3 separate designs and all three must represent
the same +12v signal, then by including the three net conductors in the same equivalence set,
they will all assume the same electrical function.
Equivalence sets enable the shared net conductors present in existing (re-usable) designs, to be
included in further projects.
When creating an equivalence set in Capital Project, one of its net conductors must be selected
as the Representative net conductor for that equivalence set. Once selected, the name of the

February 2016
representative net conductor is automatically used as the equivalence set's name. See the
Capital Project help system for more information about creating equivalence sets.
In Capital Logic, you can insert shared net conductor into a design diagram. See “Adding a
Shared Conductor to a Diagram” on page 291 for more information.
When a shared net conductor (that is part of an equivalence set) is place onto a design diagram
in Capital Logic, it is automatically annotated with cross-reference text that lists the design and
diagram names in which any of the other net conductors in the same equivalence set have been
placed. If a net conductor is part of the same equivalence set, but has not been placed on a
design, it will not appear listed in the cross-reference text. See “Cross-References on Objects”
on page 199 for further information about cross-references.
Note
Equivalence sets can only contain shared net conductors, they cannot contain shared wire
conductors.
A shared net conductor can only be included in one equivalence set, once a net conductor has
been included in one equivalence set, it is not available for inclusion in further equivalence sets.
A shared net conductor must first be removed from one equivalence set before it can be
included in another equivalence set.
A Capital Logic design containing shared net conductors (that are part of an equivalence set)
can still be associated with a Capital Integrator design in order to synthesize wiring. Signal
names in Capital Integrator will use the name of the representative shared conductor whenever a
shared conductor that is in an equivalence set is used. This means that all shared net conductors
in the same equivalence set are shorted together in Capital Integrator.
Creating a Shared Multicore or Overbraid in

Capital Logic
The Create Shared Multicore/Overbraid facility enables you to create shared multicores or
overbraids in a Capital Logic design and to edit these objects.
Note
apart from changing its appearance in a design. See “Freezing and Unfreezing Shared
Objects” on page 447 for more information about freezing shared objects.
If you have already created a multicore or overbraid that is not shared, you can promote it to a
shared object. See “Promoting a Multicore or Overbraid to a Shared Object” on page 290 for
more information about promoting an existing multicore or overbraid.

February 2016
Note
You can add both shared conductors and other conductors to a shared multicore or overbraid
that you are creating in Capital Logic. Any conductors that are not already shared are
converted to shared conductors when the shared object is created.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Shared Multicore or Shared Overbraid.
2. In the Create Shared Multicore or Create Shared Overbraid dialog box, click the
New button on the right part of the dialog box.
3. In the Edit Shared Multicore or Edit Shared Overbraid dialog box, name the new
multicore or overbraid and click the indicator type that applies to the object. Twist-
commercial, twist-military and twist-z are not shielded. Coax and oval multicores can be
shielded. An overbraid can have only a dashed-oval indicator type.
Note
When you are editing shared multicores or shared overbraids, only shared
multicores/overbraids that are used in the current design are displayed. If you want
to view shared multicores/overbraids that are used in other designs, then you must open
diagrams from those other designs.
If you do not want to use the name that the system uses by default, uncheck the Default
Name box and enter a new name in the Name box. If you want to display the name next
to each indicator for that object on the Capital Logic diagram, check the Visible box.
If you want to deselect an indicator, hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and
click the indicator.
Click OK to close the New Multicore or New Overbraid dialog box.
4. On the Create Shared Multicore/Overbraid facility, the object is added to the
Selected box. It has the appropriate indicators listed below it. Click on the object in the
Selected column to make it active, and a wire, multicore or overbraid in the Available
column to select it. Click Add to put the wire, overbraid or multicore into the new
multicore or overbraid.
5. Click OK to accept your changes. An indicator symbol of the type you have selected
appears near each end of the object. If a multicore or overbraid is between more than
two connectors and/or devices, one indicator appears near each connected end. Each
indicator can be moved independently of the others, but changes to one affect the whole
set.

February 2016
Note
A wire, overbraid or multicore can belong to only one multicore or overbraid at a
time (it is removed from the Available column). However, any time you create a
new multicore or overbraid, that object is added to the Available column.
If an indicator cannot be drawn across two parallel wires, the indicator will be drawn on
the single wire.
You can add a shield termination to coax and oval multicores and to overbraids. See
“Creating a Shield Terminator” on page 296 for more information.
You can also assign a part number from Capital Library to a multicore or overbraid. See
Related Topics

You can create shared multicores with or without a part number in Capital Project. See the
Capital Project help system for more information about how to do this. You can also create
them in Capital Logic by creating a new multicore or by promoting a multicore to a shared
multicore.
See “Creating a Shared Multicore or Overbraid in Capital Logic” on page 293 or “Promoting a
Multicore or Overbraid to a Shared Object” on page 290.
Note
If you are adding a shared net or wire conductor to a design, see “Adding a Shared
Conductor to a Diagram” on page 291.
In Capital Logic, you can add these existing shared multicores to designs. If any shared
multicores exist for the project that is open in Capital Logic, they are displayed in the Shared
Objects Browser Window.
If a shared multicore was created in Capital Project, you cannot edit the content of it in Capital
Logic. This must be done in Capital Project. If a shared object is frozen, a blue snowflake is

February 2016
displayed on the icon for the shared object . See “Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects” on
page 447 for more information about frozen shared objects.
Procedure
1. You must add each conductor in the shared multicore individually. Double-click on the
conductor in the Shared Objects Browser Window or right-click on it and select the Add
Shared Net or Add Shared Wire option from the pop-up menu.
and then continuing to drag the line.
then right-click to display a pop-up menu and select Commit.
4. Repeat the previous steps for each of the conductors in the multicore. When you have
added more than one conductor from the multicore to the design, an indicator is
displayed across the wires to show that they belong to a multicore.
Note
If the shared multicore is coax or oval, you must define a shield termination for it
when you create it. This shield termination is listed in the Shared Objects Browser
Window with the conductors for the multicore. See “Creating a Shield Terminator” on
page 296 for more information on how to add the shield termination to the design.
If a shared multicore does not have a library part number assigned to it already, you can
assign a part number from Capital Library. See “Editing an Object's General Properties”
on page 406.
Related Topics

A shield terminator is a special type of wire that is used to make a connection between a
communications cable shield and a conductor. Shield terminators can only be used with a free
connector pin.

February 2016
You can add daisy chains to connect together shield conductors so that they terminate at one
shield termination. See “Chaining Shield Conductors” on page 298 for more information.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Shield.
2. Position the mouse cursor over the connector pin where you want to place one end of the
wire.
3. Drag the mouse to draw the circuit line, clicking to leave a right-angle turn for the circuit
line. When you have drawn the line to the cable shield, double-click to place the line.
Note
4. The shield termination is added to the list of conductors in the Design Browser Window.
Note
If you are adding a shield termination to a shared multicore, the shield termination
must have already been defined as part of the multicore in Capital Project.
Related Topics

February 2016
Chaining Shield Conductors
Chaining Shield Conductors

The chaining of shield conductors is a way to indicate graphically that the shields have a
common termination point. By doing it this way, the drawing is easier to read. The chain does
not represent a connectivity object.
You use a daisy chain to connect the shield indicators on multicores and overbraids. One of the
multicores or overbraids should have a shield termination. After the shield indicators have been
chained together, they all terminate at this shield termination. See “Creating a Shield
Terminator” on page 296 for more information.
If there is no shield termination on any of the shield conductors, adding a chain does not affect
connectivity. If a shield termination is added to one of the chained indicators, connections are
added to the termination point. You must not have more than one shield termination connected
to the chain of shield indicators.
Daisy chains cannot:
• have splices added to them.

• have properties added to them.
Note
Daisy chains can be added to a shared multicore only if it has a shield already. The
shield does not have to be in the current connectivity (that is, not currently
represented in the design) but it must exist on the shared object.
Daisy Chains can be added in two ways
• “Add Daisy Chain” on page 298

• “Connect Indicators with Daisy Chain” on page 299
Add Daisy Chain

This topic describes how to add a daisy chain to a design.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Daisy-chain, and click on a pin on the shield indicator of the
first shield conductor that you want to chain.
2. Click on a pin on the shield indicator for the second conductor that you want to chain.

February 2016
Connect Indicators with Daisy Chain

Multiple multicore indicators can be connected in one action using the right-click context menu
item “Connect Indicators with Daisy Chain”. Multiple shield terminations will be consolidated
into one, in the same action.
Prerequisites
• Two or more indicators are selected on the diagram.
• The indicators selected are in the same orientation (horizontal or vertical). It is not
allowed if the selected indicators have differing (horizontal and vertical) orientation.
• Only one indicator per multi-core is selected.
Procedure
1. Select multiple multicore indicators in accordance with the prerequisite rules above. In
the example below in Figure 7-2, three indicators have been selected to be connected
with daisy chains. Note that they are all individually shielded to a multi termination on
DEV1297

February 2016
Figure 7-2. Select Indicators
2. RMB and then select action “Connect indicators with Daisy Chain”
Results
• All selected multicore indicators are now connected with Daisy Chains
• The multi terminated shields have been consolidated into a single shield termination,
with the shortest shield termination being preserved.

February 2016
Adding a Multicore from Capital Library
Figure 7-3. Indicators Connected

A multicore can be defined with a part number in Capital Library. See the Capital Library help
system for more information about how to do this.
In Capital Logic, you can add this multicore to a design.

February 2016
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Add Library Multicore.
2. The Part Selection Dialog is displayed. Click the Search button to display a list of
multicores in Capital Library, click on the multicore that you want to add and click the
Insert button.
3. The multicore is added under the Multicores section of the Design Browser Window.
The conductors in the multicore are listed as grayed out under the multicore in the tree.
4. Add each conductor to the diagram by right-clicking on the conductor and selecting
either Add as Wire or Add as Net.
a. Click on the location in the design where you want the conductor to start and use the
b. You can define sections in the conductor by clicking once to place a segment end-
point and then continuing to drag the line.
c. To place the end-point of the conductor, double-click on the location where you
want the conductor to end. Alternatively, left-click once with the mouse on the
location and then right-click to display a pop-up menu and select Commit.
d. Multicore indicators are added to the wire in the diagram. In the Design Browser
Window, the conductor changes to the name assigned to it in the diagram and is no
longer grayed out.
e. Repeat the previous steps for each of the conductors in the multicore. When you
have added more than one conductor from the multicore to the design, the indicators
are displayed across the wires to show that they belong to the same multicore.
Note
If the multicore is coax or oval and the library part does not have a shield
termination defined, one of its conductors must be defined as a shield
termination once it is added into the design. To do this, right-click on the conductor
that you want to be the shield termination under the multicore in the Design Browser
Window and select the Designate Shield menu option.
Related Topics

February 2016
Assigning Wires from Library Multicores to Wires in a Design
Assigning Wires from Library Multicores to

Wires in a Design
When you assign a library part to a multicore in Capital Logic, the Assign Library Multicore
dialog prompts you to assign the inner cores from the library multicore to the multicore wires in
the design. This dialog is displayed when you click the Insert button on the Part Selection
dialog.
Procedure
1. After you have selected the multicore library part that you are assigning to the multicore
in the Part Selection facility and you have clicked the Insert button, the Assign Library
Multicore dialog is displayed.
2. Select a wire in the Library Multicore window and select the wire to which you want to
assign it in the Group window. Click the Assign button. You can cancel an assignment
by selecting it in the Group window and clicking the Unassign button. You perform
this step for each of the wires in the Library Multicore window.
3. Click OK to exit the dialog and return to the Edit Properties facility for the multicore.
Editing the Module Code for a Wire Conductor,

Shield or Multicore
This topic explains how to specify or edit the module code for a wire, shield or multicore in a
design.
Procedure
1. Select the wire, shield or multicore in the diagram window or Design Browser Window.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Properties.
• Right-click on the object and select Properties.
The Edit Properties Dialog is displayed.
3. In the Configuration section on the General tab, specify the module code in the
Module field. The module code must not exceed 30 characters.
4. Click OK.

February 2016
Equipotential Nets at a Pin

In Capital Logic, you can connect several nets to a single device pin. When Capital Integrator
synthesizes wiring, it treats each of these nets as a different signal and creates a multiterm at the
appropriate connector cavity. This is ideal for the case where a pin can be connected to different
signals depending on the vehicle configuration (that is, when the nets are tagged with options).
However, in some cases, you may want to treat these nets as a single signal during wiring
synthesis. This allows synthesis rules to control the creation of either multiterms or spliced
wires for this signal. Although this can be achieved with equivalence sets, you can also define
the equivalence of the nets directly within the Capital Logic design. To do this, you set the
Equipotential attribute for the pin to which the nets connect.
In Capital Logic, it is possible that several pins with an Equipotential attribute are connected.
In Capital Integrator, all connected and equipotential nets will be combined into a single signal
that uses the name of one of the equipotential nets.
In Capital Integrator, the Design Browser Window displays the signal and lists all of the nets
below it.
In the case of shared pins, the Equipotential attribute is stored on each instance of the pin. This
provides a way of varying its value in different designs or different revisions of the same design.
It also allows separate groups of nets to be merged resulting in multiple signals on the pin.
However, this mechanism means that it is necessary to connect all the shared nets that are to be
merged onto the same instance of the device pin. In some cases, this is not desirable. For such
cases, you can use the Equipotential Global attribute on a shared pin. This results in all nets to
any instance of that pin being merged.
When a signal in Capital Integrator includes nets which have been merged using more than one
mechanism, the signal name is determined using the following precedence (that is, 1 overrides 2
and 3, and 2 overrides 3):
1. Equivalence Set name (if there is one)

2. Global Equipotential attribute value (if there is one)
3. Equipotential attribute value (if there is one)

February 2016
Comparison of Use of Equipotential Attribute, Equipotential Global Attribute and Equivalence Sets
Comparison of Use of Equipotential Attribute,

Equipotential Global Attribute and Equivalence
Sets
Use of the Equipotential attribute or equivalence sets provide similar functionality. That is, the
ability to merge nets that have been defined separately into a single signal. This contrasts with
combining wires/signals, which does not provide that ability. Combining wires is completely
manual and does not any effect on synthesis. Combining wires is intended for the specific case
where a physical implementation of the wiring requires a single wire to implement multiple
(exclusive) signals.
Equivalence sets can be defined only in Capital Project. This means that they can be used to
modify the merging of signals even when all the system designs are released and are therefore
read-only.
The Equipotential attribute is defined on an instance of a device pin. that means that it is stored
within a design and can therefore be revised with that design. In other words, you can have
multiple revisions of a system design and the definition of equipotential signals can be different
in each.
Use of the Equipotential Global attribute is very similar to the use of the Equipotential
attribute. The main difference is that Equipotential requires you to connect all the nets you
want to combine to a single instance of a device pin. However, Equipotential Global allows
you to combine all nets connected to any instance of the device pin.
Related Topics
Setting the Equipotential Attribute for a Pin
Setting the Equipotential Global Attribute for a Shared Pin

This topic explains how to set the Equipotential attribute for a pin in Capital Logic.
For details of the effect of setting this, see “Equipotential Nets at a Pin” on page 304.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the device pin and select the Properties option from the pop-up menu.
2. The Edit Properties facility is displayed. Go to the Attributes section of the General
tab.
3. For the Equipotential attribute, click in the Value field and select a net name from the
drop-down list. The listed nets are those that connect to the pin. The name that you select
is the name that will be used for the single signal in Capital Integrator.

February 2016
If you select the blank value for the Equipotential attribute, the nets will not be treated
as equipotential.
Note
If the selected net is later deleted, the attribute changes to reference another net
connected to the pin.
If the deletion leaves just one net connected to the pin, the attribute remains set so that
the equipotential behavior is preserved in case another net is later multitermed at the pin.
4. Click the OK button to exit the Edit Properties facility.
Note
When wiring is synthesized in Capital Integrator, the system recognizes the
equipotential attribute and creates a single signal containing the connectivity of all
the nets attached to this device pin. This signal is synthesized as a single entity.
Related Topics
Setting the Equipotential Global Attribute for a

Shared Pin
This topic explains how to set the Equipotential Global attribute for a shared pin in Capital
Logic.
For details of the effect of setting this, see “Equipotential Nets at a Pin” on page 304.
Procedure
1. Right-click on an instance of the shared device pin in Capital Logic and select the
Properties option from the pop-up menu.
2. The Edit Properties facility is displayed. Go to the Attributes section of the General
tab.
3. For the Equipotential Global attribute, enter a string in the Value field; this value is
used as the name of the combined signal in Capital Integrator.
Note
When the Equipotential Global attribute is set, the Equipotential attribute is
disabled but is not cleared. The Equipotential Global value overrides the
Equipotential value when the combined signal is named in Capital Integrator.

February 2016
Adding a Stow Wire
Related Topics
Adding a Stow Wire

Stow wires are electrically unconnected wires that are incorporated into a harness during
manufacture for a number of reasons:
• To ensure that a spare wire is available should a breakage occur the harness is installed
in a vehicle
• To offer support for future enhancements to a harness’ connectivity
• To increase the strength of a harness where the termination of only a few wires at a
connector can result in a potential weak point, and the termination of additional,
electronically unconnected wires can increase the strength of the join
Stow wires are added to a design by placing splices as points at which to terminate the ends of
the stow wire. As no other wires are terminated at these splices, the wire is electrically
unconnected. This method supports two types of stow wire:
• Full-length stow - this wire runs the full length of the bundle
• Mid-bundle stow - this wire runs from a connector cavity to a splice stow point
Procedure
1. In Capital Library, create a new splice part and name it STOW. Ensure that the splice’s
Include on BOM option is not selected.
2. In Capital Logic, to create a full-length stow wire, place two splices following the
method for “Adding a Splice with a Library Part” on page 278. Give the splices a name
that identifies them as stow points, such as STOW1 and STOW2 and set the Harness
attribute for both splices (see “Specifying the Harness Attribute for an Object” on
page 438).
Note
To create a mid-bundle stow to increase the strength of a connector join, only a
single splice needs to be added. Terminate the other end of the stow wire at a
connector pin.
3. Add a wire conductor between these splices (see “Creating/Moving/Deleting a Wire

Conductor” on page 264)and set its Harness attribute (see “Specifying the Harness
Attribute for an Object” on page 438).

February 2016
Converting Net Conductors to Wire Conductors
4. Create additional stow wires as required, but in each case, add subsequent splices at
which to terminate the wire, otherwise the stow wires will be considered electrically
connected.
Note
The stow wires can be synchronized into a harness design in Capital HarnessXC. If
the splices exist in Capital HarnessXC already, they are matched by name and the
stow wire is placed. If the splices do not exist, they are added to the bottom of the
harness diagram and you must use the Move Splice functionality to place them.
Converting Net Conductors to Wire

Conductors
This topic explains how to convert the net conductors in a single design or designs in a build
list, to wire conductors. The conversion includes individual nets and nets in multicores.
Note
You can use a constraint to exclude specific net conductors from this action. See “Excluding
Net Conductors from the Conversion to Wire Conductors” on page 314.
Prerequisites
• A diagram containing nets is open.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Nets to Wires.
The Confirm Convert Nets to Wires Dialog is displayed.
2. Select whether you want to convert net conductors only in the currently open design or
in all designs in a build list. If build lists are available, select the build list from the
dropdown list. See also Abstraction Filtering below.
3. Click OK.
Results
The process:
• Converts net conductors to wire conductors.
• Converts net multicores to wire multicores, fully preserving the multicore structure and
graphical layout.
• Creates splices at wire junctions where a net or shared net has more than two ends in the
design or build list (depending on which is selected as the scope).
• Creates or modifies shared wires and multicores.

February 2016
• Adds a Convert Nets to Wires tab to the Output Window summarizing the creation and
modification of objects. Where a component is listed by name, clicking on the name
highlights the component on the diagram.

February 2016
Multicore Behavior
Multicore Behavior
There are various considerations to take into account when running Convert Nets To Wires on
Multicores.
• Abstraction Filtering
• Shield Termination Conversion
Abstraction Filtering
To allow you to run the process against a build list, but for just one single abstraction, the
following rules apply:
• When running “Convert Nets to Wires” on a build list, convert all nets to wires on all
designs in the build list whose abstraction matches the abstraction of the currently open
design, if the currently open design has an abstraction.
• When running “Convert Nets to Wires” on a build list, if the design has no abstraction,
then all designs in the build list will be processed.
Shield Termination Conversion

On running Convert Nets to Wires, the Shield Terminations are handled in several different
ways depending on how the nets are converted to wires:
• Converting Simple Shield Terminations
• Daisy Chains
• Shield Cannot be Created
Converting Simple Shield Terminations

On running Convert Nets to Wires net multicores are removed and new wire multicores are
created. Any Shield Terminations on the original multicores are removed and a new shields are
added at the default position.
In the example in Figure 7-4, the net multicore has SHIELD1 on devices DEV1307 and
DEV1310.
Procedure
On running Convert Nets to Wires, the result as in Figure 7-5 shows that separate shields,
SHIELD25 and SHIELD26 have been created for the newly created multicores MC214 and
MC215

February 2016
Daisy Chains
Figure 7-4. Simple Shield - Pre
Figure 7-5. Simple Shield - Post
Daisy Chains
On running Convert Nets to Wires, daisy chains are removed and a new shield is added in their
place, between the new indicator and original pin.

February 2016
Daisy Chains
Procedure
1. In the examples below, the daisy chain from MC400 to MC399 in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6. Daisy Chain - Pre
2. Is replaced in Figure 7-7by a shield termination on running Convert Nets to Wires

Figure 7-7. Daisy Chain - Post

February 2016
Shield Cannot be Created
3. Multiple multicore indicators can be selected and daisy chained together in one action.
See “Connect Indicators with Daisy Chain” on page 299, for full details.
Shield Cannot be Created

There may be cases when new shields are not able to be created, for instance where the original
indicator, to which the shield was connected, has been split into two new multicores after
conversion. As both new indicators could be equally eligible for shield placement any shield
terminations connected to such indicators will be ignored and a message displayed in the
console window.
In the example in Figure 7-8below, SHIELD302 on DEV1599 connects to the indicator on
MC499 Indicator.
Procedure
1. After running Convert Nets to Wires the indicator that SHIELD302 on DEV1599, was
connected to, MC499, now spans different multicores and no shield is placed. See
Figure 7-8below.
Figure 7-8. Shield Not Created- Pre

February 2016
Excluding Net Conductors from the Conversion to Wire Conductors
Figure 7-9. Shield Not Created - Post
2. Instead, a warning is displayed in the console advising this fact. The shield has to be
placed manually.
Related Topics
Rules and Constraints
Excluding Net Conductors from the

Conversion to Wire Conductors
This topic details how to use the Exclude Nets or Multicores from the Nets to Wires
conversion constraint to exclude specific net conductors and/or multicores from the action for
converting net conductors to wire conductors (by pressing Space Bar and entering Nets to
Wires. You use constraints applied to designs to do this.
Note
Constraints can be bundled into rules that can be set on objects. See “Rules and Constraints”
on page 469 for further information about creating rules.

February 2016
Procedure
Caution
When running the Convert Nets to Wires action on a build list, it is strongly
recommended that all designs participating in the build list have the same constraints
applied to them. Otherwise, this could lead to unpredictable results, especially regarding
the conversion of shared objects.
1. Right-click on the design in the Project Browser Window; the Edit Design Dialog is
displayed.
2. Click Properties; the Edit Design Properties Dialog is displayed.
3. Click the Rules tab and click the Add Constraint button; the Constraint Selection
dialog is displayed.
4. Select “Exclude Nets or Multicores from the Nets to Wires conversion” and click OK;
the constraint is added to the Edit Design Properties dialog.
5. Edit the constraint as required and click OK.
Note
If you want to exclude both nets and multicores from the action, you must apply at
least two constraints.
Results
• When you run the Nets to Wires action on the design or a build list containing the
design, the nets or multicores that match any of these constraints are excluded from the
action in this design.
Note
If Net to Wires constraints apply to multicores and a matching multicore is an inner
multicore (within a nested multicore), that multicore is not excluded from the
conversion. If a root multicore matches a constraint, all of the multicores and nets nested
inside it are excluded from the conversion.
Related Topics

February 2016
Highways
Highways
A highway represents multiple conductors (wires and/or nets) in a single graphical
representation.
Note
Highways are also known as tramways and raceways.
Figure 7-10. Example Highway
The example shows a highway named DOOR DRV.
A highway appears both graphically in a diagram and under a Highways node in the Design
Browser Window, under which the conductor interfaces interfacing with it are listed.
When filtering is applied to a diagram, a highway is filtered out if all conductors interfacing
with it are filtered out.
When highway functionality is described in this document, the word termination is used to
describe a conductor termination with an object other than the highway. The word interface is
used to describe the connection point between the highway and a conductor instance.
A highway can have multiple instances within a design or in another design (making the
highway a Design Wide Object). If you want to create a highway connection between designs,
then you can share a highway to achieve this. In either case, cross-references are supported as
on other diagram objects (see “Cross-References on Objects” on page 199) and you can use the
View Related Items functionality to view other instances (see “Viewing Another Instance of an
Object” on page 203).

February 2016
Highway/Conductor Interfaces
If you copy and paste a highway on its own, you will create a new highway (not another
instance of the same highway) and no interfacing conductors are copied with it. See “Copying
Objects” on page 129. Similarly, if you move a highway on its own, no interfacing conductors
are moved with it.
Highway/Conductor Interfaces
Conductors interface (connect) with a highway.
When doing this, conductors are used as a Design Wide Object (that is, they are non-shared but
have multiple instances).
Even if a conductor belongs to a multicore or overbraid, it can interface with a highway.
A mixture of nets and wires can interface with one highway.
A single conductor instance can interface with one highway at one end and with another
highway at the other end and multiple instances of a conductor can interface with different
highways.
A shared conductor can interface with a non-shared highway (without the highway becoming
shared) and a non-shared conductor can interface with a shared highway.
A conductor can have also have multiple interface points with a highway. For example:
Figure 7-11. Example of Multiple Highway/Conductor Interfaces
In this example, there highway/conductor interfaces are visible for Wire1.
After a highway/connector interface has been created, you can drag it along the highway
segment to adjust its position.
Related Topics
Adding a Highway
Adding a New Branch to a Highway
Moving a Highway Section

February 2016
Adding a Highway
Editing a Highway
Deleting a Highway Section
Interfacing a Conductor with a Highway
Routing Existing Conductors into a Highway
Removing a Conductor from a Highway
Unrouting Selected Conductors from a Highway
Unrouting all Conductors from a Highway
Sharing a Highway
Unsharing a Highway Instance
Adding a Highway
This topic details how to add (create) a new highway in a diagram.
Procedure
2. Position the mouse cursor over the grid point where you want to place the first end of the
highway. Note that if you place it on an existing highway, a connection is made
automatically and the added segments become part of the existing highway.
Note
You can define segments in a highway by dragging the line, clicking once, and
dragging the line in a new direction.
4. Position the mouse cursor over the grid point where you want to place the other end of
the highway and double-click. Note again that if you place it on an existing highway, a
connection is made automatically and the added segments become part of the existing
highway.
Results
• If the new highways segments are attached to an existing highway, they become part of
the existing highway. No new highway is created.
Related Topics
Highways

February 2016

Editing a Highway
Sharing a Highway

This topic details how to add (create) a new branch to an existing highway in a diagram.
Procedure
2. Position the mouse cursor over the existing highway point where you want to place the
first end of the new branch.
Note
You can define segments in a highway by dragging the line, clicking once, and
the highway branch and double-click. Note again that if you place it on an existing
highway, a connection is made automatically and all connected segments become part of
the other highway.
Results
• If the new branch connects the highway to another highway, all connected segments
become part of the other highway.

February 2016
Related Topics
Highways
Adding a Highway
Editing a Highway
Sharing a Highway

This topic details how to move or stretch a highway section on a topology diagram.
Note that you can also add Grip Points to a harness and use them to move sections.
Procedure
In the diagram, either:
• Click a highway section, hold down the mouse button and drag the highway section
• Click the end of a highway section, hold down the mouse button and drag the end of
the highway section
Results
• If you have dragged a whole highway section, the selected highway section moves to the
new location.
• If you have dragged the end of a highway section, the section moves or changes length
as required.
• Any other highway sections connected to the highway section move or change length as
required to maintain the connection.
• If you have dragged an end of a highway section over another highway section, a
connection is created.

February 2016
Editing a Highway
• If you have dragged an end of a highway section over a highway section from a separate
highway, the highway being moved merges into the other highway. In the Design
Browser Window, the highway being moved is no longer displayed and its conductors
are displayed under the other highway.
Related Topics
Highways
Adding a Highway
Editing a Highway
Sharing a Highway
Editing a Highway
This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of a highway on a topology design.
Procedure
1. Select the highway to be edited.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the bundle
The Edit Properties: Highway Dialog is displayed.
3. Make any changes required to the highway attributes and/or properties.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Highways

February 2016
Adding a Highway
Sharing a Highway

This topic details how to delete a highway section.
Procedure
1. In the Diagram Window, select the highway section.
2. Either:
• Right-click on the selected section and select Delete
Results
• The highway section is removed from the Diagram Window.
• If the section is in the middle of a highway, the highway splits into two highways. In the
Design Browser Window, a new highway is listed and the correct conductors are listed
below it.
Related Topics
Highways
Adding a Highway
Editing a Highway

February 2016

Sharing a Highway

This topic details how to delete an entire highway from a diagram.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser Window, select the highway.
2. Either:
• Right-click on the selected highway and select Delete
Results
• All sections of the highway are removed from the Diagram Window but the interfacing
conductor instances remain.
• The highway is no longer listed in the Design Browser Window.
Related Topics
Highways
Adding a Highway
Editing a Highway
Sharing a Highway

February 2016

This topic details how to interface (connect) a conductor with a highway.
When doing this, you create Highway/Conductor Interfaces and conductors are used as a
Design Wide Object (that is, they are non-shared but have multiple instances).
Prerequisites
• The highway must exist. See “Adding a Highway” on page 318.
Procedure
1. Create the first interface (entrance/exit point) between the conductor and the highway.
To do this, use the normal functionality for adding the relevant type of conductor to
initiate the add action (for example, press Space Bar and enter Add Wire). While adding
the conductor place one end on the highway; an instance of the conductor is created in
the diagram and is listed under the highway and under Conductors in the Design
Browser Window.
2. If required, create a second interface (entrance/exit point) between the conductor and the
highway.
To do this, double-click the conductor in the Design Browser Window and add the
second instance to the diagram, placing one end at the appropriate point on the highway.
Note
You can also move or stretch the end of a conductor to a point on the highway; this
will create an interface between them.
Results
• The conductor is listed under the highway in the Design Browser Window.
Related Topics
Highways

This topic details how to route one or more existing conductors into a highway.

February 2016
When doing this, you create Highway/Conductor Interfaces and conductors are used as a
Design Wide Object (that is, they are non-shared but have multiple instances).
Prerequisites
• The conductors must exist.
• The highway must exist. See “Adding a Highway” on page 318.
Procedure
In the diagram window, select the conductors (or conductor segments) and the highway into
which you want to route them and either:
• press Space Bar and enter Route into Highway

• right-click on a selected item and select Route into Highway
Results
• The conductors are routed into the highway using the shortest routes possible.
• The conductors are listed under the highway in the Design Browser Window.
• If required, the system creates a new design wide instance or shared instance of a
conductor.
Related Topics
Highways

This topic details how to remove a conductor from a highway. You do this by deleting the
instances of the conductor that interface with the highway.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser Window or diagram window, select the instances of the
conductor that interface with the highway.
2. Either:
• Right-click on a selected instances and select Delete

February 2016

Results
• The selected instances are removed from the Design Browser Window and diagram
window.
• Unselected instances of the conductor remain in the Design Browser Window and
diagram window.
• If all instances of the conductor have been deleted, the parent node for the conductor is
deleted from the Design Browser Window.
• The highway remains in the Design Browser Window and diagram window.
Related Topics
Highways

This topic details how to unroute one or more conductors from a highway so that they no longer
interface with the highway but still exist on the diagram.
Procedure
In the Design Browser Window or diagram window, select the conductor instances that you
want to unroute from the highway and either:
• press Space Bar and enter Un-route

• right-click on a selected item and select Un-route
Results
• If the highway still interfaces with other conductors, it remains in the Design Browser
Window and diagram window. Otherwise, it is deleted.
• If a selected conductor interfaces only once with the highway, its route does not change
but it is disconnected from the highway.
• The selected conductors that entered and exited the highway are still drawn following
the grip points of the highway (overlaying each other). You can reroute them by
selecting them and pressing CTRL+R.

February 2016
Related Topics
Highways

This topic details how to unroute all conductors from a highway so that they no longer interface
with the highway but still exist on the diagram. The highway will no longer exist.
Procedure
In the Design Browser Window or diagram window, select the highway and either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Un-route

• Right-click on a selected item and select Un-route
Results
• The highway is deleted.
• If a conductor interfaced once with the highway, its route does not change.
• The conductors that entered and exited the highway are still drawn following the grip
points of the highway (overlaying each other). You can reroute them by selecting them
and pressing CTRL+R.
Related Topics
Highways
Sharing a Highway
This topic explains how to share a highway.
See “Adding a Shared Device/Connector/Splice to a Diagram” on page 186 for further
information about how shared objects are used.

February 2016
Procedure
1. Either:
• Right-click on the highway in the Design Browser Window or diagram and select
Share
• Select the highway, press Space Bar and enter Share
2. If the highway has the same name as an existing shared highway, a message asks to
decide whether you want to create a new shared highway with that same name, whether
you want to use the existing shared highway or whether you want to cancel the action.
Results
• After you share an object, it is added to the Shared Objects Browser Window and can be
used elsewhere.
• Conductors interfacing with the highway are not shared automatically. You must share
them manually.
• Shared conductors that interface with the shared highway are listed below it in the
Shared Objects Browser Window. Non-shared conductors that interface with it will not
be listed in that window but will still be listed below it in the Design Browser Window.
Related Topics
Highways
Adding a Highway
Editing a Highway

This topic explains how to unshare a shared highway.
See “Adding a Shared Device/Connector/Splice to a Diagram” on page 186 for further
information about how shared objects are used.

February 2016
Procedure
1. Either:
• Right-click on the highway in the Design Browser Window or diagram and select
Unshare
• Press Space Bar and enter Unshare
The Name Local Highway dialog is displayed.
2. Specify a name for the unshared highway. You can click the ellipsis (...) button to select
a pre-configured name (if any exist).
3. Click OK.
Results
• The highway is unshared.
• Any shared conductors in the highway remain shared.
Related Topics
Highways
Adding a Highway
Editing a Highway
Sharing a Highway

February 2016
Edit Properties: Highway Dialog

To access: In the Design Browser Window or diagram window, select the highway to be edited
and either:
• Double-click on the highway (in the diagram window only)
Used to edit the attributes and properties of a highway.
Objects
Table 7-1. Edit Properties: Highway Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the highway, which defaults to HW
from a list of pre-specified highway names maintained in the
project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. Select
Fixed if you want the name to be fixed. The contents of this
current project. Select the Visible option to display the name
next to the highway on the diagram. Click to display the
Edit Name Text Attributes dialog where you can specify how
the name is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text
Attributes for an Object” on page 439). Mandatory.
Short Description Enter a line of descriptive text to provide more information
about the highway. Select the Visible option to display the
short description next to the highway on the diagram. Click
to display the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog where you
can specify how the short description is displayed on the
diagram (see “Editing Text Attributes for an Object” on
page 439). Optional.

February 2016
Table 7-1. Edit Properties: Highway Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the highway, click the New button, enter a
following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the highway graphic to appear on the
diagram.

February 2016

Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the highway. Select the color
from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the
right of the field. As well as color names, the list contains the
following options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016

Field Description
Mandatory.
list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the highway. To use the default
Mandatory.

February 2016

Field Description
Secondary Color If the line style is a broken line, this specifies the second color
used in the lines of the highway. Select the color from the
dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the right of the
field. As well as color names, the list contains the following
options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.
Related Topics
Editing a Highway

February 2016
Chapter 8
Symbols
This section details how to add, update and manage symbols that are available for use on design
diagrams.
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram as a Non-Intelligent Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Updating Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Composite Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Updating a Symbol Block in a Composite Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Replacing Composite Symbols for Shared Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Replacing a Symbol with a Compatible Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Saving Diagram Objects as a Device Symbol (Bookshelf Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Help Button Landing Pages for Symbols Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Update Symbol - Options Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Map Pins (for Symbol) Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram

This topic details how to add a symbol from a symbol library as an intelligent object to a
diagram.
Procedure
1. Double-click the symbol name in the Symbol Browser Window or double-click the
symbol graphic in the Symbol Preview Window. Alternatively, click on the symbol
name in the Symbol Browser Window, press Space Bar and enter Symbol.
2. Move the mouse cursor over the Diagram Window. The symbol graphic is visible near
the mouse cursor. Use the mouse to drag the symbol graphic to the location where you
want to add it.
Note

February 2016
Symbols
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram as a Non-Intelligent Graphical Shape
3. Click the location to add the symbol graphic. If you place it directly on a pin, connector
or device, the symbol is automatically associated with that object (that means, if the
object is moved, the symbol moves with it).
Note
You can only modify the General and Graphical properties of a symbol graphic in
Capital Logic. See “Editing the Properties of Objects” on page 403. You cannot
scale a symbol from within Capital Logic. If you want to modify the symbol graphic
further, you must use Symbol Editor and then update the symbol graphics in the
diagram. See “Updating Symbols” on page 337.
Related Topics
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram as a Non-Intelligent Graphical Shape
Symbol Browser Window
Adding a Symbol to a Diagram as a Non-

Intelligent Graphical Shape
This topic details how to add a symbol as non-intelligent, graphical shapes and text to a
diagram. The graphical shapes comprising the symbol are placed as grouped graphics that can
be ungrouped if required.
Procedure
1. Select the symbol in the Symbol Browser Window and right-click the symbol name and
select Place Symbol As Graphics.
Alternatively, do not select a symbol in the Symbol Browser Window, but press Space
Bar and enter Place Symbol As Graphics.
For the last option, the Symbol Selection Dialog is displayed in which you select the
symbol to be added. Click OK to exit the dialog.
2. Move the mouse cursor over the Diagram Window. The symbol graphic is visible near
the mouse cursor. Use the mouse to drag the symbol graphic to the location where you
want to add it and click OK.
Note
Results
• The symbol is added to the diagram as grouped graphical objects.

February 2016
Symbols
Updating Symbols
• If you place it directly on a pin, connector or device, the symbol is automatically

associated with that object (that means, if the object is moved, the symbol moves with
it).
Related Topics
Updating Symbols
If a symbol has been updated in a symbol library, you may want to update that symbol where it
has been used in diagrams already. This update not only updates the graphic but also the fixed
properties of the symbol.
If a symbol in a diagram is controlled by a library part, you must update the library part on that
object instance in the diagram in order to update the symbol.
Procedure
1. Right-click the symbol instance in the Diagram Window or in the Design Browser
Window.
Note
If you want to update multiple symbol instances, hold down the Shift key on your
keyboard and click the symbol instances to select them. Once you have selected the
symbol instances, right-click one of the selected instances. If a symbol has been used
more than once in a diagram, you must select every instance that you want to update. If
you select only one instance of the symbol, only that instance is updated.
2. A pop-up menu is displayed. Select Update Symbol from the pop-up menu.
Alternatively, you can click the symbol, press Space Bar and enter Update Symbol.
The Update Symbol - Options Dialog is displayed.
3. Select the options as required and click OK; the symbol instances are updated to the
latest version.

February 2016
Symbols
Composite Symbol
Composite Symbol
A composite symbol represents an electrical device containing one or more blocks. The blocks
are represented by nested device symbols that also exist within Capital Symbol as individually-
selectable symbols. The complete composite may also contain optional internal connectivity
and cross-reference placeholders.
When placing a composite symbol in Capital Logic, you have the choice of placing the
complete composite or any of the sub-blocks. If you place the complete composite, the placed
graphics will match the composite symbol. If you place one of the sub-blocks, the placed
graphic will match the original sub-block symbol. If you then want to place a second instance
(or nth instance) of the device, you can again choose to place either the complete composite or
one of the sub-blocks.
Note
If the project preference Disallow pin duplication within a design is set, you cannot place
the composite and a sub block together as this would create duplicate instances of the same
pin. To allow such placement, the project preference Disallow pin duplication within a design
should be unset.
The composite symbol can be used as a plug map that you use to create a shared pin list for a
device in Capital Project. See the Capital Project help system for more information. Note that
when you set whether pins are reserved or reusable, the pins on an individual block must all be
reusable or all reserved for the same designs.
When you add the shared device to a diagram in Capital Logic, the blocks can be used to refine
the selection of pins and to enable you to place a more specific symbol representing the pins in
that instance on the diagram. See“Adding a Shared Device/Connector/Splice to a Diagram” on
See “Cross-References on Objects” on page 199 for more information about how cross-
references work with composite symbols.
From Capital Logic, you can change the composite symbol that is used for a shared device.
Updating a Symbol Block in a Composite Symbol

If a symbol that has been used as a symbol block in a composite symbol is modified, you must
manually update any instances of the symbol block in composite symbols in Capital Symbol
and in Capital Logic.
The instances can only be updated if the number of pins on the symbol used as the symbol block
have not changed. If the number of pins has changed, then you must delete the symbol block
from the composite symbol and add the symbol block again in Capital Symbol. You must then
update any instances of the composite symbol in Capital Logic.

February 2016
Symbols
Replacing Composite Symbols for Shared Devices
Procedure
1. After the changes to the symbol block have been saved, open the diagram window for
the composite symbol in Capital Symbol or the diagram window containing the instance
of the composite symbol in Capital Logic. Right-click on the instance of the symbol
block and select the Update Instances option from the pop-up menu. If more than one
symbol block has been changed, you can select all of the symbol blocks at the same
time.
Alternatively, you can select the symbol blocks to be updated, press Space Bar and enter
Update Symbol.
2. The symbol block is updated in the composite symbol. If the number of pins on the
symbol used as the symbol block has changed, the instance is not updated.

From Capital Logic, you can replace the composite symbol that has been used for a shared
device. You cannot replace the composite symbol that has been used for a shared connector.
You may want to replace a symbol with one that contains more blocks. For example, you may
have been using a switch pack with 5 switches but now want to use a switch pack with 10
switches. Alternatively, you may want to replace a symbol with one with fewer blocks because
blocks have not been used from the first composite symbol.
Properties on the shared pin list for the shared device will be preserved after replacing the
symbol.
There are a number of pre-requisites that must be met before you can perform this action:
• Designs must be editable (not released).

• The shared device must reference only one composite symbol.
• Both symbols involved in the replacement must be their latest version.
• The shared device must not be frozen.
• The shared device must not have a library part assigned to it.
• The new (target) symbol must contain symbol blocks that are the same as any used
symbol blocks from the previously used composite symbol.
• If pins will be removed from the shared object (that is, when a block is removed), there
must not be any 'non-reference' usages of those pins.

February 2016
Symbols
Procedure
1. Right-click on the device in the Shared Objects Browser Window and select the Replace
Shared Composite option from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, click on the device,
press Space Bar and enter Replace Shared Composite.
2. The Replace Shared Composite facility is displayed.
The Source Composite area shows the name of the shared device, the symbol library
where the current symbol is stored and the name of the symbol that is currently used.
The current symbol is displayed below those details.
The Target Symbol Selection enables you to navigate to the composite symbol that you
now want to use. When you select a symbol, it is displayed in the window below the
symbol libraries tree.
Select the composite symbol that you want to use by clicking on it in the tree.
3. On the Resulting Action tab, the actions that will result from replacing the composite
symbol are displayed.
4. On the Mapping tab, the symbol blocks from the previously used symbol are displayed
in the Source window, the symbol blocks from the new symbol are displayed in the
Target window. If you hold the mouse cursor over the name of a symbol block, the
names of the pins on the block are displayed.
You must associate the blocks from the previously used symbol with the blocks on the
new symbol. Associated blocks are displayed in bold. Blocks in italics must be mapped
for the action to continue (these are blocks that have instances).
When you select a new symbol, similar blocks are associated automatically. You can
disassociate all blocks by clicking the Disassociate All button. To disassociate one
target symbol block, click on it in the Target window and click the Disassociate button.
To associate all of the previously used symbol blocks click the Associate All button. To
associate one previously used symbol block, click on it in the Source window, click on
the target block in the Target window and click the Associate button.
5. Click the OK button to replace the symbol. The symbol blocks and composite symbols
on the diagrams are updated accordingly.
Related Topics
Map Pins Dialog (for Symbol)
Updating Symbols
Update Symbol - Options Dialog
Replacing a Symbol with a Compatible Symbol

February 2016
Symbols

You can replace a symbol in a diagram with a compatible symbol. That is, a symbol with a
compatible interface that does not change the logical connectivity of the diagram.
If a symbol in a diagram is controlled by a library part, you cannot replace the symbol within
Capital Logic. You can only replace the symbol in the diagram if the symbol associated with the
library part in Capital Library has been modified. In this case, you must update the library part
information for that object.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object represented by the current symbol either in the diagram or in
the Design Browser Window and select the Replace Symbol option from the pop-up
menu. Alternatively, click on the object represented by the symbol, press Space Bar and
enter Replace Symbol.
2. The Select Symbol dialog is displayed. In the browser tree, select the symbol that you
want to use as the replacement symbol and click the OK button. When you select a
symbol, it is displayed in a preview window. The OK button is enabled only if the
symbol is compatible with the current symbol.
The Map Pins Dialog (for Symbol) is displayed.
3. Map the pins from the replacement symbol to pins on the symbol instance and specify
what data on the symbol instance you want to preserve.
4. The new symbol replaces the old symbol.
Saving Diagram Objects as a Device Symbol

(Bookshelf Circuit)
This topic explains how to save selected, connected electrical objects and comment graphics in
a diagram as a device symbol (also known as a bookshelf circuit). The symbol is a single
composite symbol with internal connectivity within Capital Symbol.
Prerequisites
• Your user account must have the Symbol Library permission.
Procedure
1. In the diagram window, select the objects and comment graphics that you want to be
included in the symbol, press Space Bar and enter Save As Device Symbol; the New
Library dialog is displayed.
2. Specify the name of a new symbol library that will contain the symbol and click OK;
Capital Symbol opens and displays the new symbol library and symbol.

February 2016
Symbols
Saving Diagram Objects as a Device Symbol (Bookshelf Circuit)
Results
• The new symbol library contains device symbols and a composite device symbol. The
names of these are inherited from the names of the selected devices.
• The composite includes the selected devices with internal connectivity (links) that
represents the selected wires/nets/splices.
• The graphics of the composite symbol include any comment graphics, text and comment
symbols from the selected objects.
• The blocks within the composite symbol retain their attached analysis models.
Note
This is only applicable if normal symbols are used in the original selection. If a
composite symbol has been included in the original selection, then any analysis
model associated with that symbol will not be propagated to the new composite symbol.
• The following objects are included in the composite symbol:

o Parameterized devices (become graphics rectangles in the composite symbol and
maintain any properties)
o Symbol devices (become blocks in the composite symbol and maintain any
properties)
o Ground symbols (become blocks in the composite symbol
o Nets and wires (become links in the composite symbol with additional comment
graphics to maintain the final representation within the tool.)
o Splices (become ‘link + internal pin + graphics of a fill circle’ in the composite
symbol
o All types of comment graphics and texts (note that graphic attributes such as line
thickness and color are retained)
o Comment symbols
• The following objects are not included in the symbol and cannot be part of the selection
before attempting this action, else the action is disabled.
Connectors, multicore indicators, overbraids, shield terminations, highways, backshells,
stacked pins, daisy chains, reference pins, dangling nets and assemblies (including any
associated graphics).
• If more than one conductor segment intersect at the same point in the selection, an
internal pin is created.
• If more than one instance of a single device is selected, a separate symbol is created for
each instance.

February 2016
Symbols
Saving Diagram Objects as a Device Symbol (Bookshelf Circuit)
• If more than one instance of a single conductor is selected, a separate internal link is
created for each instance.

February 2016
Symbols
Help Button Landing Pages for Symbols Dialog Boxes
Help Button Landing Pages for Symbols

Dialog Boxes
in the software.
Update Symbol - Options Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Map Pins (for Symbol) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Update Symbol - Options Help

• Updating Symbols
• The Update Symbol - Options Dialog fields
Update Symbol - Options Dialog

To Access: right-click on a symbol on the diagram and selecting Update Symbol.
Used to control the source of symbol properties and/or attributes when updating a symbol.
• Preserve Diagram Pin Position
Select this if you want the pins on the symbol instance to remain where they are in the
diagram already. Optional.
• Remove Properties not on Symbol
With this option selected, any properties applied to the comment symbol on the design
are removed during the update if they do not exist in the original symbol definition.
Optional.
• Copy Attribute/Property Values from Symbol
With this option selected, where properties with matching names, but different values,
exist on both the symbol instance and the original symbol definition, the instance values
are updated with the values from the original symbol. Optional.
• Preserve Attribute Text
Select this if you want to maintain the visibility of the object attributes on the diagram. If
you do not select this, they will no longer be displayed. Optional.
• Preserve Pin Names

February 2016
Symbols
Map Pins (for Symbol) Help
Select this if you want to maintain any pin names that have been changed manually on
the diagram. If you do not select this, they will be replaced with pin names from the
symbol library. Optional.
Map Pins (for Symbol) Help

• Replacing a Symbol with a Compatible Symbol
• The Map Pins Dialog (for Symbol) fields

Displayed when replacing a symbol instance with a symbol that has a different number of pins
(either when using the Replace Symbol action or when updating a library part on an object.
Used to map pins on a symbol to pins on a symbol instance when you replace a symbol in a
diagram.
• Symbol pins
Lists the pins on the replacement symbol. Unmapped pins are displayed bold. You must
associate pins from this with Instance pins either by clicking Associate All to create
automatic mappings or by selecting one pin from each list and clicking Associate.
Displayed when using the Replace Symbol action.
• Library part
Lists the pins on the library part. Unmapped pins are displayed bold. You must associate
pins from this with Instance pins either by clicking Associate All to create automatic
mappings or by selecting one pin from each list and clicking Associate. Displayed when
updating a library part.
• Instance pins
Lists the pins on the symbol instance in the diagram. Unmapped pins are displayed bold.
You must associate pins from this with Symbol pins or Library part pins either by
clicking Associate All to create automatic mappings or by selecting one pin from each
list and clicking Associate.
• Associate
Creates a mapping between a pin on the replacement symbol and a pin on the symbol
instance. Select one pin from Instance pins and one pin from Symbol pins or Library
part pins and click this to create a mapping.
• Associate All

February 2016
Symbols
Creates an automatic mapping for each of the Symbol pins or Library part pins to the
Instance pins. This is not available if some pins have been mapped already.
• Disassociate
Unmaps a pin on the replacement symbol from a pin on the symbol instance. Select one
of the mapped pins from either Instance pins, Symbol pins or Library part and click this
to unmap them.
• Disassociate All
Unmaps all of the Symbol pins or Library part pins and Instance pins.
• Changes
Lists the changes that will be made to the symbol instance when you click OK.
• Preserve Diagram Pin Position
Select this if you want the pins on the symbol instance to remain where they are in the
diagram already.
Select this if you want to remove any properties from the symbol instance that are not on
the symbol in the symbol library. Displayed when using the Replace Symbol action.
Select this if you want to copy any properties and attributes that are on the symbol in the
symbol library to the symbol instance. Displayed when using the Replace Symbol action.
Select this if you want to maintain the visibility of the object attributes on the diagram. If
you do not select this, they will no longer be displayed. Displayed when using the
Replace Symbol action.
• Preserve Pin Names
Select this if you want to maintain any pin names that have been changed manually on
the diagram. If you do not select this, they will be replaced with pin names from the
symbol library. Displayed when using the Replace Symbol action.

February 2016
Chapter 9
Printing
The Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide contains full details of the
options available for configuring Projects, Designs, Print Regions and Diagrams for Printing
and Printing to a File.
Available Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Available Topics
The following topics are available:
Printing
These topics detail how to select one or more diagrams to be sent to a printer or plotter, either
installed on the local machine or available on the network.
Printing to a File
These topics detail how Print to File can export the design data from one or more diagrams to
either PDF, DXF, CGM or SVG format.
Using Print Regions
These topics detail how to add print regions to a design, with additional topics on resizing,
moving and editing print regions once created:
Printing Dialogs
This section offers a description of all dialogs related to printing functions. For each dialog, all
fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.

February 2016
Printing
Available Topics

February 2016
Chapter 10
Reports
This section details the reports available, and explains the options available to configure and
style your own reports.
Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Reporting on Single Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Saving a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Using the Report Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

February 2016
Reports
Generating Reports
Generating Reports
The following topics detail how to select one or more designs as the basis for a report, then to
generate a report using one of the default types before saving or printing the results:
Reporting on Single Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Saving a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Available Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Reporting on Single Designs

This topic details how to generate a report from one or more open designs.
Procedure
1. With one or more diagrams open, press Space Bar and enter Reports. The Reports dialog
is displayed, with all open designs listed on the Logic Design tab.
2. Select the design(s) upon which you want to base the report. The list supports the
Multiple Selection of designs.
3. Select the report type to generate (see “Available Reports” on page 353 for a full list of
the available types).
4. Click View Report. The report is displayed in a new window.
Related Topics
Reporting on a Build List
Saving a Report
Printing a Report

This topic details how to generate a report from one or more logical build lists.
Procedure
1. With one or more diagrams open, press Space Bar and enter Reports. The Reports dialog
is displayed.
2. Switch to the Build List tab, which displays all logical build lists belonging to the
current project.

February 2016
Reports
Saving a Report
3. Select the build list(s) upon which you want to base the report. The list supports the
Multiple Selection of build lists.
4. Select the report type to generate (see “Available Reports” on page 353 for a full list of
the available types).
5. Click View Report. The report is displayed in a new window.
Related Topics
Saving a Report
Printing a Report
Saving a Report
This topic details how to save the results from a report as an html file, which can be viewed in
any internet browser.
Procedure
1. Generate the report, following the steps detailed in “Reporting on Single Designs” on
page 350 or “Reporting on a Build List” on page 350.
2. Click Save Report. A generic Save dialog is displayed.
3. Enter a File name for the report, and specify the location in which to save it before
clicking Save.
Related Topics
Printing a Report
Printing a Report
This topic details how to send the results from a report to a printer, either installed on the local
machine or available on the network.
Procedure
1. Generate the report, following the steps detailed in “Reporting on Single Designs” on
page 350 or “Reporting on a Build List” on page 350.
2. Click Print. A generic Print dialog is displayed.

February 2016
Reports
Printing a Report
3. Configure the printout as required before clicking OK. The report is sent to the specified
printer.
Related Topics
Saving a Report

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
Available Reports
The following reports are available by default:
For information on adding your own reports and styling the appearance of the default report
types, see “Custom Reports” on page 363.
Assembly BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Component BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Custom Logic Wire List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Multicore List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Net List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Shared Object Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Wire List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Configured Wire List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Assembly BOM
This report lists all assemblies used on the selected design(s), along with a breakdown of each
assembly’s contents. For each assembly, the following information is displayed:
• Part Number
The unique number identifying the assembly.
• Quantity
The number of times the assembly is used on the design.
• Assembly Contents
The constituent parts of each assembly are listed individually.
o Part Number
The unique number identifying the component.
o Quantity
The number of times the component is used within the assembly.
Component BOM
This report lists all library components used on the selected design(s), along with the number of
each component used. For each component, the following information is displayed:
• Part Number

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
The unique number identifying the library component.

• Quantity
The number of times the library part is used on the selected design(s).
Custom Logic Wire List

On selecting this option you are presented with a list of checkboxes that enable you customize
the wire list report.
For each wire, the following checkboxes may be selected to appear on the report:
Attributes or Properties of Wire

• Name
The name assigned to the wire in Capital Logic.
• Description
Any descriptive text entered into the design’s Description field.
Any short description entered against the design.
• Wire CSA
The cross-sectional area of the wire.
• Wire Length
The length of the wire.
• Wire Specification
The wire specification.
• Architectural Cost
The architectural cost of the wire.
• Assembly
The assembly the wire is part of.
• Customer Name
The unique name used to identify the component to the customer.
• Customer Part Number
The unique number used to identify the component to the customer.

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
• Default Name
The default name of the wire within the selected design.
• Design
The name of the design.
• Design Abstraction
The abstraction(s) assigned to the design.
• Generated Name
The generated name of the wire on the diagram.
• Harness
The name of the harness in which the wires exist.
• Included On BOM
Indicates if the wire is included on the bill of materials.
• Included On Cut Chart
Indicates if the wire is included on the cut chart.
• Length Change Type
Specifies the Length Change Type is applied to the wire: Neither; Absolute or Offset.
• Length Change Value
Specifies a value used to override the calculated wire length, based on the Length
Change Type.
• MCAD ID
If the harness was bridged in from an MCAD application, this field displays the
component's unique identifier as derived from the external data.
• Modified Length
The modified length of the wire.
• Multicore
The name of any multicore to which the wire belongs.
• Name Overridden
The previous name of the wire if it has been overridden.
• Option Expression
The options applied to the wire.

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
• Outside Diameter
Specifies the outside diameter of the wire.
• Part Number
The part number of any library part associated with the wire.
• Poke Home
Indicates if the wire is poke home wire, connected during installation.
• Revision
The design revision.
• Status
The release status of the design.
• Supplier Name
The name of the supplier from which the component is sourced.
• Supplier Part Number
The number used by your supplier to identify the component.
• Terminal Material Code
The terminal material code applied to the end of the wire.
• Type Code
The component type, as defined within the library.
• Unmodified Length
The unmodified length of the wire.
• Wire Color
The color of the wire.
• Weight
The total weight of the harness.
• Wire Material
The material from which the wire is manufactured.
• Wire Note
Any additional information recorded against this wire.
• Attributes

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
Lists the attributes of the wire applicable for the Capital Logic design, together with a
text box to specify your required attribute. You can enter more than one attribute using a
semi-colon separated list.
• Properties
Lists the properties of the wire applicable for the Capital Logic design, together with a
text box to specify your required property. You can enter more than one property using a
semi-colon separated list.
• Reset
Resets all attributes and properties to their previous state prior to starting modifications.
• Clear
Clears all attributes and properties
From Wire End Attributes

• From Component Name
Lists the component name applicable for the start of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• From Component Option
Lists the component option applicable for the start of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• From Connector Name
Lists the connector name applicable for the start of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• From Harness Connector Part Number
Lists the harness connector part number applicable for the start of a wire in Capital
Logic Designs.
• From Pin Name
Lists the pin name details applicable for the start of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• From Pin Option
Lists the pin option details applicable for the start of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• From Mated Pin Name
Lists the mated pin name details applicable for the start of a wire in Capital Logic
Designs.
• From Mated Pin Option
Lists the mated pin option details applicable for the start of a wire in Capital Logic
Designs.

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
To Wire End Attributes

• To Component Name
Lists the component name applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• To Component Option
Lists the component option applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• To Connector Name
Lists the connector name applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• To Harness Connector Part Number
Lists the harness connector part number applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic
Designs.
• To Pin Name
Lists the pin name details applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• To Pin Option
Lists the pin option details applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic Designs.
• To Mated Pin Name
Lists the mated pin name details applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic
Designs.
• To Mated Pin Option
Lists the mated pin option details applicable for the end of a wire in Capital Logic
Designs.
From Wire End Properties

• From Component Properties
Lists the component properties as entered in the text box for the start of a wire in Capital
Logic Designs.
• From Connector Properties
Lists the connector properties as entered in the text box for the start of a wire in Capital
Logic Designs.
• From Pin Properties
Lists the pin properties as entered in the text box for the start of a wire in Capital Logic
Designs.
• From Mated Pin Properties

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
Lists the mated pin properties as entered in the text box for the start of a wire in Capital
Logic Designs.
To Wire End Properties

• To Component Properties
Lists the component properties as entered in the text box for the end of a wire in Capital
Logic Designs.
• To Connector Properties
Lists the connector properties as entered in the text box for the end of a wire in Capital
Logic Designs.
• To Pin Properties
Lists the pin properties as entered in the text box for the end of a wire in Capital Logic
Designs.
• To Mated Pin Properties
Lists the mated pin properties as entered in the text box for the end of a wire in Capital
Logic Designs.
• Next
Click the Next button to confirm your selections and generate the report.
Multicore List
This report lists all multicores on the selected design(s). For each multicore, the following
information is displayed:
• Name
The unique identifier for the multicore within the selected design.
• Design
The design upon which the multicore appears.
• Part Number
The part number of any library part associated with the multicore.
• Multicore Contents
A listing of the wires and child multicores assigned to the multicore.
• Multicore Parent

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
If a multicore is nested as a child of another multicore, the parent “containing” multicore

is listed here.
• Overbraid?
Specifies whether the multicore has been applied to the diagram as an overbraid (Y) or
as a traditional multicore (N).
Net List
This report lists all nets on the selected design(s). For each net, the following information is
displayed:
• Net ID
The unique identifier for the net within the selected design.
• Component (Device/Connector) : Pin
The components and pins between which the net is connected.
Shared Object Usage

This report lists all shared object revisions used on the selected design(s). Reports can be
generated for shared objects such as conductors, devices and multicores. Depending on the type
of shared object that appears on the design the following information is displayed:
• Name
The name of the shared object.
• Part Number
The part number associated with the shared object.
• Description
The shared object’s library part description, as defined in Capital Library.
• Type
The shared object type, such plug, connector or splice and so on.
• Component
The component name in the report, such as device or splice and so on.
• Connector
The name of the connector to which conductors are connected.

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
Note
The default comment symbol for the connector assigned to the library part will also be
displayed, if defined.
• Pin
The name of the pin at which a wire is terminated.
• Design Revision
The Design Revision where conductors are present.
• Diagram
The name of the diagram.
• Zone
The zone in which the shared object appears on the diagram.
• Conductor
The conductors connected to the pin lists.
• PinMated / PinBackshell
The mated or backshell pin name details applicable in Capital Logic Designs.
Wire List
This report lists all wires on the selected design(s), along with the pins at which they are
terminated. For each wire, the following information is displayed:
• Name
The unique identifier for the wire within the selected design.
• Component 1
The name of the component at which end 1 of the wire is terminated.
• Connector 1
If the wire is terminated at the component identified in the Component 1 field, above,
via a connector, the connector is identified here.
• Pin 1
The name of the pin at which end 1 of the wire is terminated.
• Component 2

February 2016
Reports
Available Reports
• Connector 2
If the wire is terminated at the component identified in the Component 2 field, above,
via a connector, the connector is identified here.
• Pin 2
The name of the pin at which end 2 of the wire is terminated.
• Color
The color of the wire insulation.
• Length
The length value assigned to the wire, either by manually entering a wire length, or via
the bridging in of wire lengths from an MCAD application.
• Gauge
The cross-sectional area of the wire core.
Configured Wire List Report

The Configured Wire List report is defined by editing an XML configuration file located in the
reporter\templates\embedded sub-directory of your Capital installation directory. This allows
you to determine which entries appear on your wire list report.
Either a single report may be generated, or a combination of reports for Capital HarnessXC,
Capital Logic and Capital Integrator. For each wire any, or all, of the following information
may be displayed:
• Type
The type of report being generated. For Capital Logic this is specified as “Logic”.
• Attribute
This element displays the attribute value in the column title, for example “Name” -
listing the name attributes of the wire.
• Property
The property element displays the property value in the column title. for example
“Signal” - listing the signal properties of the wire.
• Wireendexpressions
This element contains all expressions listed below, that are applicable in a wire reports,
as well as the start and end fields of the wire.
• Component

February 2016
Reports
Using the Report Builder

• Connector
The connector at which end 1 of the wire is terminated.
• Pin
The name of the Pin1 connector cavity at which end 1 of the wire is terminated. The pin
element can have an additional attribute set; “mated” which means any mated pin option
details applicable will be listed in the report.
• Component
• Connector
The connector at which end 2 of the wire is terminated.
• Pin
The name of the Pin2 connector cavity at which end 2 of the wire is terminated. The pin
element can have an additional attribute set; “mated” which means any mated pin option
details applicable will be listed in the report.

Capital provides a dynamic report generator enabling you to quickly and easily specify, create
and modify customised reports. The Report Builder interface is intuitive and user-friendly,
offering control via icons and drag and drop functionality enabling the simple creation and
management of reports.
The reports are generated as plugins and can be made available, depending on your
requirements, as tables on diagrams, in Design Inspectors, for internal reports, and in Capital
Enterprise Reporter.
For further information see Using the Report Builder in the Capital Design Tools - Common
Custom Reports
The option is available to deploy custom reports using the Capital extensibility architecture,
adding reports of your own design as compiled plugins, which can then be accessed from within
the Reports dialog.
Note
The use of custom reports does not consume an extensibility license.

February 2016
Reports
Custom Reports
Custom report plugins are managed in the same way as all extensibility plugins; see
“Extensibility Plugins” on page 70 for more information.
For detailed information on the creation of custom report plugins, see the
CustomReportDevelopment.pdf document, located in the doc\plugin sub-directory of your
Capital installation directory.

February 2016
Chapter 11
Graphics
The following sections explain how to add and edit graphical shapes and graphical objects in a
diagram.
Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Adding a Border to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Replacing a Border on a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Removing a Border from a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Graphic Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Drawing an Arc in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes and Objects . . . . . . . . . . 378
Graphics Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Grip Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Adding a Grip Point to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Deleting a Grip Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Graphics Related Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Edit Border Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Add Text Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Image Selection Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

February 2016
Graphics
Symbol Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Help Button Landing Pages for Graphics Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Edit Border Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Add Text Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Image Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Symbol Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

February 2016
Graphics
Borders
Borders
The following topics explain how to add and edit the border in a diagram.
“Adding a Border to a Diagram” on page 367
“Replacing a Border on a Diagram” on page 367
“Removing a Border from a Diagram” on page 368
Adding a Border to a Diagram

This topic details how to add a border that has been created in Capital Symbol to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Border.
The Edit Border Dialog is displayed.
2. Browse through the border libraries in the Border Selection tree and select the border to
add to the diagram.
3. Click OK. The border is added to the diagram.
Related Topics
Replacing a Border on a Diagram
Removing a Border from a Diagram

This topic details how to replace a border that has been added to a diagram.
Procedure
2. Browse through the border libraries in the Border Selection tree and select the new
border to add to the diagram.
3. Click OK. The new border is added to the diagram.
Related Topics

February 2016
Graphics

This topic details how to remove a border that has been added to a diagram.
Procedure
2. Select [ No Border ] in the Border Selection tree.
3. Click OK. The border is removed from the diagram.
Related Topics

February 2016
Graphics
Graphic Drawing Tools
Graphic Drawing Tools

The following topics explain how to add and edit non-intelligent, graphical shapes and text to a
diagram. These design objects are considered comments and do not represent any electrical
connectivity.
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Drawing an Arc in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes and Objects . . . . . . . 378
Drawing a Line in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a line to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Line. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the line.
3. To insert a waypoint into the line, click once again on the diagram, otherwise, place the
second end of the line by double-clicking or by pressing the Enter key.

February 2016
Graphics
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram
Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to
start drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object
(that means, if the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).
Drawing a Rectangle in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a rectangle to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Rectangle. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the rectangle.
3. Click on the diagram to place the opposite corner of the rectangle.
Note
Drawing a Polygon in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a polygon to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Polygon. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the polygon.
3. Click once on the diagram to place further corners and double-click on the diagram or
press the Enter key to place the last corner.
Note

February 2016
Graphics
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram
Drawing a Circle in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a circle to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Circle. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the center of the circle.
3. Drag the cursor away from the center and click once on the diagram to place the edge of
the circle.
Note
Drawing an Arc in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add an arc to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Arc. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the arc.
3. Click on the diagram to place the second end of the arc

4. Drag the cursor away from the ends and click once on the diagram or press the Enter
key to place the curve of the arc.
Note
Drawing a Curved Line in a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a curved line to a diagram.

February 2016
Graphics
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Curve. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the first end of the curved line.
3. Click once on the diagram to place further points along the curve and double-click on
the diagram or press the Enter key to place the second end of the curved line.
Note
Adding Text Frames to a Diagram

This topic details how to use the drawing tools to add a text frame to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Text. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the text frame.
3. Click on the diagram to place the opposite corner of the text frame. The Add Text
Dialog is displayed.
4. Enter the text that you want to display in the box at the bottom of the Add Text dialog.
5. Click OK..
Note
If the text is not displayed, the text frame is not large enough for the text. To increase
the size of the text frame, place the mouse cursor over a corner of the frame so that
the stretch icon is displayed, hold down the left mouse key and drag the corner.
Results
The text frame and text is added to the diagram.
Note
In Capital Logic, if you click once on a pin, connector or device before clicking to start
drawing the graphic, the graphic is automatically associated with the object (that means, if
the object is moved, the graphic moves with it).

February 2016
Graphics
Adding a Picture to a Diagram

This topic details how to add a picture from an image file (with the extensions JPG, JPEG or
GIF) to a diagram.
Note
To do this, the image file must be saved in the central image repository folder that has been
specified in the system preferences for Paths in Capital Project. The diagram saves only the
path to the image file (that is, it does not import the image) so it will lose the image if the file is
moved.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Image. The cursor changes to .
2. Click on the diagram to place the first corner of the image frame that will contain the
image.
3. Click on the diagram to place the opposite corner of the image frame. The Image
Selection Dialog is displayed.
4. In the window listing files, select the image file containing the picture that you want to
add.
5. Click Select. The image frame and picture is added to the diagram. The picture is scaled
to fit the image frame.
Note
Related Topics
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame
Changing the Picture in an Image Frame

This topic details how to change the picture that is displayed in an image frame, created by the
drawing tools.
Procedure
1. Select the current picture in the image frame.

February 2016
Graphics
Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram
2. Either:
• Double-click on the graphical shape.
3. The Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Dialog is displayed.
4. On the General tab, click the ellipsis (...) button next to the Image File field.
The Image Selection Dialog is displayed.
5. In the window listing files, select the image file containing the picture that you want to
add.
6. Click Select. The new picture is displayed in the image frame.
Related Topics

This topic details how to add a comment symbol, created in Capital Symbol, to a diagram and
how to associate the comment symbol with another object.
If the associated object is moved, the comment symbol moves to maintain its orientation to the
object. Comment symbols can be used to add a build note to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Comment Symbol.
The Symbol Selection Dialog is displayed.
2. In the Symbol Selection tree, select the comment symbol.
3. Click OK. The comment symbol is displayed next to the cursor.

4. Move the cursor to position the symbol. Either:
• Click in free space so that the comment symbol is not associated with another object
• Click once on an object to create an association and click once where you want to
position the symbol in relation to the associated object
Related Topics
Resizing a Comment Symbol in a Diagram

February 2016
Graphics

This topic explains how to resize (scale) an instance of a comment symbol in a diagram.
Procedure
Note
When resizing a comment symbol as described in this topic, datums and their text
may not scale correctly. In this case, use Capital Symbol to redraw the symbol at the
required scales.
1. Move the mouse cursor over the symbol; a bounding box is displayed.
2. Move the mouse cursor over a corner of the bounding box so that the stretch icon ( ) is
displayed, hold down the mouse button and drag the corner to resize the symbol. The
symbol is scaled proportionally along both the X-axis and Y-axis.
Related Topics
Adding Properties to a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to add a property to a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools, so
that the property value is displayed on the diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape.
2. Either:
4. On the General tab, click the New button. The New Property Dialog is displayed.
5. Enter the name of the property and click OK. The property is added to the Properties
table on the General tab.
6. In the Value field, enter the value of the property and specify whether the value can be a
string, integer or float in the Type field.
7. Click OK.
8. The value is displayed next to the graphical shape on the diagram.

February 2016
Graphics
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape
Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape

This topic details how to edit a displayed property value of a graphical shape, created by the
drawing tools.
Procedure
2. Either:
4. On the General tab, edit the Value field for the property and click OK.
5. The new value is displayed next to the graphical shape on the diagram.
Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical

Shape
This topic details how to edit the appearance (color, thickness, line style and fill pattern) of the
lines of a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools.
Procedure
2. Either:
4. On the Graphical tab, edit the values as required and click OK.
5. The appearance of the graphical shape on the diagram changes accordingly.
Stretching a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to stretch a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools.

February 2016
Graphics
Moving a Graphical Shape
Procedure
2. Move the cursor over a graphics point ( ) on the graphical shape so that the stretch icon
( ) is displayed next to it.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the graphics point to stretch the shape.
Moving a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to move a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools.
Procedure
1. Move the cursor over the graphical shape so that the move icon ( ) is displayed next to
it.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the shape.
Deleting a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to remove a graphical shape, created by the drawing tools, from a
diagram.
Procedure
2. Either:
3. The graphical shape is removed from the diagram.
Grouping Graphical Shapes

This topic details how to group together graphical shapes so that they can be edited and moved
like they are one object.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shapes in the diagram by holding down the Ctrl key on your
keyboard and clicking them.

February 2016
Graphics
Ungrouping Graphical Shapes
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Group
• Right-click on one of the selected shapes and select Group
3. A frame is displayed around the shapes and you can edit them as one object.
Related Topics

This topic details how to ungroup graphical shapes that were grouped together so that they
could be edited or moved as one object.
Procedure
1. Click one of the graphical shapes to select all of the shapes in the group.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Ungroup
• Right-click on the selected group and select Ungroup
3. The frame around the shapes is deleted and you can edit them separately.
Related Topics
Grouping Graphical Shapes
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of

Graphical Shapes and Objects
This topic details how to control the layering order (z-order) of overlapping graphical shapes
and objects (graphics, glyphs and symbols). The following actions are available:
• Bring To Front
Brings the selected shapes to the front of the overlapping shapes.
• Send To Back
Sends the selected shapes to the back of the overlapping shapes.
• Bring Forward
Brings the selected shapes one layer forward in the overlapping shapes.
• Send Backward

February 2016
Graphics
Controlling the Layering Order (Z-Order) of Graphical Shapes and Objects
Sends the selected shapes one layer backward in the overlapping shapes.
Caution
Z-order settings for an object are lost if styling is applied to it, either manually or
automatically. If using z-order settings with conductors and symbols, ensure that you
apply the z-order to the symbol (for example, Bring To Front) and not to the conductor.
Prerequisites
• The graphical shapes must have been added to the diagram.
Procedure
In the diagram window, select one or more graphical shapes and either:
• right-click on a selected object and select Order > Bring To Front / Send To Back
/ Bring Forward / Send Backward
• press Space Bar and enter Bring To Front, Sent To Back, Bring Forward, or Send
Backward
Results
The selected shapes and objects change layer accordingly.

February 2016
Graphics
Graphics Points
Graphics Points
The following topics explain how to add graphics points to graphical shapes in a diagram and
how to delete them.
A graphics point is a point at which you can stretch a graphical shape to resize or reshape it.
Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape

This topic details how to add a graphics point to a line, polygon, or curved line, created by the
drawing tools.
Procedure
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Add graphic point
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Add.
3. Click on the graphical shape where you want to add the graphics point.
4. The graphics point is added to the graphical shape.
Related Topics
Deleting a Graphics Point

This topic details how to delete a graphics point on a graphical shape in a diagram.
Note
If you delete a graphics point that forces a line to form a corner, the line straightens to
follow the shortest route between the graphics points on either side of the deleted graphics
point.
Procedure
1. Select the graphical shape on which the graphics point is located.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Delete graphics.
The cursor changes to .

February 2016
Graphics
3. Click on the graphics point.

4. The graphics point is deleted.
Related Topics
Adding a Graphics Point to a Graphical Shape

February 2016
Graphics
Grip Points
Grip Points
A grip point is point that you add to a conductor or highway in Capital Logic, a bundle in
Capital Integrator and a bundle in Capital Harness XC. It divides the object into graphical
sections that can be resized and reshaped.
The following topics explain how to add a grip point to an object and how to delete it.
Adding a Grip Point to an Object

This topic details how to add a grip point to an object.
Procedure
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Add grip point
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Grip Point > Add.
3. Click on the object where you want to add the grip point.
4. The grip point is added to the object.
Related Topics
Deleting a Grip Point

This topic details how to delete a grip point on an object in a diagram.
Note
If you delete a grip point that forces an object to form a corner, the corner straightens so that
the line follows the shortest route between the grip points on either side of the deleted grip
point.
Procedure
1. Select the object on which the grip point is located.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Delete grip point
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Grip Point > Delete.
The cursor changes to .

February 2016
Graphics
3. Click on the grip point.

4. The grip point is deleted.
Related Topics
Adding a Grip Point to an Object

February 2016
Graphics
Graphics Related Dialogs
Graphics Related Dialogs

This section offers a description of various dialogs used for editing graphics. For each dialog, all
fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Edit Border Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Add Text Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Image Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Symbol Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

February 2016
Graphics
Edit Border Dialog
Edit Border Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Border.
Used to select a border created in Capital Symbol that you want to add to a diagram.
Objects
o Border Selection
Browse through the border libraries in the tree and select the border to add to the
diagram. Mandatory.
o Properties
Displays the properties that have been specified for the selected border in Capital
Symbol. If a property is editable, you can edit its value in the Value column.
Optional.
Note
If a placeholder was used as the value for a property in Capital Symbol, you
cannot edit it here. See Adding Information Placeholders to a Border in the
Capital Symbol User Guide for more information.

February 2016
Graphics
Add Text Dialog
Add Text Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Text.
Used to specify text and its format in a text frame.
Objects
o Edit window
Enter the text you want to display. Mandatory.
o Font
Select the font type, size and color for the text, and whether the text is bold, italic or
both. Mandatory.
o Height
Specify the height of the text, and select the unit of measurement from the dropdown
list. Mandatory.
o Color
Specify the color of the text. To use the default color, select Default from the
dropdown list. To use a different color, click the color preview field to invoke the
Choose Text Color dialog where you can specify the color. Mandatory.
o Opacity
Select whether object lines are visible behind the text (Transparent), or are not
visible behind the text (Opaque). Mandatory.
o Rotation
By default, this is 0 for the text to run horizontally (left to right). Enter a different
value manually, or select a value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 for the
text to run vertically (bottom to top). Mandatory.
o Auto flip
If selected, the text flips automatically so that it never appears upside down when it
is rotated, or flipped. If not selected, a flip, or rotation results in the text being
displayed upside down.
o Justification
Specify the justification of the text within the text frame. Mandatory.
o Layout
Specify the position of the text within the text frame. Mandatory.

February 2016
Graphics
Add Text Dialog
o Preview
Displays a preview of the current Layout selection.

February 2016
Graphics
Image Selection Dialog
Image Selection Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Image.
Used to navigate to and select an image file containing a picture to be added to a diagram.
Objects
o Look in
Defaults to your central image repository folder. Mandatory.
o Window listing files
Displays the image files in your central image repository folder. Select the image file
containing the picture to be added to the diagram. The picture in the selected image
file is previewed to the right of this window. Mandatory.
o File name
Displays the name of the selected image file.
o Files of type
Specify what types of file you want to display in the window listing files.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Graphics
Symbol Selection Dialog
Symbol Selection Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Comment Symbol.
Used to navigate to a symbol in a symbol library and to select the symbol.
Note
The dialog can also accessed by pressing Space Bar and entering Place Symbol As Graphics
(with no symbol selected in the Symbol Browser Window).
Objects
• Symbol Selection
In the tree, navigate to a symbol in a symbol library and select it. The selected symbol is
displayed in the window to the right of the tree.

February 2016
Graphics
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Dialog

To access: select the graphical shape and either:
• Right-clicking on the selected entity and selecting Properties
• Double-clicking on the graphical shape.
Used to add and edit the properties and amend the appearance of a graphical shape as well as
change the picture displayed in an image frame.
Objects
• The following fields are located on the General Tab.
o Properties
To add a property to the graphical shape, click the New button, enter a Property
Name in the New Property Dialog then click OK. The new property is added to the
list. A property consists of the following fields:
• Name
• A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
• Value
• The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type
• The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is not supported
o Image File
Click on the ellipsis (...) to display the Image Selection Dialog where you select the
image that you want to display in the image frame. Displayed only for an image
frame. Mandatory.
• The following fields are located on the Graphical Tab.
o Color

February 2016
Graphics
Select the color from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the right of
the field. As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
• Default
• background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when
the background color is toggled.
• automatic
If the diagram background is white, the object is black, and vice versa.
• Choose Color
The Choose Object Color dialog is displayed, where you can select a color.
o Thickness
Specify the thickness of the lines of the graphical shape. Mandatory. To use the
default thickness, select Default from the dropdown list.
To use a different thickness, select Override from the first dropdown list and select
the type of thickness from the final dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of measurement. They provide a
logical progression of thickness with a default of 1. A line with thickness 2 is
displayed twice as thick as a line with thickness 1, and so on. When you zoom in
or out of a diagram, the line thickness does not appear any different.
The physical unit of measurement that has been specified as the Unit in the style
set applied to the diagram. The line thickness is displayed in relation to the grid
size of a diagram. When you zoom in or out of a diagram, the line grows or
shrinks to stay in scale with the grid.
When you select a unit, the middle dropdown list changes to a free text field
where you specify the thickness. The value can be any floating-point number up
to three decimal places.
See Physical Line Thickness in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions
User Guide for a definition and links to related task flows.
o Line Style

February 2016
Graphics
Specify the style of the lines of the graphical shape. Mandatory. To use the default
style, select Default from the dropdown list.
To use a different style, select Override from the dropdown list and select the style
from the second dropdown list that is displayed.
o Fill Pattern Selection
Specify the fill pattern of the graphical shape. Mandatory. Displayed only for a
graphical shape that encloses space. To use the default fill pattern, select Default
from the dropdown list.
To use a different fill pattern, select Override from the dropdown list and click
Change to display the Fill Pattern Selection Dialog where you select a fill pattern.

February 2016
Graphics
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog
Fill Pattern Selection Dialog

To access: click Change when overriding the Fill Pattern Selection in the Edit Properties:
Propertied Graphic Dialog.
Used to select a fill pattern for a graphical shape on a diagram.
Objects
o Fill Patterns
Select the fill pattern.
o Foreground Color
Specify the foreground color for the pattern. As well as color names, the list contains
the following options:
• Background
• Foreground
• Manual
o Background Color
Specify the background color for the pattern. Click on the square to display the
Choose Object Color Dialog where you specify a color. As well as color names, the
list contains the following options:
• Background
• Foreground
• Manual

February 2016
Graphics
Help Button Landing Pages for Graphics Dialog Boxes
Help Button Landing Pages for Graphics

Dialog Boxes
in the software.
Edit Border Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Add Text Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Image Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Symbol Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Edit Border Help

• The Edit Border Dialog fields
• Adding a Border to a Diagram
• Replacing a Border on a Diagram
• Removing a Border from a Diagram
Add Text Help

• The Add Text Dialog fields
• Adding Text Frames to a Diagram
Image Selection Help

• The Image Selection Dialog fields
• Adding a Picture to a Diagram
• Changing the Picture in an Image Frame

February 2016
Graphics
Symbol Selection Help
Symbol Selection Help

• The Symbol Selection Dialog fields
• Adding a Comment Symbol to a Diagram
Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Help

• The Edit Properties: Propertied Graphic Dialog fields
• Editing a Property Value of Graphical Shape
• Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape
Fill Pattern Selection Help

• The Fill Pattern Selection Dialog fields
• Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape

February 2016
Graphics
Fill Pattern Selection Help

February 2016
Chapter 12
Layout
The following topics explain how to perform layout-related actions.

Grouping Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Aligning Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Distributing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Flipping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Rotating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Defining Rotation Increments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Free Rotation of an Object or Comment Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Pivoting Text about its Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Setting Snap To Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Manual Table Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Using Japanese Text on a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Usage Example - Displaying Wire Color Information in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Grouping Objects
You can group and ungroup graphical objects so that they can be selected, and moved, aligned
or distributed, as a single entity.
Procedure
See Grouping Objects in a Diagram in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Aligning Objects
You can align objects in a diagram.
Procedure
See Aligning Objects in a Diagram in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.

February 2016
Layout
Distributing Objects
Distributing Objects
You can distribute objects in a diagram so that there is an equal distance between them.
You can distribute all objects apart from pins and indicators in a diagram window.
Procedure
See Distributing Objects in a Diagram in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Flipping Objects
You can flip objects horizontally or vertically about their centers in a diagram.
Procedure
See Flipping Objects in a Diagram in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Rotating Objects
You can rotate objects about a specified point in a diagram and also freely rotate primitive
graphical objects and comment symbols around their center point.
Procedure
See Rotating Objects in a Diagram in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Defining Rotation Increments

You can specify the major and minor rotation increments that are used in the free rotation of
primitive graphical objects and comment symbols around their center point.
Procedure
See Defining Rotation Increments in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Free Rotation of an Object or Comment

Symbol
You can freely rotate a primitive graphical object or comment symbol around its center point by
a pre-defined major or minor rotation increment.

February 2016
Layout
Pivoting Text about its Axis
Procedure
See Free Rotation of an Object or Comment Symbol in the Capital Design Tools - Common
Pivoting Text about its Axis

You can pivot text about its axis from 0 degrees to 270 degrees and vice versa.
Procedure
See Pivoting Text About its Axis in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide.
Setting Snap To Object

When adding or modifying a comment graphic, you can position it to automatically “Snap To”
alignment with another graphic on a diagram.
Note
Snap To Object is always enabled by default. You can disable it should you wish to position
objects close together, but not touching. The Snap To Object setting only affects comment
graphics.
Snap to Object: On/Off is displayed in the status bar.
Procedure
See Setting Snap To Object in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide.
Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram

You can specify how grid points are displayed on a diagram.
Procedure
See Setting Grid Defaults for a Diagram in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Manual Table Splitting

You can manually control the way in which large tables are broken down into smaller numbers
of columns or rows, allowing more flexible placement of the table content.
Procedure
See Manual Table Splitting in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide.

February 2016
Layout
Using Japanese Text on a Diagram
Using Japanese Text on a Diagram

There are prerequisites for displaying Japanese fonts and characters in diagrams.
Procedure
See Using Japanese Text on a Diagram in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide.
Usage Example - Displaying Wire Color

Information in Diagrams
It is possible to use styling to configure the logic connector cavity chart to display a graphical
representation of the actual wire colors.
Procedure
See the Usage Example Displaying Wire Color Information in Diagrams in the Capital Styling
User guide for more details.

February 2016
Chapter 13
Modifying Objects
You can modify design and diagram objects in various ways.

Editing the Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Editing an Object's General Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Specifying the Name Property of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Adding a Property to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Updating an Object's Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Unassigning a Library Part from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Defining Specification Attributes for a Conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Specifying the Slot Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Assigning or Editing an Object's Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Foreground, Background and Manual Color Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Editing an Object's Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Using Quick Editing for Object Attribute Displayed on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Editing an Object's Graphical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Changing an Object's Primary or Secondary Graphical Color Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Changing an Object's Graphical Line Style Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Assembly (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating an Assembly from the Part Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Removing an Object from an Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Renaming an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Deleting an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Adding Assemblies Containing Connectivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Adding Associated Comment Graphics or Comment Symbols to an Assembly . . . . . . . . 433

Adding Objects Within the Associated Comment Graphic Boundary to an Assembly . . . 435
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Extending the Selection of Objects for an Assembly Comment Graphic or Symbol. . . . . 437
Moving Object Label Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Specifying the Harness Attribute for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Associating Library Cavities with Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Editing Text Attributes for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Editing the Graphical Properties of Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Assigning Connector Positions Using the Modular Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Editing Objects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Adding a Parameter to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Adding a Glyph to a Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Removing a Parameter or Glyph from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Fill Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Demoting an Instance of a Shared Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Updating the Library Part Information for Devices and Connectors in Capital Library
449
Selecting the Parent Object of an Object in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Displaying a Conductor Name For Multiple Segments of a Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Using Advanced Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Part Selection Management Dialog Boxes and Field References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Part Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Project Usages Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Details Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Select Details Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Select Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Map Pins Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts for Design Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

February 2016
Modifying Objects

You use the Edit Properties facilities to edit the properties and attributes of objects. You can
select individual or multiple objects for which you want to edit properties.
Editing Multiple Object Simultaneously

You can select multiple objects in order to edit properties and attributes that apply to all of those
objects.
If you select multiple objects of different object types, the selection of tabs displayed on the
Edit Properties facility may be limited. In addition, the properties and attributes that you can
edit may be limited. This is because not all properties and attributes can be applied to all object
types.
For example:
If you select a wire and a device, a Wire Color attribute is listed but you cannot change it
because it cannot be applied to all of the selected objects.
Even if a property is not editable because it does not apply to all selected objects, you can still
change whether it is visible or not.
If any of the selected objects are frozen, you can edit only graphical properties.
You cannot edit equipotential nets as part of a multiple selection.
To access an Edit Properties facility

1. In the diagram window or Design Browser Window, select the objects whose attributes
you want to edit.
If you want to select multiple segments of a conductor in Capital Logic, bundle in
Capital Integrator or multiple objects, hold down the Shift key on your keyboard and
click the segments and objects. Selected objects are displayed in red.
If you select a conductor (net or wire) or bundle from a browser window, all segments
are selected automatically.
If you want to select a closed graphic, you must click on the border (outline) of the
graphic.
2. Right-click one of the selected segments or objects in the diagram window or a blank
area in the Design Browser Window in Capital Logic or a blank area in the Design
Browser Window in Capital Topology and select Properties from the pop-up menu that
is displayed.
3. The Edit Properties facility is displayed.
The Edit Properties facility that is displayed, depends on the object that you right-click.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
In Capital Logic:
Edit Properties facilities for all objects (excluding object name text) contain the
following tabs (if you have selected multiple objects, any changes to the parameters on
these tabs apply to all selected objects):
o General (see “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406)
o Graphical (see “Editing an Object's Graphical Properties” on page 425)
o Properties (see “Adding a Property to an Object” on page 411)
The Edit Properties facilities for devices, connectors and splices includes the following
tab:
o Parameters (see “Editing Objects Parameters” on page 444)
The Edit Properties facilities for modular connectors includes the following tab:
o Modular (see “Assigning Connector Positions Using the Modular Tab” on
page 443)
The Edit Properties facilities for conductors include the following tab:
o Text (see “Editing Text Attributes for an Object” on page 439)
The Edit Properties facility for a shared object and cross-reference text displays the
following tab:
o Cross-references (see “Editing the Graphical Properties of Cross-References” on
page 441)
In Capital Integrator:
Edit Properties facilities for all objects (including symbol graphics) contain the
following tabs (if you have selected multiple objects, any changes to the parameters on
these tabs apply to all selected objects):
o General (see “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406)
o Rules
The Edit Properties facility for a signal displays the following tab:
o Variance (see “Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and
Properties” on page 422)

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Note
The Variance tab will not be displayed for an object if there are no options
defined in a project or if the project preference for Mandate applicable options
has been set and the design does not have any applicable options.
In Capital Symbol:
The Edit Properties facility for symbol graphics and borders include the following tab:
The Edit Properties facility for a border includes the following tabs:
o General (see “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406) - note that the
General tab for a border in Capital Symbol allows you to specify placeholders for
design information that is then displayed automatically when you add the border to a
diagram. See Adding Information Placeholders to a Border in the Capital
Symbol User Guide for more information about doing this.
o Paper Layout (see Editing the Paper Layout Properties of a Border in the
Capital Symbol User Guide) - This provides information about the paper size and
usable area within the border.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing an Object's General Properties

To edit an object's general properties, right-click over the appropriate design object, select the
Properties option and click the General tab in the Edit Properties dialog box.
Note that to edit the general properties of a border in Capital Symbol, you must right-click to the
side of the border in the diagram window to access the Edit Properties facility.
A design object's General Properties facility allows you to:
• Edit the object's Name display details.

Specifies the format and diagram-display characteristics of the object's name. This is not
available in Capital Symbol. See “Specifying the Name Property of an Object” on
page 408.
• Edit the object's Short Description display details.
Specifies the format and diagram-display characteristics of the object's short description.
This is not available in Capital Symbol. See “Editing the Display-details of the Object's
Short Description” on page 410.
If the Short Description specified for the name has changed in Capital Project, you must
reassign the name to the object to update the Short Description in the diagram. See
“Specifying the Name Property of an Object” on page 408.
• Edit attributes for the object
See “Editing an Object's Attributes” on page 423.
• Add or delete Properties.
Specifies the format and diagram-display characteristics of additional information that is
used for reference purposes only. In Capital Symbol, this functionality is available for
borders only.
See “Adding a Property to an Object” on page 411 and “Deleting an Existing Property
from an Object” on page 414.
• Edit the physical length of a bundle in Capital Integrator.
See “Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator” on page 414.
• Apply a Library Description.
Specifies a Capital Library component record that corresponds to the design object. This
is not available in Capital Symbol. See “Assigning a New Library Part to an Object” on
page 414, “Updating an Object's Library Part” on page 415 and “Unassigning a Library
Part from an Object” on page 416.
• View the Library Description for an Object.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
See “Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object” on page 416.
• To specify the specification attributes for a conductor.
See “Defining Specification Attributes for a Conductor” on page 416.
• Specify the Slot Type.
This indicates whether the slot will be an equipment slot (contains normal devices), a
ground slot (contains ground devices) or a junction box slot (you can route signals
through a junction box slot). See “Implementing Ground Wiring in the Generative
Flow” on page 211 for more information about ground devices.
See “Specifying the Slot Type” on page 417.
• Assign variant Options to an object.
Specifies the variant harness options that are applicable to this design object (set for the
diagram's design using the Capital Project application). The options specified for a
design object in Capital Logic or Capital Integrator are used to distinguish the
individual variant harness designs when applying the Evaluated Designs facility in the
Capital Project application. See the Capital Project help system for more information
on Evaluated Designs. Options are not applicable to Capital Symbol.
See “Assigning or Editing an Object's Options” on page 417.
o Modules - In Capital Logic only, allows Functional Module Codes that are available
to a design, to be assigned to, amended or removed by clicking the ellipsis button,
(...), next to the Modules field. This will display the Modules dialog where you can
edit the required Functional Module code(s). Applies to connectors, multicores,
overbraids, ring terminals, shields, splices and wires only.
See “Assignation of Module Codes to Capital Logic Components” on page 72
Note
The Modules field will only display if the project has been configured to use module
codes. See Module Codes, Options preference settings in the Capital Design Tools
- Common Functions User Guide for details of how to configure the project.
• Specify a part number for a harness level in Capital Integrator.

See “Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator” on page 419.
• Edit the harness levels on which a wire exists.
See “Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists” on page 419.
• To edit the offsets of bundle region nodes from bundle ends.
See “Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends” on page 420.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Specifying the Name Property of an Object

You can specify the format and diagram display characteristics of an object's name.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the object and select Properties; the Edit Properties dialog is displayed.
2. If required, type the new name of the object in the Name box or click the ellipsis button
(...) to the right of the field to select from a list of pre-specified object names maintained
in the project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. If this field is left blank, the
object is named according to any default name configured for the object in Capital
Project
Note
With the exception of pins, you can rename an object to have the same name of
another object in the same diagram. If you do this, the name is displayed in red and
a warning is displayed when you click the OK button.
If you are editing the properties of a multicore indicator, the multicore name is displayed
in the Name field.
If you are editing the properties of a signal, you can edit the name only if the signal is
not associated with a functional source net conductor from the associated Capital Logic
design.
If a shared object has been frozen, you cannot change its name.
If you have assigned a library part to the object and usage definitions have been created
for the library part in Capital Project, the Name Selection dialog lists only the names
that are used in the usage definitions by default. You can display all available names for
the object type by unchecking the Filter on Usage box at the top of the dialog. See the
Capital Project help system for more information about usage definitions.
If you are editing the general properties for a net conductor and it connects to a device
that has a usage definition in Capital Project, the Name Selection dialog lists only the
names that have been added for the corresponding pin in the usage definition.
If a net conductor is connected to more than one device with a usage definition, the list
of net names displayed depends on the pin types to which it is connected. The pin types
can be IN, OUT, IxO, IxO Terminated, NC, PWR and GND. These are defined in
Capital Library. See the Capital Library help system for more information about
defining pin types.
In Capital Symbol, you can specify the pin type U that means that no pin type is
specified.
3. Check the Visible box if you want the specified name to be displayed with the object in
the diagram.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
The name is displayed once for each object. However, in the case of conductors, you can
display the name next to more than one segment of the conductor. See “Displaying a
Conductor Name For Multiple Segments of a Conductor” on page 454 for more
information. If name text has been added to segments previously and has not been
deleted, checking the Visible box will display the name text for each instance of name
text that has been added.
4. Click the Edit Attributes button to display the Edit Name Text Attributes facility
where you can set the following attributes for the name that is displayed on the diagram:
• Justification - where you want the text to be displayed in relation to the object.
• Clip
If selected, specifies that the text is clipped at the edge of its bounding box.
• Shrink to fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary so that the text fits
in its bounding box.
• Overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding box and flows out
of it.
• Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it reaches the edge of the
text bounding box (selected) or whether the text ignores the bounding box and
continues on one line (unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too long to fit
on a single line, it is wrapped by character. Mandatory.
• Rotation - rotates the text to change the angle at which it is displayed. By default
this is 0 which displays the text running left to right following the horizontal axis:
. Enter a different value manually or select a value from the dropdown list, for
example, 270 .
• Auto flip - if selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed upside
down when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the
text being displayed upside down.
• Color - the color of the text. To change the default color, select Over-ride from the
drop-down list on the left. This enables the box on the right that you can click to
display the Choose Text Color facility.
• Opacity - select one of the following from the drop-down list:
o Transparent - object lines are visible behind the text.
o Opaque - object lines are not visible behind the text.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short Description
• Font - select the font used for the text from the drop-down list.
• Height - the height of the text. You select the unit of measurement from the drop-
down list.
Click the OK button to exit the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog.
Editing the Display-details of the Object's Short

Description
You can edit how the short description for an object is displayed on the diagram.
Procedure
2. If the 'Name' has an associated 'short description' defined in the Object Type Information
section of Capital Project then the short description will be taken from this definition. If
the 'Name' does not exist within the Object Type Information section then the 'Short
description' field can be freely edited. This field is available for use in styling and for
search queries. Check the Visible box next to the Short Description field if you want to
display the short description.
3. Click the Edit Attributes button to display the Edit Name Text Attributes facility
where you can set the following attributes for the name that is displayed on the diagram:
• Clip
• Shrink to fit
• Overflow
of it.
• Wrap text

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Adding a Property to an Object
example, 270 .
• Height - the height of the text. You select the unit of measurement from the drop-
down list.
Click the OK button to exit the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog.

If the object being edited has attributes, properties are listed on a Properties tab of the Edit
Properties dialog. If the object does not have attributes, there is a Properties section on the
General tab of the Edit Properties dialog.
Procedure
2. Click either the Properties tab or General tab as appropriate. Under the Properties
section, click New; the New Property dialog is displayed. In the Property Name box,
either select a property name from the drop-down list or enter the name of a new
property and click the OK button.
Note
The property names in the drop-down list are predefined for object types in a project
in Capital Project. See the Capital Project help system for more information on
creating them. When a project is defined in Capital Project, the valid values for a the
property can be specified. If you enter a property value that is not valid in Capital Logic
or Capital Integrator, a warning is generated.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
3. The property is added to the properties box. In the property's row, click the following
columns to change their values:
• Name - the name of the property. This box cannot be edited.
• Value - the value of the property. This is the value that is displayed with the object
in the design if you tick the Visible box.
• Type - the type of value that the property can have. The following options are
available:
o String - a mixture of letters, numbers and special symbols.
o Integer - a whole number.
o Float - a decimal number.
• Editable (only in Capital Symbol) - check the box if you want the Value and Type
fields to be editable in other applications.
• Visible - check the box if you want the specified Value to be displayed with the
object on the design. If style set options have been defined for the property, those
options are used to define the appearance of the value. Otherwise, the Attributes
defined in this table define the appearance.
• Attributes - click Edit to display the Edit Text Attributes facility where you can
set the following attributes for the Value text that is displayed for this property on
the diagram:
o Justification - where you want the text to be displayed in relation to the object.
o Clip
o Shrink to fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary so that the text
fits in its bounding box.
o Overflow
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding box and flows
out of it.
o Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it reaches the edge of
the text bounding box (selected) or whether the text ignores the bounding box
and continues on one line (unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too
long to fit on a single line, it is wrapped by character. Mandatory.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously
o Rotation - rotates the text to change the angle at which it is displayed. By default
this is 0 which displays the text running left to right following the horizontal
axis: . Enter a different value manually or select a value from the dropdown
list, for example, 270 .
o Auto flip - if selected, the text flips automatically so that it is never displayed
upside down when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or rotation can
result in the text being displayed upside down.
o Color - the color of the text. To change the default color, select Over-ride from
the drop-down list on the left. This enables the box on the right that you can click
to display the Choose Text Color facility.
o Opacity - select one of the following from the drop-down list:
Transparent - object lines are visible behind the text.
Opaque - object lines are not visible behind the text.
4. Click OK to apply the specified property values and exit the facility.
• Height - enter the height of the text in the box and select the unit of measurement
from the drop-down list.
Editing Multiple Objects Simultaneously

If you have selected multiple objects of different object types, all of the properties for all of the
selected objects are displayed, but the values do not necessarily apply to all of the selected
objects.
If a property does not currently apply to all of the selected objects, a checkbox is displayed at
the start of the Value field when you click on it. Check this box if you want the property and its
value to apply to all of the selected objects. You can change the value of the property at any
point.
If a property does apply to all of the selected objects but the objects have different values for it,
Multiple Values is displayed in the Value field with a drop-down list of the different values.
You can select one of these values and check the box at the start of the Value field to apply it to
all selected objects or you can leave the field as Multiple Values so that the objects retain their
different values. Alternatively, you can enter an entirely new value that will apply to all of the
selected objects.
If there is a list of possible values defined for a property, these are listed in the drop-down list
with the used values in the Value field. Any values that are already used on the selected objects
are displayed in bold.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object
If a property has a different Type value (string, integer or float) on different objects, then you
cannot edit it and Different Types is displayed in the Value field
Deleting an Existing Property from an Object

If the object being edited has attributes, properties are listed on a Properties tab of the Edit
Properties dialog. If the object does not have attributes, there is a Properties section on the
General tab of the Edit Properties dialog.
Procedure
2. Click either the Properties tab or General tab as appropriate. Under the Properties
section, select the property and click Delete; the property is removed from the object.
3. Click OK to apply the change and exit the dialog.
Editing a Bundle's Length in Capital Integrator

The physical length of the bundle is initially determined by the length of the bundle in the
diagram.
The bundle length is used when calculating the cost of any synthesized wiring. Overriding the
length can therefore change the result of routing logical signals because the system selects the
cheapest route.
Check the Override box and change the Length.
Assigning a New Library Part to an Object

You can assign a library part to an object in a design.
A library part with a footprint may or may not have a symbol associated with it in Capital
Library. In either case, you can assign the library part to existing devices (including shared
devices) in a Capital Logic diagram.
If the library part has device connectors, device connectors are added to the device in Capital
Logic. In the case of a shared device, the device connectors are added to the shared instances.
See “Overview of Device Connectors and Harness Connectors in Capital Logic” on page 214
for more information about device connectors.
If a library part has a symbol associated with it, the graphical representation of the device in
Capital Logic does not change to the symbol when you assign that library part to it.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Updating an Object's Library Part
Note
Library Part Usage on Shared Objects in Capital Logic
When a library part is assigned to a shared pin list, if the number of pins/cavities on the library
part is greater than the number of pins on the pin list, the number of pins necessary to account
for difference is added to the shared pin list.
When a library part is assigned to a shared device, if you have selected a symbol for the library
part, that symbol is added to the shared device and you are presented with a dialog to map
shared pins to the symbol pins.
Procedure
2. Click the Add (...) button in the Library Part section of the General tab; the Part
Selection Dialog is displayed.
3. Search for the library part, select it and click Insert.
4. If you are assigning a library part to a device, connector or backshell, the Associate
Pins with Cavities dialog is displayed. You must associate the cavities from the library
part with the pins on the object. See “Associating Library Cavities with Pins” on
page 439 for more information about this dialog. When you have associated the cavities
with the pins, click the OK button.
If you are assigning a library description to a multicore, the Assign Library Multicore
dialog prompts you to assign the innercores from the library multicore to the multicore
wires in the design. See “Assigning Wires from Library Multicores to Wires in a
Design” on page 303 for more information about this dialog. When you have associated
the multicore wires, click the OK button.
5. The library part number is displayed at the top of the Library Part section of the
General tab.
Note
If the details for a library description are changed in Capital Library, they are not
updated automatically in Capital Logic or Capital Integrator, you must update them
manually. See the To update an object's library part section below.
Updating an Object's Library Part

If a library part definition has been updated in the library, you must manually update the
definition on a diagram object in order for the changes to apply to that diagram object.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Unassigning a Library Part from an Object
Procedure
2. Click the Update ( ) button in the Library Part section of the General tab.
3. The details for the library description are updated in the Edit Properties facility. Click
the OK button.
Unassigning a Library Part from an Object

You can unassign a library part from an object.
Procedure
2. Click the Remove ( ) button in the Library Part section of the General tab.
3. The details for the library description are removed from the Edit Properties facility.
Viewing the Library Part Details for an Object

You can view the details of a library part assigned to an object.
Procedure
2. Click the View ( ) button in the Library Part section of the General tab.
3. The View Component facility is displayed. This is like the Part Selection facility but is
read-only. Click the Close button to exit the facility.
Defining Specification Attributes for a Conductor

You can define the color, material, spec and CSA in the Edit Properties dialog for a conductor.
Note
When you assign a library part to the conductor, the Part Selection Dialog uses these
attributes to restrict the search for a library part.
Procedure

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Specifying the Slot Type
2. In the Specification section of the General tab, specify the Color, Material, Spec and
CSA as required. If you want to display any of these attribute values next to the
conductor in the diagram, select the box next to the field and click the button to
display the Edit Graphical Attributes dialog where you specify how it is displayed.
3. Click OK to apply the specified values and exit the facility.
Specifying the Slot Type

From the drop-down list in the Slot Type field, you can specify the type of slot.
Procedure
The slot type cannot be changed after devices have been placed in the slot.
• Equipment - this indicates that the slot will contain normal devices
• Ground - this indicates that the slot will contain ground devices.
• Junction Box - this indicates that signals can be routed through this slot.
Assigning or Editing an Object's Options

This topic describes how to assign/edit an object's options.
Procedure
2. In the Configuration section, enter the option expression in the Option field. You can
either enter the expression manually or click the ellipsis button (...) to display the Edit
Option Expression dialog.
After a device has been placed using variant-based placement, the General tab of the
Edit Properties facility for a device displays the Expression field under the heading
Placement to distinguish the option expression from regular option tagging.
Note
The options that are available for assignment to the object in the Edit Option
Expression dialog box are initially created for the object's project and then assigned
to the object's design using the Applicable Options facility in the Capital Project
application. See the Capital Project help system for more information on creating and
assigning options and evaluated designs.
If no options have been assigned specifically to the design, the system displays all of the
options that have been created for the project.
If you attempt to enter an invalid option expression in the Expression box, the text is

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Assigning or Editing an Object's Options
displayed in red and the OK button is disabled.
If you attempt to enter an invalid expression in the Edit Option Expression dialog, an
error message is displayed.
3. Check the Visible box if you want the option expression to be displayed next to the
object on the diagram. You can set the attributes for the text that is displayed by clicking
the Edit Attributes button and specifying the following:
• Clip
• Shrink to fit
• Overflow
of it.
• Wrap text
example, 270 .

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in Capital Integrator
• Height - enter the height of the text in the box and select the unit of measurement
from the drop-down list.
Click the OK button to exit the Edit Attributes dialog.
Specifying a Part Number for a Harness Level in

Capital Integrator
You can specify a part number for a harness level in Capital Integrator.
Note
This part number is not used in Capital Library. If harness levels have been combined, a part
number cannot be specified for a child harness level.
Procedure
1. Open the Edit Properties facility for the harness level. To do this, right-click on the
harness level in the Configuration Setting Browser Window and select the
Properties option from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, select the harness level in the
Harness Levels facility (see Defining a Harness Level in the Capital Integrator User
Guide) and click the Properties button.
2. Enter the part number in the Part Number field and click the OK button to close the
facility.
Editing the Harness Levels on which a Wire Exists

Harness levels are assigned to wires to indicate that those wires exist in the derivative harness
that the level represents. When wiring is synthesized, wires are assigned to appropriate harness
levels to support the functional options that have been defined. The Edit Properties dialog for a
wire enables you to edit manually the harness levels to which a wire has been assigned.
The Configuration section also contains an Option Expression field that cannot be edited.
This contains the option expression that has been generated either by running Composite Wiring
Synthesis or by using the Generate Option Expressions facility.
Procedure
1. In the Configuration section of the Edit Properties facility, click the ellipsis (...) button
next to the Level field.
2. The Edit Levels facility is displayed. The Available window displays the available
harness levels to which the wire has not been assigned. The Selected window displays

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from Bundle Ends
the harness levels to which the wire has been assigned. You can assign a wire to a
harness level by clicking on it in the Available window and clicking the Add button.
You can remove a wire from a harness level by clicking on it in the Selected window
3. Click the OK button to confirm the changes and to exit the Edit Levels facility.
Editing the Offset of Bundle Region Nodes from

Bundle Ends
You can edit the offset of bundle region nodes from bundle ends.
Procedure
2. Change the values for the offsets that you want to change.
The Offset section of the Edit Properties facility for a bundle region indicates the offset
from the bundle start node and bundle end node for each of the region
nodes.
The fields in the Offset section are:

• Bundle Start - From - the offset from the bundle start node to the region start node.
• Bundle Start - To - the offset from the bundle start node to the region end node.
• Bundle End - From - the offset from the bundle end node to the region start node.
• Bundle End - To - the offset from the bundle end node to the region end node.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Foreground, Background and Manual Color Options
For example:
A region has the following offset
values:
The following image indicates the sections of the bundle to which the offset distances
correspond:
3. In the diagram, red squares indicate the new locations of the region nodes. If you have
entered conflicting offsets, the offset values are displayed in red. Click OK to accept
your changes to the offsets.
4. The bundle region changes accordingly in the diagram window.
Related Topics
Foreground, Background and Manual Color

Options
Wherever you can select a color, as well as color names, the list contains various options.
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.
• Foreground
• Manual

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net Attributes and Properties
Specifying Option-Specific Values for Net

Attributes and Properties
The Variance tab in the Edit Properties facility for net conductors in Capital Logic enables
you to specify option-specific values for net attributes and properties. For example, a net
conductor can have a WireColor attribute of blue when used in one option and a WireColor
attribute of green when used in another option.
When the Capital Logic design is associated with a Capital Integrator design, the Variance tab
can be viewed (but not edited) in the Edit Properties facility for signals in Capital Integrator.
The option-specific values are taken into account when composite wiring synthesis is
performed.
Note
The Variance tab will not be displayed for an object if there are no options defined in a
project or if the project preference for Mandate applicable options has been set and the
design does not have any applicable options.
Any properties specific to the individual net conductor or to the net conductor object type can
have option-specific values.
The attributes that can have option-specific values are:
• WireColor
• WireCSA
• WireMaterial
• WireSpecification
In order for these attributes or net-specific properties to be available on the Variance tab, they
must have a valid value set on the Properties tab or General tab of the Edit Properties facility.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the net conductor in the diagram or Logical Design Browser Window and
select the Properties option from the popup menu.
2. Ensure that the attribute or property has a valid value set on the Properties tab or
General tab of the Edit Properties facility. This value is used as the default value when
no option expression has been applied to the net.
3. Click on the Variance tab and click the New button in the Option Variable Attributes
or Option Variable Properties section as appropriate.
4. The Option Selection dialog is displayed. From the dropdown list, select the attribute or
property and click the OK button.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing an Object's Attributes
5. A row for that attribute or property is added to the appropriate table. In the Options
column, specify the option expression to which the value applies. You can click on the
ellipsis (...) button to display the Edit Option Expressions facility that helps you to
define the expression. In the Value field, specify the option-specific value.
You repeat steps 2 to 5 for each option-specific value for that attribute or property.
Note
There are two design rule checks that can be run in Capital Integrator that are
relevant to these option-specific values, Wires violating specification rules and
Option-based variance inconsistency. See Checks applicable to Capital Integrator
designs in the Capital Design User - Common Functions User Guide.

The Attributes section on General tab the Edit Properties facility for an object enables you to
edit the values for the attributes for that object.
Attributes must not be confused with properties on an object.
An attribute is a quality or characteristic of an object within Capital. Object attributes are built-
in to Capital and particular tool behavior is inferred by their presence and value.
A property is a user-defined name/value pair assigned to an object. No use is made of the

properties within Capital other than the ability to display and report them.
The attributes that are displayed in the Attributes section vary depending on the type of object.
If an attribute is editable for the object, its name and value are displayed in black in the Name
and Value column, otherwise they are grayed out. If you enter an invalid value, it changes to
red.
The Show All Attributes option is selected by default. Unselect this option to display only the
editable attributes on this tab.
When you have edited the attributes, you must click the OK button to exit the Edit Properties
facility and to commit your changes.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Using Quick Editing for Object Attribute Displayed on Diagram
Note
If harness names have been created in Capital Project, you can click the ellipsis (...) button
by the Harness attribute value to select one.
In Capital Logic, you can specify the Harness attribute for an object either on the General tab
of the Edit Properties facility or using the Edit Harness Attribute facility. See “Specifying
the Harness Attribute for an Object” on page 438 for more information.
Related Topics
Using Quick Editing for Object Attribute Displayed on Diagram
Using Quick Editing for Object Attribute

Displayed on Diagram
This topic details how to perform a quick edit of an object attribute value that is displayed on a
diagram (for example, the object’s name). This action does not work for user-defined properties
or option expressions.
Prerequisites
• The attribute value must be visible on the diagram.
Procedure
1. Double-click on the attribute value in the diagram window; an editable window
containing the value is displayed.
2. Edit the value as required and press Enter; the value is updated in the diagram window.
Note
If pre-defined values are available for selection, an ellipsis (...) button is displayed
next to the field. Click that button to select a value.
You can expand the window to display the full Edit Properties dialog for the object by
clicking or by pressing ALT + Up Arrow.
You can hit the Esc button on your keyboard to cancel the action at any time.
If you want to edit the graphical display of the text, select it on the diagram and press
ALT + Enter on your keyboard to display the Attribute Text dialog box.
Related Topics

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing an Object's Graphical Properties
Editing an Object's Graphical Properties

When first applied to a diagram, an object assumes the application's default graphical
properties.
The Edit Object Properties dialog box, located by right-clicking the mouse cursor over an
object and selecting the Properties menu option and then the Graphical tab, permits the
changing of the default (or subsequent) attributes of an object.
The following Object Graphical Properties may be changed:
• Color - the color of the object as it is displayed in the diagram. See “Changing an
Object's Primary or Secondary Graphical Color Property” on page 425.
• Thickness - the thickness of the lines of the object in the diagram. See “Changing an
Object's Graphical Thickness Property” on page 426.
• Line Style - the style of the lines of the object in the design. See “Changing an Object's
Graphical Line Style Property” on page 426.
• Fill Pattern - whether a fill pattern is used in a polygon or closed object. See “Changing
the Fill Color Attribute for an Object” on page 427.
• Line Style (for lines and conductors in Capital Logic only) - the style of arrow at the end
of a line. See “Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor” on page 427.
Changing an Object's Primary or Secondary

Graphical Color Property
This topic details how to change an object’s Primary or Secondary color: that is, the color of the
object as it is displayed in the diagram.
A Secondary Color, (for highways and conductors in Capital Logic/Capital Publisher, and
bundles in Capital Integrator only) is the color of the gap in a broken line style as it is displayed
in the diagram.This setting is disabled until a broken line style is selected.
Procedure
1. Select the color from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the right of the
field. As well as color names, the list contains the following options:
• Default
• Background
The same color used for the background of the diagram. The color changes when the
background color is toggled.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness Property
• Foreground
• Manual
2. Click OK to apply it.
Changing an Object's Graphical Thickness

Property
This topic details how to change an object’s Thickness: the thickness of the lines of the object in
the diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the Override option from the drop-down list box to the right of the Thickness
label.
2. Select the type of thickness from the final dropdown list:
• Logical
These thicknesses do not have a physical unit of measurement. They provide a
logical progression of thickness with a default of 1. A line with thickness 2 is
displayed twice as thick as a line with thickness 1, and so on. When you zoom in or
out of a diagram, the line thickness does not appear any different.
• Unit of measurement (mm, cm, inch)
These are physical units of measurement. The line thickness is displayed in relation
to the grid size of a diagram. When you zoom in or out of a diagram, the line grows
or shrinks to stay in scale with the grid.
When you select a unit, the middle dropdown list changes to a free text field where
you specify the thickness.
3. Click the OK button to apply the specified thickness to the object.
Changing an Object's Graphical Line Style Property

This topic details how to change an object’s Line Style: the style of the lines of the object in the
design.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object
Procedure
1. Select the Override option from the drop-down list box to the right of the Line Style
label.
2. Select the required line style from the drop-down list box.
3. Click the OK button to apply the selected Property to the Object.
4. The line style will display with the color currently selected in the Primary Color
setting.
Note
If the object is a highway or conductor in Capital Logic, or a bundle in Capital
Integrator, and the line style selected is broken, then the color of the gaps in the
broken line style can be set with the Secondary Color option
Changing the Fill Color Attribute for an Object

This topic details how to change an object’s fill color. It can be used, for example, to highlight
the function of a connectivity object when producing service documentation.
Note
If you add a fill pattern to grouped objects, the fill pattern is lost when you ungroup them.
Procedure
1. Select the Over-ride option from the drop-down list box to the right of the Fill Pattern
label.
2. The Fill Pattern dialog is displayed. Click on the fill pattern that you want to use.
3. Specify the foreground color and background color that you want to use for the fill
pattern by clicking on the corresponding color box. The Foreground Color dialog box
is displayed in which you can select the color. Click the OK button to exit the color
dialog box.
4. Click the OK button to exit the Fill Pattern dialog.
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor

This topic details how to change an object’s Line End Style: the style of arrow at the end of a
line, (for lines and conductors in Capital Logic only).
Procedure
1. In the Line End Style section at the bottom of the facility, click on the Left drop-down
list and select the style of arrow that you want to display at the left end of the conductor.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Changing the Line End Style of a Conductor
When you select an arrow style, it is previewed in the window below the drop-down list.
If you do not want an arrow at the end of the conductor, select the blank line from the
drop-down list.
2. Click on the Right drop-down list and select the style of arrow that you want to display
at the right end of the conductor.
3. Click the OK button to apply the selected end line styles to the object.
Note
The style is applied to every end-segment of the conductor. An end-segment is a
segment where at least one end point is not connected to another segment from the
same conductor.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Assembly (Overview)
Assembly (Overview)
An assembly is a collection of objects that you can use as a single entity. It is treated as a design
wide object. It can contain wires, shields, nets, devices, connectors, conductor groups, inline
plugs and inline jacks, and other assemblies. Commercially Off the Shelf (COTS) cables are
also treated as assemblies. COTS cables are purchased in their made-up form containing multi-
conductors with one or more pre-connected connectors. For further information on COTS
cables see the Capital Library User Guide.
Adding assemblies from Capital Library automatically populates the design browser with the
correct child parts, improving quality and reducing design time. The part selection dialog assists
in assigning the correct assembly and sub-assembly parts. In addition, if the assembly contains
connectivity information then once the assembly is placed on the diagram the system auto-
routes the conductors defined in the assembly.
You can add comment graphics and comment symbols to a diagram so that those graphics and
symbols are associated with the assembly and form a graphical boundary around it.
Note
An assembly cannot contain shared objects.
This functionality can be used, for example, to create the graphical representation of a panel, a
line replaceable unit (LRU) or Commercially Off the Shelf (COTS) cables.
Creating an Assembly
This topic details how to create an assembly and specify the design objects that are included in
the assembly.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Assemblies.
2. The Edit Assemblies facility is displayed. Click the Create button ( ); the New
Assembly dialog is displayed.
3. If you do want to use a default name for the assembly, leave the Default Name box
checked. Otherwise, uncheck the Default Name box and enter the assembly name in the
Assembly Name box. Click the OK button.
4. Click on the assembly in the Selected box. The Available box contains the objects that
can be added to the assembly. Select the objects that you want the assembly to contain
and click the Add ( ) button. You can leave the assembly empty for later use.
5. Any selected objects are added to the Selected box under the assembly. You can double-
click the assembly name to show or hide the objects in it. Click the OK button.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Creating an Assembly from the Part Selection Dialog
6. The assembly is added to the Assemblies folder in the Design Browser Window.
Note
You can right-click on the assembly in the Design Browser Window and select the
Extend Selection option from the pop-up menu to highlight all of the objects in the
assembly in the diagram window.
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)
Removing an Object from an Assembly
Renaming an Assembly
Deleting an Assembly
Adding Associated Comment Graphics or Comment Symbols to an Assembly
Adding Objects Within the Associated Comment Graphic Boundary to an Assembly
Assembly
Extending the Selection of Objects for an Assembly Comment Graphic or Symbol
Creating an Assembly from the Part Selection

Dialog
It is possible to add pre-defined assemblies, including COTS cables, sub-circuits and assemblies
containing connectivity from Capital Library into designs. This offers the benefit of
standardization to assemblies as they can be defined and controlled by parts librarians rather
than being created on a case by case basis. Quality is further enhanced by additional structure
match checks via a constraint on the selected assembly ensuring only valid child parts are
available during assembly creation.
Prerequisites
• The assembly must exist in Capital Library.
Procedure
1. Access the Part Selection Dialog functionality from the Parts tab on the left of the
application and use the search function to identify the required assembly.
2. Right-click on the required assembly and select Create Assembly on the context menu.
The selected assembly is added to the Assembly folder in the Design browser, while its
contents are added to the Unplaced folder of the child object.
3. The assembly can now be placed on the diagram using the “Place Dialog” on page 89

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Results
The pre-validated assembly is placed on the diagram, system constraints having ensured that
only valid child parts have been used in the construction of the assembly.
• If the assembly has a part number but it's children do not then the Part Selection Dialog
on the children checks the structure of the assembly and only allows valid children.
• If the assembly does not have a part number but its children do then the Part select
Dialog on the assembly only allows assemblies which contain the children.

This topic details how to remove a design object from an assembly.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Assemblies; the Edit Assemblies dialog is displayed.
2. In the Selected window, expand the assembly containing the object and select the
object.
3. Click the Remove ( ) button; the object moves from the Selected box to the Available
box.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)
Assembly
This topic details how to rename an assembly.
Procedure

February 2016
Modifying Objects
2. Right-click on the assembly name in the Selected box and select Rename from the pop-
up menu; the Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.
3. Ensure that the Default Name box is unchecked and enter the new name in the
Assembly Name box. Click the OK button.
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)
Assembly
This topic details how to delete an assembly.
Procedure
2. Click on the assembly in the Selected box and click the Delete ( ) button.
3. The assembly name is deleted and any objects under the assembly move from the
Selected box to the Available box. Any comment graphics or comment symbols
associated with the assembly are deleted.
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)
Assembly

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Adding Assemblies Containing Connectivity
Adding Assemblies Containing Connectivity

Adding assemblies such as COTS cables and sub-circuits that contain connectivity speeds up
design time by enabling rapid diagram creation. It also improves quality by reusing approved
circuitry and helps optimize layouts using assisted placement and ghosted connection lines.
Once assemblies, including COTS cables, that can contain connectivity information are stored
within Capital Library they are available for consumption in designs. The facility also exists to
save assemblies that have had child part content and connectivity changes back into Capital
Library once this has been finalized on a design.
Prerequisites
• The assembly must exist in Capital Library
Procedure
1. Create an assembly following the process detailed in ***UNRESOLVED***. This
populates the design browser with all defined connectivity objects such as devices,
connectors, splices and so on.
Note
If you have read-write domain access permission you can save the design assembly
changes back into the library assembly by selecting Save Design into Assembly on
the ribbon.
2. Once the assembly is added to the diagram its pre-defined connectivity, including any
highway information is shown by ghosted lines. This enables the optimal placing of
objects and connectivity prior to saving the design. For further information see
“Preserving Connectivity” on page 184.
3. Save your design.
Adding Associated Comment Graphics or

Comment Symbols to an Assembly
This topic details how to add comment graphics and comment symbols to a diagram so that
those graphics and symbols are associated with the assembly and form a graphical boundary
around it.
This functionality can be used, for example, to create the graphical representation of a panel or
line replaceable unit (LRU).

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Figure 13-1. Example Assembly Graphic
In this example, the box surrounding the diagram objects and the text ASSEMBLY1 are
comment graphics associated with an assembly called ASSEMBLY1. WIRE3 and WIRE5
pass out of the box to connect with other design objects not in the assembly. The inline jack J1
is part of the assembly whereas the inline plug P1 is not.
The visible graphical boundary can be any shape but the system creates an invisible rectangle
around the extents of the visible shape. This invisible rectangle represents the boundary for any
actions related to the assembly (such as Reset Assembly and Update Assembly).
Prerequisites
• The assembly must exist.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser Window, select the assembly in the Assemblies folder and either:
• right-click on it and select Associate Graphics followed by the graphic drawing tool
that you want to use.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
• select the graphic drawing tool from the toolbar

2. Use the selected tool to add the required graphic or symbol. See “Graphic Drawing
Tools” on page 369 for detailed instructions for each tool.
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)
Assembly
Adding Objects Within the Associated Comment

Graphic Boundary to an Assembly
When you associate comment graphics with an assembly to form a visible, graphical boundary
around it, the system creates an invisible rectangle around the extents of the visible shape.
This topic details how to add diagram objects wholly contained within the invisible boundary to
the assembly.
Prerequisites
• The assembly must exist with the associated comment graphic boundary. See “Creating
an Assembly” on page 429 and “Adding Associated Comment Graphics or Comment
Symbols to an Assembly” on page 433.
• The objects to be added to the assembly must have been added to the diagram within the
invisible boundary.
Procedure
In the Design Browser Window, select the assembly in the Assemblies folder or select the
visible graphical boundary in the diagram window and either:
• right-click on the selected object and select Update Assembly.

• press Space Bar and enter Update Assembly.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Results
Any diagram objects wholly contained within the invisible boundary are added to the assembly
and appear under it in the Design Browser Window.
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)
Assembly
Removing Objects No Longer Within the

Associated Comment Graphic Boundary from an
Assembly
When you associate comment graphics with an assembly to form a visible, graphical boundary
around it, the system creates an invisible rectangle around the extents of the visible shape.
This topic details how to remove diagram objects no longer wholly contained within the
invisible boundary from the assembly.
Prerequisites
• The assembly must exist with the associated comment graphic boundary. See “Creating
an Assembly” on page 429 and “Adding Associated Comment Graphics or Comment
Symbols to an Assembly” on page 433.
• The objects to be removed from the assembly must not be wholly contained within the
invisible boundary.
Procedure
In the Design Browser Window, select the assembly in the Assemblies folder or select the
visible graphical boundary in the diagram window and either:
• right-click on the selected object and select Reset Assembly.

• press Space Bar and enter Reset Assembly.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Results
Any diagram objects no longer wholly contained within the invisible boundary are removed
from the assembly and are no longer displayed under it in the Design Browser Window.
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)
Extending the Selection of Objects for an Assembly

Comment Graphic or Symbol
When you select particular objects in the diagram window, you can extend the selection to
include associated objects. The behavior for comment graphics and symbols associated with an
assembly is slightly different to other objects.
Procedure
1. Select a comment graphic or comment symbol associated with an assembly in the
diagram window and either:
• right-click on a selected object and select Extend Selection
• press CTRL+E
• press Space Bar and enter Extend Selection
All graphics and symbols associated with the assembly are selected in the diagram
window.
2. Perform the action a second time to extend the selection to all diagram instances of the
assembly contents (all design wide objects contained in the assembly).
Related Topics
Assembly (Overview)

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Moving Object Label Text
Assembly
Moving Object Label Text

Name text, property text and cross-reference text can be moved from its default position for
ease of viewing.
Procedure
1. Select the text to be moved by holding down the Shift key, then click and hold the
mouse button on the text to be moved.
2. Drag the text to the desired location and release the mouse button. When you are moving
the text, a broken line is displayed between the text and the object to which it belongs.
Specifying the Harness Attribute for an Object

The Harness attribute is used for mapping Capital Logic objects to Capital HarnessXC
harnesses during synchronization.
See Synchronizing from a Capital Logic Build List in the Capital HarnessXC User Guide for
more information.
You can specify the Harness attribute for an object either on the Attribute tab of the Edit
Properties facility (see “Editing an Object's Attributes” on page 423) or using the Edit
Harness Attribute facility as described in this topic.
There are cases were one object attribute may be in multiple harnesses. To eliminate the need to
run numerous synchronizations multiple harness attributes can be stored as comma (,) separated
values and may also be specified by entering a relevant Harness Group tag. These names are
created and maintained in Capital Project and can be edited by following the directions below.
Caution
Although it is possible to enter multiple harnesses as a comma-separated list, you should not
do so when working with Poke Home Wires. This is because a poke home wire only ever
belongs to one harness.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Associating Library Cavities with Pins
Procedure
• Right-click on the object either in the diagram window or in a browser tab at the
bottom left of the application window and select Edit Harness Attribute.
• Click the object, press Space Bar and enter Set Harness Attribute.
2. The Edit Harness Attribute dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the harness or the
harness group that the object is to be synchronized to. If harness names or harness
groups have been created in Capital Project, you can select one from the drop-down list
in the Harness field.
Associating Library Cavities with Pins

When you assign a library part description to a device, a connector or a backshell (shared or
unshared) in Capital Logic, you must associate the cavities from the library part with the pins on
the object. The Associate Pins with Cavities dialog is displayed to enable you to do this.
When you associate the cavities with pins, the pins are renamed to the names of the cavities. All
pins must be associated with a cavity. If there are more cavities than pins, not all cavities have to
be associated with pins.
For shared objects, if there are more cavities than shared pins, additional pins will be generated
and named according to the remaining unassociated cavities.
Procedure
1. In the Associate Pins with Cavities dialog, click on the cavity in the Cavities window
and click on the pin in the Pins window. Any pins that are not yet associated are
displayed in bold in the Pins window.
Note
You can associate all of the cavities automatically at once by clicking the Associate
All button. You can also disassociate a pin from a cavity by clicking on the pin in the
Pins window and clicking the Disassociate button. You can disassociate all pins by
clicking the Disassociate All button.
2. The associated pin is no longer displayed in bold. Click the OK button to exit the dialog.
Editing Text Attributes for an Object

When you are editing the properties for an object, you can edit how text (for example, name text
or property text) is displayed on a diagram.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing Text Attributes for an Object
Procedure
1. In the Edit Properties dialog, click the button.
2. The Edit Text Attributes facility is displayed.

If required, type the new name of the object in the box below the Font section. If valid
names for the object type have been created in Capital Project, you can select a name by
clicking the ellipsis button (...) to display the Name Selection dialog.
Note
You cannot rename an object to have the same name of another object in the same
diagram. The application will automatically change the name to a unique name.
3. If displayed, check the Visible box if you want the specified name to be displayed with
the object in the diagram.
4. Set the following attributes for the text that is displayed on the diagram:
• Clip
• Shrink to fit
• Overflow
of it.
• Wrap text
example, 270 .

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing the Graphical Properties of Cross-References
• Height - the height of the text. You select the unit of measure from the drop-down
list.
5. Click the OK button to exit the facility.
Editing the Graphical Properties of Cross-

References
When you create more than one instance of a shared or design wide object, cross-references are
displayed next to the instances in the diagram by default.
See “Cross-References on Objects” on page 199 for an overview of cross-references.
You can use the Project Preferences facility in Capital Project or Capital Logic to control
whether cross-references are displayed for pin lists, conductors and pins. If you want to override
the project preferences related to the display of cross-reference text, you can edit the cross-
reference properties for an instance of a object. To do this, right-click on the instance of the
object in the diagram and select the Properties option from the pop-up menu. The graphical
properties for cross-references are on the Cross-references tab of the Edit Properties facility
that is displayed.
The following properties are displayed:
• Justification - where you want the cross-reference text to be displayed in relation to the
object.
• Clip
• Shrink to fit
If selected, specifies that the font of the text reduces as necessary so that the text fits in
its bounding box.
• Overflow

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Editing the Graphical Properties of Cross-References
If selected, specifies that the text ignores the edge of its bounding box and flows out of
it.
• Wrap text
Specifies whether the text wraps onto multiple lines when it reaches the edge of the text
bounding box (selected) or whether the text ignores the bounding box and continues on
one line (unselected). When this is selected, if a word is too long to fit on a single line, it
is wrapped by character. Mandatory.
• Rotation - rotates the text to change the angle at which it is displayed. By default this is
0 which displays the text running left to right following the horizontal axis: . Enter
a different value manually or select a value from the dropdown list, for example, 270 .
down when it is rotated or flipped. If not selected, a flip or rotation can result in the text
being displayed upside down.
drop-down list on the left. This enables the box on the right that you can click to display
the Choose Text Color facility.
• Height - the height of the text. You select the unit of measure from the drop-down list.
• Value - the cross-reference values. These cannot be edited.
• Limit references per line - the maximum number of cross-references that can be
displayed on one line when there are multiple cross-references for an object. To override
the value set either in the project preferences or in the applied style set. To set a limit,
you must check the Set Limit box (if you check the Override box and leave the Set
Limit box unchecked, the references per line will be unlimited for the object).
• Limit Lines per block - the maximum number of lines that can be in a block of cross-
references for the instance. If the number of cross-references for the instance is greater
than this value, the cross-references are displayed in multiple blocks. If you move a
cross-reference in a block to another location in the diagram, all of the cross-references
in that block move with it. Cross-references in other blocks for the instance do not move.
To override the value set in the project preferences or in the applied style set, you must
check the Override box. To set a limit, you must check the Set Limit box (if you check
the Override box and leave the Set Limit box unchecked, the references per line will be
unlimited for the object).

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Assigning Connector Positions Using the Modular Tab
• Visible - check this box if you want cross-reference text for the instance to be displayed
on the diagram. Uncheck this box if you do not want cross-reference text to be
displayed.
Assigning Connector Positions Using the

Modular Tab
The modular tab displays any positions available on a modular connector (housing) and allows
you to assign sub-connectors to those positions.
See “Adding a Modular Connector” on page 224 for more information. The following fields are
available:
• Position List
This tree menu shows every position configured against a modular connector. To assign
a sub-connector to a position, first select the position, then specify a name (if required)
and select a library part. Positions can be empty, filled or blocked, as indicated by the
following icons:
o - the position is empty. You can select this position and assign a sub-connector.
o - the position has an associated sub-connector. The sub-connector part number is

displayed to the right of the icon.
o - the position is blocked by a sub-connector assigned to another position. It is not
possible to assign a sub-connector to this position.
• Name
A unique label for the sub-connector (within this design). Type a name, or click the
ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to select from a list of pre-specified connector
names maintained in the project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. If this
field is left blank, the sub-connector is named according to any default names
configured for the project in Capital Project. Optional.
• Library Part
Specifies an association with a sub-connector in the library. Select the required library
part number type (Internal, Customer or Supplier) and click the ellipsis (...) button.
The Part Selection Dialog is displayed allowing you to search for and insert a sub-
connector from the library. You can view details for the associated part by clicking the
button. The associated part can be removed by clicking the button. Optional.
Related Topics

February 2016
Modifying Objects

This following sections provide an introduction and overview to editing object parameters.
A design object's parameters determine the visual appearance of that design object on the
schematic diagram. Parameters consist of sub-parameters, that determine the relative position of
the object on the diagram and glyphs, that determine the shape of the object.
Parameters at the top level can only be renamed (by changing the value in the Type field),
whereas sub-parameters can have their type and name changed.
The Parameters tab on the Edit Properties facility enables you to add or edit parameters for
connectors, cables, splices, blocks and devices in Capital Logic. It is not available for other
objects. See “Editing the Properties of Objects” on page 403 topic for more information on the
Edit Properties facility.
Note
Each object type has its own set of parameters. For example, the "bottom-broken" (broken
line glyph) is only available for shared components.
Adding a Parameter to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Adding a Glyph to a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Removing a Parameter or Glyph from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Adding a Parameter to an Object

You can add a parameter to an object.
Procedure
1. Select the object for which you want to add a parameter, open the Edit Properties
facility and click the Parameters tab.
2. A browser tree is displayed that contains folders for any selected objects (for example, if
you have selected a device with pins, the device and each pin will be listed). Right-click
on the object and select Add Parameter from the pop-up menu.
3. Param: Param Type is added under the object in the browser tree. Ensure that this new
parameter is selected in the browser tree and select the parameter type from the drop-
down list in the Type field. If there is more than one parameter for this parameter type,
you can select the particular parameter from the drop-down list in the Name field.
4. The parameter in the browser tree changes to display the parameter type and name. See
the To add a glyph to a parameter section for information on adding glyphs.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Adding a Glyph to a Parameter
Related Topics
Editing Object Parameters
Removing a Parameter or Glyph from an Object

You can add a glyph to an object's parameter.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the parameter in the browser tree and select Add Glyph from the pop-up
menu.
2. Glyph Type = Glyph Name is added under the parameter in the browser tree. Ensure
that the glyph is selected in the browser tree and select the glyph type from the drop-
down list in the Type field. Select the name of the glyph from the drop-down list in the
Name field.
3. The glyph type and name are displayed in the browser tree.
Related Topics

You can edit the parameters for an object.
Procedure
1. Select the object for which you want to edit a parameter, open the Edit Properties
facility and click the Parameters tab.
2. A browser tree is displayed that contains folders for any selected objects (for example, if
you have selected a device with pins, the device and each pin will be listed). Click the
flippers to browse the parameters and glyphs for the objects. Double click the parameter
or glyph that you want to edit.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
3. The item's current values will be displayed in the Type and Name boxes below the
browser tree. Edit a parameter's value or a glyph's value by clicking it in the tree
structure and selecting the required values from the drop-down lists.
4. Click the OK button to save the amended parameters and view the subsequent changes
to the object.
Related Topics

You can remove a parameter or glyph from an object.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the parameter of glyph in the browser tree on the Parameters tab of the
Edit Properties facility.
2. Right-click on the parameter or glyph and select Remove from the pop-up menu.
Related Topics
Fill Pattern Selection

The Fill Pattern Selection facility enables you to specify a fill pattern and color for the
currently selected object.
Click on a fill pattern to select it and click on the Foreground Color and Background Color
boxes to select colors.
Click the OK button to exit the facility.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects
Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects

After a design has been released, it is possible to change the attributes and properties of a shared
object that is in that design. Making these changes, often changes the diagram and the
underlying connectivity. To prevent changes to such shared objects on a released design, you
can freeze them.
Frozen shared objects are indicated by a blue snowflake on their icons in the browser
windows.
You can manually freeze shared objects at any time. In Capital Project, you can also add a
Frozen Shared Objects behavior to a release level so that all shared objects in a design must be
frozen before you can move the design to that release level. The release level would generally
be of type Released. See the Capital Project help system topic for more information. After a
design has been moved to this release level, unfrozen shared objects cannot be added to it.
When you use the Edit Design facility to move a design to a release level with this behavior and
you click the OK button, the Freeze/Unfreeze Shared Objects facility is displayed
automatically.
Note
You cannot work with unfrozen shared objects in a Capital Logic design with a release level
that has the Frozen Shared Objects behavior. For example, promoting an unshared object
results in the freezing of that object.
If you have the necessary permission set in Capital User, you can unfreeze a shared object after
it has been frozen. The unfreezing of a shared object is an administrative operation and can be
done on any frozen shared objects. This might not be possible in Capital Logic if a design is
read-only (generally the case for a released design).
apart from changing its appearance in a design. If the object has pins, you can also:
• Add or remove pins.

• Change the reservation status of pins.
If you revise a design that contains frozen objects, you can make only connectivity changes to
those shared objects. You cannot edit attributes, properties or part numbers. To make such
changes, you must create a revision of the shared object. See the Creating a Revision of a
Shared Object topic for more information.
If your user account has the Frozen Shared Object Pin Attributes/Properties permission, you
can edit the attributes/properties for frozen shared object pins that have not been used on a
released design. If you do not have this permission, you cannot edit a frozen shared object pin
under any circumstances.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Demoting an Instance of a Shared Object
To freeze a single shared object:

1. Right-click on the object in the Shared Object Browser Window and select Freeze
Shared Object from the pop-up menu
2. The object is frozen.
To unfreeze a single shared object:
1. Right-click on the object in the Shared Object Browser Window and select Unfreeze
Shared Object from the pop-up menu.
2. The object is unfrozen.
To freeze or unfreeze multiple shared objects:
1. In the Shared Objects Browser Window, click the Freeze/Unfreeze Shared Objects
( ) toolbar icon.
The Freeze/Unfreeze Dialog is displayed.

2. Select the shared objects that you want to freeze, unselect those that you want to
unfreeze, and click OK.
Demoting an Instance of a Shared Object

You can demote an instance of a shared object so that the relationship between the instance and
the shared object is removed but the diagram remains the same (including the connectivity). It is
advisable, though not required, that you specify a new name for the demoted object as the
shared object will still be available for use elsewhere.
Pin reservations are not affected when you demote an object.
Any unrestricted or reserved pins that are not present on an instance of a shared object that you
demote will not be available on the object after you demote it.
Note
When you unshare an instance of a multicore or overbraid, all instances of it in the design
become unshared.
Procedure
1. Right-click on one instance of a shared object in the Design Browser or in the diagram
and select Unshare from the popup menu. Alternatively, click the object, press Space
Bar and enter Unshare.
2. The Name Local [object type] dialog is displayed. Specify a name (can be new or used
already) for the demoted object. If valid names have been specified in Capital Project,
you can click the ellipsis (...) button to open the Name Selection dialog where you can
select a valid name.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Updating the Library Part Information for Devices and Connectors in Capital Library
After specifying a name, click the OK button. You cannot undo this action.
3. If you have specified a name that is already used, a message asks whether you want to
use that name again or not.
After you demote the object, the Design Browser Window is updated accordingly.
Note
If the project preference Disallow pin duplication within a design is set, the
Unshare menu option will not be available for selection where the unsharing of the
object will create duplicate instances of pins. A tooltip message displays an explanation
of this on hovering over the Unshare menu item.
Updating the Library Part Information for

Devices and Connectors in Capital Library
You can update library part information either in the Edit Properties facility for an object or by
right-clicking on an object in the diagram or in the Design Browser Window and selecting the
Update Part option from the pop-up menu.
Caution
If an update cannot be performed because of conflicts between the updated library part
definition and the object instance definition, a message is displayed. In the case where an
update of the library part information causes existing connectivity to be an error, the existing
connectivity is disconnected from the object instance. For example, if a device with harness
connectors defined in the library part footprint changes so that the harness connectors are no
longer valid, the harness connectors are disconnected from the device instance when the update
is performed.
Depending on the object and any changes that have been made to the library part in Capital
Library, the Map Pins dialog may be displayed. This allows you to edit the associations
between the cavities on the library part and the pins on the object in the diagram. The Changes
window at the bottom of the dialog describes what will happen as a result of the new
associations.
If you attempt to perform an invalid action for the object (for example, removing a pin from a
shared object), a message is displayed in the Changes window and you cannot proceed.
Note
There is a design rule check called Invalid library pin mapping that checks for invalid
library pin mappings. See “Running Design Rule Checks” on page 65.
If the symbol associated to the library part has been modified, the symbol in the diagram is
updated or replaced when you update the library part information. When a symbol has been

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Selecting the Parent Object of an Object in a Diagram
replaced, the Map Pins Dialog (for Symbol) is displayed where you map the library part symbol
pins to the pins on the instance.
Selecting the Parent Object of an Object in a

Diagram
You can select the parent object of an object (e.g. the slot on which a pin is located).
Procedure
Select the child object (e.g. the pin), press Space Bar and enter Extend Selection; the parent
object (e.g. the slot) is then highlighted in red.
Finding and Replacing Property Values,

Attribute Values and Symbols
From Capital Logic and Capital Integrator, you can find and replace attribute values, property
values and symbols across multiple designs and/or diagrams, a build list or an entire project.
Changes are made to Capital Logic designs only.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Find and Replace. Alternatively, you can select an object and
then select the menu option.
2. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. Specify the following:
• Scope - select the project, build list, designs or diagrams in which you want to
search. If build lists exist, they are listed above the designs.
3. The filter symbol in the Scope section indicates whether a filter has been set or
not .
If a filter has been set and you do not want to use a filter, click the Clear Filter button.
If you want to set a filter for the search, click the Set Filter button to display the Find
and Replace Filters dialog. In that dialog, specify the following;
• Object Types - select the object types that you want to be included in the search.
You can clear the selection at any point by clicking the Clear Selection button.
Note
If you search for pins, the search results include backshell terminations, if you
search for devices, the search results also include ground devices.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Finding and Replacing Property Values, Attribute Values and Symbols
• Revision - specify the design revision in which you want to search. You can check
the Latest Revision Only box to only ever search across the latest revision.
• Release Level - from the dropdown list, select either no release level (blank) or a
release level across which you want to search.
• Abstraction - from the dropdown list, select either no abstraction level (blank) or an
abstraction level across which you want to search.
• Domain - from the dropdown list, select either no domain (blank) or a domain
across which you want to search.
• Effectivity (only visible if effectivity functionality has been enabled for the project
in Capital Project) - specify the effectivity range within which you want to search.
Click the OK button to exit the Find and Replace Filters dialog.
4. In the Find section, you specify for what you are searching and potentially want to
replace.
The behavior of the search depends on whether you select Exact Match and/or Match
Case for the fields in this section:
• Neither are selected
The search finds appropriate objects/attributes/values that contain the string entered
in the box, regardless of whether any characters are uppercase or lowercase.
For example, you search for an Attribute/Property of model.
The search will find any object with an attribute or property whose name contains
the string model. As this is not case-sensitive, it will find the string regardless of
whether any characters are uppercase of lowercase in it (for example, Analysis
Model would be found).
• Exact Match IS NOT selected and Match Case IS selected
The search finds appropriate objects/attributes/values that contain the string entered
in the box with the same uppercase and lowercase characters.
The search will find any object with an attribute or property whose name contains
the string model. As this is case-sensitive, it will not find the string if any of the
characters are in a different case (for example, Analysis Model would not be found
but Vehicle model would be found).
• Exact Match IS selected and Match Case IS NOT selected
The search finds appropriate objects/attributes/values that match the exact string
entered in the box, regardless of whether any characters are uppercase or lowercase.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
The search will find any object with an attribute or property whose name exactly
matches the string model. As this is not case-sensitive, it will find the string
regardless of whether any characters are uppercase of lowercase in it (for example,
Model and model would be found but Analysis Model would not be found).
• Exact Match and Match Case are both selected
The search finds appropriate objects/attributes/values that match the exact string
entered in the box with the same uppercase and lowercase characters.
The search will find any object with an attribute or property whose name exactly
matches the string model. As this is case-sensitive, it will not find the string if any of
the characters are in a different case (for example, model would be found but Model
and Analysis Model would not be found).
You can specify the following:
Note
In the following fields, if you want to search for a special character such as $, ensure
that you type a delimiter (\) before it. For example, \$.
• Object Name - if you want to limit the search to objects with particular names, you
can enter a full name or part of a name using wildcards.
• Attribute/Property - specify the attribute or property name. You can either enter
the name manually or select it from the drop-down list in the field.
• Matches - specify the value of the attribute or property.
If Exact Match is selected, every value string found will be fully replaced by the
content in the replace section.
If Exact Match is not selected, each and every occurrence of the string entered will
be replaced by the content in the replace section. For example, find “AB” and
replace with “C”, results in the renaming of Property=ABDAB with
Property=CDC.
If nothing is specified here, the entire value strings of the attribute/property
occurrences found will be replaced by the content in the replace section. For
example, find “AB“ and replace with “C”, results in the renaming of
Property=ABDAB with Property=C.
• Symbol - if you want to search on objects that use a particular symbol only, you can
click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Symbol Selection dialog that enables you
to browse the available symbol libraries to select the symbol. If you select a symbol,
it is displayed in a preview window.
You can click the Clear button to clear the symbol selection.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
5. In the Replace section, you can specify the following:

• Attribute/Property - the attribute or property name that you want to replace the
attribute or property names found by the search. You can either enter the name
manually or select it from the drop-down list in the field. The properties listed are
those created at the project level and are not those created on the fly for an instance
of an object. The attributes listed are only those applicable to the specified objects.
• Value - the property value that you want to replace the property values found by the
search.
• Symbol - the symbol that you want to replace the symbols found by the search. You
click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Select Symbol dialog that enables you to
browse the available symbol libraries to select the symbol. If you select a symbol, it
is displayed in a preview window.
You can click the Clear button to clear the symbol selection.
• Update Symbol Only - select this if you want to replace only the symbols used for
the found objects and not their attributes or properties. You cannot replace comment
symbols or symbols associated to library parts.
• Preserve Pin Positions
Select this if you want the pins on the symbol instances to remain where they are in
the diagram already.
Select this if you want to remove any properties from the symbol instances that are
not on the symbol in the symbol library.
Select this if you want to copy any properties and attributes that are on the symbol in
the symbol library to the symbol instances.
The attribute visibility settings on a diagram instance of a symbol may be different to
the attribute visibility settings on that symbol in the symbol library. If this is
selected, the attribute visibility settings on the symbol instance in the diagram are
retained. If this is not selected, the attribute visibility settings on the diagram
instance are overwritten by those on the symbol in the library.
• Preserve Diagram Pin Name
In a diagram, you can rename a pin name on a symbol instance. If this is selected, the
pin names in the diagram are retained. If this is not selected, the pin names in the
diagram are replaced by the pin names from the symbol in the symbol library.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Displaying a Conductor Name For Multiple Segments of a Conductor
6. Click one of the following buttons:

• Find - finds the specified attributes and properties but does not replace any values.
The output window at the bottom of the application displays the found objects on the
Find and Replace tab. You can click on an object name to view that object in a
diagram.
• Preview - previews the changes that would be made if you did a replace but does not
change the actual designs. The changes are displayed on the Find and Replace tab
of the output window at the bottom of the application but are not made to the actual
design. You can click on an object name to view that object in a diagram.
• Replace - finds and replaces the specified values. This works on editable designs
only. If the replace action affects a shared object, the design is saved automatically.
This button is disabled if the Replace section does not contain valid data. The
objects with replaced values are listed on the Find and Replace tab of the output
window at the bottom of the application. You can click on an object name to view
that object in a diagram. Some replacement values may be invalid for some of the
found objects and the Find and Replace tab lists these as errors.
7. If you are replacing values, a message states that the operation is undoable and you must
confirm whether you want to proceed. You can check a box so that this message is not
displayed again.
If you are replacing symbols and the replacement symbol has a different number of pins
to the symbol instance, the Map Pins Dialog is displayed and you map the pins from the
replacement symbol to pins on the symbol instances. You also specify what data on the
symbol instance you want to preserve and what data you want to remove. After doing
this, click OK.
Displaying a Conductor Name For Multiple

Segments of a Conductor
If the name of a conductor (nets, wires and shields in Capital Logic, bundles in Capital
Integrator) has been set as Visible in the conductor's general properties, the name of the
conductor is displayed once on the diagram by default.
See “Editing an Object's General Properties” on page 406 for more information about
displaying an object's name.
You can display the name more than once along the course of a conductor.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the name of the conductor has been set as visible in the conductor's general
properties.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Using Advanced Naming
2. Select one or more segments of the conductor next to which you want to display the
conductor name and right-click one of the selected segments. Select the Add Name
Text menu option from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, select one or more segments of
the conductor, press Space Bar and enter Name Text.
3. The name of the conductor is displayed next to each selected segment and follows the
property style preferences that have been specified in Capital Project.

There are various types of object names.
• Default names - these are generated automatically.
• Fixed names - these are defined in the Properties for objects and set as fixed. See
“Editing the Properties of Objects” on page 403 for more information about how to do
this.
Note
All shared devices have fixed names, regardless of whether they were named
manually or automatically.
If the name for an object has been modified from the default in the Name field of the
Edit Properties dialog, it is set as fixed by default.
• Generated names - these are based on the naming compositions set up in the advanced
naming functionality in Capital Project. Each name composition has a condition that
determines the objects for which can be used to generated names. When a name is being
generated, each name composition is tested against the named object in the order the
compositions are defined. The first name composition to match the object is used to
generate a name.
Different types of condition entries are used to test the named object. Property and attribute
value conditions can be used to match their value to a fixed string. For example, the condition
"color"="Blue" matches all objects with the property set to "Blue".
It may be the case that some objects will not be renamed when you apply advanced naming to
them because they do not match any conditions for the naming compositions.
Design properties can also be included in naming compositions so the values that you have
specified for design properties influence the names that are generated. See “Editing the
Information for a Design” on page 48 for more information about specifying design properties.
Note
Device connectors whose names are constrained by a footprint or library part cannot be
renamed using advanced naming.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
If you want to use the advanced naming conventions, you can:
• Use the Generate Advanced Names dialog to generate them for specific selected
objects. See “To generate names for selected objects using advanced naming” below.
• Use the Generate Advanced Names dialog to generate them for all objects in a design
or a diagram. See “To generate a batch of names using advanced naming” below.
To generate names for selected objects using advanced naming

1. Select the objects for which you want to generate names, right-click on one of them and
select the Generate Selected Names option from the pop-up menu. Alternatively, select
the objects, press Space Bar and enter Update Selected.
2. The Generate Names facility is displayed. The objects already have names and you
must select which types of names you want to replace with newly generated names.
Check the box next to each type of name that you want to replace (Default Names,
Generated Names and Fixed Names).
Note
If you want to replace names on shared objects, you must select Fixed Names
because shared object names are considered as fixed by the system.

o Reset Object Indices - Check this box if you want to replace the indices for the
counters on the objects. New indices start at the next number after the counters last
value.
For example:
If you replace the indices for three objects with the indices 1, 2 and 3, the new
indices will be 4, 5 and 6. If you replace the indices again, they become 7, 8 and 9.
o Reset Counters - Check this box if you want to reset the indices for the counters on
the objects to begin counting from 1.
For example:
If you reset a counter for three objects that currently have the indices 7, 8 and 9, the
indices become 1, 2 and 3.
Note
If you check both the Replace Object Indices box and the Reset Counters box,
the indices on the objects will start from 1.
If the Reset Counters box is checked and the Replace Object Indices box is not
checked, the indices on the selected objects do not change but the counter will start
from 1 again when you create new objects. For example: If you have three objects
with the indices 4, 5 and 6, those indices will remain 4, 5 and 6. However, when you

February 2016
Modifying Objects
create a new object that uses that counter, it will have the index value 1. The next
new object created after that will have the index value 2, and so on.
4. Click the OK button to generate new names for the selected objects.
To generate a batch of names using advanced naming
1. With the appropriate project open, press Space Bar and enter Batch Update.
2. The Generate Names facility is displayed. In the browser tree in the Select Scope
window, select the design or diagram within which you want to generate names.
The objects in these containers already have names and you must select which types of
names you want to replace with newly generated names. Check the box next to each
type of name that you want to replace (Default Names, Generated Names and Fixed
Names).
Note
If you want to replace names on shared objects, you must select Fixed Names
because shared object names are considered as fixed by the system.

o Reset Object Indices - Check this box if you want to replace the indices for the
counters on the objects. New indices start at the next number after the counters last
value.
For example:
If you replace the indices for three objects with the indices 1, 2 and 3, the new
indices will be 4, 5 and 6. If you replace the indices again, they become 7, 8 and 9.
o Reset Counters - Check this box if you want to reset the indices for the counters on
the objects to begin counting from 1.
For example:
If you reset a counter for three objects that currently have the indices 7, 8 and 9, the
indices become 1, 2 and 3.
Note
If you check both the Replace Object Indices box and the Reset Counters box,
the indices on the objects will start from 1.
If the Reset Counters box is checked and the Replace Object Indices box is not
checked, the indices on the selected objects do not change but the counter will start
from 1 again when you create new objects. For example: If you have three objects
with the indices 4, 5 and 6, those indices will remain 4, 5 and 6. However, when you
create a new object that uses that counter, it will have the index value 1. The next
new object created after that will have the index value 2, and so on.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog
4. Click the OK button to generate new names for the objects in the container that you
have selected.
Selecting a Component Part Number in the

Part Selection Dialog
This topic explains how to use the Part Selection dialog to select one or more component part
numbers when editing a field on another dialog that requires a component part number to be
entered.
Procedure
1. In the Part Selection Dialog, enter your search criteria as required and click Search
parts using criteria specified ( ).
The search results are returned in the Parts table.
2. Select the part number that you want to use in the table and click Insert.
The Part Selection dialog closes and the selected component part definitions are added
to the field that you are editing.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Part Selection Management Dialog Boxes and Field References
Part Selection Management Dialog Boxes and

Field References
The following dialog boxes aid part selection and management.
Part Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Project Usages Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Details Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Select Details Dialog Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Select Details Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Map Pins Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Part Selection Help

• The Part Selection Dialog fields
• Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog

February 2016
Modifying Objects

To access: Accessed when adding library parts via an Edit Properties dialog, pressing Space
Bar and entering From Library in Capital Logic, or from an Edit dialog for an object in
Capital HarnessXC.
Used to select a library part and assign its definition to an object in a design.
Note
You can also access Part Selection Dialog functionality from the Parts tab on the left of
the application. This tab can be dragged from its location to display it as a separate floating
dialog. Close the dialog to return it to the original tab location. See “Parts Browser” on
page 482.
Objects
o Search By (Internal/Customer/Supplier)
Use the dropdown list to specify whether you want to search for an internal,
customer or supplier part number and enter a partial or full part number in the field
next to that dropdown list. When you start to type a part number, a dropdown list
suggests full part numbers that you may want to select. Mandatory.
As you type a part number, a dropdown list suggests part numbers that match the
entered string. If ... is displayed at the bottom of the list, this indicates that more
matching part numbers are available. When the entry ... is selected, a component
search with the currently entered part number string combined with other defined
search criteria is performed.
You can use the following characters to restrict the part numbers returned in the
search results:
• * (star symbol)
Represents any number of characters when used in a string. For example,
entering C-00*E represents values that start C-00, followed at any position by an
E. Example results are C-002-BLUE, C-003-GREEN, C-004-GREY, C-005-
RED.
• ? (question mark character)
Represents any single character when used in a string. For example, entering
A??X (an A, two question marks and an X) into a field represents only 4-
character values that have an A as their first character and an X as their fourth
character. Example results are ABCX, A11X, ABCXAB.
• Single letter

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Entering a single letter into the field, returns only part numbers that begin with
that letter. For example, typing the character C into a box will list only that box's
records that begin with C - regardless of their length.
o Search parts using criteria specified
Displays parts matching the criteria entered in the Search By (Internal/

Customer/Supplier) and Filter Table in the Parts Table.
o Filter Table
Enables you to enter advanced search criteria. To enter a criteria, click Add
restriction ( ) to add a new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute
Name, an Operator and a Value from the dropdown lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s) ( ). To remove all
criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ). These criteria are applied when you
click Search parts using criteria specified.
If you are using the Parts tab, the table is not displayed until you add a criteria.
If you are editing the part number for a shared device or connector, two filters for
No. Cavities/Pins are displayed. The first filter cannot be edited and the value
indicates the number of pins that have been used in diagrams. The second filter
indicates the current shared pin count (the sum of used and unused shared pins on the
device). You can edit this second filter and this allows you to increase or decrease
the number of pins on the shared object.
o Preferred
If you have multiple customer or supplier part numbers for the component, this
specifies whether the part number is the preferred part number (selected) or not
(unselected). Mandatory.
o Latest
With this option selected, any parts belonging to a revision history in which they are
not the latest revision will not be returned by a search. Mandatory.
o Parts Table
Displays the results of a search for part numbers when you click Search parts using
criteria specified. To select a part number for assigning to an object, click on the
library part in the table and click Insert.
If you want to view the details for the part, click View part details ( ) to display
the Details Dialog. When using the Parts tab, you can right-click the part and select
View Details.
If the selected part has details that require you to make a choice, the Set details to be
selected ( ) button is enabled. Click this to display the Select Details Dialog where

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Project Usages Help
you select the details that you want to apply. When using the Parts tab, you can
right-click the part and select Select Details.
When using the Parts tab, you can right-click on part numbers for certain
component types and add a component to a harness with that part number. See “Parts
Browser” on page 482.
Insert
Click this to assign the part number that is selected in the Parts Table to the object
that you are editing.
Project Usages Help

• The Project Usages Dialog fields

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Project Usages Dialog
Project Usages Dialog

To access: Click the View Project Usages ( ) button on the Part Selection Dialog or on the
Parts Browser (Parts tab at the bottom left of the application) with a part selected.
Used to view where a component part has been used in projects.
Objects
This dialog contains a table with columns that can be filtered by selecting an item from the
dropdown list below the column header. The columns are:
o Project
The project in which the component is used.
o Design
The design in which the component is used.
o Design Type
The type of design in which the component is used.
o Release Level
The release level of the design in which the component is used.
o Object Name
The name of the object instance where the component is used.
o Object Type
The type of object where the component is used.
Details Dialog Help

• The Details Dialog fields

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Details Dialog
Details Dialog
To access: Select a component in the Part Selection Dialog and clicking View part details ( ).
Used to display the component details tabs for a component.
Objects
See Component Details in the Capital Library User Guide for more information about the
fields on the tabs.
Select Details Dialog Help

• The Select Details Dialog fields

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Select Details Dialog
Select Details Dialog

To access: Select a component in the Part Selection Dialog and click Set details to be selected
( ).
Used to choose what details you want to apply to the instance of the part currently selected in
the Part Selection dialog.
Objects
The details to be chosen are displayed in tables, select the rows for the settings that you want to
apply.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Map Pins Dialog
Map Pins Dialog

Displayed when replacing a symbol instance with a symbol that has a different number of pins.
Used to map pins on a symbol to pins on a symbol instance when you replace a symbol in a
diagram.
Objects
o Symbol pins
Lists the pins on the replacement symbol. Unmapped pins are displayed bold. You
must associate pins from this with Instance pins either by clicking Associate All to
create automatic mappings or by selecting one pin from each list and clicking
Associate.
o Instance pins
Lists the pins on the symbol instance in the diagram. Unmapped pins are displayed
bold. You must associate pins from this with Symbol pins either by clicking
Associate All to create automatic mappings or by selecting one pin from each list
and clicking Associate.
o Associate
Creates a mapping between a pin on the replacement symbol and a pin on the symbol
instance. Select one pin from Instance pins and one pin from Symbol pins and click
this to create a mapping.
o Associate All
Creates an automatic mapping for each of the Symbol pins to the Instance pins. This
is not available if some pins have been mapped already.
o Disassociate
Unmaps a pin on the replacement symbol from a pin on the symbol instance. Select
one of the mapped pins from either Instance pins or Symbol pins and click this to
unmap them.
o Disassociate All
Unmaps all of the Symbol pins and Instance pins.
o Changes
Lists the changes that will be made to the symbol instance when you click OK.
o Preserve Pin Positions
Select this if you want the pins on the symbol instance to remain where they are in
the diagram already.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts for Design Objects
o Remove Properties not on Symbol

Select this if you want to remove any properties from the symbol instance that are
not on the symbol in the symbol library.
o Copy Attribute/Property Values from Symbol
Select this if you want to copy any properties that are on the symbol in the symbol
library to the symbol instance.
o Preserve Attribute Text
Select this if you want to maintain the visibility of the object attributes on the
diagram. If you do not select this, they will no longer be displayed.
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts for

Design Objects
This topic explains how to perform a batch update of library part information for objects based
on the Part Number attribute for each object. The action can update library part information for
all objects in the currently active design or in a build list to which that design belongs.
Note
You can use extensibility plugins to assign part numbers to objects. Having used such a
plugin, you can then use this batch update functionality to update the association of library
parts. For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital
installation.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Batch Update Library Parts; the Confirm Batch Update Of
Library Parts dialog is displayed.
2. If given the choice, select whether you want to update library parts in the currently
active design or in a build list to which that design belongs and click Update; a status
bar indicates that the update is taking place.
3. Once the update is complete:
• The Output Window displays information regarding which objects have been
updated on a Update Library Parts tab. This tab also displays messages regarding
any objects that could not be updated. You can click on an object’s name to jump to
that object in the diagram window.
• If an object has a value specified for its Part Number attribute but does not have a
library part associated, this action creates an association to a library part for that
object.

February 2016
Modifying Objects
Performing a Batch Update of Library Parts for Design Objects
• If an object already has an associated library part, the associated part is not changed
but the library part information is updated for that object where appropriate.

February 2016
Chapter 14
In Capital Logic, you can use constraints to set properties and attributes on objects and to
exclude specific nets from conversion to wires.
Rules and Constraints Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Defining a Constraint for a Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Defining Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Referencing another Rule in a Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Adding Rules to a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Using a Constraint to Set Properties and Attributes on Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Rules and Constraints Overview

In Capital Logic, you can use constraints to set properties and attributes on objects and to
exclude specific nets from conversion to wires.
In Capital Integrator, you can set rules and constraints to control how the system places devices
in slots, synthesizes wiring and sets properties/attributes for objects. See Overview of Rules
and Constraints in Capital Integrator in the Capital Integrator User Guide for more
information about all of the constraints that you can use.
If you are using Capital Topology, see “Constraints (Capital Topology)” on page 629 for details
of the constraints that are available. Otherwise, use the information in this chapter on how to use
rules and constraints in general.
Standard Constraints for Capital Logic

In Capital Logic, a constraint is a statement that can be set for a whole design only.
You use constraint templates in Capital Logic and Capital Integrator to define a constraint.
You can write your own custom constraints in Java and load them into Capital Integrator or
Capital Logic. For more information about writing and loading custom constraints, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf document that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital
installation. Once custom constraints are loaded, you use them in the same way as standard
constraints. An object can have both standard and custom constraints defined for it.
The design rule check Missing Custom Constraint Check can be run to report on any custom
constraints that have been defined for an object but are not loaded any longer in Capital

February 2016
Rules and Constraints Overview
Integrator or Capital Logic. See “Running Design Rule Checks” on page 65 for more
information about running design rule checks.
The constraint templates available in Capital Logic are:
• Set Logic Attribute/Property on Object

Allows you to specify that a property or attribute must be set to a particular value on
objects of a particular type when they have another property or attribute with a particular
value. The specified property/attribute and value are assigned to the object when you run
the Apply Constraints action in Capital Logic. The Objects that break attribute/
property rule design rule check can be run to check for objects that violate this
constraint. This constraint can be set for a whole design only. Used in Capital Logic
only.
See “Using a Constraint to Set Properties and Attributes on Objects” on page 475.
Nets to Wires
• Exclude Nets or Multicores from the Nets to Wires conversion

Default: Do not convert Net to wire where AttrOrProp = Value
Allows you to specify that a net or multicore is to be excluded from the action for
converting net conductors to wire conductors (pressing Space Bar and entering Nets to
Wires). This constraint can be set for a whole design only. Used in Capital Logic only.
If you want to exclude both nets and multicores from the action, you must apply at least
two of these constraints to a design.
When set for nets, a constraint is applied as follows:
o Nets that meet the constraint and are not in a multicore are excluded from the action
o Nets in a multicore (even if they meet the constraint) are not excluded from the
action
When set for multicores, the constraint is applied as follows:
o Multicores that meet the constraint and are not nested within another multicore are
excluded from the action and so are any nets or multicores nested within those
multicores
o Multicores that meet the constraint but are nested within a parent (top-level)
multicore that does not meet the constraint are not excluded from the action
See “Excluding Net Conductors from the Conversion to Wire Conductors” on page 314.

February 2016
Defining a Constraint for a Design
Rules
In Capital Logic, a rule is a group of constraints that can be applied to a whole design. You can
define rules from within Capital Logic or from within Capital Project. In Capital Project, you
can define rules either at a project level or you can define rule libraries at a system level. A rule
library can be added to a project. See the Capital Project help system for more information
about defining rule libraries.
Related Topics
Defining Rules
Adding Rules to a Design

In Capital Logic, constraints can be defined for a whole design only.
Alternatively, constraints can be associated to form rules which can then be applied to a whole
design. See “Defining Rules” on page 473 for more information.
Procedure
1. Right-click over the appropriate design in the Project Browser Window and select the
Edit option.
The Edit Design Dialog is displayed.
2. Click Properties.
The Edit Design Properties Dialog is displayed.
3. Click the Rules tab.
4. Click Add Constraint and select the type of constraint that you want to define. Click
the OK button to add it to the Rules tab. Click on the constraint and click on the green
and red text in the constraint to edit it.
You can select whether you want to use the standard version or a custom version of this
constraint by clicking the icon at the start of the constraint. This displays a drop down
list containing the standard version of this constraint and any custom versions of this
constraint. Select the required version from the list and click the OK button. If the icon
is white, it indicates a standard constraint. A yellow icon indicates a custom constraint.
An icon indicates a rule. See “Adding Rules to a Design” on page 474 for more
information about rules.
The following text may be displayed as editable (red or green) in a constraint:
• Value

February 2016
This is used typically when you want to use rules to add properties and attributes to
conductors, splices and multicores. Select one of the following:
o Literal
This means it is a literal value. Enter the value string in the box. You can use
wildcards in this string. Click the OK button to exit the dialog.
o Attribute
This means the value is derived from the value of an attribute on the functional
signal or multicore. Select the attribute from the drop-down list in the box. Click
the OK button to exit the dialog.
In the defined constraint, ValueOf is placed in front of the bracketed attribute
name. For example,
o Property
This means the value is derived from the value of a property on the functional
signal or multicore. Enter the property name in the box. Click the OK button to
exit the dialog.
• Object Type
Select an object type from the list that is displayed when you click on this.
• AttrOrProp
Select either Attribute or Property. For an attribute, select the attribute name from
the drop-down list. For a property, enter the property name in the box or select from
the list of pre-defined property names in the drop-down list. Click the OK button to
exit the dialog.
If a constraint contains a clause for matching it to particular objects (for example, Object
Name = PropValue), you can also edit the match operator that is = by default. The
available operators are:
= Equal to
!= Not equal to
< Less than
> Greater than
<= Less than or equal to
>= Greater than or equal to
For example:
Only route signals with property matching Object Name != Signal01

February 2016
Defining Rules
In this example, only signals that do not have a value of Signal01 for the Object Name
property will be routed.
Do place devices with property matching Rating >= 7.5 here
In this example, only devices that have a value greater than or equal to 7.5 for the
Rating property will be placed.
When specifying a property value string in a constraint, you can use wildcards.
For example:
.* is all possible strings
si.* is any string starting with si.
Related Topics
Defining Rules
Defining Rules
In Capital Logic, rules are groups of associated constraints that can be applied to a whole
design. A rule can contain (reference) other rules and therefore include their constraints.
Procedure
1. Open the project for which you want to define rules, press Space Bar and enter Rules. If
rules or rule libraries have been defined before, they are displayed in the Rules window.
2. Click the New button, enter a new rule name and click the OK button.
3. Click the Add Constraint button and select a constraint template from the Constraint
Selection dialog. Click the OK button to exit the Constraint Selection dialog.
4. The constraint is displayed in the Rules Contents window. See “Rules and Constraints”
on page 469 for information about editing constraints.
You can select whether you want to use the standard version or a custom version of this
constraint by clicking the icon at the start of the constraint. This displays a drop down
list containing the standard version of this constraint and any custom versions of this
constraint. Select the required version from the list and click the OK button. If the icon
is white, it indicates a standard constraint. A yellow icon indicates a custom constraint.
5. Click the OK button when you have added and edited all of the constraints that you want
the rule to have.

February 2016
Referencing another Rule in a Rule
Related Topics

You can reference another rule within a rule.
Procedure
1. In the Define Rules facility, click the rule that you want to reference another rule and
click the Add Rule Ref button.
2. A list of available rules is displayed. These are rules or rule libraries that have been
defined in Capital Logic or in Capital Project. Click on the rule that you want to be
referenced and click the OK button.
3. The rule name is added to the Rule Contents window. An icon indicates a rule. You
can click on the referenced rule in the Rule Contents window to edit it.
Related Topics
Defining Rules

In Capital Logic, you can add one or more rules to a whole design only.
Procedure
1. Right-click over the appropriate design in the Project Browser Window and select the
Edit option.
The Edit Design Dialog is displayed.
2. Click Properties.
The Edit Design Properties Dialog is displayed.
4. Click the Add Rule Ref button to display the Rule Selection dialog in which you select
the rule and click the OK button.
5. The rule is added to the Rules tab. An icon indicates a rule. An icon indicates a
constraint. If the icon is white, it is a standard constraint. If the icon is yellow, it is a

February 2016
Using a Constraint to Set Properties and Attributes on Objects
custom constraint. See “Defining a Constraint for a Design” on page 471 for more
information about constraints. You can click on the rule to display the constraints from it
in a read-only window.
Related Topics
Defining Rules
Using a Constraint to Set Properties and

Attributes on Objects
This topic explains how to use the Set Logic Attribute/Property on Object constraint to set a
property or attribute with a particular value on objects of a particular type.
Procedure
1. Set the Set Logic Attribute/Property on Object constraint on a design. You can set
this constraint multiple times, specifying a different object type and different property/
attribute values each time. See “Rules and Constraints” on page 469 for more
information about setting rules and constraints.
The constraint is:
Set Object Type AttrOrProp to Value where AttrOrProp = Value
An example of its use is:
Set Wire Name to ValueOf(PartNumber) where EMC Category = A
In this example, if a wire has an EMC Category property of A, the Name attribute of
that wire will be set to its part number value.
2. To apply the constraint or constraints to a diagram, press Space Bar and enter Apply
Constraints.
The properties and attributes from the constraints are set for the appropriate objects.

February 2016
Using a Constraint to Set Properties and Attributes on Objects

February 2016
Chapter 15
Interface Help
The Capital Logic interface contains various elements.

Extending a Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
The Application Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Ribbon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Project Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Design Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Symbol Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Parts Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Shared Objects Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
ICD Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Placing ICDs in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Placing ICDs Containing Shared Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Refreshing ICDs in Capital Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Viewing ICD Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Diagram Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Output Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Bridge Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Icons (Glyphs) in Browser Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Displaying Option Names or Option Descriptions in Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Extending a Selection
When you select particular objects in the Design Browser Window or diagram window, you can
extend the selection to include associated objects.
You can use this function on the following objects:
• Assembly - selects all objects in the assembly

• Comment graphic or comment symbol associated with an assembly - use the action once
to select all associated graphics and symbols, use the action twice to also select the
assembly objects

February 2016
Interface Help
The Application Window
• Conductor group - selects the contents of the conductor group

• Device - selects all pins on the device
• Connector - selects all pins on the connector
• Conductor segment - selects all other segments of the conductor
• Pin - selects the object to which the pin belongs and all other pins on the object
Procedure
1. Select one or more objects in the Design Browser Window or diagram window and
either:
• right-click on a selected object and select Extend Selection
• press CTRL+E
• press Space Bar and enter Extend Selection
2. The associated objects are selected in both windows.
The Application Window

The application window for Capital Logic contains various elements.
• Ribbon (see “Ribbon” on page 479)
• Project Browser Window (see “Project Browser Window” on page 479)
• Design Browser Window (see “Design Browser Window” on page 481)
• Symbol Browser Window (see “Symbol Browser Window” on page 482)
• Parts Browser (see “Parts Browser” on page 482)
• Shared Objects Browser Window (see “Shared Objects Browser Window” on page 483)
• Diagram Window (see “Diagram Window” on page 488)
• Output Window (see “Output Window” on page 489)
• Status Bar (see “Status Bar” on page 489)
To minimize / maximize the windows

Click the minimize/maximize arrows by the window that you want to minimize or
maximize.
To move the frames of the windows

Position the mouse cursor over the gray frame that you want to move, hold the right mouse
button down and drag the frame.

February 2016
Interface Help
Ribbon
Note
If a window is not large enough for everything to be visible, scroll bars are added to it
automatically and you can move these to display different areas of the window.
Ribbon
The ribbon at the top of an application contains tabs with menu items and buttons for various
actions.
You can use a Ribbon Helper to find a particular action.
See Searching for an Action on the Ribbon in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions
User Guide.

The Project Browser Window is located on the upper left side of the application window. It
contains a browser tree that displays the designs and diagrams that exist for the project that is
open.
Note
You can hide the various browser windows by selecting the View menu option and
unchecking the Browser Area box. To display the browser windows again, select the View
menu option and check the Browse Window box.
To expand the browser tree (Project Browser Window)

Click the right-pointing flipper by the project folder or design folder that you want to expand.
Alternatively, double-click the name of the project or the name of the design.
To expand all sub-folders under a folder, right-click on the folder and select the Expand
Completely option from the pop-up menu.
The project folder contains folders for designs. Design folders contain the design revision and
diagrams for the design
revision.
You can collapse a section of the browser tree by clicking a downward-pointing flipper .
Alternatively, you can double-click the name of the project or the name of a design.

February 2016
Interface Help
To collapse a section of the browser tree (Project Browser Window)

Click the downward-pointing flipper or double-click the folder name at the top of the section.
Alternatively, right-click on the folder and select the Collapse option from the pop-up menu.
To display an open project in the Project Browser Window and open a Diagram Window
1. Click the Open Project Selector that is located at the top right of the Project Browser
Window.
2. A drop-down list displays the names of open projects. Click the name of the project that
you want to display in the Diagram Window.
3. The existing designs and diagrams for the project are displayed in the Project Browser
Window and any open diagrams for the project are displayed in Diagram Windows on
the right-hand side of the application window.
To filter the listed designs
Use the following controls:
• Enter Filter String ( ) / Clear Filter String ( )
In the Enter Filter String ( ) field, enter a series of characters, for example, Engine. A
filter is applied to the Project browser tree so that only designs with names containing
that series of characters are listed.
project.
• Design Filter ( )
Click the dropdown list to filter the designs displayed in the Project browser tree
o Show All Designs ( )
o Show all designs (active build list) ( )
o Show all designs (no active build list) ( )
o Show only logic designs
o Show designs and build lists in the working set .

To open a Diagram Window for an existing diagram
Double-click the diagram name in the browser tree in the Project Browser Window.
To close a project
Click the Close Project button at the top left of the Project Browser Window.

February 2016
Interface Help
Design Browser Window
Design Browser Window

The Design Browser Window is located on the lower left side of the application window and is
opened by clicking the Design tab. It contains a browser tree that lists the devices, connectors,
pins, conductors and multicores that are in the diagram window that is currently active.
Once a device is added to diagram, it is treated as a Design Wide Object that can be added to the
design multiple times.
Note
You can hide the various browser windows by selecting the View menu option and
unchecking the Browser Area box. To display the browser windows again, select the View
• Browser tree
Lists the objects used in the active diagram or in the design. Also lists any design wide
object that is not currently used in the design in Unplaced folders.
If an object has child objects, such as pins, these are displayed as sub-nodes of that
object. You can expand a folder or node by clicking the + symbol. To collapse a folder
or node, click the - symbol.
When you click on an object in the browser tree, it is highlighted in the currently active
diagram window. If you click a pin, a circle is displayed around it in the diagram
window.
If you move your cursor over an instance of a design wide object, a tooltip indicates the
diagram where that instance is located. Double-click an instance to jump to it in the
diagram window.
• Enter Filter String ( )
Enter a series of characters. A filter is applied to the Design Browser Window so that
only objects with names containing that series of characters are listed. If you want to use
a regular expression character, such as a bracket, in the filter, you must prefix it with \.
For example, \(P.
• Showing all objects in the design ( )/ Only showing objects in the active diagram
( )
Controls what is displayed in the browser tree. Click this to switch between showing all
objects in the design and only objects used in the active diagram.

February 2016
Interface Help

The Symbol Browser Window is located on the lower left side of the application window and is
opened by clicking the Symbol tab.
It contains a browser tree that lists symbols that are available for you to use in diagrams. Below
the browser tree is the Symbol Browser Window that allows you to view a symbol before
adding it to a diagram. You can preview the symbols by using the arrow-up and arrow-down
keys to cycle through the symbol list.
To launch Capital Symbol, right-click on a symbol library name or a symbol name and select
Edit Symbol. Capital Symbol is launched in a separate window with the appropriate library and
symbol open.
Note
You can hide the various browser windows by selecting the View menu option and un-
checking the Browser Area box. To display the browser windows again, select the View
To expand the browser tree (Symbol Browser Window)

Click the right-pointing flipper by the folder that you want to expand. Alternatively, double-
click the name of the folder.
To expand all sub-folders under a folder, right-click on the folder and select the Expand
Completely option from the pop-up menu.
To collapse a section of the browser tree (Symbol Browser Window)

To view a symbol in the Symbol Preview Window

Click on the name of the symbol in the browser tree.
Related Topics
Parts Browser
The Parts tab, located on the lower-left side of the application window, allows you to use Part
Selection dialog functionality to search for library parts and view their details. This tab can be
dragged from its location to display it as a separate floating dialog. Close the dialog to return it
to the original tab location.

February 2016
Interface Help
Shared Objects Browser Window
In addition to that functionality, you can right-click on part numbers for certain component
types and add a component to a harness with that part number. This action creates a component
in the same way as using a menu option but Library Part fields will be pre-populated. You can
do this for the following components:
• Connectors
• Devices
• Wires
• Nets
• Shields
• Multicores
• Splices

The Shared Objects Browser Window is located on the lower left side of the application
window and is opened by clicking the Shared tab.
It contains a browser tree that lists the shared objects that are available for the project that is
open in Capital Logic. If a shared object is frozen, a blue snowflake is displayed on the icon for
the shared object .
You can hide the various browser windows by selecting the View menu option and un-checking
the Browser Area box. To display the browser windows again, select the View menu option
and check the Browse Window box.
When you insert a shared conductor (that was created in Capital Project) into a design, you
will be asked (immediately), if you wish to save the design. If you do not choose save the
design, the conductor will not be inserted. You can choose to have the design automatically save
after the insertion of shared conductors, by checking the Don't show me this message again
box in the Confirm Save Design dialog box.
The toolbar in the Shared Objects Browser Window contains the following:
• Edit Shared Object - allows you to edit a shared object. See “Editing Shared
Devices and Shared Connectors” on page 191.
• Create Revision - allows you to create a revision of a shared object. See “Creating a
New Revision of a Shared Object” on page 197.
• Freeze/Unfreeze Shared Objects - allows you to freeze and unfreeze shared objects.
See “Freezing and Unfreezing Shared Objects” on page 447.

February 2016
Interface Help
• Delete Unused Shared Objects - allows you to delete multiple unused shared
objects in a project. See “Deleting Multiple Unused Shared Objects” on page 210.
• Delete Shared Object - allows you to delete a single unused shared object from a
project. See “Deleting a Single Unused Shared Object” on page 211.
• Refresh Shared Device, Connectors, and Conductors - allows you to refresh the
shared objects displayed in the Shared Objects Browser Window so that changes made
by other users to the available shared objects can be seen.
The tree contains the following nodes:
• Shared Devices - lists the shared devices

• Shared Connectors - lists the shared connectors
• Shared Inlines - lists the shared inline pairs
• Shared Splices - lists the shared splices
• Shared Conductors - lists the shared conductors (including those in shared multicores)
• Shared Multicores - contains a sub-folder for each shared multicore. The sub-folders
list the conductors contained in each multicore.
• Shared Overbraids - contains a sub-folder for each shared overbraid. The sub-folders
list the conductors contained in each overbraid.
You can right-click on shared object revision and select Show Usages to find which build lists
and designs use it. See “Finding Which Designs Use a Shared Object Revision” on page 93.
You can right-click on a shared object revision and select Swap Out Revision to swap instances
of that shared object revision for another compatible revision in designs. See “Swapping Out
Shared Objects for a Compatible Revision” on page 198.
To expand the browser tree (Shared Objects Browser Window)

Click the right-pointing flipper by the folder that you want to expand. Alternatively, double-
click the name of the folder.
To expand all sub-folders under a folder, right-click on the folder and select the Expand All
option from the pop-up menu.
To collapse a section of the browser tree (Shared Objects Browser Window)


February 2016
Interface Help
ICD Browser Window
ICD Browser Window

The Interface Control Document (ICD) Browser Window is located on the lower left side of the
application window and is opened by clicking the ICD tab. It contains a browser tree that lists
allocated ICDs definitions.
ICDs are created using Capital Devices - a web-based tool that captures and manages device
data, and its flow. It enables Device Engineers to create Interface Control Documents (ICDs) for
use in the Capital design flow. This can aid device engineers with tasks such as:
• designing the input and outputs (I/O) of devices

• details about device usage and applicability
• specifying which platforms devices are to be used on
• the context the device is to be used in on a particular platform
For further details on creating ICDs refer to the Capital Devices User Guide.
Once ICD information is received in Capital Logic it can be utilized to quickly and accurately
place devices into designs, generate connectivity using auto-route functionality and be easily
verified using design rule checks that validate the connectivity and device information against
the original ICD definition. See “Running Design Rule Checks” on page 65. Any subsequent
updates to an ICD can be dynamically synchronized using a context menu command. ICD
details and descriptions can be viewed from within Capital Logic in a popup browser window,
again by utilizing a context menu command.
Furthermore visual feedback in the form of changed icons is provided in the design browser
immediately indicating if any ICD shares connectivity with other ICDs in the active design or
build list.
Note
Capital Devices requires a valid license in order to access its functionality. Contact Mentor
Graphics Customer Support to obtain this license.
There are also a number of settings that must be enabled in the Capital configuration files before
using ICDs and accessing the ICD tab. See the Capital Configuration Files User Guide for
further information on these settings.
On accessing the ICD tab four folders are available containing device information. These are:
• Unplaced
Lists any ICDs that are allocated to the current, active design, but that have not yet been
placed on the diagram.
• Placed

February 2016
Interface Help
Placing ICDs in Capital Logic
When ICDs are added to the diagram they are moved into the Placed folder.
• Placed in other designs
Lists ICDs that have been placed in other designs in the build list and that share
connectivity.
• Unallocated
Lists devices that have been made applicable for the current project but not (as yet) to an
active design.
Placing ICDs in Capital Logic

This topic describes how to place an ICD device and use the place and route functionality to
automate the design creation process.
Procedure
1. Select a device from the Unplaced folder and drag it on to the diagram.
2. As the device is placed “shadow” graphics are displayed if any pins on that device have
matching signal names to pins already placed on the diagram.
3. Optimize the layout of the design using the shadow graphics as guidance.
4. The system automatically completes the connectivity. For further information see
“Auto-routing of Nets” on page 275 and “Auto-routing of Signals” on page 275.
Note
The conductor and footprint behavior is determined by the design abstraction.
- If the abstraction is set to “Auto create harness connectors” then wires and footprints
are used.
- If “Auto create harness connectors” is not set then Nets are used and no footprints
added.
See the Edit Design Abstractions in the Capital Project User Guide for further
information.
Placing ICDs Containing Shared Connectivity

This topic describes how to place ICDs that contain common connectivity across a number of
designs and diagrams in a build list.
Prerequisites
• ICDs have been imported into Capital Logic

February 2016
Interface Help
Refreshing ICDs in Capital Logic
Procedure
1. Select a device from the Unallocated/Unplaced folder and place it on to the diagram.
2. The ICD icons in the design browser change ( )to denote any ICDs that share
connectivity with ICDs already placed on designs in the same build list. These ICDs are
listed in the Placed in other designs folder and in other designs of the build list.
3. Select the ICD containing common connectivity in the relevant design, right-click on it
and select Share from the context menu. Its icon changes to indicate it is now shared
( ). For further information see “Adding a Shared Device, Plug, Receptacle, Ring
Terminal, or Inline Connector to a Diagram” on page 187.
4. Once you place and share an ICD in the active design its connectivity is automatically
displayed. See “Placing ICDs in Capital Logic” on page 486 for further information.
Refreshing ICDs in Capital Logic

This topic describes how to refresh or update ICD data to reflect any latest changes from Capital
Devices. These changes can be highlighted by design rule checks (DRCs).
Procedure
1. Do one of the following
• Press Space Bar and enter Refresh ICDs - this action updates ICD information in the
design browser.
2. or
• Click the Refresh icon in the ICD Browser Window - this updates information
related to placed ICDs on the diagram.
3. or
• Right-click on the ICD in the diagram and select Update From ICD from the
context menu. Changes are propagated synchronizing this ICD with its Capital
Devices definition.
Viewing ICD Content

Capital Logic allows you to interrogate the original ICD description from within the design.
Prerequisites
• The port and machine on which the Capital Devices web server is running, together with
the browser to launch for viewing must be configured prior to use. For further

February 2016
Interface Help
Diagram Window
information on these settings see icdviewer in the Capital Configuration Files Reference
Guide.
Procedure
1. Select the ICD which you wish to interrogate from the ICD tab in the design browser.
2. Right-click on the ICD and select View ICD Details from the context menu.
Results
A popup browser window opens allowing you to view the ICD information and description as
defined in Capital Devices.
Diagram Window
Diagram Windows are displayed on the right-hand side of the Application Window. This is
where diagrams are edited.
More than one Diagram Window can be open in the Application Window.
When no diagram is open, a launch pane is visible. See Launch Pane in the Capital Design
Tools - Common Functions User Guide.
To open a diagram window

Double-click on the diagram name in the browser tree in the Project Browser Window.
Diagram title bar
An active diagram has a purple title bar and an inactive diagram has a gray title bar. The title bar
displays the name of the diagram and the design to which it belongs. The title bar also has the
following buttons:
Minimize
Minimizes the size of the Diagram Window so that it is displayed as a small gray bar:
Note
To restore the Diagram Window to the size it was before, double-click the left end of the
gray bar or click the name of the design and diagram on the gray bar.
Maximize

February 2016
Interface Help
Output Window
Maximizes the size of the Diagram Window so that it fills all available space in the Application
Window.
When a Diagram Window is maximized, the Maximize button becomes a Restore button.
Click the Restore button to restore the Diagram Window to the size it was before.
Close
Closes the Diagram Window.
Note
If a Diagram Window is not large enough for everything to be visible, scroll bars are added
to it automatically and you can move these to display different areas of the Diagram
Window.
Alternatively, you can change the size of a Diagram Window by holding down the right mouse
button over an edge of the Diagram Window (the cursor changes to a two-way arrow ) and
dragging the edge.
Output Window
The Output Window is located at the bottom of the Capital Logic window. It displays the tool
output during operation, and includes various tabs.
• Capital Logic shows the output of the commands.
• Logic shows the status of any logic calculations performed in the diagrams.
• Update displays the status of diagram windows.
Each pane also has a pop-up menu, accessible with a right mouse button click, that contains text
manipulation commands (Select All, Copy, and Clear).
To view/hide the Output Window

Press Space Bar and enter Toggle Output Window. If the box is checked, the Output Window
is visible; if it is not checked, the Output Window is hidden. Information sent to the window is
not lost while the window is hidden.
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Application Window and contains various
elements.
• Auto-route: ON/OFF Indicator

February 2016
Interface Help
Status Bar
Indicates whether Auto-routing is enabled or disabled and which mode is currently

selected. See “Auto-routing of Nets” on page 275 and “Auto-routing of Signals” on
page 275
• - Auto-routing is off.
• - Auto-route Net is on.
• - Auto-route Signal is on.
• Design Rule Checks Toggle

(Start Background Run / Stop Background Run)
Indicates whether design rule checks are running in the background. Click the toggle
button (play icon) to start the checks running in the background.
When running, the toggle button changes to a square (stop icon) that you can click to
stop the checks running:
The symbol next to the toggle button (start / stop icon) indicates whether the checks
have currently found failures or not.
• Filtering Icon
Indicates whether any filtering is applied to the open diagram. You can click this icon to
open the Design Filter dialog that allows you to apply filtering. See “Filtering the
Objects Displayed in a Diagram” on page 120.
• Selected object counter
Displays the number of objects (including text) that are selected on a diagram.
• Cursor co-ordinate box
Displays the co-ordinates of the position of the mouse cursor in a Diagram Window.
• Active Language
Indicates which diagram translation language is active. By default, this is EN.

February 2016
Interface Help
Bridge Filter
Note
You can hide the Status Bar by selecting the View menu option and unchecking the
Status Bar box. To display the Status Bar again, select the View menu option and
check the Status Bar box.
Bridge Filter
When bridging out data from Capital Logic, filtering may be applied to selectively output data.
This is useful when your design contains several configurations and/or harnesses and you are
attempting to bridge out to a single MCAD harness.
To access the Bridge Filter dialog, select Filter from the Bridge menu. This dialog contains
two list boxes:
• Configuration Filter
This box displays a list of the available configurations within the design. These can be
selected individually by clicking on the name of the configuration. Use the SHIFT and
CTRL keys to make multiple selections within the list.
• Harness Filter
This box displays a list of the available harnesses within the design. These can be
selected individually by clicking on the name of the harness. Use the SHIFT and CTRL
keys to make multiple selections within the list.
For each list box you can also use the Select All and Clear All buttons to select (or de-select) all
the items in the list. Once the desired items have been selected, press OK to return to the main
Capital Logic window.
Once filter selections have been made, subsequent Bridge Out operations will export data only
for those items. If no filters are specified, the whole connectivity of the design is exported.
Icons (Glyphs) in Browser Windows

There are various icons (glyphs) for specific objects in the browser windows (for example, the
Diagram tab) in Capital Logic.
Table 15-1. Icons (Glyphs) in Browser Windows

Icon Identifies
Device
Ground device

February 2016
Interface Help
Displaying Option Names or Option Descriptions in Dialogs
Table 15-1. Icons (Glyphs) in Browser Windows (cont.)

Pin or backshell
Net conductor
Wire conductor
Multicore
Overbraid
Assembly
Shield termination
Plug connector
Receptacle connector
Splice
Object icons in browser windows can be modified in certain scenarios:
A hand under an object icon indicates that the object is shared. If a blue snowflake is
displayed at the top of the icon, it indicates that the shared object is frozen.
An orange circle on an object icon indicates that it has an Analysis model attached to it.
An orange tick on an object indicates that is has a library part assigned to it.
Displaying Option Names or Option

Descriptions in Dialogs
You can display either option names or option descriptions in dialogs where options are listed
(both as column titles and as selectable objects in windows).
Press Space Bar and enter Show Option Description to select either option names or option
descriptions. The option descriptions are defined in Capital Project and cannot be edited in other
applications.
When option descriptions are displayed, they are followed by the option name in brackets.
For example:
V6 3.0L Engine [ENG_3.0] where V6 3.0L Engine is the option description and ENG_3.0 is
the option name.
When just option names are displayed, it would read ENG_3.0.

February 2016
Interface Help
Hot Keys
If option descriptions have been selected but no description has been given for an option, the
option name is displayed in brackets, such as [ENG_3.0].
Note
Options displayed in the diagram window and options displayed in option expressions will
be displayed as the option name regardless of the setting.
Hot Keys
Hot Keys permit the execution of commands by pressing a single key on your keyboard. For
reference, the equivalent TransDesign commands are also listed for the Capital Logic
commands. The Hot Keys are not case sensitive.
Capital Logic Commands
Table 15-2. Capital Logic Hot Keys

Command in Capital Capital Hot Equivalent TransDesign Command
Key
Add Arc A Sets (draw) arc mode.
Add Rectangle R Sets (draw) box mode.
Add Circle C Sets (draw) circle mode.
Add Line L Sets (draw) line mode.
Add Text T Adds annotation text.
Disconnect Selected D Disconnects a wire or net.
Zoom Selected Z Zooms in on the selected object.
Add Net N Sets (draw) net mode.
Add Wire W Sets (draw) wire mode.
Add Shield Termination S -
Add Highway G -
Add Multicore M Create cable.
Add Pin P Adds a pin to a symbol (in symbol
mode)

February 2016
Interface Help
Hot Keys

February 2016
Chapter 16
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic
The Capital AutoView Assist for Logic (CAVAL) facility allows a user to create functional or
wiring diagrams based on an existing set of connectivity using specified constraints, instead of
manually placing components.
Overview of Capital AutoView Assist for Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Generating Diagrams for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Generating Filtered Diagrams for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Importing a Project and Generating Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered Connectivity from Multiple Designs. 503
Specifying Layout Styling when Generating Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic Dialog Boxes and Field References . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
AutoView Diagram Generator - Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
New Diagram - Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
New Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Selection Preview - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Selection Preview Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Import Project and Generate Diagrams - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Import Project and Generate Diagrams Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
AutoView Style Editor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Overview of Capital AutoView Assist for Logic

The Capital AutoView Assist for Logic (CAVAL) facility allows a user to create logical or
wiring diagrams based on an existing set of connectivity using specified constraints, instead of
manually placing components.
When you generate the diagrams, you can specify how objects are styled and you can specify
whether you want to use existing diagrams from another project as a template (or prototype). If

February 2016
a design (for which diagrams have to be generated) and the template are revisions of the same
design, connectivity objects (devices, conductors, and so on) are matched by revisions.
Otherwise, connectivity objects are matched by name.
The facility is invoked:
• As a single action directly from Capital Logic or Capital Design to import a project
XML file and bulk generate a diagram for each design. In this case, the user can select
the border and style preferences to be applied to all diagrams to be generated (one per
design). If a design has a diagram already, no new diagram will be generated. See
“Importing a Project and Generating Diagrams” on page 500 for more information.
• Directly against an existing Capital Logic design, regardless of whether diagrams exist
already or not. In this case, the user can select the layout and style preferences to be
applied to all diagrams to be generated. See “Generating Filtered Diagrams for a
Design” on page 499 for more information.
• For a specific Capital Logic design, regardless of whether diagrams exist already or not.
In this case, a filtering option is available to interactively paginate a set of design
connectivity into multiple diagrams and apply a project based style preference set
against each. See “Generating Diagrams for a Project” on page 497 for more
information.
• For a project or build list so that it can generate a single design and its diagrams for
filtered logical connectivity from multiple Capital Logic, Capital Integrator or Capital
HarnessXC designs in a project. See “Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered
Connectivity from Multiple Designs” on page 503.
Notes on the Creation of Diagrams

• Shared Pin Lists
If a pin list appears more than once in the connectivity, it is automatically promoted to a
shared object when the diagrams are generated. If a pin list in the connectivity is already
shared, the pins of that shared pin list are made unrestricted. This action occurs any time
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic is used to create a filtered diagram in which: 1) a
diagram already exists within that design; 2) any of the same entities are reused as part
of the filter operation to produce a new diagram.
• Symbols
Note that Capital AutoView Assist for Logic currently only creates parameterized
symbols and does not use any library symbols that were defined for objects in diagrams
previously. However, you can use Capital Logic functionality to replace parameterized
symbols with library symbols after the diagrams are generated.
• Tree Type Connections

February 2016
Generating Diagrams for a Project
When a device has a tree type connection (logical or physical) to another device that has
no other connectivity relationships, the path between the devices is the shortest path
available that minimizes the crossing over of conductors, maximizes the balancing of
white space, and reduces net jogs. Additionally, two new layout style settings optimize
the way that the tree connectivity is displayed.
When complex loops occur within the design connectivity, Capital AutoView Assist for
Logic will ensure: 1) minimum conductor cross over, 2) no device collisions, 3) even
device distribution in both the horizontal and vertical planes.

Use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate diagrams for all designs without diagrams in
a project.
Procedure
1. Open the project, right-click on the project name in the Project Browser Window and
select the AutoView > Generate Diagrams option from the pop-up menu.
2. The Diagram Generator dialog displays.
3. On the General tab, specify the following:
• Border Selection - select [No Border] if you do not want the diagrams in the project
to have a border. If you do want to use a border on the diagrams, select the border
name in the browser tree.
• Horizontal - specify whether you want the border to align with the left, right or
center of the connectivity on the diagram.
• Vertical - specify whether you want the border to align with the top, bottom or
• Regenerate Existing Diagrams - check this box to regenerate any existing
diagrams based on the currently specified settings.
• Run Segment Overlay DRC - check this box if you want to run a design rule check
that checks for overlaying conductor segments. See “Running Design Rule Checks”
on page 65 for more information about design rule check functionality.
4. On the Component Styling tab, specify the styling that you want to use for objects on
the generated diagrams. By default, Capital AutoView Assist for Logic uses the Default
style set for Capital Logic.
If you have a license to use Capital Styling, you can use the Style Set dropdown list at
the top of the tab to select a different style set if they are available. You can click the
ellipsis (...) to open the Style Sets Dialog where you can edit an existing style set or
create a new style set.

February 2016
Caution
On the Component Styling tab, you can edit the default style set or selected style set
but note that the changes will apply to any designs using the style set and will be
visible if this style set is viewed in Capital Project.
See the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information about style sets and how to
edit them.
5. On the Layout Styling tab, specify the preferences that you want to use for the layout of
the diagrams. See “Specifying Layout Styling when Generating Diagrams” on page 504
for more information about layout styling preferences.
6. If you want to use template diagrams from another project for the generation of
diagrams, click the Prototype tab. Any connectivity in the current project that matches
connectivity in the selected template designs will take the layout from the template. Any
unmatched connectivity in the current project will be laid out automatically.
Note
If a path in the current project is more complex than the reference path in a template
path, Capital AutoView Assist for Logic uses its own improved algorithm to
determine the layout of the path.
Specify the following:

• Select Prototype Design By - specify how you want the system to select template
designs for the designs within the project (in both cases, the system will select the
latest revision of a design):
o Name - template designs are selected by matching design names regardless of
whether the designs are revisions of the designs in the current project. For
example, if there is a design POWER:1:review in the current project and an
unrelated design POWER:20:partial exists in the template project,
POWER:20:partial will be selected as the template.
o Revision - template designs are selected only if they are revisions of the designs
in the current project. For example, if there is a design POWER:1:review in the
current project and an unrelated design POWER:20:partial exists in the
template project, POWER:20:partial will not be selected as a template.
Note
If a design (for which diagrams have to be generated) and the template are
revisions of the same design, connectivity objects (devices, conductors, and
so on) are matched by revisions. Otherwise, connectivity objects are matched by
name. This matching rule applies in all cases. For example, even if you select to
match designs by name, the connectivity objects are matched by revisions if the
design and its template are revisions of the same design.

February 2016
Generating Filtered Diagrams for a Design
• From Project - select the project from which the template designs should be
selected.
7. Click the OK button to generate the diagrams.
Note
If a design has a diagram, it is ignored by Capital AutoView Assist for Logic and a
message is displayed on the Import/Generate tab of the Output Window at the
bottom of the application.
Related Topics

Use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate one or more diagrams for a design.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the design name in the Project Browser Window and select the
AutoView: Generate Diagrams option from the pop-up menu.
2. The New Generated Diagrams Dialog dialog is displayed.
If you do not have a CAVAL Filter license, specify the Name and Properties of the
diagram to be generated on the New Generated Diagrams - Name Tab.
If you have a CAVAL Filter license, specify the diagrams that you want to generate and
the connectivity objects that you want distributed to each diagram on the New Generated
Diagrams - Diagrams Tab.
3. On the Auto View Diagram Generator - Component Styling Tab, specify the styling that
you want to use for objects on the generated diagrams. By default, Capital AutoView
Assist for Logic uses the Default style set for Capital Logic.
Caution
On the New Generated Diagrams - Component Styling Tab, you can edit the default
style set or selected style set but note that the changes will apply to any designs
using the style set and will be visible if this style set is viewed in Capital Project.
edit them.

February 2016
Importing a Project and Generating Diagrams
4. On the New Generated Diagrams - Layout Styling Tab, specify the preferences that you
want to use for the layout of the diagrams. See “Specifying Layout Styling when
Generating Diagrams” on page 504 for more information about layout styling
preferences.
5. On the New Generated Diagrams - Prototype Tab, specify whether you want to use an
existing design as a template for the generated diagram. Any connectivity in the current
design that matches connectivity in the selected template design will take the layout
from the template. Any unmatched connectivity in the current design will be laid out
automatically.
Note
In the From Project window, select the project that contains the template diagram. In
the Select Design Prototype window, select the template diagram from the browser
tree.
Note
If a design (for which diagrams have to be generated) and the template are revisions
of the same design, connectivity objects (devices, conductors, and so on) are
matched by revisions. Otherwise, connectivity objects are matched by name.
6. Click the OK button to generate the diagram.

Existing diagrams that have had connectivity added or removed are deleted and new
diagrams are created (where there are connectivity objects distributed to them).
Related Topics

In Capital Logic, you can import a project and use the Capital AutoView Assist for Logic
functionality to generate diagrams for the connectivity in the project. If diagrams already exist
in the project, these are imported with the project. Any connectivity without a diagram will have
a diagram generated for it automatically.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Import Project & Generate Diagrams.

February 2016
2. The Import Project & Generate Diagrams dialog is displayed. Specify the following:
• Look In - select a folder location from the drop-down list and browse to the project
file that you want to import in the window below the Look In field.
• Border Selection - select [No Border] if you do not want the diagrams in the project
to have a border. If you do want to use a border on the diagrams, select the border
name in the browser tree.
• Horizontal - specify whether you want the border to align with the left, right or
• Vertical - specify whether you want the border to align with the top, bottom or
• Regenerate Existing Diagrams - check this box to regenerate any existing
diagrams based on the currently specified settings.
• Run Segment Overlay DRC - check this box if you want to run a design rule check
that checks for overlaying conductor segments. See “Running Design Rule Checks”
on page 65 for more information about design rule check functionality.
• Show AutoView Style Editor - Check this box if you want to open a style editor
when you import the project. The style editor enables you to specify component
styling, diagram layout styling and the selection of template (prototype) diagrams.
• File Name - if you have not browsed to the file in the window above, enter the full
path to the project XML file that you want to import.
• Files of Type - from the drop-down list, select the type of files for which you want
to browse.
4. A dialog indicates the progress of the process. If you did not check the Show AutoView
Style Editor box, skip to step 8.
If you did check the Show AutoView Style Editor box, the style editor is displayed. On
the Component Styling tab, you specify the styling that you want to use for objects on

February 2016
Caution
edit them.
6. If you want to use template diagrams for the generation of diagrams, click the Prototype
tab. Any connectivity in the current project that matches connectivity in the selected
template designs will take the layout from the template. Any unmatched connectivity in
the current project will be laid out automatically.
Note
Specify the following:

• Select Prototype Design By - specify how you want the system to select template
designs for the designs within the project (in both cases, the system will select the
latest revision of a design):
o Name - template designs are selected by matching design names regardless of
whether the designs are revisions of the designs in the current project. For
example, if there is a design POWER:1:review in the current project and an
unrelated design POWER:20:partial exists in the template project,
POWER:20:partial will be selected as the template.
o Revision - template designs are selected only if they are revisions of the designs
in the current project. For example, if there is a design POWER:1:review in the
current project and an unrelated design POWER:20:partial exists in the
template project, POWER:20:partial will not be selected as a template.
Note
If a design (for which diagrams have to be generated) and the template are
revisions of the same design, connectivity objects (devices, conductors, and
so on) are matched by revisions. Otherwise, connectivity objects are matched by
name. This matching rule applies in all cases. For example, even if you select to
match designs by name, the connectivity objects are matched by revisions if the
design and its template are revisions of the same design.

February 2016
Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered Connectivity from Multiple Designs
• From Project - select the project from which the template designs should be
selected.
8. When the project is imported, existing diagrams are imported with it and diagrams are
generated for connectivity that does not have diagrams.
Related Topics
Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered

Connectivity from Multiple Designs
This topic explains how to generate a single design and its diagrams for filtered logical
connectivity from multiple Capital Logic, Capital Integrator or Capital HarnessXC designs in a
project.
Procedure
1. Either:
• Right-click on the project name in the Project Browser Window and click
AutoView: Query and Generate Design; the Scope Tab is displayed.
• Right-click on a design under the Build Lists node of the Project Browser Window
and click AutoView: Query and Generate Design; the Scope Tab is displayed.
2. On the Scope Tab, specify the designs from which connectivity will be included in the
generated designs. If you selected a design under the Build Lists node, that build list is
already selected and displayed in the Selected window.
3. On the Design Tab, specify the base details for the design that will be generated.
4. On the Filter Tab, specify any filtering that you want to apply to the connectivity taken
from the existing designs and click OK; the New Generated Diagrams Dialog is
displayed.
5. If you do not have a CAVAL Filter license, specify the Name and Properties of the
diagram to be generated on the New Generated Diagrams - Name Tab.
If you have a CAVAL Filter license, specify the diagrams that you want to generate and
the connectivity objects that you want distributed to each diagram on the New Generated
Diagrams - Diagrams Tab.
6. On the Component Styling tab, specify the styling that you want to use for objects on

February 2016
Specifying Layout Styling when Generating Diagrams
Caution
edit them.
8. On the Prototype tab, specify whether you want to use an existing design as a template
for the generated diagram. Any connectivity in the current design that matches
connectivity in the selected template design will take the layout from the template. Any
unmatched connectivity in the current design will be laid out automatically.
Note
In the From Project window, select the project that contains the template diagram. In
the Select Design Prototype window, select the template diagram from the browser
tree.
Note
If a design (for which diagrams have to be generated) and the template are revisions
of the same design, connectivity objects (devices, conductors, and so on) are
matched by revisions. Otherwise, connectivity objects are matched by name.
Specifying Layout Styling when Generating

Diagrams
When using Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate diagrams, the Layout Styling tab
enables you to specify the default styling for the layout of the diagrams.

February 2016
Diagram flow — Specify whether you want the layout of the components, pins and conductors
in the diagram to flow horizontally (left to right), or vertically (bottom to top).
Figure 16-1. Horizontal Flow

February 2016
Figure 16-2. Vertical Flow
Enable connector flow — Check this box if you want devices and connectors to have their pins
only on the sides that follow the direction of the Diagram flow. That is, on the top and bottom
sides in a vertical flow, and on the left and right sides in a horizontal flow. This restricts the
connector placement to the sides of devices following the flow.
Do not check this box if you want devices and connectors to have pins on all sides, and
therefore do not want to restrict connector placement on devices.

February 2016
Figure 16-3. Enable Connector Flow

February 2016
Figure 16-4. Disable Connector Flow
Note that harness-side connectors become shared if they have multiple instances in the
generated diagram as a result of the flow.
Enable Tree Layout — When you check this box, diagrams are created using a tree layout that
reflects the specified Diagram flow direction. When you do not check this box, diagrams are
created using a graph representation that reduces the overlapping of connectivity and bends in
conductors. The following considerations are relevant to this type of layout:
• Generated diagrams do not have a flow.

• Pins are not always evenly distributed.
• Conductors may have 90 degree bends.

February 2016
Figure 16-5. Enable Tree Layout

February 2016
Figure 16-6. Disable Tree Layout
Enable device stretching — Check this box if you want devices to stretch in the generated
diagram to reduce net jogs, and the crossover of conductors. The device height and width
exceeds nominal pin grid spacing. Otherwise, do not check this box.

February 2016
Figure 16-7. Enable Device Stretching

February 2016
Figure 16-8. Disable Device Stretching
Optimize parallel placements of tree devices — Many devices can directly associate to a
single device. Check this box if you want such associations to be graphically represented by
aligning the devices either vertically, or horizontally. This is considered a one-to-many
connection. An example is an ABS module, and its sensors.
Enable connector splitting by proximity — Check this box if you want the graphical
representation of harness connectors to be split around the devices to which they belong, if it
reduces net jogs, and conductor crossover. Otherwise, do not check this box.

February 2016
Figure 16-9. Enable Connector Splitting

February 2016
Figure 16-10. Disable Connector Splitting
Hide unconnected pins — This specifies whether unconnected pins are hidden (selected) or
displayed (unselected), in the generated diagrams.
Minimum segment length — Specify the minimum distance in grid spaces that can exist
between any two devices, connectors, or splices that are connected by a conductor. If a greater
length is specified, more white space will appear between objects in the diagram.
Related Topics

February 2016
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic Dialog Boxes and Field References
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic Dialog

Boxes and Field References
The following dialog boxes enable Capital AutoView Assist for Logic (CAVAL) to create
functional or wiring diagrams based on an existing set of connectivity using specified
constraints, instead of manually placing components.
AutoView Diagram Generator - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
New Diagram - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
New Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Selection Preview - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Selection Preview Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Import Project and Generate Diagrams - Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Import Project and Generate Diagrams Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
AutoView Style Editor Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
AutoView Diagram Generator - Help

• Generating Diagrams for a Project
• The AutoView Diagram Generator Dialog fields
• Specifying Layout Styling when Generating Diagrams

February 2016
AutoView Diagram Generator Dialog

To access: In the Project Browser Window, open the project, and then right-click on the project
name and select AutoView > Generate Diagrams from the pop-up menu.
This dialog enables you to generate diagrams for all designs in a project.
Objects
• The dialog has the following tabs:
o General Tab
o Component Styling Tab
o Layout Styling Tab
o Prototype Tab
Table 16-1. Auto View Diagram Generator - General Tab

Field Description
General Tab The General tab allows you to specify various diagram settings to be
applied to the diagrams that are going to be created. The settings can
also be applied to existing diagrams.
Border Selection Select a border to be used on the generated diagrams. Select [No
Border] if you want to generate the diagrams without a border.
Horizontal Specify whether you want the border to align with the left, right or
Vertical Specify whether you want the border to align with the top, bottom or
Regenerate Existing Check this box to regenerate any existing diagrams based on the
Diagrams currently specified settings.
Run Segment Check this box to run a design rule verification for overlaying
Overlay DRC conductor segments.

February 2016
Table 16-2. Auto View Diagram Generator - Component Styling Tab

Field Description
Component Styling Use this tab to specify the required styling to use for objects on the
Tab generated diagrams.
By default, Capital AutoView Assist for Logic uses the Default style
set for Capital Logic.
On the Component Styling tab, you can edit the default style set, or
selected style set but note that the changes will apply to any designs
using the style set and is visible if this style set is viewed in Capital
Project.
Refer to the Diagram Styling User Guide for full information about
the style set configuration options displayed on this tab and how to
edit them.
If you have a license to use Capital Styling, use the Style Set
dropdown list at the top of the tab to select a different style set, if they
are available. You can click the ellipsis (...) to open the Style Sets
Dialog where you can edit an existing style set, or create a new style
set.
Table 16-3. Auto View Diagram Generator - Layout Styling Tab

Field Description
Layout Styling Tab Use this tab to specify the required styling to use for layout of objects
on the generated diagrams.
See “Specifying Layout Styling when Generating Diagrams” on
page 504 for illustrations of the effects of these settings.
Diagram Flow Set the layout of the components, pins and conductors in the diagram to
flow:
• Horizontal (left to right)
• Vertical (bottom to top).
Enable Connector Check this box if you want devices and connectors to have their pins
Flow only on the sides that follow the direction of the Diagram flow. On the
top and bottom sides in a vertical flow, and on the left and right sides in
a horizontal flow. This restricts the connector placement to the sides of
devices following the flow.
Uncheck this box if you want devices and connectors to have pins on
all sides, and therefore do not want to restrict connector placement on
devices.

February 2016
Table 16-3. Auto View Diagram Generator - Layout Styling Tab (cont.)
Field Description
Enable Tree When you check this box, diagrams are created using a tree layout that
Layout reflects the specified Diagram flow direction. When you do not check
this box, diagrams are created using a graph representation that reduces
the overlapping of connectivity and bends in conductors. The following
considerations are relevant to this type of layout:
Enable Device Check this box if you want devices to stretch in the generated diagram
Stretching to reduce net jogs, and the crossover of conductors. The device height
and width exceeds nominal pin grid spacing. Otherwise, do not check
this box.
Optimize Parallel Many devices can directly associate to a single device. Check this box
placements of Tree if you want such associations to be graphically represented by aligning
Devices the devices either vertically, or horizontally. This is considered a one-
to-many connection. An example is an ABS module, and its sensors.
Enable Connector Check this box if you want the graphical representation of harness
Splitting by connectors to be split around the devices to which they belong, if it
Proximity reduces net jogs, and conductor crossover. Otherwise, do not check this
box.
Enable Inline Check this box to enable the creation of individual inline pin pairs. For
Splitting example, if an inline has ten pins then ten instances of that inline are
created. Note: Enabling Inline Splitting normally creates a better layout
when compared with a single instance of the inline, however this
should be validated on your data.
Auto select Border Check this box to automatically select a suitable border to fit the
to Fit design.
Minimum Segment Specify the minimum distance in grid spaces that can exist between any
Length two devices, connectors, or splices that are connected by a conductor. If
a greater length is specified, more white space will appear between
objects in the diagram.
Minimum Device Specify the minimum width in grid spaces for Device display.
Width

February 2016
New Generated Diagrams - Help
Table 16-4. Auto View Diagram Generator - Prototype Tab

Field Description
Prototype Tab The Prototype tab allows you to specify an existing Project as a
template for the generated diagrams. Any connectivity in the importing
designs matching connectivity in the selected Prototype design, adopts
the layout from the template. Any unmatched connectivity in the
importing design is laid out automatically.
If a design (for which diagrams have to be generated) and the template
are revisions of the same design, connectivity objects (devices,
conductors, and so on) are matched by revisions. Otherwise,
connectivity objects are matched by name.
Select Prototype Select Name or Revision to match the designs being imported to the
Design By designs in the selected prototype by Name or Revision
From Project Displays a list of all projects that are available to be used as a
Prototype.
Related Topics
New Generated Diagrams - Help

• The New Generated Diagrams Dialog fields

February 2016
New Generated Diagrams Dialog

To access: Right-click on a design in the Project Browser Window and select AutoView >
Generate Diagrams.
When you use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate diagrams for a design, this dialog
is used to specify the generated diagrams, the data contained in them and the component and
layout styling.
Objects
• The dialog has the following tabs:
o New Generated Diagrams - Diagrams Tab
o New Generated Diagrams - Name Tab
o New Generated Diagrams - Component Styling Tab
o New Generated Diagrams - Layout Styling Tab
o New Generated Diagrams - Prototype Tab
Table 16-5. New Generated Diagrams - Diagrams Tab

Field Description
Diagrams Tab When you use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate
diagrams for a design, use this tab to specify the content of the
generated diagrams. See “Generating Filtered Diagrams for a Design”
on page 499.
This tab is only displayed if you have a CAVAL filter license.

February 2016
Table 16-5. New Generated Diagrams - Diagrams Tab (cont.)

Field Description
Available Lists the available data in the design that can be distributed across
Connectivity diagrams. Select the connectivity objects required to distribute to the
selected Target Diagram.
• All Connectivity — Lists all connectivity objects in the design.
• Undistributed Connectivity — Lists only connectivity objects
not yet distributed in diagrams.
• Signals — Lists all conductors in the connectivity, grouped by the
signals they carry, and the pins to which they connect. For nets,
the conductor name is taken as the signal. For wires and shields,
the signal is defined as a conductor property or attribute. The
brackets list the diagrams on which the conductors, and signals
are found.
• Harnesses — Lists all conductors in the connectivity, grouped by
the harnesses they define, and the pins to which they connect. The
brackets list the diagrams on which the conductors and harnesses
are found.
• Configurations — Lists all connectivity objects in the design,
grouped under the configuration for which they are active.
• Diagram Name — Lists all the connectivity objects in the
specific diagram.
When selecting from the Available Connectivity field, if you select
an object with child objects (for example, a multicore containing
conductors that are attached to pins), they are distributed too.
Any component or connectivity currently selected in the Available
Connectivity treeview will display highlighted in red in the Selection
Preview Dialog.
View Opens the Selection Preview Dialog, and displays a read-only version
of the diagram selected in the Available Connectivity field. Optional,
enabled only if the selected diagram already exists.
Distribution By Applies the distribution of connectivity used in the template
(prototype) selected on the Prototype tab to the distribution on the
Diagrams tab. Removes any diagrams that do not yet exist from the
Target diagram field, and removes any existing distributions on the
Diagrams tab. A diagram is created for each diagram in the template,
and the connectivity objects are distributed to match the template. If
the Target Diagram field contains existing diagrams whose names
match the names of the template diagrams, the new diagrams are
given unique names. Optional, enabled only if you have a template
(prototype) selected on the Prototype tab.

February 2016
Table 16-5. New Generated Diagrams - Diagrams Tab (cont.)

Field Description
Add Adds the selected objects in the Available Connectivity tree to the
Target Diagram tree so they are distributed to the selected Target
Diagram. If a diagram is selected in the Available Connectivity tree,
the objects remain distributed to that diagram as well as to the
selected Target Diagram. Optional.
Move Moves the selected objects in the Available Connectivity tree to the
Target Diagram tree so that they are distributed to the selected Target
Diagram. The selected objects are removed from any diagrams to
which they have been distributed previously. Optional.
Remove Moves the selected objects in the Target Diagram tree to the
Available Connectivity tree so that they are no longer distributed to
the selected Target Diagram. If a selected object has child objects (for
example, the pins of a pin list or the conductors of a multicore), they
are removed, too. Associated objects are not removed (for example,
the pins connected to a conductor). Optional.
Remove All Moves all connectivity objects in the Target Diagram tree to the
Available Connectivity tree so that they are no longer distributed to
the selected Target Diagram. Optional.
Auto Complete Auto complete allocates undistributed connectivity into the target
diagram. For example, within a design if devices are moved or added
to a new target diagram and Auto Complete selected, then
corresponding wires and/or nets are also distributed to the target
diagram.
Target Diagram Specifies the name of a diagram that is generated. The tree below the
dropdown list displays the connectivity objects distributed to that
diagram. When you create multiple diagrams, select a diagram from
the dropdown list to edit the connectivity objects that are distributed
to it. Mandatory.
Regenerate Diagram Select this to regenerate existing diagrams using current styling and
layout settings.
New Displays the New Diagram Dialog where you specify the name and
properties of a new diagram to be generated. The diagram name is
added to the dropdown list in the Target Diagram field. Optional.
Edit Displays the Edit Diagram Dialog where you edit the name and
properties of a new diagram to be generated. The diagram name is
added to the dropdown list in the Target Diagram field. Optional.
Delete Removes the selected diagram name in the Target Diagram field. Any
distribution of connectivity objects to that diagram is undone.
Optional.

February 2016
Table 16-6. New Generated Diagrams - Name Tab

Field Description
Name Tab When you use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate a diagram for a
design, use the Name Tab to specify the name and properties of a new
diagram. See “Generating Filtered Diagrams for a Design” on page 499.
This tab is only displayed if you do not have a CAVAL filter license.
Name A label to identify the diagram. Enter a new name, or click the ellipsis (...)
button to the right of the field to select from a list of pre-specified diagram
names maintained in the project’s Object Type Information in Capital
Project. Mandatory.
New To add a property to the diagram, click the New button, enter a Property
Name in the New Property Dialog, and then click OK. The new property is
added to the list.
A property consists of the following fields:
• Name — A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
• Value — The value assigned to the property. Optional.
• Type — The data type of the value. Mandatory.
If you enter a Value that is not supported by the selected Type, the Value
appears in red text, and the OK button is disabled. The following types are
available:
• String — A mix of letters, number or special characters.
• Integer — A whole number.
• Float — A number including a decimal (floating) point.<usage notes
content>
Delete To delete a property from the list, select it, click the Delete button, and then
click OK to confirm the deletion.

February 2016
Table 16-7. New Generated Diagrams - Component Styling Tab

Field Description
Component Use this tab to specify the required styling to use for objects on the generated
Styling Tab diagrams.
By default, Capital AutoView Assist for Logic uses the Default style set for
Capital Logic.
On the Component Styling tab, you can edit the default style set, or selected
style set but note that the changes will apply to any designs using the style set
and is visible if this style set is viewed in Capital Project.
Refer to the Diagram Styling User Guide for full information about the style
set configuration options displayed on this tab and how to edit them.
If you have a license to use Capital Styling, use the Style Set dropdown list at
the top of the tab to select a different style set, if they are available. You can
click the ellipsis (...) to open the where you can edit an existing style set, or
Table 16-8. New Generated Diagrams - Layout Styling Tab

Field Description
Layout Styling Use this tab to specify the required styling to use for layout of objects
Tab on the generated diagrams.
flow:
• Horizontal (left to right) See
• Vertical (bottom to top). See
Enable Connector Check this box if you want devices and connectors to have their pins
Flow only on the sides that follow the direction of the Diagram flow. On the
top and bottom sides in a vertical flow, and on the left and right sides in
devices following the flow. Uncheck this box if you want devices and
connectors to have pins on all sides, and therefore do not want to restrict
connector placement on devices

February 2016
Table 16-8. New Generated Diagrams - Layout Styling Tab (cont.)

Field Description
the overlapping of connectivity and bends in conductors. The following
considerations are relevant to this type of layout:
See and .
this box.
Optimize Parallel Many devices can directly associate to a single device. Check this box if
placements of Tree you want such associations to be graphically represented by aligning the
Devices devices either vertically, or horizontally. This is considered a one-to-
many connection. An example is an ABS module, and its sensors.
Enable Connector Check this box if you want the graphical representation of harness
Splitting by connectors to be split around the devices to which they belong, if it
Proximity reduces net jogs, and conductor crossover. Otherwise, do not check this
box.
Enable Inline Check this box to split the graphical orientation of inline connectors
Splitting around devices
Auto select Border Check this box to automatically select a suitable border to fit the design
to Fit
Minimum Segment Specify the minimum distance in grid spaces that can exist between any
Length two devices, connectors, or splices that are connected by a conductor. If
a greater length is specified, more white space will appear between
objects in the diagram.
Minimum Device Specify the minimum width in grid spaces for Device display.
Width

February 2016
New Diagram - Help
Table 16-9. New Generated Diagrams - Prototype Tab

Field Description
Prototype Tab The Prototype tab allows you to specify existing design as a template
for the generated diagram. Any connectivity in the current design
matching connectivity in the selected Prototype design, adopts the
layout from the template. Any unmatched connectivity in the current
design is laid out automatically.
Existing diagrams that have had connectivity added or removed are
deleted and new diagrams are created (where there are connectivity
objects distributed to them).
connectivity objects are matched by name
Existing diagrams that have had connectivity added or removed are
deleted and new diagrams are created (where there are connectivity
objects distributed to them).
From Project Displays a list of all projects that are available to be used as a Prototype
Select Design Displays all designs of the project currently selected in the From
Prototype Project panel that are available for selection as a Prototype.
Related Topics
New Diagram - Help

• The AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Design Tab Contents fields

February 2016
New Diagram Dialog
New Diagram Dialog

To access this dialog, click the Create a New Diagram button on the New Generated Diagrams -
Diagrams Tab of the New Generated Diagrams Dialog.
When you use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate diagrams for a design, use New
Diagram Dialog to specify the name and properties of a new diagram.
Note
See “Generating Filtered Diagrams for a Design” on page 499.
Objects
Table 16-10. New Diagram Dialog Contents

Field Description
Name Enter a new name for the diagram, or click the ellipsis (...)
button to the right of the field to select from a list of pre-
specified diagram names maintained in the project’s Object
Type Information in Capital Project. Mandatory.
New Click to add a property to the diagram. Enter a Property
Name in the New Property Dialog then click OK. The new
property is added to the list. Optional
See the Usage Notes below
Delete Click to delete the currently selected property. Optional
Usage Notes
• A property consists of the following fields:
o Name — A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
o Value — The value assigned to the property. Optional.
o Type — This is the data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is
not supported by the selected Type, the Value appears in red text, and the OK
button is disabled.
o String — A mix of letters, number or special characters.
o Integer — A whole number.
o Float — A number including a decimal (floating) point.
Related Topics

February 2016
Edit Diagram - Help
Edit Diagram - Help

• The Edit Diagram Dialog fields

February 2016
Edit Diagram Dialog
Edit Diagram Dialog

To access this dialog, click the Edit Diagram Properties button on the New Generated Diagrams
- Diagrams Tab of the New Generated Diagrams dialog.
When you use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate diagrams for a design, use Edit
Diagram Dialog to amend the name and properties of a diagram.
Note
Objects
Table 16-11. Edit Diagram Dialog Contents

Field Description
Name Enter a new name for the diagram, or click the ellipsis (...)
button to the right of the field to select from a list of pre-
specified diagram names maintained in the project’s Object
New Click to add a property to the diagram. Enter a Property
Name in the New Property Dialog then click OK. The new
property is added to the list. Optional
See the Usage Notes below.
Delete Click to delete the currently selected property. Optional
Usage Notes
• A property consists of the following fields:
o Name — A unique identifier for the property. Read-only.
o Value — The value assigned to the property. Optional.
o Type — This is the data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a Value that is
not supported by the selected Type, the Value appears in red text, and the OK
button is disabled.
o String — A mix of letters, number or special characters.
o Integer — A whole number.
o Float — A number including a decimal (floating) point.
Related Topics

February 2016
Selection Preview - Help
Selection Preview - Help

• The Selection Preview Dialog fields

February 2016
Selection Preview Dialog
Selection Preview Dialog

To access this dialog, click View on the New Generated Diagrams - Diagrams Tab of the New
Generated Diagrams dialog, with an existing diagram selected in the Available
Connectivity field.
When you use Capital AutoView Assist for Logic to generate diagrams for a design, use the
Selection Preview Dialog, to display (view) a read-only version of the diagram, selected in the
Available Connectivity field on the New Generated Diagrams - Diagrams tab.
Note
Objects
Table 16-12. Selection Preview Dialog Contents

Field Description
Zoom In Increases the scale of the diagram so that objects appear
larger.
Zoom Out Decreases the scale of the diagram so that objects appear
smaller
Zoom All Zooms out to display all objects in the diagram.
Usage Notes
• Connectivity objects selected in the Available Connectivity tree are highlighted in the
diagram.
Related Topics
Import Project and Generate Diagrams - Help

• The Import Project and Generate Diagrams Dialog fields

February 2016
Import Project and Generate Diagrams Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Import Project & Generate Diagrams.
Use this dialog to import a project and use the Capital AutoView Assist for Logic functionality
to generate diagrams for the connectivity in the project.
Objects
Table 16-13. Import Project and Generate Diagrams Dialog Contents

Field Description
Look In Select a folder location from the drop-down list and browse to the
project file that you want to import.
Border Selection Select a border to be used on the generated diagrams. Select [No
Border] if you want to generate the diagrams without a border.
Horizontal Specify whether you want the border to align with the left, right or
Vertical Specify whether you want the border to align with the top, bottom
or center of the connectivity on the diagram.
Regenerate Existing Check this box to regenerate any existing diagrams based on the
Diagrams currently specified settings.
Run Segment Overlay Check this box to run a design rule check that checks for
DRC overlaying conductor segments.
Show AutoView Style Check this box to open the AutoView Style Editor Dialog when
Editor you import the project.
See the Usage Notes below.
File Name Specify the project XML file that you want to import.
Usage Notes
• If ‘Show AutoView Style Editor’ is selected, the AutoView Style Editor Dialog is
displayed as the project is imported. This dialog enables you to specify component
styling, diagram layout styling and to select a template (prototype) to be applied to the
diagrams that are being imported.
Related Topics
AutoView Style Editor Dialog

February 2016

To access: Select ‘Show AutoView Style Editor’ on the Import Project and Generate Diagrams
Dialog. This dialog will then display during the import process.
Use this dialog to specify any component styling, diagram layout styling and to select a
template (prototype) to be applied to the diagrams that are being imported by the importing a
project and generating diagrams process.
Note
See Importing a Project and Generating Diagrams for further information about the process.
Objects
• The dialog has three tabs:
o Component Styling Tab
o Layout Styling Tab
o Prototype Tab Contents
Table 16-14. AutoView Style Editor - Component Styling Tab

Field Description
Component Styling Use this tab to specify the required styling to use for objects on the
Tab generated diagrams.
By default, Capital AutoView Assist for Logic uses the Default
style set for Capital Publisher.
On the Component Styling tab, you can edit the default style set,
or selected style set but note that the changes will apply to any
designs using the style set and is visible if this style set is viewed in
Capital Project.
Refer to the Diagram Styling User Guide for full information about
the style set configuration options displayed on this tab and how to
edit them.
If you have a license to use Capital Styling, use the Style Set
dropdown list at the top of the tab to select a different style set, if
they are available. You can click the ellipsis (...) to open the Style
Sets Dialog where you can edit an existing style set, or create a new
style set.

February 2016
Table 16-15. Auto View Style Editor - Layout Styling Tab

Field Description
Layout Styling Use this tab to specify the required styling to use for layout of objects
Tab on the generated diagrams.
flow:
• Horizontal (left to right).
• Vertical (bottom to top).
Enable Check this box if you want devices and connectors to have their pins
Connector only on the sides that follow the direction of the Diagram flow. On the
Flow top and bottom sides in a vertical flow, and on the left and right sides in
devices following the flow.
Uncheck this box if you want devices and connectors to have pins on
all sides, and therefore do not want to restrict connector placement on
devices.
the overlapping of connectivity and bends in conductors. The
following considerations are relevant to this type of layout:
this box.
Optimize Many devices can directly associate to a single device. Check this box
Parallel if you want such associations to be graphically represented by aligning
placements of the devices either vertically, or horizontally. This is considered a one-
Tree Devices to-many connection. An example is an ABS module, and its sensors.
Enable Check this box if you want the graphical representation of harness
Connector connectors to be split around the devices to which they belong, if it
Splitting by reduces net jogs, and conductor crossover. Otherwise, do not check this
Proximity box.
Enable Inline Check this box to split the graphical orientation of inline connectors
Splitting around devices

February 2016
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Help
Table 16-15. Auto View Style Editor - Layout Styling Tab (cont.)
Field Description
Auto select Check this box to automatically select a suitable border to fit the design
Border to Fit
Minimum Specify the minimum distance in grid spaces that can exist between
Segment any two devices, connectors, or splices that are connected by a
Length conductor. If a greater length is specified, more white space will appear
between objects in the diagram.
Minimum Specify the minimum width in grid spaces for Device display.
Device Width
Table 16-16. Auto View Style Editor - Prototype Tab Contents

Field Description
Prototype Tab The Prototype tab allows you to specify an existing Project as a
template for the generated diagrams. Any connectivity in the
importing designs matching connectivity in the selected Prototype
design, adopts the layout from the template. Any unmatched
connectivity in the importing design is laid out automatically.
connectivity objects are matched by name.
Select Select Name or Revision to match the designs being imported to the
Prototype designs in the selected prototype by Name or Revision
Design By
From Project Displays a list of all projects that are available to be used as a
Prototype
Related Topics
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog -

Help
• Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered Connectivity from Multiple Designs

February 2016
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Help
• The AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog fields


February 2016
AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog

To access: Right-click the project name in the Project Browser Window or right-click a design
under the Build Lists node and click AutoView: Query and Generate Design.
Use this dialog box to filter the connectivity to be included in a single generated design and used
to specify the base details for the generated design.
Objects
The dialog has the following tabs:
o Scope Tab
o Design Tab
o Filter Tab
Table 16-17. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Scope Tab
Field Description
Scope Tab Use this dialog box to specify the designs and build lists from which
you want to take the connectivity that will be included in the generated
design and diagrams.
Design Type Select the type of designs from which you want to take connectivity.
The available designs for that type are displayed in the Available
window. Mandatory.
Available Window Lists the available designs and build lists (of the type selected for
Design Window ). Select the build lists and designs from which you
want to take connectivity and click Add to move them to the Selected
window. Click Add All to move all build lists and designs to the
Selected window.
Selected Window Lists the designs and build lists that have been selected. These are the
designs whose connectivity will be included in the generated design
and diagrams. To move a design to the Available window, select it and
click Remove. To move all designs to the Available window, click
Remove All.
Effectivity
Table 16-18. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Design Tab
Contents
Field Description
Design Tab Used to specify the base details for the generated design.

February 2016
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Name A unique label to identify the design. Mandatory.
Properties Click this button to access the Edit Design Properties Dialog, from
where you can create properties to associate with the design.
Optional.
Revision Specifies the version of the design, allowing multiple updated
versions of the same design to exist in the database. Mandatory.
Short Description Enter a line of descriptive text to provide more information about the
design revision. This information is displayed alongside the design
Filter Tab and Revision in the Project Browser Window. Optional.
Description This is a free-text field into which you can enter additional
comments or notes relevant to this design. Optional.
Release Level This field is used to record the design’s progress through the stages
of the design lifecycle. A number of system-defined release levels
are available, but it is possible to create custom levels in Capital
Project (see the Creating a Release Level for a Projecttopic in the
Capital Project User Guide for more information). Regardless of the
number of custom levels available, they must correspond to one of
the system-defined release levels:
If no custom levels are configured, the only option available is
Draft, which is selected by default.
Any custom levels configured must correspond to the Draft system-
defined level, so select the custom level required as dictated by your
internal procedures.
Abstraction If you are using design abstractions, select the abstraction to which
this design belongs, from the dropdown list. Maintained in Capital
Project, abstractions allow you to group related harnesses together
for reporting purposes, providing a “view” of a subset of a vehicle’s
wiring. See the Create a Project’s Design Abstractions topic in the
Capital Project User Guide for more information. Optional.
Domain If you are using domains to restrict user access to designs, select the
domain to which this design belongs from the dropdown list. Only
users with access rights to the selected domain are able to access this
design. Domains are created and associated with user accounts in
Capital User. See the Domains topic in the Capital User User Guide
for more information. Optional.

February 2016
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Applicable The options that apply to this design revision. Click the ellipsis (...)
Options button to the right of the field to launch the Applicable Options
Dialog, from where you can select the option codes available. Once
selected, the available options are displayed in the field.
These options - created and maintained in Capital Project - can then
be applied to the components on the design. Optional.
Option The option or option expression that you want to apply to the whole
design revision. Click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Edit
Option Expression Dialog where you can select a single option or
create an option expression. Optional.
Parent Folder The folder in the Project design tree under which the design will be
added. Click the ellipsis (...) to display the Scope Tab where you can
select the folder.
Table 16-19. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Filter Tab
Field Description
Filter Tab Used to specify attribute filters against components or devices to
restrict the connectivity that is included in the generated design and
diagrams.
Filter Table Lists the filters that have been set in a tree. The tree consists of entity
type (component or device) nodes and sub-nodes for specific attributes
used to filter those types of entities.
Attribute Lists entity types and the attribute filters set for them.
Name To add an entity type, select Entities at the top of the tree and click
Add New Attribute (x) A node is added to the tree. Click on that node
(in the column) to select the entity type from a dropdown list. A sub-
node for an attribute is added below the entity node, click on the sub-
node to select an attribute name from a dropdown list.
To add additional attribute sub-nodes below an entity type, click that
entity node in the tree and click Add New Attribute (x). A new sub-
node is added below the entity type.
To remove a node and its sub-nodes, select that node and click
Remove Attribute (x).
To remove all nodes, click Reload Criteria (x).

February 2016
Table 16-19. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Filter Tab (cont.)
Field Description
Operator Offers a list of standard query comparators that you can use in the filter
for the corresponding, as defined in table: Table 16-20 below.
Select the condition to use, then enter the number or string to compare
the attribute or property to in the Related Topics column.
Value Specifies the value used in the filter for the corresponding.
Connectivity Specifies the different ways in which electrically connected entities
processor can be discovered for the purposes of filtering data. Mandatory.
The options are:
Connectivity Between Pin ListsDiscovers all connectors connected
between the pin lists returned by the filter. This discovery will pass
through any splices and inlines. Additionally, if used with a Pin
Processor the discovery of conductors can traverse devices that have
internal connectivity.Directly ConnectedDiscovers all conductors
connected to the pin lists returned by the filter. If the pin list is a
device, then the harness connector and any device connector pins are
included.IdentityDoes not search the connectivity for any other
entities than those specified by the filters in the Filter Table.Signal
TracerIdentifies each item in the filter and discovers all their
connected conductors and terminations. It can traverse all splices and
inlines. Additionally, if the Pin Processor filter is selected here it
allows traversal between pins connected with internal connectivity and
symbols having internal links, for example a fuse symbol with a “fuse”
link.
Configuration Specifies that you want to filter the connectivity to only that belonging
to a particular vehicle configuration. Optional.
Pin Processor Used in conjunction with the Connectivity Between Pin Lists or Signal
Tracer Connectivity Processor to discover additional objects for
inclusion in the target design. One processor is provided: Traverse
Internal Links.
This processor enables the system to traverse internal links created
within Capital Symbol.
Additional processors can be developed and loaded as plugins. For
more information see the PluginDevelopment.pdf document that is
located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation.

February 2016
Parent Folder Selection Help
Table 16-19. AutoView: Query and Generate Design Dialog - Filter Tab (cont.)
Field Description
Reuse shared Specifies whether shared objects are copied to the new design as new
objects in objects (unselected) or if they are created in the new design with
design stitching references to the shared object (selected). Mandatory, displayed only
for Capital Logic designs.
For example:
If you select this option and there is a shared device DEV1 in the scope
designs, the generated design contains a device DEV1 that is an
instance of the same shared device.If you do not select this option and
there is a shared device DEV1 in the scope designs, the generated
design contains a device DEV1 but it is not an instance of the shared
device DEV1 in the scope designs. It is a new device DEV1.
Usage Notes
Table 16-20. Query Operators

Symbol Description
= Is equal to
!= Is not equal to
<= Is less than or equal to
< Is less than
> Is greater than
>= Is greater than or equal to
is like Contains. This option allows
the comparison of strings
using regular expressions
matches Matches the option
expression. Available only
when the Option Expression
attribute is selected.

• Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered Connectivity from Multiple Designs
• The Parent Folder Selection Dialog fields

February 2016

February 2016
Parent Folder Selection Dialog

To access: Clicking the ellipsis (...) next to the Filter Tab field on the Scope Tab.
Used to select the parent folder in the Project design tree under which the generated design will
be added.
Objects
Table 16-21. Parent Folder Selection Contents

Field Description
Parent Displays the Project design tree. Select the folder under
Folder which you want to add the generated design and click OK.
Selection
Related Topics
Generating a Design and Diagrams for Filtered Connectivity from Multiple Designs

February 2016

February 2016
Chapter 17
Capital Topology
Capital Topology enables you to create topological designs and diagrams from within Capital
Logic.
Capital Topology Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Enabling Capital Topology Functionality in Capital Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Topology Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
High-Level Flow for Using Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Styling Objects (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Harness Concurrency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Topology Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Creating a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Editing a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Deleting a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Logical Design Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Build List Association (Managed Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Associating Logical Designs with the Topological Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Replacing a Logical Design Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Locating a Source Physical Object in a Capital Logic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Comparing Capital Topology Design Revisions with Other Design Revisions . . . . . . . . . 567
Topology Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Working with Multiple Diagrams Overview Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Creating a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Editing a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Deleting a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Opening a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Closing a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Flipping Objects in a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Rotating Objects in a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Defining Rotation Increments in a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Free Rotation of an Object or Comment Symbol in a Topology Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Physical Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Specifying the Physical Scale of a Capital Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Adding a Skeleton to a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Removing a Skeleton from a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

February 2016
Capital Topology
Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Adding an Empty Slot to a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Adding a Slot with a Device to a Topology Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Editing a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Constraining the Placement of Devices in a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Manually Placing a Device in a Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Manually Unplacing a Device from a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Viewing the Signal Map for a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Creating Multiple Slot Instances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Slot Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Adding an Unassociated Slot Connector to a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Adding a Specific Harness Connector as a Slot Connector to a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Editing a Slot Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Specifying a Route Code for a Slot Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Moving a Slot Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Constraining the Association of Logical Harness Connectors to Slot Connectors. . . . . . . 588
Device Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for a Device Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Adding a Bundle to a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Editing a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Creating Multiple Bundle Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Specifying the Physical Length of a Bundle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Specifying Variant Physical Lengths for a Bundle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Moving a Bundle Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Deleting a Bundle Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Deleting an Entire Bundle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Specifying a Bundle (Harness) as a Poke Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Constraining the Placement of Splices on a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Multiple Harnesses at Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Constraining the Routing of Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify the Possible Routes for an Unrouted Wire . . . . . 604
Selected Inline Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Reporting on All Unrouted Wires that Could Pass Through an Inline Connector . . . . . . . 607
Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Updating Wire Lengths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Multicores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Multicore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Splices in Capital Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

February 2016
Capital Topology
Specifying the Harness Attribute for a Splice in Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Inline Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Adding an Unassociated Inline Pair to a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Adding a Specific Logical Inline Pair to a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Editing an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Specifying a Route Code for an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector 616
Moving an Inline Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Deleting an Inline Pair from a Bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Toggling the Inline Plug Connector and Inline Receptacle Connector on an Inline Pair. . 618
Constraining the Automatic Association of Inline Halves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Viewing the Signal Map for an Inline Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Virtual Harnesses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Editing a Virtual Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Grouping Wires into Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Usage Example for Grouping Wires into Signals in Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Adding a Hole to a Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Editing a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Constraining the Mapping of Wires to a Hole on a Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Constraints (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Standard Constraints for Capital Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Using a Constraint to Set an Attribute or Property on an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Applying the Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Reports (Capital Topology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Harness Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Creating a Harness Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Material Statistics Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Creating a Material Statistic Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Bundle Wires Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Creating a Bundle Wires Report for a Bundle Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Copying the Bundle Wires Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Clearing the Bundle Wires Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Applied Constraints Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Creating an Applied Constraints Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Component BOM Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Creating a Component BOM Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Multicore List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Creating a Multicore List Report for a Topology Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Using the Report Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

February 2016
Capital Topology
Metrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Design Rule Checks (Capital Topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Running Design Rule Checks in the Design Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Capital Topology Dialog and Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Add Selected Logical Design Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Associate Wiring Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Concurrency Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Connector Details Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Connector Details Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Design Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Edit Physical Scale (Capital Topology) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Edit Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Edit Properties: Device Connector Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Edit Properties: Hole Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Edit Properties: Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Edit Properties: Slot Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Edit Properties: Wire Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Edit Skeleton Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

February 2016
Capital Topology
Capital Topology Overview

Material Statistics Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
New Topology Design Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
New Topology Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
New Topology Diagram Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
New Topology Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Place Device Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Place Device Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Design Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Signal Map for Slot Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Routing Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Variant Tab (Edit Properties Dialog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Wiring Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Capital Topology Overview

Capital Topology enables you to create topological designs and diagrams from within Capital
Logic. Wiring designs from Capital Logic can be associated and synchronized with topological
designs, and multiple topological designs can be grouped together in a build list.
Note
Capital Topology is an add-on to Capital Logic and requires a valid license in order to
enable (expose) the functionality. Contact Capital Support to obtain a license. If you possess
a valid license, see “Enabling Capital Topology Functionality in Capital Logic” on page 550.
The Capital Topology functionality is available within Capital Logic only when a Capital
Topology diagram is active.
Capital Topology designs can be synchronized with Capital HarnessXC, or exchanged with
MCAD tools via one of the Capital MCAD topology bridges. For further details, see the
Bridging Data In and Out of Capital User Guide.
You can report on topological data using either the embedded reporting capability or Capital
Enterprise Reporter. For further details, see the Capital Enterprise Reporter User Guide.
Capital Insight
Capital Insight is an additional product that provides functionality for conducting physical
architectural trade studies on designs created in Capital Integrator, Capital Topology, Capital

February 2016
Capital Topology
Enabling Capital Topology Functionality in Capital Logic
HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC. These studies use metrics to compare design data, for
example, using cost and weight.
See the Capital Insight chapter in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide
for more details.
Related Topics
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Topology Flows
High-Level Flow for Using Capital Topology
Enabling Capital Topology Functionality in

Capital Logic
In order to use Capital Topology functionality, you must enable (expose) the functionality by
doing the following.
Prerequisites
• You must have a valid license for Capital Topology.
Procedure
1. In the Capital Launcher, click Configuration (located under Support at the top); the
Edit Capital Configuration dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Enable Topology Design option (located at the bottom of the dialog) and
click OK. When you next open Capital Logic, the Capital Topology functionality will
be exposed. If you have Capital Logic open when doing this, close it and open it again.
Note
Alternatively, you can enable Capital Topology by editing the clientprops.xml file in
the config directory of your Capital installation. Find the <packages> section in that
file and ensure that the line for topology reads: <feature check="YES"
name="topology"></feature>
Related Topics
Capital Topology

February 2016
Capital Topology
Video Test Drive - Aerospace and Topology

Flows
The Mentor Leaning Center includes a video in which you learn the basic topology and
aerospace design flow - from initial subsystem design through to physical harness topology, and
engineering of the harnesses.
• Designer - Connectivity (Foundation)


This topic provides an overview of the intended flow for using Capital topology.
Note
This particular flow assumes that you are creating the topology within Capital.
Alternatively, you can bridge in the topology from MCAD via one of the Capital MCAD
topology bridges. Full details on how to bridge data in, and out of Capital Topology, how to use
the bridges and their functionality is contained within the Bridging Data In and Out of Capital
User Guide.
1. In Capital Logic, create a topology design. See “Topology Designs” on page 558. Note
that Capital Topology uses a style set to style objects in diagrams. See “Styling Objects
(Capital Topology)” on page 553.
2. Specify the physical scale of the diagram. See “Physical Scale” on page 575. This must
be done prior to creating the topology (for example, bundles) because the graphical
length of bundle graphics (relative to the skeleton) will change if you change the scale.
This means the bundles would no longer fit correctly with the skeleton.

February 2016
Capital Topology
3. Create the topology layout by adding the following objects as required:

o Skeletons
o Slots (with or without Holes)
o Slot Connectors
o Bundles (note that you can have Multiple Harnesses at Connectors)
o Inline Pairs
Note that you can set rules and constraints on the diagram and individual objects. See
“Constraints (Capital Topology)” on page 629.
4. Create wiring designs and diagrams in Capital Logic.
5. As an optional step, in the Capital Logic designs, set a property or attribute on wires that
you will later use to group wires into signals in the topology design. The values of the
property or attribute will be the name of the signals. See “Signals” on page 622 for a
detailed description of how signals are modeled in a topology design.
6. Associate the Capital Logic designs with the topology design. See “Logical Design
Association” on page 561.
The topology design is synchronized with the Capital Logic designs such that the Design
Browser displays the associated Signals and wiring (Wires, Multicores, devices, harness
connectors, Device Connectors, and Inline Pairs) that could be automatically associated.
The Wiring Browser indicates the logical objects that are and are not associated with
topology objects.
See “Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology Design” on page 565.
7. As an optional step, group wires into signals in the topology diagram by specifying the
wire property or attribute that identifies the signal to which they belong. See “Grouping
Wires into Signals” on page 622.
8. If there are unassociated devices on the Wiring Browser, add slots for them to the
diagram. See “Adding a Slot with a Device to a Topology Diagram” on page 578.
9. Run bundle reports to determine the contents (wires, multicores and shields) and the
approximate diameter of the bundles. See “Bundle Wires Report” on page 635.
Note
You can run design rule checks on the diagram (see “Design Rule Checks (Capital
Topology)” on page 641), use Capital Enterprise Reporter to report on the design
data (see the Capital Enterprise Reporter User Guide), and compare the topology design
with wiring designs (see “Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions
or Build Lists” on page 61).

February 2016
Capital Topology
Styling Objects (Capital Topology)
10. If you want to locate and/or edit a particular object on the source Capital Logic designs,
use the Show Physical Source function to open the relevant diagram and make the edit.
See “Locating a Source Physical Object in a Capital Logic Design” on page 566.
11. Select the topology design to open it in the Diagram Window again; the edits from the
Capital Logic design are reflected in the topology design.
12. You can annotate wire lengths from the Capital Topology design back to the wires in the
Capital Logic designs. See “Annotating Topology Wire Lengths and Harness Attributes
Back to Logical Wires and Splices” on page 608.
Related Topics
Capital Topology
Styling Objects (Capital Topology)

You specify the way in which you want to style objects in diagrams by using a style set. Style
sets are maintained at the system level but are applied to individual diagrams. By default,
Capital Topology uses a Default style set.
The creation of style sets beyond the default offered is a licensed operation; if you do not have
the license required, the option to create new style sets is unavailable.
See the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information about style sets and how to edit
them.
Harness Concurrency
Harness concurrency is functionality that allows you to run Capital Topology in multi user
mode or single user mode. Multi user mode enables multiple users to open the same Capital
Topology diagram for simultaneous editing and allows each user to work on a different portion
of the diagram. This is achieved primarily by the ability to lock individual harnesses and slots.
If you do not run Capital Topology in multi user mode, you run it in single user mode. In this
mode, if a user opens a design, other users can open the same design in read-only mode only.
If a lock is held on a diagram in Capital Topology, the design for that design cannot be edited or
deleted in Capital Project. If you hold a lock on a slot or harness in Capital Topology, other
users cannot perform editing actions that operate directly on that locked object and connected
objects. Connected objects can be bundles, nodes, bundle regions, inline connectors, slot
connectors, device connectors, cavities and wiring objects. Any actions that they cannot
perform are disabled for the locked objects.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Harness Concurrency
Note
To run Capital Topology in single user mode, your user account must have the Manage
Design permission set in Capital User. You can still edit a diagram in multi user mode even
if you do not have this permission set. See the Capital User help system for more information
about setting permissions for user accounts.
Relationships between Locks and User Modes

There are various relationships between locks and user modes.
Complete diagram lock in single user mode

If you edit a diagram in single user mode, you have a complete diagram lock that allows you to
edit everything and that prohibits other users from editing any object in that diagram. When
editing a diagram, you cannot change to single user mode if another user is editing the diagram
in multi user mode. If you have the Manage Design permission, when you open a diagram that
is not being edited by another user, you are automatically in single user mode and therefore
have a complete diagram lock. When you close the diagram in single user mode, the diagram
lock is removed.
Weak diagram lock in multi user mode

If you edit a diagram in multi user mode, you have a weak lock on that diagram. This means
other users can edit the diagram only in multi user mode too. In order to edit a slot or harness in
that diagram, you must lock that object so that other users cannot edit it at the same time as you
(see “Locking a Harness or Slot when Running in Multi User Mode” below). When you close a
diagram in multi user mode, your weak lock is removed. If you change from multi user mode to
single user mode, any slot or harness locks are removed because you can then edit any objects
without manually locking them.
When you are editing a diagram in multi user mode, you can dim (gray out) objects that are
unlocked and objects that are locked by other users. This means that you only see objects that
you have locked and can edit. See “Dimming (Graying out) Slots and Harnesses that Are
Locked by Other Users or that Are Unlocked” below.
After you have finished editing an object, you should unlock it so that other users can edit it if
required (see “Unlocking a Harness or Slot when Running in Multi User Mode” below).
If you create a new harness or slot in multi user mode, no other user will see the new object on
their Concurrency tab until you save it. When you save the object, you have a lock on it
automatically.
Concurrency tab
The Concurrency tab is displayed at the bottom left of the application window and enables you
to view the lock state for the diagram, each harness and each slot.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Harness Concurrency
It contains the following:
• Mode field - enables you to select whether you are running in multi user or single user
mode. See “Selecting to Run in Multi User or Single User Mode” below.
• Table of harnesses and slots - enables you to view a list of slots, harnesses and their lock
states (see “Selecting which Lockable Objects to View on the Concurrency Tab”
below). The table contains the following columns:
o Lock - shows whether the object is unlocked , locked by you or locked by
another user .
o Modified - shows whether the object has been modified since the last save in
the current session. The column is blank for unmodified objects.
o Object Type - shows whether an object is a slot or a harness.
o Name - shows the name of the object.

o Locked By - shows the name of the user who has the object locked.
• Connected Objects table - shows you the slots and harnesses that are connected to the
objects that are currently selected in the table above. The columns are the same as in the
table above.
Selecting to Run in Multi User or Single User Mode
Select the Actions - Concurrency - Switch to Multi User Mode/Switch to Single User Mode
menu option.
Or
1. Click on the Concurrency tab to the left of the application window.

2. In the Mode field, select either Multi User or Single User from the dropdown list. If
another user has a weak lock on the diagram that you have open, you cannot change to
Single User mode.
Selecting which Lockable Objects to View on the Concurrency Tab
Click on the buttons that are situated below the table on the Concurrency tab .
The buttons represent harnesses, multi-harness slots (that is, slots connected to multiple
harnesses), single-harness slots (that is, a slot connected to a single harness) and multi-harness
connectors (that is, connectors connected to multiple harnesses. If the red stop sign is displayed
on a button, it means those objects are not currently displayed on the tab. If a red stop sign is not
displayed on a button, it means that the objects are already displayed on the tab.
Locking a Harness or Slot when Running in Multi User Mode

o Right-click on the harness or slot in the diagram window or Design Browser and
select the Lock option from the popup menu.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Harness Concurrency
o Click on the harness or slot in the diagram or Design Browser, press Space Bar and
enter Lock.
o Ensure that the object you want to lock is listed on the Concurrency tab and click
the unlocked padlock symbol at the start of the table row for it.
2. If the object is listed on the Concurrency tab, the padlock symbol for the object changes
to a locked padlock to indicate that the object is locked. The name of the user holding
the lock is also displayed in the Locked By column for that object. Any other users
viewing the object on the Concurrency tab in another session will see a locked padlock
with an extra mark .
If you have locked a harness, the action also refreshes and locks all single-harness slots
on the harness.
If you have locked a slot connected to a single harness, the action also refreshes and
locks the harness attached to the slot.
If you have locked a slot connected to more than one harness, the action also refreshes
any harnesses directly connected to it.
Unlocking a Harness or Slot when Running in Multi User Mode
Note
You can unlock an object only if it is has been saved since it was last modified.

o Right-click on the harness or slot in the diagram window or Design Browser and
select the Unlock option from the popup menu.
o Click on the harness or slot in the diagram or Design Browser, press Space Bar and
enter Unlock.
o Ensure that the object you want to unlock is listed on the Concurrency tab and click
the locked padlock symbol at the start of the table row for it.
2. If the object is listed on the Concurrency tab, the padlock symbol for the object changes
to an unlocked padlock to indicate that the object is unlocked.
Dimming (Graying out) Slots and Harnesses that Are Locked by Other Users or that Are
Unlocked
You can dim (gray out) slots and harnesses in the diagram if they are locked by other users or
are unlocked. This helps you to see which objects are locked by you and are therefore editable
in the diagram. If you print out a diagram, any dimmed objects are printed normally.
1. Ensure that the dimming functionality is enabled by clicking the Dim By Harness Lock
Status button at the bottom of the application window so that it has no red stop sign
displayed. If a red stop sign is displayed , no objects are dimmed in the diagram.
Alternatively, you can right-click on the Dim By Harness Lock Status button to

February 2016
Capital Topology
Harness Concurrency
display two sliders and a Dim checkbox. Check the box to enable the dimming of
objects.
2. Display the sliders by right-clicking on the button. One slider is for unlocked objects
and the other is for objects locked by other users . Move the sliders down to dim out
objects and move the slider up to make objects clearer.
3. Click in the main application window to hide the sliders.
Refreshing Harness Information with Changes from Other Users and Synchronize the Wiring
Select an unlocked object on the Concurrency tab and click the Refresh Harnesses and Slots
button next to the Mode field. You can select multiple objects. This refreshes only the
selected objects.
Or
Do no select anything and click the Refresh Harnesses and Slots button next to the Mode
field. This refreshes the entire diagram.
Or
Select an unlocked object in the diagram, press Space Bar and enter Refresh to refresh the
harness on which the object is located and any adjacent modified harnesses.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Topology Designs
Topology Designs
A topology design is the container for your engineered data representing a topological layout for
a harness.
Multiple topology designs can be grouped together in a build list. See “Build Lists” on page 48
for more information.
The following topics detail how to create, edit and delete topology designs:
• “Creating a Capital Topology Design” on page 558

• “Editing a Capital Topology Design” on page 559
• “Deleting a Capital Topology Design” on page 559
• “Logical Design Association” on page 561
• “Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology Design” on page 565
• “Locating a Source Physical Object in a Capital Logic Design” on page 566
• “Comparing Capital Topology Design Revisions with Other Design Revisions” on
page 567
• “Design Rule Checks (Capital Topology)” on page 641
• “Build Lists” on page 48
Creating a Capital Topology Design

This topic explains how to create a new topology design from within Capital Logic but using
Capital Topology.
Prerequisites
• Capital Topology must have been enabled. See “Enabling Capital Topology
Functionality in Capital Logic” on page 550.
Procedure
1. In the Project Browser Window in Capital Logic, navigate to the project for which you
are creating a design, right-click and select New Topology Design; the New Topology
Design Dialog is displayed.
2. Specify a Name and Revision.
3. Click OK.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Editing a Capital Topology Design
Results
The design is added to the Project Browser Window. The diagram is opened in the Diagram
Window.
If you selected a template design with multiple diagrams, the system creates diagrams matching
those and with the same names.
Related Topics
Topology Designs
Creating a Capital Topology Diagram
Deleting a Capital Topology Design

This topic details how to edit a topology design.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the design you want to edit in the Project Browser Window, right-click and
select Edit. The Edit Design dialog box Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology) is
displayed.
2. Make any changes required to the design attributes and/or properties.
3. Click OK.
Related Topics
Topology Designs

This topic details how to delete a design from the database.
Note
The ability to delete a design may depend on its release level, and the allowable behaviors
assigned to that release level in Capital Project.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the design you want to delete in the Project Browser, right-click and select
Delete.

February 2016
Capital Topology
2. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion; click Yes to proceed. The
following design entities are deleted:
• Design folder
• Design
• Diagrams (if present)
Related Topics
Topology Designs
Deleting a Capital Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Logical Design Association

In order to place devices and synthesize wiring in a topological design, you must associate one
or more logical designs from Capital Logic with it. When doing this, you associate a specific
revision of each design.
You can associate more than one logical design with a single topological design. To do this, you
can either associate the designs individually or associate a build list.
You can replace a logical design association with a newer revision of that design. When you do
this, the topological design retains the device placement and wiring for common devices and
nets from those logical design revisions.
Build List Association (Managed Mode)

If you use a build list, you enter a managed mode where Capital Topology is aware of any
changes to the build list. New logical designs and revisions can be added to the build list at any
time in Capital Logic or Capital Project.
When you open the topological design in Capital Topology, an Update design associations?
message is displayed if changes have been made to the build list. At that point, you select either
to not update the associations (Don’t Update) or to review those changes (Review Changes). If
you review the changes, they are not applied until you click OK in the Associate Wiring
Designs Dialog Box. You click Cancel if you do not want to apply them.
Related Topics
Associating Logical Designs with the Topological Design
Replacing a Logical Design Association
Associating Logical Designs with the Topological

Design
In order to place devices and synthesize wiring in a topological design, you must associate one
or more designs from Capital Logic with it. When doing this, you associate a specific revision
of each design.
You can associate more than one logical design with a single topological design. To do this, you
can either associate the designs individually or associate a build list.
Procedure
Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Associate Logical Designs.

February 2016
Capital Topology
• Click the Associate Logical Designs ( ) button on the Design Browser.
The Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box is displayed and the Associated Designs
window displays any logical designs that are associated already.
Table 17-1. Association Choice

If you want to... Do the following:
Associate individual designs 1. Select None from the ‘Managed by Build List’
dropdown list.
2. Click the Add associated designs ( ) button;
the Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box is
displayed.
3. In the Logical designs window, select the logical
designs that you want to associate and click Add
Selected; the logical designs are added to the
Associated Designs window in the Associate
Wiring Designs dialog box.
An icon ( ) is displayed next to the added
designs.
If you add a design that is a newer revision of an
already associated design, the following indicates
that the new one will replace the old:
4. Click OK to save the changes.
Associate a build list 1. Select the build list from the ‘Managed by Build
List’ dropdown list; the design revisions from the
build list are displayed in the Associated Designs
window.
2. Click OK to associate the design revisions from
the build list.
Note
When associating individual designs, you can remove the association with a logical
design by selecting it in the Associated Designs window and clicking the Remove
associated designs () button. An icon () indicates that you are going to remove the
association when you click OK.
Results
• The Wiring Browser lists the devices, connectors, multicores, splices and wires from the
associated Capital Logic designs. If a logical device has the same name as a topology
slot, the device is placed in the slot (unless constraints dictate otherwise).

February 2016
Capital Topology
• If a harness connector has the same name as a slot connector on the Capital Topology
diagram, an association is created between them. If a device connector is attached to a
harness connector in the Capital Logic design, a device connector is created as a
separate object that is connected to the slot connector. The device connector is added to
the Design Browser.
• If an inline plug connector or an inline receptacle connector from the Capital Logic
designs has the same name as one in the topology diagram, an association is created
between them.
• Wires associated with bundles in the topology diagram are added to the Design Browser,
either under the Unassigned node or, if grouped into Signals, under the Signals node.
• Any items that have not been placed or routed are grayed out in the Wiring Browser.
Notes relating to option expressions on devices and nets:
• When associating logical designs, any nets that are tagged with an option expression that
evaluates to FALSE because of obsolete options are not added to the design. Similarly, a
net connection will not be added if that connection’s pins are tagged with an option
expression that evaluates to FALSE because of obsolete options.
• Devices tagged with an option expression that evaluates to FALSE because of obsolete
options are not added to the design. Similarly, a device is not added even if one of its
pins is tagged with an option expression that evaluates to FALSE because of obsolete
options.
• In the case of a net connected to multiple pins, the net will be considered even if at least
one of its pins has an option expression that is TRUE. However, the net is ignored if its
pins all have option expressions that are FALSE.
• If a logic design is tagged with an option expression that evaluates to FALSE, you will
not be allowed to add this design to the set of associated designs. It is displayed on the
right-hand side of the dialog in italics, which indicates that it will not be considered.
• If an already associated design is tagged with an obsolete option expression, it will be
un-associated whenever the associations are updated.
Related Topics
Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology Design

You can replace a logical design association with a newer revision of that design.

February 2016
Capital Topology
When you do this, the topological design retains the device placement and wiring for common
devices and nets from those logical design revisions.
Prerequisites
• The new design revision must have been created in Capital Logic or Capital Project.
• If you are working in managed mode (where a build list association is used), the new
design revision must be added to the associated build list and the old one must be
removed.
Procedure
Follow the appropriate procedure from the table.
Table 17-2. Available Procedures

Replace an old design 1. Open the topological design in Capital Integrator;
revision with a new revision an Update design associations? message is
in managed mode (where a displayed.
build list association is used) 2. Click Review Changes, the Associate Wiring
Designs Dialog Box is displayed and indicates
the changes that are suggested as a result of the
build list changes.
3. Click OK to accept the changes.
Replace an old design 1. With the topological design open in Capital
revision with a new revision Integrator, press Space Bar and enter Associate
in non-managed mode Logical Designs; the Associate Wiring Designs
(where individual design Dialog Box is displayed.
associations are used) 2. Click the Add associated designs ( ) button;
the Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box is
displayed.
3. In the Logical designs window, select the new
logical design revision and click Add Selected;
the design revision is added to the Associated
Designs window in the Associate Wiring
Designs dialog box. The following icons indicate
that the new one will replace the old.
4. Click OK to save the changes.
Results
• The topological design retains the device placement and wiring for common parts of
those logical designs or design revisions.

February 2016
Capital Topology
• New devices are ready to be placed.

• New nets are ready to have wiring synthesized.
Related Topics
Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital

Topology Design
This topic details how to synchronize changes in the associated Capital Logic designs with the
topology design. This step is necessary if changes have been made to associated Capital Logic
designs since they were associated with the topology design.
Note
Synchronization occurs automatically when you open a topology design (even in read-only
mode) and when an open topology design is activated.
Prerequisites
• The Capital Logic designs must be associated with the topology design. See “Logical
Design Association” on page 561.
Procedure
Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Synchronize Logical Changes

• Click the Refresh Wiring ( ) button on the Design Browser
Results
• If logical objects have changed names, been created or been deleted, the associations
with objects in the topology diagram change accordingly.
• The Design Assistant displays any messages or errors related to this action.
• If the synchronization finds a change to a net or device that means the object is now
obsolete, the device/signal or its wiring is not removed from the Capital Integrator
design but the Sync tab indicates that it cannot remove the signal/device:
o If the system finds a change to a net that now has wiring, the signal is not removed
from the design.
o If the system finds a change to a net that has not yet got wiring generated, the signal
is removed from the design and a message is displayed on the Sync tab.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Locating a Source Physical Object in a Capital Logic Design
o If the systems finds a change to a device that is now placed, the device is not
removed from the design.
o If the system finds a change to a device that is not placed, the device is removed
from the design and a message is displayed on the Sync tab.
Related Topics
Locating a Source Physical Object in a Capital

Logic Design
This topic details how to locate (find) the source physical object associated with a topology
object in a topology diagram. This action opens the Capital Logic diagram containing the source
object and highlights it.
You can locate the physical source for the following objects:
• Devices, both placed and unplaced

• Wires
• Connectors
• Splices
• Multicores
• Overbraids
• Shield Terminations
Procedure
Select the object in the Diagram Window, Design Browser or Wiring Browser, press Space Bar
and enter Show Physical Source, or press CTRL + X.
Note
If there is more than one diagram containing the physical source, the Show Physical
Source dialog is displayed where you select the diagram to be opened.
Results
• The Capital Logic diagram containing the source physical object is opened in the
Diagram Window.
• The source physical object is highlighted in the Capital Logic diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Comparing Capital Topology Design Revisions with Other Design Revisions
Comparing Capital Topology Design Revisions with

Other Design Revisions
You can compare objects and their properties in Capital Topology design revisions with design
objects from other design revisions or build lists.
See “Comparing Objects and Their Properties in Design Revisions or Build Lists” on page 61
for more details.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Topology Diagrams
Topology Diagrams
A topology diagram is the drawing canvas upon which the topological layout for a design is
created. Each design can have one or more diagrams.
• “Creating a Capital Topology Diagram” on page 568
• “Editing a Capital Topology Diagram” on page 569
• “Deleting a Capital Topology Diagram” on page 569
• “Opening a Topology Diagram” on page 570
• “Closing a Topology Diagram” on page 570
Working with Multiple Diagrams Overview Video

A design in Capital Topology can have multiple diagrams.
For an overview of working with multiple diagrams see the video Multiple Diagrams Overview.
It includes examples of:
• Slicing bundles and slots

• Creating multiple instances of a dangling bundle
• Moving objects between diagrams
• Navigating between instances of an object
• Viewing signals that go across split bundles
• Using harness synchronization on a design with multiple harness instances

This topic explains how to create a new topology diagram for a topology design. You can have
one or more diagrams per design.
Procedure
1. In the Project Browser Window in Capital Logic, navigate to the topology design for
which you are creating a diagram, right-click and select New Diagram; the New
Topology Diagram Dialog is displayed.
2. Specify a Name and click OK.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Editing a Capital Topology Diagram
Results
The diagram is added under the design in the Project Browser Window and is opened in the
Diagram Window.
Related Topics
Topology Diagrams
Specifying the Physical Scale of a Capital Topology Diagram

This topic details how to edit a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the diagram you want to edit in the Project Browser Window, right-click
and select Edit. The “Edit Diagram Dialog Box” on page 654 is displayed.
2. Make any changes required to the diagram attributes and/or properties.
3. Click OK.
Related Topics
Topology Diagrams

This topic details how to delete a topology diagram from the database.
Note
The ability to delete a diagram may depend on its parent design’s release level, and the
allowable behaviors assigned to that release level in Capital Project.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the diagram that you want to delete in the Project Browser Window, right-
click and select Delete.
2. A message is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion; click Yes to proceed. The
diagram is deleted.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Opening a Topology Diagram
Related Topics
Topology Diagrams

This topic details how to open a topology diagram into the Diagram Window.
Procedure
1. Open the project containing the design you want to edit. See “Opening a Project” on
page 36.
2. Navigate to the design in the Project Browser Window and expand it until the diagram is
visible.
3. Either:
• Double-click on the diagram
• Right-click and select Open
The diagram is opened.
Related Topics
Topology Diagrams
Closing a Topology Diagram
Closing a Topology Diagram

This topic details how to close a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. If not in tabbed mode, click the cross button ( ) in the top-right corner of the Diagram
Window.
If in tabbed mode, click the cross button ( ) on the right side of the tab for the Diagram
Window.
2. The following checks are performed:
• If the diagram has not been saved, you are prompted to save it before closing. Click
Yes to save, No to close without saving or Cancel to abort the close action.
• If any outstanding processes are still running, a message is displayed to warn you
and you are prevented from closing the diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Flipping Objects in a Topology Diagram
If both checks are satisfied, the diagram is closed.

Related Topics
Topology Diagrams

This topic explains how to flip objects horizontally or vertically about their centers in a
diagram.
In Capital Topology, you can flip:
• primitive graphical objects

• comment symbols
• slots
• mated inline connector pairs
• unmated inline halves
• interface connectors
Procedure
1. Select one or more objects that you want to flip.
2. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Horizontal Flip About Center
• Right-click on one of the selected objects and select Horizontal Flip About Center
or Horizontal Flip About Center from the menu
Results
• The objects flip about their own centers.
• All text labels are orientated as part of the flip process to ensure that they can be read
correctly.
• Bundles remain connected to the flipped objects and extend as required. Calculated
bundle lengths will therefore change.
• Styling is re-applied to the flipped objects.
Related Topics
Rotating Objects in a Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology

This topic explains how to freely rotate objects around their center point by increments of 90
degrees.
In Capital Topology, you can rotate:
• primitive graphical objects

• comment symbols
• slots
• mated inline connector pairs
• unmated inline halves
• interface connectors
Procedure
1. Select one or more objects that you want to rotate.
Note
Bundles cannot rotate.
2. Press Space Bar and enter Rotate About Center.

Results
• The objects rotate about their own centers by 90 degrees.
• All text labels are orientated as part of the rotation process to ensure that they can be
read correctly.
• Bundles remain connected to the rotated objects and extend as required. Calculated
bundle lengths will therefore change.
• Styling is re-applied to the rotated objects.
Related Topics
Free Rotation of an Object or Comment Symbol in a Topology Diagram
Defining Rotation Increments in a Topology

Diagram
This topic explains how to specify the major and minor rotation increments that are used in the
free rotation of primitive graphical objects and comment symbols around their center point.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Set Rotation Degrees.
2. Set the Minor Rotation Increment used for finer grained rotational control. Default value
is 1 degree.
3. Set the Major Rotation Increment used for coarser grained rotational control. Default
value is 5 degrees.
4. Click on the OK to confirm your settings.
Related Topics
Free Rotation of an Object or Comment Symbol in a

Topology Diagram
This topic explains how to freely rotate a primitive graphical object or comment symbol around
its center point by a pre-defined major or minor rotation increment.
Note
Tables, Electrical Connectivity Objects and Electrical Symbols do not have free rotation
enabled.
Procedure
1. Select one object that you want to rotate.
2. Either:
• Press CTRL+> to rotate the object clockwise by a major increment. Press Ctrl+< to
rotate counter-clockwise. For finer grained control press CTRL+Shift+> to rotate
the object clockwise by a minor increment. Press Ctrl+Shift+< to rotate counter-
clockwise.
• Press CTRL and move the clickable scroll wheel on your mouse forwards or
backwards to rotate the object clockwise or counter-clockwise by a major increment.
For finer grained control press CTRL+Shift and move the clickable scroll wheel on
your mouse forwards or backwards to rotate the object clockwise or counter-
clockwise by a minor increment.
3. The object rotates at a pre-defined degree increment around their center point.
Related Topics
Defining Rotation Increments in a Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology

February 2016
Capital Topology
Physical Scale
Physical Scale
In a topology diagram, this is the scale used for the distance between grid points that indicates
how long that distance is for real-world, physical wires.
It is used to calculate the real-world length of bundles and wires in the diagram.
The physical scale does not effect the size of the diagram when it is printed.
The size of a skeleton graphic on a diagram does not change if the physical scale is changed,
only the number of grid points that fit within the skeleton changes.
This scale must be specified prior to creating the topology (for example, bundles) because the
graphical length of bundle graphics (relative to the skeleton) will change if you change the
scale. This means the bundles would no longer fit correctly with the skeleton.
Specifying the Physical Scale of a Capital Topology

Diagram
This topic details how to specify the physical scale of a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Physical Scale; the Edit Physical Scale Dialog (Capital
Topology) is displayed.
2. Specify the Physical Scale and click OK.
Related Topics

February 2016
Capital Topology
Skeletons
Skeletons
A skeleton graphic is created and saved as a border in Capital Symbol.
It uses the Physical Scale that has been set for the diagram.
Note that you can also add a border to the diagram. See “Borders” on page 367.
Adding a Skeleton to a Topology Diagram

This topic details how to add a skeleton graphic to a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Skeleton; the Edit Skeleton Dialog is displayed.
2. From the tree, select the skeleton graphic and click OK.
Results
The skeleton graphic is added to the diagram.
Related Topics
Skeletons
Removing a Skeleton from a Topology Diagram

This topic details how to add a skeleton graphic to a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Skeleton; the Edit Skeleton Dialog is displayed.
2. From the tree, select [ No Skeleton ] and click OK.
Results
The skeleton graphic is removed from the diagram.
Related Topics
Skeletons

February 2016
Capital Topology
Slots
Slots
Slots represent the location of electrical equipment within the electrical wiring system. At the
most basic level, a slot is a connection point to the harness system. A slot is also referred to as a
component. Electrical devices, as defined in the associated Capital Logic diagrams, are placed
into slots in the topology diagram to define connectivity.
Slots are connected together by bundles and there must be a slot connector or a hole wherever a
bundle connects to a slot.
You can place logical devices in slots in two ways:
• Create an empty slot prior to associating a Capital Logic design with the topology design
and place a device in it after the association. Note that when you associate a Capital
Logic design with the topology design, any logical device with a name matching a
topology slot name is placed in that slot automatically.
• Create a slot for a specific device after a Capital Logic design has been associated with
the topology design. This action creates the slot and places the device in one step.
If you want to place multiple devices in one slot, you can use the Place by Attribute/Property
constraint to force the placement. See “Constraining the Placement of Devices in a Slot” on
page 579. If there is a direct connection (wire) between two devices placed in one slot, the wire
connecting them is listed below the slot in the Design Browser.
Once devices have been placed in a slot, you can view a read-only signal map to see which
signals and wires are entering the slot at which connector cavities or holes.
Adding an Empty Slot to a Topology Diagram

This topic details how to add a slot to a topology diagram without placing a device in it. This
can be done before or after associating a Capital Logic design with the topology design.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Equipment Slot.
2. In the Diagram Window, position the mouse cursor over the grid point where you
want to place one corner of the slot.
3. Drag the mouse away to place the opposite corner of the slot; a gray rectangle is
displayed.
4. Click the grid point where you want to place the opposite corner of the slot.
Results
• The slot is created with a default name of DEV appended with an incrementing number.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Adding a Slot with a Device to a Topology Diagram
Related Topics
Slots
Editing a Slot
Viewing the Signal Map for a Slot

This topic details how to add a slot to a topology diagram and simultaneously place a device in
it.
Prerequisites
• The Capital Logic design containing the device must be associated with the topology
design.
Procedure
1. In the Wiring Browser, navigate to the device.
2. Either:
• Double-click the device.
• Click the device, press Space Bar and enter Create Slot
3. In the Diagram Window, position the mouse cursor over the grid point where you
want to place one corner of the slot.
4. Drag the mouse away to place the opposite corner of the slot; a gray rectangle is
displayed.
5. Click the grid point where you want to place the opposite corner of the slot.
Results
• The slot is created with the name of the device.
• The device is placed in the slot.
• Any harness connector attached to the logical device is added as a slot connector to the
edge of the slot. If a device connector is attached to a harness connector in the Capital
Logic design, a device connector is created as a separate object that is connected to the
slot connector. The device connector is added to the Design Browser.
• If the device has any direct-to-device connections in the Capital Logic design, one hole
is added to the slot automatically.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Editing a Slot
Related Topics
Slots
Editing a Slot
Editing a Slot
This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of a slot on a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the slot to be edited.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the slot in the Diagram Window
The Edit Properties: Slot Dialog is displayed.
3. Make any changes required to the slot attributes and/or properties.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Slots
Constraining the Placement of Devices in a Slot

This topic details how to use the Place by Attribute/Property constraint to control the
placement of logical devices in topology slots based on attribute and property values. This
constraint can be used to force the placement of multiple devices in one slot.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Manually Placing a Device in a Slot
Note
Rules and constraints adhere to hierarchies. That means, if they are set on an object, child
objects inherit them. For example, constraints can be set for a diagram so that they are inherited
by all objects on that diagram (in this case, all slots and connectors). See “Setting Constraints
for an Entire Topology Diagram” on page 631.
Procedure
1. Select a slot.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the slot
The Edit Properties dialog for the object is displayed.
4. Select ‘Place by Attribute/Property’ and click OK; the constraint is added to the Edit
Properties dialog.
Results
• The constraint is applied when Capital Logic designs are associated with the topology
diagram and when updated data from the Capital Logic design is synchronized with the
topology design.
Related Topics
Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology Diagram
Constraints (Capital Topology)
Slots

This topic explains how to manually place one or more unplaced devices in a slot.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Manually Unplacing a Device from a Slot
Procedure
1. Select one or more unplaced devices in the Wiring Browser and either:
• right-click on one of the selected devices and select Place Device
• press Space Bar and enter Place Device
The Place Device Dialog is displayed.
2. Select the slot into which you want to place the devices and click OK.
Results
• The devices are placed in the slot.
• For each device, a ‘Place by Attribute/Property’ constraint is added to the slot specifying
that the device is to be placed in that slot. For example, for a device called DEV1, the
constraint would be Do place devices with attribute/property matching Name =
DEV1.
Related Topics
Slots

This topic explains how to manually unplace one or more unplaced devices from a slot.
Procedure
Select one or more placed devices in the Design Browser, Wiring Browser or Diagram Window
and either:
• right-click on one of the selected devices and select Unplace Devices

• press Space Bar and enter Unplace Devices
Results
• The devices are unplaced from the slots.
• For each device, if a ‘Place by Attribute/Property’ constraint has been added to the slot
specifically for that device, the constraint is removed.
Related Topics
Slots

February 2016
Capital Topology

This topic explains how to view a read-only signal map for a slot.
Procedure
Right-click on the slot, a hole on the slot or a connector on the slot and select Signal Map; the
Signal Map for Slot Dialog is displayed. In the Signal Mappings table, each signal or wire has a
row showing its mapping.
Related Topics
Slots
Editing a Slot
Creating Multiple Slot Instances

You can create multiple instances of a single slot so that it is represented in different places in
one or more diagrams.
Video
For an overview of working with multiple diagrams, including creating multiple slot
instances, see the video Multiple Diagrams Overview.
Prerequisites
• At lease one instance of the slot must exist.
Procedure
Perform one of the following procedures:

Split or slice an existing slot See Slicing a Slot in the Capital Design Tools -
instance in a diagram Common Functions User Guide.
Create a new instance of a 1. Right-click on the slot in the Design Browser
slot using the context menu (Design tab) and select Create Slot
(on the same diagram or Instance; the cursor changes as for the
another) ‘Create Slot’ action.
2. Draw the new instance of the slot.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Creating Multiple Slot Instances

Create a new instance of a 1. Drag the slot name from the Design Browser
slot using drag and drop (on (Design tab) to the diagram canvas; the
the same diagram or another) cursor changes as for the ‘Create Slot’
action.
2. Draw the new instance of the slot.
Results
The new instance is created in the diagram.
In the Design Browser (Design tab), an Instances folder displays under the slot and lists the
instances of the slot with the name of the diagram containing that instance. The connectors on
an instance are listed below it.
You can use styling to control whether and how cross-reference text is displayed at a slot with
multiple instances. You apply this styling to the slot object in your style set. See Adding a
Cross-Reference Text Decoration in the Capital Diagram Styling User Guide.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Slot Connectors
Slot Connectors
In a topology diagram, a slot connector connects devices in a slot to a bundle. You cannot
connect a bundle to a slot without either a slot connector or holes. Bundles from different
harnesses can connect to the same slot connector without the harnesses merging.
A slot connector in a Capital Topology design represents a harness connector on the associated
Capital Logic designs. Any device connector attached to the harness connector is created as a
separate object that is connected to the slot connector.
You can add slot connectors to slots in the following ways:
• Create an empty slot prior to associating a Capital Logic design with the topology design
and place a device in it after the association (see “Adding an Empty Slot to a Topology
Diagram” on page 577). When you associate a Capital Logic design with the topology
design, any logical device with a name matching a topology slot name is placed in that
slot automatically. Any harness connectors on the logical device are automatically
added as slot connectors to the slot.
• Create a slot for a specific device after a Capital Logic design has been associated with
the Capital Topology design. This action creates the slot and places the device in one
step. Any harness connectors on the logical device are automatically added as slot
connectors to the slot. See “Adding a Slot with a Device to a Topology Diagram” on
page 578.
• Add an unplaced logical harness connector to the slot containing its device. See “Adding
a Specific Harness Connector as a Slot Connector to a Slot” on page 585.
• Add an unassociated slot connector manually to a slot. See “Adding an Unassociated
Slot Connector to a Slot” on page 584.
Adding an Unassociated Slot Connector to a Slot

This topic explains how to manually add a slot connector to a slot either when the slot does not
contain a device or when the slot contains a device but does not have the necessary slot
connectors.
Procedure
1. Select the slot and either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Slot connector
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Add slot connector
2. In the Diagram Window, position the mouse cursor over the edge of the slot where you
want to place the slot connector and click. A line is displayed across the cursor if the
location is invalid.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Adding a Specific Harness Connector as a Slot Connector to a Slot
Results
• The slot connector is added to the slot in the Diagram Window.
• The slot connector is added below the slot in the Design Browser.
Related Topics
Slot Connectors
Editing a Slot Connector
Specifying a Route Code for a Slot Connector
Moving a Slot Connector
Adding a Specific Harness Connector as a Slot

Connector to a Slot
This topic explains how to add an unplaced harness connector (from an associated Capital Logic
design) as a slot connector to a slot. In the topology design, the slot represents the device to
which the harness connector belongs and the slot connector represents the harness connector
itself.
Prerequisites
• The Capital Logic design containing the harness connector must be associated with the
topology diagram. See “Logical Design Association” on page 561.
• The slot must contain the device to which the harness connector belongs. See “Slots” on
page 577.
Procedure
1. In the Wiring Browser, navigate to the harness connector.
2. Double-click the connector and position the mouse cursor over the edge of the slot
where you want to place the slot connector and click. A line is displayed across the
cursor if the location is invalid.
Results
• The slot connector is added to the slot in the Diagram Window.
• An association is created between the slot connector and the harness connector.
• The slot connector is added below the slot in the Design Browser.
• If a device connector is attached to a harness connector in the Capital Logic design, a
device connector is created as a separate object that is connected to the slot connector.
The device connector is added to the Design Browser.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Related Topics
Slot Connectors

This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of a slot connector on a topology
diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the slot connector to be edited.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the slot connector in the Diagram Window
The Edit Properties: Slot Connector Dialog is displayed.
3. Make any changes required to the slot connector attributes and/or properties.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Slot Connectors

This topic details how to specify a route code for a slot connector.
The route code is not used in Capital Topology but is used in Capital HarnessXC. If there are
multiple harnesses entering the connector, you can specify a different route code for the
connector on each harness.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Procedure
1. Select the slot connector to be edited.
2. Either:
3. Click the Routes tab, specify the Route Code and click OK.
Related Topics
Slot Connectors

You can move a slot connector to another grid point on the edge of the slot. This is purely a
visual movement and does not change the connectivity of the slot connector.
If you have multiple instances of a slot, you can move the slot connector to another instance in
the same diagram. You cannot move it to an instance on another diagram.
Procedure
Do one of the following:
• Right-click the slot connector that you want to move and select the Move slot
connector option from the pop-up menu. Click on the new location.
• Click on the slot connector to select it, press Space Bar and enter Move. Click on the
new location.
• Click on the slot connector, hold the mouse button down and drag the slot connector
to the new location.
Note
During the action, circles denote the valid grid points.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Constraining the Association of Logical Harness Connectors to Slot Connectors
Results
The slot connector moves to the new location and is re-styled appropriately (for example, to
move related text).
Related Topics
Slot Connectors
Constraining the Association of Logical Harness

Connectors to Slot Connectors
This topic details how to use the Assign Connector by Attribute/Property constraint to
control the association of logical harness connectors to slot connectors based on attribute and
property values.
This constraint is not normally required as the default behavior is to associate connectors with
the same name. This constraint would only be used if you wanted harness connectors in Capital
Logic to have different names from slot connectors in Capital Topology.
Note
objects inherit them.
For example, constraints can be set for a diagram so that they are inherited by all objects on that
diagram (in this case, all slots and connectors). See “Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology
Diagram” on page 631.
This constraint can also be set on a slot so that all slot connectors on that slot inherit it.
Procedure
1. Select a slot. If you want to set this constraint for the entire diagram, see Setting
Constraints for an Entire Topology Diagram.
2. Either:

February 2016
Capital Topology
Constraining the Association of Logical Harness Connectors to Slot Connectors
• Double-click on the slot connector

4. Select ‘Assign Connector by Attribute/Property’ and click OK; the constraint is added
to the Edit Properties dialog.
Results
topology design.
Related Topics
Slot Connectors

February 2016
Capital Topology
Device Connectors
Device Connectors
In a topology diagram, slot connectors represent an associated harness connector. Any device
connector attached to the harness connector is created as a separate object that is attached to the
slot connector.The device connector and harness connector are treated as separate graphical
objects.
However, the device connectors are listed below the slot connectors in the Design Browser.
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for a Device

Connector
This topic details how to view the attributes and properties of a device connector on a topology
diagram.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser, select the device connector to be viewed.
2. Either:
The Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog is displayed.
3. Click OK to exit.
Related Topics
Device Connectors

February 2016
Capital Topology
Bundles
Bundles
A bundle is used to join together slots and inline pairs. It represents an available wire-routing
path within the electrical system. A collection of bundles represents a harness. There must be a
slot connector or a hole wherever a bundle connects to a slot. After you have associated Capital
Logic designs with the topology design and synchronized logical changes, wires are routed
along these bundles.
Bundles from different harnesses can connect to one connector without the harnesses merging
(see “Multiple Harnesses at Connectors” on page 600).
Adding a Bundle to a Diagram

This topic details how to add a bundle to a diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Bundle.
2. Position the mouse cursor over the grid point where you want to place the first end of the
bundle. Note that if you place it on a slot connector or another bundle, a connection is
made automatically. If you place it on a slot, a slot connector is created automatically.
3. Drag the mouse cursor to define bundle segments.
Note
You can define segments in a bundle by dragging the line, clicking once, and
the bundle and double-click. Note again that if you place it on a slot connector or
another bundle, a connection is made automatically. If you place it on a slot, a slot
connector is created automatically.
Results
• If the bundle is not attached to an existing harness, a new harness is added to the Design
Browser.
• If the bundle is attached to an existing harness, new bundles are listed under the harness
in the Design Browser as appropriate.
• If the bundle is attached to a slot connector, a connection is made.
• If the bundle is attached to a slot, a slot connector is created automatically and a
connection is made. The slot connector is added under both the harness and the slot in
the Design Browser.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Editing a Bundle
Related Topics
Bundles
Editing a Bundle
Moving a Bundle Section
Deleting a Bundle Section
Deleting an Entire Bundle
Specifying a Bundle (Harness) as a Poke Home
Editing a Bundle
This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of a bundle on a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the bundle to be edited.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the bundle in the Diagram Window
The Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog is displayed.
3. Make any changes required to the bundle attributes and/or properties.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Bundles
Creating Multiple Bundle Instances

You can create multiple instances of a single bundle so that it is represented in different places
in one or more diagrams.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Creating Multiple Bundle Instances
Video
For an overview of working with multiple diagrams, including creating multiple bundle
instances, see the video Multiple Diagrams Overview.
Procedure
Perform one of the following procedures:

Split or slice an existing See Slicing a Bundle in the Capital Design Tools -
bundle on a diagram. Common Functions User Guide.
Create a new instance of a 1. Right-click on the bundle in the Design Browser
bundle using the context (Design tab) and select Create Bundle
menu (in the same diagram or Instance; the cursor changes as for the ‘Create
another) Bundle’ action.
2. Draw the new instance of the bundle.
Create a new instance of a 1. If it does not exist, add the first instance as a
bundle using drag and drop dangling bundle to a diagram. A dangling bundle
(in the same diagram or is only connected to something at one end.
another) Note: In the Design Browser (Design tab), a
dangling bundle has a specific icon ( ).
2. Either in the same diagram or in another, drag
the bundle name from the Design Browser
(Design tab) to the diagram canvas; the cursor
changes as for the ‘Create Bundle’ action.
3. Draw the new instance of the bundle.
Results
The new instance is created in the diagram.
The Design Browser (Design tab) displays an Instances folder under the harness for the bundle.
It lists the instances of that harness. You can also expand the node for that particular bundle to
view the different instances of it
The sliced end of the bundles have an arrowed glyph to indicate that these are sliced
bundles.
You can drag a sliced end to stretch and move a bundle.
You can also extend an instance by adding a bundle at a sliced end. This results in a longer
instance and not a new bundle.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Specifying the Physical Length of a Bundle
If a harness has multiple instances, you cannot merge it with another harness by dragging a
sliced end. You must drag a non-sliced end. However, you can merge instances of the same
harness to form one instance by dragging a sliced end to any place on the other instance.
You can use styling to control whether and how cross-reference text is displayed at a sliced end
for a bundle. You apply this styling to the bundle object in your style set. See Adding a Cross-
Reference Text Decoration in the Capital Diagram Styling User Guide.
There are various ways you can navigate between object instances, see Navigating Between
Sliced Object Instances in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide.

This topic details how to specify (edit or override) the physical length of a bundle.
The physical length is initially determined by the length of the bundle in the diagram.
The bundle length is used when calculating the cost of any synthesized wiring. Overriding the
length can therefore change the result of routing logical signals because the system selects the
cheapest route.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the bundle in the Diagram Window or Design Browser and select
Properties; the Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog is displayed.
2. On the General tab, select Override next to the Length field and change the value in the
field.
3. Click OK to exit the Edit Properties facility and to commit your changes.
Related Topics
Editing a Bundle
Specifying Variant Physical Lengths for a Bundle

This topic details how to specify variant physical lengths for a selected bundle. The individual
lengths are used only when a particular option expression is applied to a bundle.
You may want to do this when a vehicle topology is identical across its variants except for
differences in bundle length.
The physical length is initially determined by the length of the bundle in the diagram. This
length is displayed on the General tab of the Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog for the bundle and
can be overridden (see “Specifying the Physical Length of a Bundle” on page 594). This is the

February 2016
Capital Topology
physical length used by default. However, the bundle length may vary for different variants of
the built vehicle.
The lengths are passed from Capital Topology to Capital HarnessXC when designs are
synchronized between the two. Capital HarnessXC uses the variant lengths when performing
composite breakdown.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the bundle in the Diagram Window or Design Browser and select
Properties; the Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog is displayed.
2. Click the Variant Tab (Edit Properties Dialog).
3. In the Option Expression column of the currently empty row, enter the option expression
for which you want to specify a variant length; a new empty row is added to the table.
4. In the Variant Length column for the option expression that you have entered, specify
the variant length.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each variant physical length that you want to enter.
6. Click OK to exit the Edit Properties facility and to commit your changes.
Results
• Wiring import and export does not support variant bundle information.
• When the Capital Topology design is synchronized with a Capital HarnessXC design,
the variant lengths are displayed on the Variant tab of the Edit Bundle dialog for the
appropriate bundle in Capital HarnessXC.
• There is no support for linking variant bundles through bridges or Change Manager. The
MCAD bridge is used to set the nominal length.
• When bundles are merged:
o The bundles retain variants and merge where required.
o When merging a variant bundle with a non-variant bundle, the resulting bundle
retains the variant information. The lengths for each variant will be modified by
adding the default length of the non-variant bundle.
o When merging two variant bundles, the variances are merged. Where option
expressions match, the variant lengths are added together.
o When a variant length is unique on one of the bundles, it is not modified on the
merged bundle.
• When splitting a variant bundle, the resulting bundles both have the variant lengths
applied. The lengths are adjusted according to the proportional nominal position where
the bundle is split.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Related Topics
Editing a Bundle

This topic details how to move or stretch a bundle section on a topology diagram.
Procedure
In the diagram, either:
• Click a bundle section, hold down the mouse button and drag the bundle section
• Click the end of a bundle section, hold down the mouse button and drag the end of
the bundle
Results
• If you have dragged a whole bundle section, the selected bundle section moves to the
new location.
• If you have dragged the end of a bundle section, the section moves or changes length as
required.
• Any other bundle sections connected to the bundle section move or change length as
required to maintain the connection.
• If you have dragged an end of a bundle section over another bundle section, a
connection is created.
• If you have dragged an end of a bundle section over a bundle section from a separate
harness, the harness being moved merges into the other harness. In the Design Browser,
the harness being moved is no longer displayed and its bundles are displayed under the
other harness.
Related Topics
Bundles
Editing a Bundle

February 2016
Capital Topology

This topic details how to delete a bundle section.
Procedure
1. In the Diagram Window, select the bundle section.
2. Either:
Results
• The bundle section is removed from the Diagram Window.
• If the section is in the middle of a harness, the harness splits into two harnesses. In the
Design Browser, a new harness is listed and the correct bundles are listed below it.
Related Topics
Bundles
Editing a Bundle

This topic details how to delete an entire bundle from a diagram.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser, select the bundle
2. Either:
Results
• All sections of the bundle are removed from the Diagram Window.
• The bundle is no longer listed in the Design Browser.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Related Topics
Bundles
Editing a Bundle

This topic details how to specify that a bundle (harness) is poked home at a slot connector,
inline plug connector or inline receptacle connector.
This setting is not reflected graphically in the topology design but is passed on to Capital
HarnessXC during synchronization. When this information is transferred to Capital Harness
Classic or Capital HarnessXC, the connector is marked as Not on BOM.
Procedure
1. Select the slot connector, inline plug connector or inline receptacle connector at which
the bundle is poked home.
2. Either:
3. Click the Routes tab, click the Poke Home column for the bundle (harness) and click
OK.
Related Topics
Editing a Bundle
Constraining the Placement of Splices on a Bundle
Multiple Harnesses at Connectors

February 2016
Capital Topology

This topic details how to use the Minimum Splice Separation and Place Splice/s on Bundle
by Attribute/Property constraints to control the creation and placement of splices on a bundle.
The Minimum Splice Separation constraint allows you to specify the minimum distance that
there must be between a splice and a connector, splice or takeout. The Place Splice/s on Bundle
by Attribute/Property constraint allows you to specify whether splices with a particular
property or attribute should or cannot be placed on a bundle.
Note
Procedure
1. Select a bundle or a parent object of bundles (a harness). If you want to set this
constraint for all objects in the diagram, see Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology
Diagram.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the bundle in the Diagram Window
4. Click the Add Constraint button; the Constraint Selection dialog is displayed.
5. Select ‘Minimum Splice Separation’ or ‘Place Splice/s on Bundle by Attribute/Property’
and click OK; the constraint is added to the Edit Properties dialog.
6. Edit the constraint as required.
7. If you want to use both constraints on the bundle, repeat steps 4 to 6 for the other
constraint.
8. Click OK.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Results
topology design.
Related Topics
Bundles

Due to installability considerations, you may want to manage multiple harnesses at connectors.
Graphically, this is displayed as multiple bundles connected to the same connector cavity. You
add option expressions to the bundles to allow them to be filtered. See “Filtering the Objects
Displayed in a Diagram” on page 120.
The primary scenario for multiple harnesses at a connector is at an inline connector, for
instance, where wires terminating at the inline belong to different harness part numbers.
However, there are some cases where you may want to have multiple harnesses at a connector
on a slot, for example, if the H1 and H2 harnesses connect to the same connector. In this case,
you may not want to duplicate the connectors on the slot.
Example 17-1. Example of Multiple Harnesses at a Connector
Both the H1 and H2 harnesses are connected to the single door harness via
a single inline connector.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Scenarios Modeled Using Multiple Harnesses at a Connector

The use of multiple harnesses at a connector enables you to model:
• Mutually exclusive harnesses and connectors (including many-to-many mating)

In this case, the cavities on the connector are connected to wires from multiple
harnesses. You apply option expressions to the harnesses to ensure that only one is
active at a time. A cavity can be connected to wires from different harnesses only if the
signals on these wires are the same.
• Poke home wires (wire from one harness plugged into the connector of another
harness)
This is where a wire is to be connected to a connector at harness installation time rather
than harness manufacture time. This setting is not reflected graphically in the topology
design but is passed on to Capital HarnessXC during synchronization. When this
information is transferred to Capital Harness Classic or Capital HarnessXC, the
connector is marked as Not on BOM.
If any wire in a bundle is poked home, all wires in that bundle will be poked home.
A simple case being where a harness has only poked home wires at a connector; all
bundles at that connector for that harness contain only poke home wires.
• EWIS scenario of multiple harnesses/bundles connected to a single connector
Routing constraints are used to route wires down particular paths based upon a
Separation Code property.
For example, here are three differently colored bundles. The wires have been assigned a
Separation Code property and the ‘Route by Attribute/Property’ constraint has been set
on the different bundles to control the routing of the wires down the different harnesses
(see “Constraining the Routing of Wires” on
page 603).

February 2016
Capital Topology
Synchronization with Capital HarnessXC

If you synchronize a design containing multiple harnesses at a connector with a Capital
HarnessXC design, Capital HarnessXC will recognize that not all the nodes at a connector
belong to the harness being edited. In addition, it recognizes that just because a cavity has no
wire in this harness, it does not mean a plug should be inserted into the cavity. The cavity might
be required for a wire on another harness.
Example High-Level Flow Using Multiple Harnesses at Connectors

The following example gives high-level details of how multiple harnesses at connectors may be
used. This is not the only flow that could be used.
1. Add a new bundle that either starts of finishes at a connector that is already connected to
another bundle; the system treats this as a new connection to a complex connector
junction.
2. Add option expressions to the bundles to identify their applicability.
3. Specify bundles at the connector that contain poke home wires.
4. Synchronize the data with a design in Capital Harness Classic or Capital HarnessXC; the
system treats the complex junction as if there is a connector applicable to each harness.
Note
All other tools that access the data (including reports, design rule checks and Capital
Enterprise Reporter) treat the complex junction as if multiple bundles are connected
to a single connector.
Related Topics
Specifying a Route Code for an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology
Wires
Wires
The source wires from associated Capital Logic designs are listed on the Wiring Browser. After
these wires have been routed along the bundles in the topology diagram, they are displayed
under the Unassigned node in the Design Browser or, if grouped into signals, under the Signals
node.
The wires from the associated Capital Logic designs are automatically routed along the bundles
in the topology design when the devices that they connect have been placed in slots.
The real-world length of the wires is calculated using the Physical Scale of the topology
diagram and is specified as the value of the Wire Length attribute on the Edit Properties: Wire
Dialog. This length can be back annotated to the source wires in the Capital Logic designs. If
you have performed actions that changed bundle lengths, you may need to update the wire
lengths before back annotating them (see “Updating Wire Lengths” on page 607).
Constraining the Routing of Wires

This topic details how to use the Route by Attribute/Property constraint to specify whether
wires with a particular property or attribute can or cannot be routed along a bundle, through a
junction box, or through an inline pair. This constraint can be applied to bundles, inline
connectors and harnesses in a topology diagram.
Note
Procedure
1. Select the object on which you are setting the constraint.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the object in the Diagram Window

February 2016
Capital Topology
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify the Possible Routes for an Unrouted Wire
4. Select ‘Route by Attribute/Property’ and click OK; the constraint is added to the Edit
Properties dialog.
Results
topology design.
Related Topics
Wires
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify the Possible

Routes for an Unrouted Wire
This topic details how to use the Routing Assistant to identify all possible, common routes for
one or more unrouted wires and to place splices that could not be placed automatically. Each
stage of the route may or may not be complete in the associated Capital Logic designs. The
Routing Assistant also displays details of where you need to add an instance of an inline
connector in the Capital Logic designs in order to complete a route.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser, expand the Unrouted node, select one or more unrouted wires
for which you want to identify possible routes, right-click on a selected wire and select
Routing Assistant or click Show Routing Assistant ( ) on the Design Browser or
Wiring Browser.
Alternatively, if the Routing Assistant is already open, you can drag and drop wires from
a tab for a Capital Logic design or a Capital Topology design into the Routing Assistant.
The wires must exist in Capital Topology and be unrouted. If a dragged wire does not
meet those criteria, a message will be displayed in the Output Window.
2. A progress bar indicates that the system is identifying the routes and it displays the
common, unique routes for the wires in the Routing Assistant tab in the Output Window.
Note
You select a route in the ‘Alternative Routes Table / Route to Implement Table /
Routes to Implement Table’ in order to view details of the stages of that route in the
To-Do List Table (See Routing Assistant.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify all Unrouted Wires that Need to Pass Through a Selected
3. In the ‘Alternative Routes Table / Route to Implement Table / Routes to Implement

Table’, select the route that you want the wires to follow and click Select Route; the
other routes are removed from that table and the To-Do List Table displays the details
for the stages of the selected route. See Routing Assistantfor a detailed description of the
information in this table.
4. For each stage of the route where a wire is displayed in red, you need to add an instance
of an inline connector to an associated Capital Logic design so that the wire passes
through it.
Note
If you click a wire cell or connector cell in the table, a tooltip displays additional
information about it, including links to any instances of that object in either the
Capital Topology diagram or in the associated Capital Logic diagrams. Click the link to
jump to the Capital Logic diagram where the instance of the inline connector needs to be
added.
5. After an inline connector instance is added, you must rename it to the same name as the
inline connector named in the To-Do List Table row for that stage of the route.
Results
• When a stage of a route is completed for a wire in the Capital Logic diagrams, the wire
name in that To-Do List Table row changes from red to black.
• When a stage is complete for all wires, the status column for it displays a tick ( ).
• When all stages are complete for all selected wires, the status column for the route in the
‘Alternative Routes Table / Route to Implement Table / Routes to Implement Table’
displays a tick ( ).
Related Topics
Selected Inline Connector
Splices in Capital Topology
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify all Unrouted

Wires that Need to Pass Through a Selected Inline
Connector
This topic details how to use the Routing Assistant to identify the currently unrouted wires
whose routes could be completed by adding instances of a selected inline connector from the
Capital Topology design to the associated Capital Logic designs. The Routing Assistant also
displays details of the stages of these routes and indicates where an instance of the inline
connector needs to be added.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Using the Routing Assistant to Identify all Unrouted Wires that Need to Pass Through a Selected
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser or diagram window, right-click on the inline connector and select
Routing Assistant or click Show Routing Assistant ( ) on the Design Browser or
Wiring Browser; a progress bar indicates that the system is identifying the routes and it
displays the routes for the wires in a Routing Assistant tab in the Output Window. All of
these routes need to be completed.
2. In the ‘Alternative Routes Table / Route to Implement Table / Routes to Implement
Table’, select a route; the To-Do List Table displays the details for the stages of the
selected route. See Routing Assistantfor a detailed description of the information in this
table.
3. For each stage of the route where a wire is displayed in red, you need to add an instance
of the inline connector to an associated Capital Logic design so that the wire passes
through it.
Note
If you click a wire cell in the table, a tooltip displays additional information about it,
including links to any instances of that object in either the Capital Topology diagram
or in the associated Capital Logic diagrams. Click the link to jump to the Capital Logic
diagram where the instance of the inline connector needs to be added.
4. After an inline connector instance is added, you must rename it to the same name as the
inline connector named in the To-Do List Table row for that stage of the route.
Results
• When a stage of a route is completed for a wire in the Capital Logic diagrams, the wire
name in that To-Do List Table row changes from red to black.
• When a stage is complete for all wires following that route, the status column for it
displays a tick ( ).
• When all stages are complete for all wires following that route, the status column for the
route in the ‘Alternative Routes Table / Route to Implement Table / Routes to
Implement Table’ displays a tick ( ).
Related Topics
Reporting on All Unrouted Wires that Could Pass Through an Inline Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology
Reporting on All Unrouted Wires that Could Pass

Through an Inline Connector
This topic details how to report on all unrouted wires that could pass through an inline
connector at any point along their paths. You can use the report to identify whether the selected
inline is big enough to house all of the wires that may need to pass through it.
Procedure
In the Design Browser or diagram window, right-click on the inline connector and select Inline
Connector Report; a progress bar indicates that the system is identifying the unrouted wires
and then the Connector Details Dialog with the report is displayed.
Related Topics
Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Wire

This topic details how to view the attributes and properties of a wire on a topology diagram.
You cannot edit these within the Capital Topology design as they are carried over from the
associated Capital Logic design.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser or Wiring Browser, select the wire to be viewed.
2. Either:
The Edit Properties: Wire Dialog is displayed.
Related Topics
Wires
Updating Wire Lengths

After wire routing has taken place, actions that update the length of a bundle also automatically
update wire lengths.

February 2016
Capital Topology
These actions include:
• Adding/removing an inline pair

• Synthesizing wiring
• Combining/splitting wire segments
• Replacing a wire when editing the topology
• Editing a wire path
• Bridging in data
• Moving a pin on a a slot
• Any action that moves/stretches a bundle
• Changing wire paths in a Signal Map dialog box
You can manually update all wire lengths and you may want to do this before transferring the
project to another application that will use them.
Procedure
Press Space Bar and enter Update All Lengths; the wire lengths are updated.
Annotating Topology Wire Lengths and Harness

Attributes Back to Logical Wires and Splices
This topic details how to back annotate the real-world length of wires in the topology diagram
(specified as the value of the Wire Length attribute on the Edit Properties: Wire Dialog) to the
source wires in the associated Capital Logic designs.
The action also back annotates Harness attributes for wires and splices. Capital Topology back-
annotates the Harness attribute according to the name of the harness in which the object (that is,
wire/splice) has been routed.
If you are working in multi user mode (see “Harness Concurrency” on page 553 for an
explanation of what this means), this action updates wiring only from locked harnesses and
refreshes the unlocked harnesses before running. It also opens and locks any Capital Logic
designs that need to be updated.
Procedure
With the topology diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Back Annotate.
Results
• The Length value from the topology wires are copied to the attributes of the source wires
in the Capital Logic designs.

February 2016
Capital Topology
• Harness attributes are back-annotated to wires and splices in the Capital Logic designs
with the name of the harness in which the object (wire or splice) is routed in Capital
Topology.
Related Topics
Wires
Edit Properties: Wire Dialog

February 2016
Capital Topology
Multicores
Multicores
The multicores from associated Capital Logic designs are listed with their innercore wires on
the Wiring Browser.
After these wires have been routed along the bundles in the topology diagram, the routed
innercore wires are displayed under the Unassigned node in the Design Browser or, if grouped
into Signals, under the Signals node.
The innercore wires from the associated Capital Logic designs are automatically routed along
the bundles in the topology design when the devices that they connect have been placed in slots.
The real-world length of the innercore wires is calculated using the Physical Scale of the
topology diagram and is specified as the value of the Wire Length attribute on the Edit
Properties: Wire Dialog. This length can be back annotated to the source wires in the Capital
Logic designs.
Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Multicore

This topic details how to view the attributes and properties of a multicore in a topology design.
You cannot edit these within the Capital Topology design as they are carried over from the
associated Capital Logic design.
Procedure
1. In the Wiring Browser, select the multicore to be viewed.
2. Either:
The Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog is displayed.
Related Topics
Multicores

February 2016
Capital Topology

When you associate Capital Logic designs with a topological design, the Wiring Browser lists
the splices from the logical designs.
Capital Topology attempts to place each splice in the correct harness by looking at the wires
connected to the splice. If all these wires are in the same harness, then the splice will also be
placed in that harness. However, when not all the connected wires are in the same harness,
Capital Topology tries to find the most likely harness for the splice using the following rules:
• Splices connecting wires whose paths are mainly on one harness are placed on a bundle
on that harness.
• If the connected wires have paths that are equally distributed across multiple harnesses,
the splice is placed on the first harness from the alphanumerically sorted list of potential
harnesses. It is connected to any appropriate conductors in that harness.
• If none of the connected wires have any paths on the available harnesses, the splice is
left unplaced. This means the connected wires are also not routed.
• If the splice is center-stripped, the path of the center-stripped wire(s) is used to select the
harness.
If Capital Topology has not identified the correct harness for a splice, you can override the
default harness by specifying a Harness attribute for it. When you refresh wiring (or re-
synchronize), the splices will be re-positioned in the specified harness. (see “Specifying the
Harness Attribute for a Splice in Capital Topology” on page 611 and “Synchronizing Wiring
Changes with a Capital Topology Design” on page 565).
You can then run the Design Assistant to identify routing paths for the unrouted wires
connected to these splices. See “Using the Routing Assistant to Identify the Possible Routes for
an Unrouted Wire” on page 604.
You can back-annotate the Harness attribute to the splices in the associated Capital Logic
designs. See “Annotating Topology Wire Lengths and Harness Attributes Back to Logical
Wires and Splices” on page 608.
Specifying the Harness Attribute for a Splice in

Capital Topology
If Capital Topology has not identified the correct harness for a splice, you can override the
default harness by specifying a Harness attribute for it. When you refresh wiring (or re-
synchronize), the splice will be re-positioned in the specified harness.
You can specify the Harness attribute for an object either on the Attribute tab of the Edit
Properties facility (see Editing an Object Attributes and Graphical Display in the Capital
Integrator User Guide) or using the Edit Harness Attribute facility as described in this topic.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Specifying the Harness Attribute for a Splice in Capital Topology
Procedure
• Right-click on the object either in the diagram window or in a browser tab at the
bottom left of the application window and select Edit Harness Attribute.
• Click the object, press Space Bar and enter Set Harness Attribute.
2. The Edit Harness Attribute dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the harness or the
harness group that the object is to be synchronized to. If harness names or harness
groups have been created in Capital Project, you can select one from the drop-down list
in the Harness field.
Results
• When you refresh wiring (or re-synchronize), the splice will be re-positioned in the
specified harness.
• You can then run the Design Assistant to identify routing paths for the unrouted wires
connected to these splices.
Related Topics

February 2016
Capital Topology
Inline Pairs
Inline Pairs
Inline pairs consist of an inline plug connector and an inline receptacle connector (also known
as inline halves).
When placed on a bundle, an inline pair splits the bundle into separate Virtual Harnesses.
There are several factors that are considered when placing inline pairs, the following highlights
some of the possible factors:
• Manufacturing - if the sections of the vehicle (the harnesses) are to be manufactured

(or designed) at separate locations (companies, factories etc.
• Assembly - to aid fitting the harnesses into the vehicle.
• Option content - large numbers of options on a harness will result in many harness
levels which may be difficult to manage.
• Physical constraints - where the connectors can be placed for easy assembly, for
accessibility and for reliability (where the connectors will not undergo physical or
environmental distress).
You can view a read-only signal map to see which wires connect to which cavities of the inline
halves.
Adding an Unassociated Inline Pair to a Bundle

This topic details how to add an unassociated inline pair (inline plug connector and inline
receptacle connector) to a bundle in a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Inline Pair.
2. In the Diagram Window, position the mouse cursor over the bundle where you want to
place the inline pair. A line is displayed across the cursor if the location is invalid. A
ghost image indicates how the inline pair graphic will look.
3. Click to place it.
Results
• The inline pair is added to the Diagram Window.
• The harness to which it is added is split into two. The wires are unrouted and do not
connect to the inline pair. The wires move to the Unrouted folder of the Design
Browser. They are not considered routed until the inline pair is associated with an inline
pair from a Capital Logic design.
• The newly created harness is added to the Design Browser but contains no wires.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Adding a Specific Logical Inline Pair to a Bundle
• The inline plug connector and inline receptacle connector are listed below the Inlines
node of the Design Browser.
• The inline plug connector and inline receptacle connector are displayed below the
harnesses to which they connect in the Design Browser.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs
Editing an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector
Moving an Inline Pair
Deleting an Inline Pair from a Bundle
Toggling the Inline Plug Connector and Inline Receptacle Connector on an Inline Pair
Constraining the Automatic Association of Inline Halves

This topic details how to add an unplaced inline pair (from an associated Capital Logic design)
to a bundle.
Prerequisites
• The Capital Logic design containing the logical inline pair must be associated with the
topology diagram. See “Logical Design Association” on page 561.
Procedure
1. In the Wiring Browser, navigate to either the inline plug connector or inline receptacle
connector.
2. Double-click the connector and position the mouse cursor over the bundle where you
want to place the inline pair. A line is displayed across the cursor if the location is
invalid. A ghost image indicates how the inline pair graphic will look.
3. Click to place it.
Results
• The inline pair is added to the Diagram Window.
• The harness to which it is added is split into two and the new harness is added to the
Design Browser.
• The inline plug connector and inline receptacle connector are listed below the Inlines
node of the Design Browser.

February 2016
Capital Topology
• The inline plug connector and inline receptacle connector are displayed below the
harnesses to which they connect in the Design Browser.
• An association is created between the logical inline pair and the topology inline pair.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs
Editing an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline

Receptacle Connector
This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of an inline plug connector or an
inline receptacle connector (from an inline pair) on a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the inline plug connector or an inline receptacle connector to be edited.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the inline plug connector or inline receptacle connector in the
Diagram Window
The Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog or Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle
Connector Dialog is displayed.
3. Make any changes required to the attributes and/or properties.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs

February 2016
Capital Topology

Specifying a Route Code for an Inline Plug

Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector
This topic details how to specify a route code for inline plug connector or an inline receptacle
connector.
The route code is not used in Capital Topology but is used in Capital HarnessXC. If there are
multiple harnesses entering the connector, you can specify a different route code for the
connector on each harness.
Procedure
1. Select the inline plug connector or an inline receptacle connector to be edited.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the inline plug connector or inline receptacle connector in the
Diagram Window
The Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog or Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle
Connector Dialog is displayed.
3. Click the Routes tab, specify the Route Code and click OK.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs

February 2016
Capital Topology

This topic details how to move an inline pair along a bundle section.
Procedure
Click the inline plug connector or the inline receptacle connector, hold down the mouse button
and drag the inline pair to the new location; the connected bundles move and stretch as required
to maintain connectivity.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs

This topic details how to delete an inline pair (both the inline plug connector and the inline
receptacle connector) from a bundle in a topology diagram.
Procedure
Right-click the inline plug connector or the inline receptacle connector and select Delete Inline
Pair.
Results
• The inline pair is deleted from the diagram.
• If there is more than one bundle connected to either side of the inline, it is replaced with
a structure node.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs

February 2016
Capital Topology
Toggling the Inline Plug Connector and Inline

Receptacle Connector on an Inline Pair
This topic details how to toggle (swap) the inline plug connector and inline receptacle connector
on an inline pair.
Procedure
1. Select either the inline plug connector or the inline receptacle connector.
2. Either:
• Right-click on the selected entity and select Toggle Inline Type
• Press Space Bar and enter Toggle Inline Type
Results
• The inline plug connector becomes an inline receptacle connector and vice versa.
• The new inline plug connector and inline receptacle connector are given new names.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs
Constraining the Automatic Association of Inline

Halves
This topic details how to use the Place Inline Half by Attribute/Property constraint to specify
whether inline halves with a particular property or attribute (from Capital Logic) should or

February 2016
Capital Topology
should not be associated with particular inline halves in Capital Topology. This constraint can
be applied to inline connectors and harnesses in a topology diagram.
This constraint is not normally required as the default behavior is to associate inline halves with
the same name. This constraint would only be used if you wanted inline halves in Capital Logic
to have different names from inline halves in Capital Topology.
Note
Procedure
1. Select the object on which you are setting the constraint.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the object in the Diagram Window
4. Select ‘Place Inline Half by Attribute/Property’ and click OK; the constraint is added to
the Edit Properties dialog.
Results
topology design.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs

February 2016
Capital Topology
Viewing the Signal Map for an Inline Pair

You can view a read-only signal map for an inline pair.
Procedure
Right-click on one half of the inline pair and select Signal Map; the Signal Map Dialog Box for
Inline Pair is displayed.
• The Signal Mappings tab displays the mapping of signals and wires between the
cavities of connectors on each inline half.
Each row represents a signal and wire mapping between connector cavities on both
halves of the inline.
The table is divided into two sections by the middle column. The fields on either side
of this apply to the connector cavities on either side of the inline.
• The Wire Info tab displays details of the wires connecting to the connectors. Each
row represents a wire.
Related Topics
Inline Pairs

February 2016
Capital Topology
Virtual Harnesses
Virtual Harnesses
Virtual harnesses are displayed in the Design Browser. Each virtual harness lists the connectors
and bundles included on it.
Editing a Virtual Harness

This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of a virtual harness on a topology
diagram.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser, select the virtual harness to be edited.
2. Either:
The Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog is displayed.
3. Make any changes required to the attributes and/or properties.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Virtual Harnesses

February 2016
Capital Topology
Signals
Signals
In Capital Topology, you can group wires into a signal based on attribute or property values.
You can constrain the routing of wires in the topology diagram based on the signals that they
carry in the associated Capital Logic designs.
Grouping Wires into Signals

This topic details how to group wires into signals in a topology diagram. The wires are assigned
to the signal if they have a particular attribute or property and the attribute/property value is
used as the name of the signal.
Prerequisites
• In the associated Capital Logic designs, the wires must have a value specified for the
attribute or property that you are using.
• The Capital Logic designs must be associated with the topology diagram. See “Logical
Design Association” on page 561.
Procedure
1. Either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Associate Signals By
• Click the Associate Signals By Attribute or Property ( ) button on the Design
Browser
The Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog is displayed.
2. Specify whether you want to use an attribute or property for the grouping, select it from
the drop-down list and click OK.
Results
• In the Design Browser, signal nodes are created for the values of the selected attribute or
property under the Signals section of the tree.
• The Capital Topology design is synchronized with the associated Capital Logic designs.
• Wires with values for the selected attribute or property are moved under the signal node
that matches their attribute/property value.
Related Topics
Usage Example for Grouping Wires into Signals in Capital Topology
Signals

February 2016
Capital Topology
Usage Example for Grouping Wires into Signals in

Capital Topology
This example demonstrates the functionality of the Associate Signals By Attribute or
Property dialog.
Figure 17-1 shows the simple wiring design used in this example, including the devices,
connectors and wires between them.
Figure 17-1. Wire Grouping Example - Logical Design
• Wire -199- has a property Topo_Signal with the value Sig01.

• Wires -200- and -201- have the property Topo_Signal with the value Sig02.
Figure 17-2 shows the simple Capital Topology diagram used in this example, including the
slots, bundles, slot connectors and inline pairs.
Figure 17-2. Wire Grouping Example - Topology Design
• The slot, slot connectors and inline pairs have the same names as the corresponding
objects on the logical design so that associations will be created automatically.
Prerequisites
• Create a new project to work in for the duration of the example.
• Create a new logical design and diagram, and add the devices, connectors, inline pairs
and wires as shown in Figure 17-1.
• Create a new topology diagram, and add the slots, slot connectors, inline pairs and
bundles as shown in Figure 17-2.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Procedure
1. With the topology diagram open in Capital Logic, press Space Bar and enter Associate
Signals By; the Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog is displayed.
2. Select Property and enter Topo_Signal in the drop-down list box. Click OK.
3. Press Space Bar and enter Associate Logical Designs. The Associate Wiring Designs
Dialog Box is displayed.
4. Select the logical design you created from the Available list, then click Add to move it
into the Associated list. Click OK; the designs are associated. The topology objects are
associated with the logical objects of the same name and the wires are displayed in the
Design Browser, grouped as follows:
Figure 17-3. Wire Grouping Example - Grouped Wires
• Wire -199- is placed under the signal Sig01, which was the value of the
Topo_Signal property on it in the Capital Logic design.
• Wires -200- and -201- are grouped under the signal Sig02, which was the value of
the Topo_Signal property on them in the Capital Logic design.
Related Topics
Signals

February 2016
Capital Topology
Holes
Holes
A hole is used to create a direct-to-device connection in Capital Topology.
In a Capital Logic design, this would be modeled by a wire connecting directly to a device pin
(no connector in between). When the device is placed in a slot in a topology diagram, no
connector is created and the system does not know where a connecting signal or wire enters the
slot. In this scenario, you must use a ‘Route by Attribute/Property’ constraint on the connecting
bundle or an ‘Assign Conductor/s to Hole by Attribute/Property’ constraint on the hole itself.
A hole can house one or several different wires and, unlike a connector, does not have cavities.
Only one harness can connect to a hole.
Adding a Hole to a Slot

This topic details how to add a hole to a slot.
Procedure
1. Select the slot in the diagram and either:
• Press Space Bar and enter Hole
• Right-click on the slot and select Add Hole
2. In the Diagram Window, position the mouse cursor over the position on the edge of the
slot where you want to place the hole and click.
Results
• The hole is created with a default name of HOLE appended with an incrementing
number.
Related Topics
Holes
Editing a Hole
Constraining the Mapping of Wires to a Hole on a Slot
Editing a Hole
This topic details how to edit the attributes and properties of a hole on a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Select the hole to be edited.

February 2016
Capital Topology
2. Either:
• Double-click on the hole in the Diagram Window
The Edit Properties: Hole Dialog is displayed.
3. Make any changes required to the hole attributes and/or properties.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Holes
Adding a Hole to a Slot
Constraining the Mapping of Wires to a Hole on a

Slot
This topic details how to use the Assign Conductor/s to Hole by Attribute/Property
constraint to specify whether conductors with a particular property or attribute are or are not
mapped to a particular hole on a slot.
Note
Procedure
1. Select the hole.
2. Either:
• Double-click on the slot in the Diagram Window

February 2016
Capital Topology

4. Click the Add Constraint button; the Constraint Selection dialog is displayed.
5. Select ‘Assign Conductor/s to Hole by Attribute/Property’ and click OK; the constraint
is added to the Edit Properties dialog.
6. Edit the constraint as required.
7. Click OK.
Results
topology design.
Related Topics
Holes

February 2016
Capital Topology
Assemblies
Assemblies
An assembly is a collection of objects that you can use as a single entity in a design. It can
contain wires, shields, nets, devices, connectors, conductor groups and other assemblies.
Although you cannot add an assembly specifically to a Capital Topology design, an associated
Capital Logic design can contain assemblies.
If an object from an assembly is placed in the Capital Topology design, the assembly is listed
under the Assemblies node in the Design Browser.
If no objects from an assembly have been placed, it will not be listed in the Design Browser.
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for an

Assembly
This topic details how to view the attributes and properties of an assembly in a topology design.
You cannot edit these within the topology design as they are carried over from the associated
Capital Logic design.
Procedure
1. In the Design Browser, select the assembly to be viewed.
2. Either:
The Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog is displayed.
Related Topics
Assemblies

February 2016
Capital Topology

By default, the Place by Attribute/Property constraint is set for a topology diagram and is
inherited by any slots. The default setting forces devices to be placed in slots with the same
name.
For an overview of how to use rules and constraints in general see “Rules and Constraints” on
page 469.
Standard Constraints for Capital Topology

Various constraints are available for use in Capital Topology.

One Attributes and Properties constraint is available.
Set Integrator/Topology Attribute/Property on Object

Default: Set Bundle AttrOrProp to Value where AttrOrProp = Value
Allows you to specify that a property or attribute must be set to a particular value on objects of
a particular type when they have another property or attribute with a particular value. The
property/attribute and value are assigned to the object when you select the Set Attribute/
Property action from the ribbon in Capital Topology. The Object that breaks attribute/
property rule design rule check can be run to check for objects that violate this constraint.
For further information, see “Using a Constraint to Set an Attribute or Property on an Object”
on page 632 and “Applying the Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object Constraint” on
page 633.
Placement
Various Placement constraints are available.
Assign Connector by Attribute/Property

Default: Do assign connector to slot connector where Device connector Name = VC Name
This is applied when you place devices attached to harness connectors in slots. It allows you to
control whether a harness connector with a particular value for an attribute or property is
mapped to a slot connector with an attribute or property that has the same value.
This constraint is not normally required as the default behavior is to associate connectors with
the same name. This constraint would only be used if you wanted harness connectors in Capital
Logic to have different names from slot connectors in Capital Topology.
For further information on using this constraint, see “Constraining the Association of Logical
Harness Connectors to Slot Connectors” on page 588.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Standard Constraints for Capital Topology
Place by Attribute/Property
Default: Do place devices with attribute/property matching Name = Slot Name
Allows you to specify whether objects with a particular property or attribute should or cannot be
placed in a slot. The system obeys this rule when automatically placing objects.
By default, the Place by Attribute/Property constraint is set for a topology diagram and is
inherited by any slots. The default setting forces devices to be placed in slots with the same
name. This default setting can be edited or removed.
For further information on using this constraint, see “Constraining the Placement of Devices in
a Slot” on page 579 and “Manually Placing a Device in a Slot” on page 580.
Place Inline Half by Attribute/Property

Default: Do place inline half with attribute/property matching Name = .Inline Half Name
Allows you to specify whether inline halves with a particular property or attribute (from Capital
Logic) should or should not be associated with particular inline halves in Capital Topology. The
system obeys this rule when automatically placing objects. This constraint can apply to inline
connectors, harnesses and diagrams.
This constraint is not normally required as the default behavior is to associate inline halves with
the same name. This constraint would only be used if you wanted inline halves in Capital Logic
to have different names from inline halves in Capital Topology.
For further information on using this constraint, see “Constraining the Automatic Association of
Inline Halves” on page 618.
Routing
Various Routing constraints are available.
Assign Conductor/s to Hole by Attribute/Property

Default: Do assign conductor/s with attribute/property matching Name = .* to hole
Allows you to specify whether conductors with a particular property or attribute are or are not
mapped to a particular hole on a slot. This constraint can apply to a hole.
For further information on using this constraint, see “Holes” on page 625 and “Constraining the
Mapping of Wires to a Hole on a Slot” on page 626.
Minimum Splice Separation

Default: Minimum separation from splice to object = num where splice matches Name = .*
Allows you to specify the minimum distance that there must be between a splice and a
connector, splice or takeout. This can be set so that it only applies if a splice has an attribute or
property with a particular value. This can be set on an entire diagram, on a bundle or on a
harness.

February 2016
Capital Topology
For further information on using this constraint, see “Constraining the Placement of Splices on a
Bundle” on page 599.
Place Splice/s on Bundle by Attribute/Property

Default: Do place splice/s with attribute/property matching Name = .* on bundle
Allows you to specify whether splices with a particular property or attribute should or cannot be
placed on a bundle. The system obeys this rule when automatically placing objects. This
constraint can apply to bundles, harnesses and diagrams.
For further information on using this constraint, see “Constraining the Placement of Splices on a
Bundle” on page 599.
Route by Attribute/Property
Default: Don’t route conductors with attribute/property matching Name = Value here
Allows you to specify whether conductors with a particular property or attribute can or cannot
be routed along a bundle, along a harness or through an inline pair. This constraint can apply to
bundles, inline connectors, harnesses and diagrams.
For further information on using this constraint, see “Constraining the Routing of Wires” on
page 603.
Related Topics

This topic details how to set constraints for an entire topology diagram. Those constraints will
be inherited by the appropriate objects on the diagram.
Note
Procedure
1. On the Design Browser, click the Set Rules and Constraints ( ) button; the Edit
Properties: Diagram Dialog is displayed.
2. Add any rules and Constraints (Capital Topology) to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’
window and click OK.
Results
• The constraints are inherited by objects on the diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Using a Constraint to Set an Attribute or Property on an Object
• The constraints are applied when actions are performed on the topology diagram.
Related Topics
Using a Constraint to Set an Attribute or Property

on an Object
This topic details how to use the Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object constraint to set
an attribute or property value on an object.
Note
Procedure
2. Either:
• Double-click on the object
4. Select ‘Set Integrator/Topology Attribute/Property on Object’ and click OK; the
constraint is added to the Edit Properties dialog.
Results
• When you use the Set Attribute/Property action, the attribute or property value is set on
the object.
Related Topics
Applying the Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object Constraint

February 2016
Capital Topology
Applying the Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object Constraint
Applying the Set Topology Attribute/Property on

Object Constraint
This topic details how to apply any Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object constraints
that have been set on objects in a topology diagram.
Procedure
Press Space Bar and enter Set Attribute/Property.
Results
• The attribute and property values on objects on the topology diagram are updated based
on the constraints.
Related Topics
Using a Constraint to Set an Attribute or Property on an Object

February 2016
Capital Topology
Reports (Capital Topology)
Reports (Capital Topology)

You can create various reports for a topology design.
• “Harness Report” on page 634
• “Material Statistics Report” on page 635
• “Bundle Wires Report” on page 635
• “Applied Constraints Report” on page 637
• “Component BOM Report” on page 638
• “Multicore List Report” on page 639
• “Using the Report Builder” on page 640
Harness Report
This creates a summary report in HTML format detailing all of the design objects (and their
measurements) that are located on the currently active topology diagram.
Related Topics
Creating a Harness Report for a Topology Diagram
Creating a Harness Report for a Topology Diagram

This topic details how to create a harness report for a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Harness Report.
The Harness Report dialog is displayed.
2. Specify where you want to save the report in HTML format, the name of the file and
click Save.
Note
Select the Open in Browser option if you want the report to be opened
automatically in a browser window.
Related Topics
Harness Report

February 2016
Capital Topology
Material Statistics Report

This reports on the materials used in the topology diagram. The reported materials include
connectors, inlines, splices and wires. You can display the totals for the diagram, the totals for
the harnesses, the totals for each harness level of each harness and the totals for the options.
If you have assigned properties to the wires in the Capital Logic design or in the topology
diagram, you can breakdown the statistics for number of wires and wire length by wire property
value.
You can save the report in comma separated variable (CSV) format. The enables the report to be
opened into applications such as MS Excel.
Related Topics
Creating a Material Statistic Report

This topic details how to create a material statistics report for a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Material Statistics; the Material Statistics Dialog is displayed.
2. In the Report Detail section, specify how you want to structure the report and click
Generate; the report table is generated on the dialog.
Related Topics
Bundle Wires Report

This reports on the number of wires in a bundle and the approximate outside diameter of that
bundle. The outside diameter is calculated using the values specified for the Outside Diameter
attribute of the wires in the Capital Logic designs and the Wire CSA attribute of the wires in the
topological design. The project preferences for Wire Gap Coefficient and Default Insulation
Thickness are also used in the calculation.
The report is generated on a Bundle tab in the Output Window and you can copy it to the
Windows Clipboard.
Related Topics
Creating a Bundle Wires Report for a Bundle Section
Copying the Bundle Wires Report
Clearing the Bundle Wires Report

February 2016
Capital Topology
Creating a Bundle Wires Report for a Bundle

Section
This topic details how to create a bundle wires report for a bundle section in a topology
diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Bundle Wires.
2. Position the mouse cursor over the bundle section for which you want to create the
report. A line is displayed across the cursor if the location is invalid. The offset from the
start of the bundle is displayed next to the cursor.
3. Click the bundle section.
Results
• A Bundle tab is added to the Output Window.
• The Bundle tab lists the details of the wires along the bundle and the estimated outside
diameter for the bundle.
Related Topics
Bundle Wires Report

This topic details how to copy a bundle wires report to the Windows Clipboard.
Procedure
1. Right-click on the report on the Bundle tab of the Output Window and select Select All.
2. Right-click again on the report and select Copy; the report contents are copied to the
Windows Clipboard.
3. Paste the report content to the appropriate application.
Note
You can also copy sub-sections of the report by highlighting the appropriate sections
with your mouse and selecting Copy before pasting into the other application.
Related Topics
Bundle Wires Report

February 2016
Capital Topology


This topic details how to clear a bundle wires report.
Procedure
Right-click on the report on the Bundle tab of the Output Window and select Clear.
Results
• The Bundle tab is cleared.
Related Topics
Bundle Wires Report
Applied Constraints Report

This reports on the constraints that have been set on objects in the currently active topology
diagram. The report can be saved in HTML or CSV format.
The report lists only those objects that have a constraint applied directly to them. For example, a
connector with a constraint will be listed but its pins will not, even though they inherit
constraints added to the connector.
The report contains the following columns:
• Harness
Specifies the name of the harness to which the object belongs if appropriate.
• Object Name
Specifies the name of the object.
• Object Type
Specifies the type of object.
• Constraint Type
Specifies whether the constraint is standard (STANDARD) or customized (CUSTOM).
• Constraint

February 2016
Capital Topology
Creating an Applied Constraints Report for a Topology Diagram
The constraint that has been applied to the object. If multiple constraints have been
applied to an object, the object is listed multiple times. If a constraint was applied via a
rule (that is, the rule was referenced rather than adding a constraint directly, then the
entry in this column starts with the rule name and a colon.
Related Topics
Creating an Applied Constraints Report for a Topology Diagram
Creating an Applied Constraints Report for a

Topology Diagram
This topic details how to create an applied constraints report for a topology diagram.
Procedure
1. Press Space Bar and enter Applied Constraints; the Applied Constraints Report dialog
is displayed.
2. Specify the directory where you want to save the report, the name of the HTML or CSV
file and click Save; the report is generated and saved at the specified location.
Note
Select Open in Browser or Spreadsheet if you want the report to open
automatically when it is generated.
Related Topics
Applied Constraints Report
Component BOM Report

This report contains a component bill of materials for the currently active topology diagram.
The report can be saved in HTML format and can be printed.
It contains the following information:
• Part Number
The part number of the library component.
• Quantity
The number of times the library part is used on the selected design(s).
Related Topics
Creating a Component BOM Report for a Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Creating a Component BOM Report for a Topology Diagram
Creating a Component BOM Report for a Topology

Diagram
This topic details how to create a component BOM report for the currently active topology
diagram.
Procedure
Press Space Bar and enter Component BOM; the Component BOM dialog displays the report.
Note
To save the report in HTML format, click Save Report. To print the report, click
Print.
Related Topics
Component BOM Report
Multicore List Report

This report contains a list of all multicores on the currently active topology diagram. The report
can be saved in HTML format and can be printed.
It contains the following information for each multicore:
• Name
The unique identifier for the multicore within the diagram.
• Design
The design upon which the multicore appears.
• Part Number
The part number of any library part associated with the multicore.
• Multicore Contents
A listing of the wires and child multicores assigned to the multicore.
• Multicore Parent
If a multicore is nested as a child of another multicore, the parent “containing” multicore
is listed here.
Related Topics
Creating a Multicore List Report for a Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Creating a Multicore List Report for a Topology Diagram
Creating a Multicore List Report for a Topology

Diagram
This topic details how to create a multicore list report for the currently active topology diagram.
Procedure
Press Space Bar and enter Multicore List; the Multicore List dialog displays the report.
Note
To save the report in HTML format, click Save Report. To print the report, click
Print.
Related Topics
Multicore List Report

Capital provides a dynamic report generator enabling you to quickly and easily specify, create
and modify customised reports. The Report Builder interface is intuitive and user-friendly,
offering control via icons and drag and drop functionality enabling the simple creation and
management of reports.
The reports are generated as plugins and can be made available, depending on your
requirements, as tables on diagrams, in Design Inspectors, for internal reports, and in Capital
Enterprise Reporter.
For further information see Using the Report Builder in the Capital Design Tools - Common
Functions User Guide for full details.
Metrics
The Metrics or Insight tab at the bottom left of the application window supplies metrics that can
be run against the open design.
For a full description of this functionality, see Capital Insight in the Capital Design Tools -

February 2016
Capital Topology
Design Rule Checks (Capital Topology)

Design rule checks can be run against designs to identify errors.
For instructions on running them, see “Running Design Rule Checks” on page 65 and “Running
Design Rule Checks in the Design Assistant” on page 641.
For a full list of the design rule checks available for use in Capital Topology, see Design Rule
Checks Applicable to Capital Topology Designs in the Capital Design Tools - Common
Running Design Rule Checks in the Design

Assistant
This topic explains how to use the Design Assistant to run design rule checks to identify errors
in designs.
Prerequisites
• The Design Assistant must have been made visible by pressing Space Bar and entering
Show Design Assistant.
• The checks that you want to run in the Design Assistant must have been specified in the
Project Preferences for Capital Topology designs.
Procedure
Click the Run Checks ( ) button in the Design Assistant; the results of the checks are
displayed in the Design Assistant Output Table.
Related Topics
Design Assistant

February 2016
Capital Topology
Capital Topology Dialog and Field Reference
Capital Topology Dialog and Field Reference

This section offers a description of all input dialogs used in the creation, maintenance and
viewing of Capital Topology designs. For each dialog, all fields are listed, along with a full
description of the field’s function.
Add Selected Logical Design Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Associate Wiring Designs Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Concurrency Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Connector Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Connector Details Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Design Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Edit Physical Scale (Capital Topology) Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Edit Diagram Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Edit Properties: Device Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Edit Properties: Hole Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Edit Properties: Diagram Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

February 2016
Capital Topology
Add Selected Logical Design Help
Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Edit Properties: Slot Connector Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Edit Properties: Wire Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Edit Skeleton Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Material Statistics Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
New Topology Design Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
New Topology Design Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
New Topology Diagram Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
New Topology Diagram Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Place Device Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Place Device Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Design Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Signal Map for Slot Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Routing Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Variant Tab (Edit Properties Dialog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Wiring Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Add Selected Logical Design Help

• The Logical Design Association concept
• The Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box fields
• Associating Logical Designs with the Topological Design

February 2016
Capital Topology
Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box
Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box

To access: Click the Add associated designs ( ) button on the Associate Wiring Designs
Dialog Box.
Used to select individual logical designs that you want to associate with the topological design.
Objects
Table 17-3. Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter by Build List From the dropdown list, select whether you want to filter the logical
designs displayed in the Logical designs window to only those from
a particular build list. If you want to display all available designs,
select None.
Logical designs Displays the logical designs that are available for association with
window the topological design. Select the designs that you want to associate
with the topological design and click Add Selected; the designs are
added to the Associated Designs window in the Associate Wiring
Designs Dialog Box.
Enter Filter String ( ) / In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of
Clear Filter String ( ) characters. A filter is applied to the Logical designs window so that
only designs with names containing that series of characters are
listed.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and view all
available designs.
Related Topics
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Help

• Signals
• The Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog fields
• Grouping Wires into Signals
• Usage Example for Grouping Wires into Signals in Capital Topology

February 2016
Capital Topology
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog

To access: With a topology diagram open in the Diagram Window, press Space Bar and enter
Associate Signals By, or click the Associate Signals By Attribute or Property ( ) button
on the Design Browser.
Use this dialog to group wires into signals in a topology diagram. The wires are assigned to a
signal if they have a particular attribute or property and the attribute/property values are used as
the signal names.
Objects
Table 17-4. Associate Signals By Attribute or Property Dialog Contents

Field Description
Attribute Select this if you want to use a wire attribute for the grouping.
A list of available attributes is displayed in the drop-down list.
Select the attribute.
Property Select this if you want to use a wire property for the grouping.
A list of available properties is displayed in the drop-down list.
Select the property.
Related Topics
Associate Wiring Designs Help

• The Logical Design Association concept
• The Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box fields
• Associating Logical Designs with the Topological Design
• Replacing a Logical Design Association

February 2016
Capital Topology
Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box
Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Associate Logical Designs, or click the Associate Logical
Designs ( ) button on the Design Browser.
Use this dialog box to associate individual logical designs or a build list with the topological
design.
Objects
Table 17-5. Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Managed by Build Displays any logical design build lists that can be associated with the
List Capital Integrator design. If you select a build list, you enter managed
mode where the association of the logical designs is managed by the
build list.
If you want to associate individual designs rather than a build list,
select None.
Remove associated Removes the association with any logical designs selected in the
designs Associated Designs window.
Enabled only if you have selected None in the Managed by Build
List field. That means the logical design associations are not managed
by a particular build list. You can therefore select which designs are
associated.
Add associated Displays the Add Selected Logical Design Dialog Box where you
designs select individual logical designs that you want to associate with the
topological design.
Enabled only if you have selected None in the Managed by Build
List field. That means the logical design associations are not managed
by a particular build list. You can therefore select which designs are
associated.
Associated Designs Displays the logical designs that have been associated with the
window topological design. Icons are displayed next to the designs when you
add or remove them.
indicates that the design association will be added when you click
OK.
indicates that the design association will be removed when you
click OK.
If you add a design revision that replaces an older revision, the
following is displayed:

February 2016
Capital Topology
Concurrency Tab
Table 17-5. Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Enter Filter String In the field next to the Enter Filter String icon ( ), enter a series of
( ) / Clear Filter characters. A filter is applied to the Associated Designs window so
String ( ) that only designs with names containing that series of characters are
listed.
Click the Clear Filter String icon ( ) to clear the filter and view all
available designs.
All / Changed / To be An additional filter for the Associated Designs window.
• All
Displays all designs in the window.
• Changed
Displays only the designs that will be added ( ) or removed ( )
when you click OK.
• To be
Displays only the designs that will remain associated when you
click OK.
Related Topics
Concurrency Tab
The Concurrency tab to the left of the application window is used with harness concurrency
functionality. The tab shows information on the design, harnesses, slots and their lock state and
allows you to lock and unlock objects.
See “Harness Concurrency” on page 553 for more information about this functionality.
Connector Details Help

• The Connector Details Dialog fields
• Reporting on All Unrouted Wires that Could Pass Through an Inline Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology
Connector Details Dialog
Connector Details Dialog

To access: In the Design Browser or diagram window, right-click on the inline connector and
select Inline Connector Report.
Use this dialog to report on all unrouted wires that could pass through an inline connector at any
point along their paths. The report can be printed or saved as a CSV file.
Objects
Table 17-6. Connector Details Dialog Contents

Field Description
Print Opens a Print dialog from which you can print the report.
Export Opens a Save dialog from which you can export and save the
report as a CSV file.
Connector The name of the inline connector.
Part Number The component part number assigned to the inline connector.
Available Cavities The number of cavities that are available on the inline
connector.
Total Cavities The total number of cavities on the inline connector.
Harness The harness on which the inline connector is located.
Locations Hyperlinks to the locations in the design where the inline
connector is placed. If you click a hyperlink, the diagram
window changes focus to that instance of the inline
connector.
Spec. Table For each unrouted wire, this lists:
Spec.
The different gauges of the unrouted wires.
Cavities
The number of available cavities on the connector that
support the gauge.
Wires
The number of unrouted wires with this gauge that could
pass through the inline.
Related Topics

February 2016
Capital Topology
Design Assistant
Design Assistant
Accessed by pressing Space Bar and entering Design Assistant.
Also displayed when you click the Refresh Wiring ( ) button on the Concurrency Tab,
Design Browser or Wiring Browser.
The Design Assistant is displayed as a tab in the Output Window. It can be used to run selected
design rule checks or to view or wiring synchronization messages.
It can be closed by right-clicking on the tab and selecting Remove tab.
• Save to CSV
Saves the content of the Design Assistant Output Table as a comma separated variable
(CSV) file. A dialog is displayed where you specify the file name and where you want to
save it.
• Run Checks
Runs the design rule checks that are set to run in the Design Assistant. The results of the
checks are displayed in the Design Assistant Output Table. You can specify which
checks are run by clicking Configure Checks ( ).
• Configure Checks
Opens the Project Preferences dialog where you specify which design rule checks are
run by the Design Assistant. See Project Preferences.
• Design Assistant Output Table
The table includes columns in which you can filter the contents by selecting an item
from the dropdown list at the top. It can be cleared by right-clicking on the tab and
selecting Clear. You can also filter some columns by typing a string into the box in the
column header. This allows you to filter on partial words, and so on.
You can sort the contents of a column by clicking the column header. The columns are:
o Severity
Whether the result is an error ( ), a warning ( ), an information message ( ), or a
summary.
o Message

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Design (Capital Topology) Help
Detailed message about what the check or wiring synchronization action has
identified. You can click an object in the message to jump to that object in the
diagram window.
o Category
The category of design rule check to which the particular design rule check belongs
(for example, Connectivity, Naming, and so on). If the wiring synchronization
action has been performed, Sync is displayed.
o Check
The specific design rule check or wiring synchronization action that has identified
something in the design.
o Design
The design in which the check or wiring synchronization action has identified
something/
o Object
The specific object for which the check or wiring synchronization action has
identified something.
Related Topics
Running Design Rule Checks in the Design Assistant
Edit Design (Capital Topology) Help

• Topology Designs
• The Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology) fields
• Editing a Capital Topology Design
• Deleting a Capital Topology Design
• Creating a Capital Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology)
Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology)

To access: In Capital Logic, right-click on the design in the Project Browser Window and select
Edit.
Use this dialog to edit an existing topology design.
Objects
Table 17-7. Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology) Contents

Field Description
Name A unique label to identify the topology design, which
defaults to TopologyDesign appended with an incrementing
number. Enter a new name or click the ellipsis (...) button to
the right of the field to select from a list of pre-specified
harness design names maintained in the project’s Object
Type Information in Capital Project. The contents of this
current project. Mandatory.
Properties Click this button to access the Edit Design Properties Dialog,
from where you can create properties to associate with the
design. Optional.
Revision Specifies the version of the design, allowing multiple
updated versions of the same design to exist in the database.
When creating a new design, the initial version number or
letter should be entered. Subsequent revisions receive a new
revision number as part of their creation. See the Create a
Design Revision from an Existing Design topic in the
Capital Project User Guide for more information on creating
a new revision. Mandatory.
about the design. This information is displayed alongside the
design Name and Revision in the Project Browser Window.
Optional.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Physical Scale (Capital Topology) Help
Table 17-7. Edit Design Dialog (Capital Topology) Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Release Level This field is used to record the design’s progress through the
stages of the design lifecycle. A number of system-defined
release levels are available, but it is possible to create custom
levels in Capital Project (see the Creating a Release Level for
a Project topic in the Capital Project User Guide for more
information). Regardless of the number of custom levels
available, they must correspond to one of the system-defined
release levels:
• If no custom levels are configured, the only option
available is Draft, which is selected by default.
• Any custom levels configured must correspond to the
Draft system-defined level, so select the custom level
required as dictated by your internal procedures.
Abstraction If you are using design abstractions, select the abstraction to
which this design belongs, from the dropdown list.
Maintained in Capital Project, abstractions allow you to
group related designs together for reporting purposes,
providing a “view” of a subset of a vehicle’s wiring. See the
Create a Project’s Design Abstractions topic in the Capital
Project User Guide for more information. Optional.
Domain If you are using domains to restrict user access to designs,
select the domain to which this design belongs from the
dropdown list. Only users with access rights to the selected
domain are able to access this design. Domains are created
and associated with user accounts in Capital User. See the
Domains topic in the Capital User User Guide for more
information. Optional.
Related Topics
Edit Physical Scale (Capital Topology) Help

• Physical Scale
• The Edit Physical Scale Dialog (Capital Topology) fields
• Specifying the Physical Scale of a Capital Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Physical Scale Dialog (Capital Topology)
Edit Physical Scale Dialog (Capital Topology)

To access: With a topology diagram open in the diagram window, press Space Bar and enter
Physical Scale.
Use to specify the physical scale of the topology diagram.
Objects
Table 17-8. Edit Physical Scale Dialog Contents

Field Description
Physical Scale Specifies the scale used for the distance between grid points
that indicates how long that distance is for real-world, physical
wires. It is used to calculate the real-world Length of bundles
and wires in the diagram.
In the first field, specify the physical length of the distance
between two grid points. Select the unit of measurement from
the drop-down list.
Related Topics
Edit Diagram Help

• Topology Diagrams
• The Edit Diagram Dialog Box fields
• Editing a Capital Topology Diagram
• Deleting a Capital Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Diagram Dialog Box
Edit Diagram Dialog Box

Edit.
Use this dialog to edit an existing topology diagram from within Capital Logic.
Objects
Table 17-9. Edit Diagram Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name A label to identify the topology diagram (diagram), which
defaults to Plane1. Enter a new name, or click the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field to select from a list of pre-
specified topology diagram names maintained in the
project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project.
Mandatory.
Style Set Specifies the style set that you want to apply to the diagram.
See the Diagram Styling User Guide for more information
about style sets and how to edit them.
Properties To add a property to the diagram, click the New button, enter
a Property Name in the New Property Dialog, then click
OK. The new property is added to the list. A property
consists of the following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a
Value that is not supported by the selected Type, the
Value is displayed in red text and the OK button is
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
To delete a property from the list, select it and click the
Delete button, then click OK to confirm the deletion.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Assembly Help
Related Topics
Edit Properties: Assembly Help

• Assemblies
• The Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog fields
• Viewing the Attributes and Properties for an Assembly

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog
Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog

To access: In the Design Browser, select the assembly to be viewed, press Space Bar and enter
Physical Scale, or right-click on the selected entity and select Properties.
Use this dialog to view the attributes and properties of an assembly. You cannot edit these
within the Capital Topology design as they are carried over from the associated Capital Logic
design.
Objects
Table 17-10. Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the assembly, which defaults to DC
from a list of pre-specified slot names maintained in the
project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. The
contents of this field are displayed in red if they are not unique
within the current project. Read-only.
about the assembly. Read-only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Bundle Help
Table 17-10. Edit Properties: Assembly Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the assembly, click the New button, enter a
following fields:
• Name
• Value
The value assigned to the property. Read-only.
• Type
The data type of the value. Read-only. If you enter a Value
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
button, then click OK to confirm the deletion. Read-only.
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the assembly.
Click Add to associate a library part using the Part Selection
Dialog. Click Update to update the library part information if
changes have been to the part in Capital Library. Click Remove
to cancel the association of the library part. Click View to
display the Details Dialog for the library part. Read-only.
Properties Tab Specify the values for assembly properties. Read-only.
Related Topics
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for an Assembly

• Bundles
• The Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog fields

February 2016
Capital Topology
• Editing a Bundle
• Adding a Bundle to a Diagram
• Moving a Bundle Section
• Deleting a Bundle Section
• Deleting an Entire Bundle

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog

To access: Select the bundle to be edited, press Space Bar and enter Properties, right-click on
the selected entity and select Properties, or double-click on the bundle in the Diagram
Window.
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a bundle.
Objects
Table 17-11. Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the bundle, which defaults to BUN
within the current project. Select the Visible option to display
the name next to the bundle on the topology diagram. Click
can specify how the name is displayed on the diagram (see
“Editing Text Attributes for an Object” on page 439).
Mandatory.
about the bundle. Select the Visible option to display the short
description next to the bundle on the topology diagram. Click
to display the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog where
you can specify how the short description is displayed on the
Option Specifies the derivatives in which the bundle exists. To create
or edit an option expression, click the ellipsis (...) button to the
right of the field and use the Edit Option Expression Dialog.
Alternatively, you can enter or modify an option expression
directly within the field. Select the Visible option to display the
option expression next to the bundle on the topology diagram.
Click to display the Edit Attributes dialog where you can
specify how the option expression is displayed on the diagram
(see “Editing Text Attributes for an Object” on page 439).
Optional.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-11. Edit Properties: Bundle Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Length Specifies the real-world, physical length of the bundle. By
default, this is determined by the length of the bundle in the
diagram and the diagram’s Physical Scale. To override the
default behavior, select Override and specify the physical
length. Select the Visible option to display the length next to
the bundle on the topology diagram. Click to display the
Edit Attributes dialog where you can specify how the length is
displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text Attributes for an
Object” on page 439). Mandatory.
Properties To add a property to the bundle, click the New button, enter a
following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for bundle attributes in the Value column.
Select the Visible option to display the attribute value next to
the bundle on the topology diagram. Click to display the
Edit Graphical Attributes dialog where you can specify how
the value is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the bundle graphic to appear on the
topology diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the bundle. Select the color
from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the
right of the field. As well as color names, the list contains the
following options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Mandatory. To use the default thickness, select Default from
the dropdown list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the bundle. To use the default
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Secondary Color If the Line Style is a broken line, this specifies the second color
used in the lines of the bundle. Select the color from the
dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to the right of the
field. As well as color names, the list contains the following
options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.
Rules Tab
Show Inherited Specifies what is displayed in the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’
window.
Select this if you want to display all constraints that apply to the
bundle, including constraints that have been set for the whole
diagram and constraints included in rules that have been added
to the bundle. Note that you cannot edit the constraints when
this option is selected.
Do not select this if you want to display only the rules added to
the bundle and constraints that have been set specifically for the
bundle. Mandatory.
Object Rule Rule Contents: Displays the Constraints (Capital Topology) that apply to the
Window bundle. Optional.
If Show Inherited is selected, you cannot edit any of the
constraints.
If Show Inherited is not selected, you can edit the individual
constraints added to the bundle but not the rules. A rule is
indicated by and you can click to display the constraints
in that rule (in read-only mode).
A constraint is indicated by . Red text indicates a value that
either must be edited or is invalid. Green text indicates editable
text.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Device Connector Help

Field Description
Add Rule Ref Displays the Rule Selection dialog from which you can select a
rule that you want to apply to the bundle. The selected rule is
added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’ window. Optional.
Add Constraint Displays the Constraint Selection dialog from which you can
select a constraint that you want to add to the bundle. The
selected constraint is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’
window where you can edit it. Optional.
Related Topics
Editing a Bundle
Edit Properties: Device Connector Help

• Device Connectors
• The Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog fields
• Viewing the Attributes and Properties for a Device Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog
Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog

To access: Select the device connector to be viewed, press Space Bar and enter Properties, or
right-click on the selected entity and select Properties.
Use this dialog to view the attributes and properties of a device connector. You cannot edit these
within the Capital Topology design as they are carried over from the associated Capital Logic
design.
Objects
Table 17-12. Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the device connector, which defaults
to DC appended with an incrementing number. Enter a new
name or click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to
select from a list of pre-specified slot names maintained in the
about the device connector. Read-only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Hole Help
Table 17-12. Edit Properties: Device Connector Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the device connector, click the New
button, enter a Property Name in the New Property Dialog,
then click OK. The new property is added to the list. A property
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the device
connector. Click Add to associate a library part using the Part
Selection Dialog. Click Update to update the library part
information if changes have been to the part in Capital Library.
Click Remove to cancel the association of the library part.
Click View to display the Details Dialog for the library part.
Read-only.
Attributes Specify the values for device connector attributes in the Value
column. Read-only.
Related Topics
Viewing the Attributes and Properties for a Device Connector

• Holes

February 2016
Capital Topology
• The Edit Properties: Hole Dialog fields

• Editing a Hole
• Constraining the Mapping of Wires to a Hole on a Slot

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Hole Dialog

To access: Select the hole to be edited, press Space Bar and enter Properties, right-click on the
selected entity and select Properties, or double-click on the hole in the Diagram Window
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a hole.
Objects
Table 17-13. Edit Properties: Hole Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the slot, which defaults to HOLE
from a list of pre-specified hole names maintained in the
the name next to the hole on the topology diagram. Click to
display the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog where you can
specify how the name is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing
Text Attributes for an Object” on page 439). Mandatory.
about the hole. Select the Visible option to display the short
description next to the hole on the topology diagram. Click

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-13. Edit Properties: Hole Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the hole, click the New button, enter a
following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for hole attributes in the Value column.
the hole on the topology diagram. Click to display the Edit
Graphical Attributes dialog where you can specify how the
value is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text Attributes
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the hole graphic to appear on the
topology diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the hole. Select the color from
options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
the dropdown list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the hole. To use the default
Mandatory.
Rules Tab

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Help

Field Description
window
hole, including constraints that have been set for the whole
to the hole. Note that you cannot edit the constraints when this
option is selected.
the hole and constraints that have been set specifically for the
hole. Mandatory.
Window hole. Optional.
constraints.
constraints added to the hole but not the rules. A rule is
text.
rule that you want to apply to the hole. The selected rule is
select a constraint that you want to add to the hole. The selected
constraint is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’ window
where you can edit it. Optional.
Related Topics
Editing a Hole

• Inline Pairs
• The Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog fields
• Editing an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology
• Adding an Unassociated Inline Pair to a Bundle

• Adding a Specific Logical Inline Pair to a Bundle
• Moving an Inline Pair
• Deleting an Inline Pair from a Bundle
• Toggling the Inline Plug Connector and Inline Receptacle Connector on an Inline Pair
• Constraining the Automatic Association of Inline Halves
• Specifying a Route Code for an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle
Connector
• Specifying a Bundle (Harness) as a Poke Home

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog

To access: Select the inline plug connector to be edited, press Space Bar and enter Properties, or
right-click on the selected entity and select Properties.
Use this dialog to edit the properties of an inline plug connector.
Objects
Table 17-14. Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the inline plug connector, which
defaults to P appended with an incrementing number. Enter a
new name or click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field
to select from a list of pre-specified inline plug connector
names maintained in the project’s Object Type Information in
Capital Project. The contents of this field are displayed in red if
they are not unique within the current project. Select the
Visible option to display the name next to the inline plug
connector on the topology diagram. Click to display the
the name is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text
about the inline plug connector. Select the Visible option to
display the short description next to the inline plug connector
on the topology diagram. Click to display the Edit Name
Text Attributes dialog where you can specify how the short
description is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text
Attributes for an Object” on page 439). Optional.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-14. Edit Properties: Inline Plug Connector Dialog Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Properties To add a property to the inline plug connector, click the New
button, enter a Property Name in the New Property Dialog,
then click OK. The new property is added to the list. A property
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for inline plug connector attributes in the
Value column. Select the Visible option to display the attribute
value next to the slot on the topology diagram. Click to
display the Edit Graphical Attributes dialog where you can
specify how the value is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the inline
plug connector. Click Add to associate a library part using the
Part Selection Dialog. Click Update to update the library part
Optional.
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the inline plug connector graphic to
appear on the topology diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the inline plug connector.
Select the color from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the
window to the right of the field. As well as color names, the list
contains the following options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Field Description
the dropdown list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the inline plug connector. To
use the default style, select Default from the dropdown list; to
use a different style, select Override from the dropdown list
and select the style from the second dropdown list that is
displayed. Mandatory.
Rules Tab

February 2016
Capital Topology
Field Description
Show Inherited Specifies what is displayed in the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:
window’.
inline plug connector, including constraints that have been set
for the whole diagram and constraints included in rules that
have been added to the slot. Note that you cannot edit the
constraints when this option is selected.
the slot and constraints that have been set specifically for the
slot. Mandatory.
Window inline plug connector. Optional.
constraints.
constraints added to the inline plug connector but not the rules.
A rule is indicated by and you can click to display the
constraints in that rule (in read-only mode).
text.
rule that you want to apply to the inline plug connector. The
selected rule is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:
window’. Optional.
select a constraint that you want to add to the inline plug
connector. The selected constraint is added to the ‘Object Rule
Rule Contents: window’ where you can edit it. Optional.
Routes Tab Used to specify:
• the route code for the connector. If there are multiple
harnesses entering the connector, you can specify a different
route code for the connector on each harness.
• whether bundles entering the connector are poke home
bundles.
Harness The name of the harness entering the connector. Read-only.
Connector The name of the connector. Read-only.
Bundle The name of the harness bundle entering the connector. Read-
only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Help
Field Description
Route Code The route code used to distinguish between connectors, for
example, when there is more than one slot connector combined
with a slot. It is not used in Capital Topology but it is used in
Capital HarnessXC.
If no route codes have been defined for the library part or no
library part is assigned, you can manually specify a route code
for the connector when on the harness specified in this row.
Optional.
If route codes have been defined for the library part used for the
connector, this field is not editable and displays the appropriate
code from the library part. Read-only.
Poke Home Whether the bundle specified in this row is a poke home bundle
(selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory.
Related Topics

• Inline Pairs
• The Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Dialog fields
• Adding an Unassociated Inline Pair to a Bundle
• Adding a Specific Logical Inline Pair to a Bundle
• Moving an Inline Pair
• Deleting an Inline Pair from a Bundle
• Toggling the Inline Plug Connector and Inline Receptacle Connector on an Inline Pair
• Constraining the Automatic Association of Inline Halves
• Specifying a Route Code for an Inline Plug Connector or an Inline Receptacle
Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Dialog

To access: Select the inline receptacle connector to be edited, press Space Bar and enter
Properties, right-click on the selected entity and select Properties, or double-click on the
inline receptacle connector in the Diagram Window.
Use this dialog to edit the properties of an inline receptacle connector.
Objects
Table 17-15. Edit Properties: Inline Receptacle Connector Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the inline receptacle connector,
which defaults to J appended with an incrementing number.
Enter a new name or click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
the field to select from a list of pre-specified inline receptacle
connector names maintained in the project’s Object Type
Information in Capital Project. The contents of this field are
displayed in red if they are not unique within the current
project. Select the Visible option to display the name next to
the inline receptacle connector on the topology diagram. Click
to display the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog where
you can specify how the name is displayed on the diagram (see
Mandatory.
about the inline receptacle connector. Select the Visible option
to display the short description next to the inline receptacle
connector on the topology diagram. Click to display the
the short description is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing
Text Attributes for an Object” on page 439). Optional.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the inline receptacle connector, click the
New button, enter a Property Name in the New Property
Dialog, then click OK. The new property is added to the list. A
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for inline receptacle connector attributes in
the Value column. Select the Visible option to display the
attribute value next to the slot on the topology diagram. Click
to display the Edit Graphical Attributes dialog where you
can specify how the value is displayed on the diagram (see
Mandatory.
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the inline
receptacle connector. Click Add to associate a library part
using the Part Selection Dialog. Click Update to update the
library part information if changes have been to the part in
Capital Library. Click Remove to cancel the association of the
library part. Click View to display the Details Dialog for the
library part. Optional.
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the inline receptacle connector graphic
to appear on the topology diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the inline receptacle connector.
Select the color from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the
window to the right of the field. As well as color names, the list
contains the following options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Mandatory.
list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the inline receptacle connector.
To use the default style, select Default from the dropdown list;
to use a different style, select Override from the dropdown list
and select the style from the second dropdown list that is
displayed. Mandatory.
Rules Tab

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Show Inherited Specifies what is displayed in the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:
window’
inline receptacle connector, including constraints that have
been set for the whole diagram and constraints included in rules
that have been added to the slot. Note that you cannot edit the
slot. Mandatory.
Window inline receptacle connector. Optional.
constraints.
constraints added to the inline receptacle connector but not the
rules. A rule is indicated by and you can click to display
the constraints in that rule (in read-only mode).
text.
rule that you want to apply to the inline receptacle connector.
The selected rule is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:
window’. Optional.
select a constraint that you want to add to the inline receptacle
connector. The selected constraint is added to the ‘Object Rule
Rule Contents: window’ where you can edit it. Optional.
bundles.
only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Multicore Help

Field Description
Capital HarnessXC.
Optional.
Related Topics
Edit Properties: Multicore Help

• Multicores
• The Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog fields
• Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Multicore

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog
Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog

To access: In the Wiring Browser, select the multicore to be viewed, press Space Bar and enter
Properties, or right-click on the selected entity and select Properties.
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a multicore. You cannot edit these within the Capital
Topology design as they are carried over from the associated Capital Logic design.
Objects
Table 17-16. Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the multicore, which defaults to the
name of the multicore in the source Capital Logic design. Enter
a new name or click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to select from a list of pre-specified slot names maintained
in the project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. The
about the multicore. Read-only.
Module Specifies the module(s) to which this multicore is assigned. If
this has been specified for the source wire in Capital Logic, this
field displays the assigned module code, but this can be
overwritten. Multiple module codes can be specified by
separating them with a forward slash (/). Codes cannot begin or
end with a forward slash or a space. Read-only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Diagram Help
Table 17-16. Edit Properties: Multicore Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the multicore, click the New button, enter
a Property Name in the New Property Dialog, then click OK.
following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for multicore attributes in the Value column.
Read-only.
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the
multicore. Click Add to associate a library part using the Part
Read-only.
Related Topics
Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Multicore

• The Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog fields

February 2016
Capital Topology
• Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog
Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog

To access: On the Design Browser, click the Set Rules and Constraints ( ) button.
Use this to set constraints that apply to the entire topology diagram. Those constraints will be
inherited by any appropriate objects on the diagram.
Objects
Table 17-17. Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog Contents

Field Description
Rules Tab
Object Rule Rule Displays the rules and Constraints (Capital Topology) that
Contents: Window apply to the diagram. Optional.
A rule is indicated by and you can click to display the
A constraint is indicated by . Red text indicates a value
that either must be edited or is invalid. Green text indicates
editable text.
Add Rule Ref Displays the Rule Selection dialog from which you can
select a rule that you want to apply to the diagram. The
selected rule is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’
window. Optional.
Add Constraint Displays the Constraint Selection dialog from which you
can select a constraint that you want to add to the diagram.
The selected constraint is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule
Contents:’ window where you can edit it. Optional.
Related Topics
Edit Properties: Slot Help

• Slots
• The Edit Properties: Slot Dialog fields
• Editing a Slot
• Adding an Empty Slot to a Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Slot Help
• Adding a Slot with a Device to a Topology Diagram

• Constraining the Placement of Devices in a Slot
• Manually Placing a Device in a Slot
• Manually Unplacing a Device from a Slot
• Viewing the Signal Map for a Slot
• Adding an Unassociated Slot Connector to a Slot

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Slot Dialog

To access: Select the slot to be edited, press Space Bar and enter Properties, right-click on the
selected entity and select Properties, or double-click on the slot in the Diagram Window.
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a slot.
Objects
Table 17-18. Edit Properties: Slot Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the slot, which defaults to DEV
the name next to the slot on the topology diagram. Click to
display the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog where you can
specify how the name is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing
about the slot. Select the Visible option to display the short
description next to the slot on the topology diagram. Click
Option Specifies the derivatives in which the slot exists. To create or
edit an option expression, click the ellipsis (...) button to the
directly within the field. Click to display the Edit
Attributes dialog where you can specify how the option
expression is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text
Attributes for an Object” on page 439). Optional.
Slot Type Only Equipment is available in Capital Topology. Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-18. Edit Properties: Slot Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the slot, click the New button, enter a
following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for slot attributes in the Value column.
the slot on the topology diagram. Click to display the Edit
Graphical Attributes dialog where you can specify how the
value is displayed on the diagram (see “Editing Text Attributes
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the slot.
display the Details Dialog for the library part. Optional.
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the slot graphic to appear on the
topology diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the slot. Select the color from
options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Mandatory.
list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the slot. To use the default style,
select Default from the dropdown list; to use a different style,
select Override from the dropdown list and select the style
from the second dropdown list that is displayed. Mandatory.
Fill Pattern Selection Specify the fill pattern of the slot. To use the default fill pattern,
select Default from the dropdown list; to use a different fill
pattern, select Override from the dropdown list and click
Change to display the Fill Pattern Selection Dialog, from
where you select a fill pattern. This option is displayed only for
a graphical shape that encloses space. Mandatory.
Rules Tab

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Slot Connector Help

Field Description
window.
slot, including constraints that have been set for the whole
to the slot. Note that you cannot edit the constraints when this
option is selected.
slot. Mandatory.
Window slot. Optional.
constraints.
constraints added to the slot but not the rules. A rule is
text.
rule that you want to apply to the slot. The selected rule is
select a constraint that you want to add to the slot. The selected
constraint is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’ window
where you can edit it. Optional.
Related Topics
Editing a Slot

• Slot Connectors
• The Edit Properties: Slot Connector Dialog fields
• Editing a Slot Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology
• Adding an Unassociated Slot Connector to a Slot

• Adding a Specific Harness Connector as a Slot Connector to a Slot
• Specifying a Route Code for a Slot Connector
• Moving a Slot Connector
• Constraining the Association of Logical Harness Connectors to Slot Connectors
• Specifying a Route Code for a Slot Connector

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Slot Connector Dialog

To access: Select the slot to be edited, press Space Bar and enter Properties, right-click on the
selected entity and select Properties, or double-click on the slot connector in the Diagram
Window.
Use this dialog to edit the properties of a slot connector.
Objects
Table 17-19. Edit Properties: Slot Connector Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the slot connector, which defaults to
P appended with an incrementing number. Enter a new name or
the name next to the slot connector on the topology diagram.
Click to display the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog
where you can specify how the name is displayed on the
page 439). Mandatory.
about the slot connector. Select the Visible option to display the
short description next to the slot connector on the topology
diagram. Click to display the Edit Name Text Attributes
dialog where you can specify how the short description is
Object” on page 439). Optional.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-19. Edit Properties: Slot Connector Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the slot connector, click the New button,
enter a Property Name in the New Property Dialog, then click
OK. The new property is added to the list. A property consists
of the following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for slot connector attributes in the Value
column. Select the Visible option to display the attribute value
next to the slot connector on the topology diagram. Click to
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the slot
connector. Click Add to associate a library part using the Part
Optional.
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the slot graphic to appear on the
topology diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the slot. Select the color from
options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Mandatory.
list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the slot. To use the default style,
select Default from the dropdown list; to use a different style,
select Override from the dropdown list and select the style
from the second dropdown list that is displayed. Mandatory.
Rules Tab

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
window.
slot connector, including constraints that have been set for the
whole diagram and constraints included in rules that have been
added to the slot connector. Note that you cannot edit the
the slot connector and constraints that have been set specifically
for the slot connector. Mandatory.
Window slot connector. Optional.
constraints.
constraints added to the slot connector but not the rules. A rule
is indicated by and you can click to display the
text.
rule that you want to apply to the slot connector. The selected
rule is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’ window.
Optional.
select a constraint that you want to add to the slot connector.
bundles.
only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Help

Field Description
Capital HarnessXC.
Optional.
Related Topics
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Help

• The Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog fields
• Editing a Virtual Harness

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog

To access: In the Design Browser, select the virtual harness to be edited, press Space Bar and
enter Properties, or right-click on the selected entity and select Properties.
Use this dialog to edit the attributes and properties of a virtual harness.
Objects
Table 17-20. Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the virtual harness, which defaults to
H appended with an incrementing number. Enter a new name
or click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to select
from a list of pre-specified virtual harness names maintained in
the project’s Object Type Information in Capital Project. The
the name next to the virtual harness on the topology diagram.
Click to display the Edit Name Text Attributes dialog
where you can specify how the name is displayed on the
page 439). Mandatory.
about the virtual harness. Select the Visible option to display
the short description next to the virtual harness on the topology
diagram. Click to display the Edit Name Text Attributes
dialog where you can specify how the short description is
Object” on page 439). Optional.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-20. Edit Properties: Virtual Harness Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the virtual harness, click the New button,
enter a Property Name in the New Property Dialog, then click
OK. The new property is added to the list. A property consists
of the following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for virtual harness attributes in the Value
column. Select the Visible option to display the attribute value
next to the virtual harness on the topology diagram. Click to
Graphical Tab Specify how you want the virtual harness graphic to appear on
the topology diagram.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Primary Color Specify the color of the lines of the virtual harness. Select the
color from the dropdown list; it is previewed in the window to
the right of the field. As well as color names, the list contains
the following options:
• Default
• Background
• Foreground
vice versa.
• Manual
can select a color.
Mandatory.

February 2016
Capital Topology

Field Description
Mandatory.
list.
dropdown list:
• Logical
places.
related task flows.
Line Style Specify the style of the lines of the virtual harness. To use the
default style, select Default from the dropdown list; to use a
different style, select Override from the dropdown list and
select the style from the second dropdown list that is displayed.
Mandatory.
Rules Tab

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Properties: Wire Help

Field Description
window.
virtual harness, including constraints that have been set for the
whole diagram and constraints included in rules that have been
added to the virtual harness. Note that you cannot edit the
the virtual harness and constraints that have been set
specifically for the virtual harness. Mandatory.
Window virtual harness. Optional.
constraints.
constraints added to the virtual harness but not the rules. A rule
is indicated by and you can click to display the
text.
rule that you want to apply to the virtual harness. The selected
rule is added to the ‘Object Rule Rule Contents:’ window.
Optional.
select a constraint that you want to add to the virtual harness.
Related Topics
Editing a Virtual Harness

• Wires
• The Edit Properties: Wire Dialog fields

February 2016
Capital Topology
• Viewing the Attributes and Properties of a Wire

• Constraining the Routing of Wires

February 2016
Capital Topology

To access: In the Design Browser or Wiring Browser, select the wire to be viewed, press Space
Bar and enter Properties, or right-click on the selected entity and select Properties.
Use this dialog to view the properties of a wire. You cannot edit these within the Capital
Topology design as they are carried over from the associated Capital Logic design.
Objects
Table 17-21. Edit Properties: Wire Dialog Contents

Field Description
General Tab
Name A unique label to identify the wire, which defaults to the name
of the wire in the source Capital Logic design. Enter a new
name or click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to
select from a list of pre-specified slot names maintained in the
about the wire. Read-only.
Module Specifies the module(s) to which this wire is assigned. If this
has been specified for the source wire in Capital Logic, this
field displays the assigned module code, but this can be
overwritten. Multiple module codes can be specified by
separating them with a forward slash (/). Codes cannot begin or
end with a forward slash or a space. Read-only.
Option Specifies the derivatives in which the wire exists. To create or
edit an option expression, click the ellipsis (...) button to the
directly within the field. Read-only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Skeleton Help
Table 17-21. Edit Properties: Wire Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties To add a property to the wire, click the New button, enter a
following fields:
• Name
• Value
• Type
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
Attributes Specify the values for wire attributes in the Value column.
Read-only.
Library Part Specifies whether a library part is associated with the wire.
display the Details Dialog for the library part. Read-only.
Related Topics
Edit Skeleton Help

• Skeletons
• The Edit Skeleton Dialog fields

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Skeleton Help
• Adding a Skeleton to a Topology Diagram

• Removing a Skeleton from a Topology Diagram

February 2016
Capital Topology
Edit Skeleton Dialog
Edit Skeleton Dialog

To access: With a topology diagram open, press Space Bar and enter Skeleton.
Use this dialog to add or remove a skeleton graphic on a topology diagram.
Objects
Table 17-22. Edit Skeleton Dialog Contents

Field Description
Tree Lists the skeleton graphics that are available. Select the
skeleton that you want to add to the diagram. If you do not want
a skeleton on the place, select [ No Skeleton ]. Mandatory.
Related Topics
Material Statistics Help

• The Material Statistics Dialog fields
• Creating a Material Statistic Report

February 2016
Capital Topology
Material Statistics Dialog
Material Statistics Dialog

To access: Press Space Bar and enter Material Statistics.
Use this dialog to create a material statistics report for a topology diagram.
Objects
Table 17-23. Material Statistics Dialog Contents

Field Description
Report Detail Determines how the report is structured. Mandatory.
• Totals
The report contains one line with the totals for the whole diagram.
• By Harness
In addition to the totals for the whole diagram, the report contains
lines with the totals for each base harness.
• By Level
lines for each harness level of each base harness. For example:
Figure 17-4. Example Material Report by Level
In this example:
• The Totals row shows the total number of objects in the diagram as a
whole. That is, 56 connectors, 12 inlines, 11 splices, and so on.
• The top BODY row shows the total number of objects on the BODY
base harness regardless of harness levels. That is, 12 connectors, 1
inline, 1 splice, and so on.
• The other BODY rows show the total number of objects on particular
harness levels for the BODY base harness. For the _US-SP1 level,
there are 6 non-inline connectors. In other words, there are 6 slot slot
connectors or interface connectors populated for this harness level.
• By Option
lines for each base harness and is further divided by option.

February 2016
Capital Topology
New Topology Design Help
Table 17-23. Material Statistics Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
By Wire Attribute/ Gives you the option of adding columns to the table for a particular wire
Property attribute or property. Specify the following to determine which columns
are added:
• Number of Wires (No./W.)
Check this box if you want to add columns labelled #.W. that contain
the number of wires for a particular wire property value.
• Wire Length (W.L.)
Check this box if you want to add columns labelled W.L. that contain
the length of wire used for a particular wire property value.
• Drop-down box
Select the wire attribute or property for which you want to display
information from the drop-down list.
For example If you check the Number of Wires (No./W.) box and
select WireColor from the drop-down list. Columns are added showing
how many wires for each WireColor value are used.
In this example, you can see that 1 wire with the WireColor value U/P is
used in total and that 3 wires with the WireColor value G are used in the
BODY LH base harness.
Generate Generates the report table.
Save Report File Displays the Material Statistics Report dialog that allows you to save
the report as a CSV file.
Related Topics
New Topology Design Help

• The New Topology Design Dialog fields
• Creating a Capital Topology Design

February 2016
Capital Topology
New Topology Design Dialog

To access: In Capital Logic, right-click on the project in the Project Browser Window and select
New Topology Design.
Use this dialog to create a new topology design from within Capital Logic.
Objects
Table 17-24. New Topology Design Dialog Contents

Field Description
Name A unique label to identify the topology design, which
defaults to TopologyDesign appended with an incrementing
number. Enter a new name or click the ellipsis (...) button to
harness design names maintained in the project’s Object
Properties Click this button to access the Edit Design Properties Dialog,
from where you can create properties to associate with the
design. Optional.
Revision Specifies the version of the design, allowing multiple
updated versions of the same design to exist in the database.
When creating a new design, the initial version number or
letter should be entered. Subsequent revisions receive a new
revision number as part of their creation. See the Create a
Design Revision from an Existing Design topic in the
Capital Project User Guide for more information on creating
a new revision. Mandatory.
about the design. This information is displayed alongside the
design Name and Revision in the Project Browser Window.
Optional.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-24. New Topology Design Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Release Level This field is used to record the design’s progress through the
stages of the design lifecycle. A number of system-defined
release levels are available, but it is possible to create custom
levels in Capital Project (see the Creating a Release Level for
a Project topic in the Capital Project User Guide for more
information). Regardless of the number of custom levels
available, they must correspond to one of the system-defined
release levels:
• If no custom levels are configured, the only option
available is Draft, which is selected by default.
• Any custom levels configured must correspond to the
Draft system-defined level, so select the custom level
required as dictated by your internal procedures.
Abstraction If you are using design abstractions, select the abstraction to
which this design belongs, from the dropdown list.
Maintained in Capital Project, abstractions allow you to
group related harnesses together for reporting purposes,
providing a “view” of a subset of a vehicle’s wiring. See the
Create a Project’s Design Abstractions topic in the Capital
Project User Guide for more information. Optional.
Domain If you are using domains to restrict user access to designs,
select the domain to which this design belongs from the
dropdown list. Only users with access rights to the selected
domain are able to access this design. Domains are created
and associated with user accounts in Capital User. See the
Domains topic in the Capital User User Guide for more
information. Optional.
Diagram Details Specify the first details for the first diagram to be created for
the design.
Template If required, specify a template design that you want to use for
the diagram. If you select a design with multiple diagrams,
the Name and Style Set fields below this are disabled.
Name A unique label to identify the diagram, which defaults to
Plane1. Enter a new name or click the ellipsis (...) button to
harness diagram names maintained in the project’s Object

February 2016
Capital Topology
New Topology Diagram Help
Table 17-24. New Topology Design Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Properties Click this button to access the Edit Diagram Properties
dialog, from where you can create properties to associate
with the design. See “Editing the Properties of a Diagram” on
page 119 for more information. Optional.
Related Topics
New Topology Diagram Help

• The New Topology Diagram Dialog fields

February 2016
Capital Topology
New Topology Diagram Dialog
New Topology Diagram Dialog

New Diagram.
Use this dialog to create a new topology diagram from within Capital Logic.
Objects
Table 17-25. New Topology Diagram Dialog Contents

Field Description
Name A label to identify the topology diagram, which defaults to
Plane1. Enter a new name, or click the ellipsis (...) button to
topology diagram names maintained in the project’s Object
Properties To add a property to the diagram, click the New button, enter
a Property Name in the New Property Dialog, then click
OK. The new property is added to the list. A property
• Name
• Value
• Type
The data type of the value. Mandatory. If you enter a
Value that is not supported by the selected Type, the
Value is displayed in red text and the OK button is
• String
• Integer
A whole number.
• Float
To delete a property from the list, select it and click the
Delete button, then click OK to confirm the deletion.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Place Device Help
Related Topics
Place Device Help

• The Place Device Dialog fields
• Manually Placing a Device in a Slot

February 2016
Capital Topology
Place Device Dialog
Place Device Dialog

To access: Select one or more unplaced devices in the Wiring Browser and either right-click on
one of the selected devices and select Place Device, or press Space Bar and enter Place
Device.
Use this dialog to select a slot into which you want to place the selected devices.
Objects
Table 17-26. Place Device Dialog Contents

Field Description
Locked by you Lists the slots in the design. Select a slot and click OK to place
the devices that you have selected into it.
Related Topics
Design Browser
This tab, labelled Design and located on the lower-left side of the application window, is
displayed when a topology diagram is active in the diagram window. It lists all topological and
harness objects present on the topology diagram, grouped into folders by object type.
Table 17-27. Design Tab Contents

Field Description
Associate Wiring Displays the Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box that
Designs allows you to associated Capital Logic wiring designs with
the topology diagram. See “Logical Design Association” on
page 561.
Show Routing Opens the Routing Assistant. If wires are selected, this
Assistant button runs the assistant. If no wires are selected, the Routing
Assistant opens empty.
Set Rules and Displays the Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog where you can
Constraints set rule and constraints for the topology diagram. See
“Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology Diagram” on
page 631.
Associate Signals by Displays the Associate Signals By Attribute or Property
Attribute or Property Dialog that allows you to group wires into topology signals.
See “Grouping Wires into Signals” on page 622.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Signal Map for Inline Pair Help
Table 17-27. Design Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Refresh Wiring Synchronizes changes in the associated Capital Logic
designs with the Capital Topology design. See
“Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology
Design” on page 565.
When is displayed, this indicates that the topology and the
associated Capital Logic designs have become out-of-sync
and you need to synchronize them again. This may be
triggered by manually placing or unplacing devices and
renaming objects in the topology.
Tree Lists all topological and harness objects present on the
diagram, grouped into folders by object type.
To highlight an object in the Diagram Window, click on it in
the browser tree.
Each object entry in the design browser offers all of the right-
click options available to the object on the diagram.
Hovering your mouse over a wire displays a tooltip that
indicates the start and end point (device, connector, pin) and
the topology signal under which it is grouped.
The Unrouted folder contains wires that terminate at an
object that is not associated with an object from the Capital
Logic designs (for example, a newly added inline pair).
Enter Filter String box Enter a series of characters. A filter is applied to the Wiring
Browser so that only objects with names containing that
series of characters are listed.
Active diagram filter ( ) You can toggle this to control whether the design browser
displays all objects in the design or only objects in the
currently active diagram ( ).
Note
You can hide the Design Browser (and the Project Browser Window) by pressing Space Bar
and entering Toggle Browser Area. You can return it in the same way.
Signal Map for Inline Pair Help

• The Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair fields
• Viewing the Signal Map for an Inline Pair

February 2016
Capital Topology
Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair

To access: Right-click an inline half and select Signal Map. Alternatively, select an inline half,
press Space Bar and enter Signals.
Use this dialog to view which wires connect to which cavity in the inline pair. All fields on this
dialog box are read-only.
Objects
Table 17-28. Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair Contents
Field Description
Connector Mating Table Displays each half of the inline pair. The table is split into
two sections by the middle column. The fields on either side
of this represent the two halves of the inline pair.
To select which columns you want displayed in the table,
right-click on a column header and select/unselect the
column names as required.
Connector A unique identifier for the inline half.
Part Number The library part of the inline half (if a library part has been
selected).
No. of Cavities Specifies the number of cavities on the inline half.
Signal Mappings tab Displays the mapping of signals and wires between the
cavities of connectors on each inline half.
Each row represents a signal and wire mapping between
connector cavities on both halves of the inline.
The table is divided into two sections by the middle column.
The fields on either side of this apply to the connector
cavities on either side of the inline.
Status Column (blank column Displays an error or warning symbol if there is an issue with
header) the mapping. Move your mouse over the symbol to view a
brief description of the issue.
Connector Displays the name of a connector used for the inline half.
Cavity Displays the name of a cavity or backshell termination ( )
on the connector in the Connector column.
Harness Displays the name of the harness owning the connector in
the Connector column.
Signal Specifies the signal travelling between the connector
cavities from the Cavity columns.
Wire Displays the wire that is carrying the signal and is mapped
to the connector cavity in the Cavity column.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Table 17-28. Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Wire Info tab Displays details of the wires connecting to the connectors
from the Connector Mating Table. Each row represents a
wire.
If no connector is selected in the Connector Mating Table,
all wires connecting to all of the connectors are displayed.
If a connector is selected in one half of the Connector
Mating table, wires connecting to only that connector are
displayed.
If you click the Select both halves ( ) symbol in the
middle of the Connector Mating table, both connectors are
selected and all wires connecting to both of them are
displayed.
You can right-click on a row for a wire and select
Properties to view the properties for the wire, including its
library part.
To sort the table rows based on the contents of a column,
click on the column header.
To select which columns you want displayed in the table,
right-click on a column header and select/unselect the
column names as required.
Status Column Displays an error or warning symbol if there is an issue with
the wire. Move your mouse over the symbol to view a brief
description of the issue.
Harness The harness to which the wire belongs.
Connector/Hole The connector to which the wire is connected.
Cavity/Backshell The connector cavity or backshell through which the wire
passes.
Signal The signal carried by the wire.
Wire The name of the wire.
Part The library part assigned to the wire.
Spec The specification of the wire.
Material The material of the wire.
Color The color of the wire.
Variant The variant option expression for a variant wire.
Option Expression The option expression on the wire.
Module Code The module code of the wire.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Signal Map for Slot Help
Table 17-28. Signal Map Dialog Box for Inline Pair Contents (cont.)
Field Description
To The object and pin to which the wire connects at the other
end.
Related Topics
Signal Map for Slot Help

• The Signal Map for Slot Dialog fields
• Viewing the Signal Map for a Slot

February 2016
Capital Topology
Signal Map for Slot Dialog
Signal Map for Slot Dialog

To access: Right-click a slot and select Signal Map.
Use this dialog to view the mapping of signals and wires to connector cavities and holes on a
slot. The fields on this dialog are read-only.
Objects
Table 17-29. Signal Map Dialog Contents

Field Description
Device & Connector Lists the devices, connectors, ring terminals and holes on the
Table slot. You can change the order of the rows by clicking a
column header so that the rows are ordered alphabetically or
numerically according to the contents of that column.
If no object is selected, the Signal Mappings Table displays
mappings to all objects on the slot. Click an object so that the
tab displays mappings to that object only. To display all
mappings again, click the selected object to toggle back to
the full signal mapping view.
Signal Mappings Table Lists signal or wire mappings for the slot. If no object is
selected in the Device & Connector Table, this tab lists all
mappings in the slot. If an object is selected, this tab lists
mappings to that object only.
You can change the order of the rows by clicking a column
header so that the rows are ordered alphabetically or
numerically according to the contents of that column.
Connector The connector, hole or ring terminal to which the signal or
wire is mapped. Click on the field in the column to select a
hole from the dropdown list. Read-only.
Cavity The name of the cavity on the connector.
Harness The harness or harnesses through which the signal or wire
passes. This is determined by the selected Connector. Read-
only.
Wire Displays the wire that is carrying the signal and is mapped to
the connector cavity in the cavity column. Read-only.
Pin The device pin to which the signal or wire is mapped. Read-
only.
Device The name of the device to which the signal or wire is
mapped. Read-only.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Routing Assistant
Table 17-29. Signal Map Dialog Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Slot instance filter Filters the contents of the Signal Mappings tab so that only
connectors and holes on the selected instance of the slot are
displayed. You can toggle this setting to display all
connectors and holes on all instances of the slot.
Related Topics
Routing Assistant
The Routing Assistant is displayed as a tab in the Output Window. It identifies possible routes
for selected/identified unrouted wires. These routes may or may not be complete.
If they are incomplete, the To-Do List Table identifies where an inline connector instance is
required in the associated Capital Logic diagrams to complete the route.
You access the Routing Assistant by either:
• selecting one or more unrouted wires, for which you want to identify possible routes,
right-clicking on a selected wire, and selecting Routing Assistant or clicking Show
Routing Assistant ( ) on the Design Browser or Wiring Browser.
• right-clicking on an inline connector, for which you want to identify the currently
unrouted wires whose routes could be completed by adding instances of this inline
connector to the Capital Logic designs, and selecting Routing Assistant or clicking
Show Routing Assistant ( ) on the Design Browser or Wiring Browser.
It can be closed by right-clicking on the tab and selecting Remove tab.
• Alternative Routes Table / Route to Implement Table / Routes to Implement Table

When unrouted wires have been selected, this displays the common, unique routes that
are possible for those wires. When you select a route in this table, it is highlighted in the
topology diagram window and details for each stage of the route are displayed in the To-
Do List Table. If a Capital Logic diagram is active in the diagram window, no route is
highlighted in it. Each stage of the route may or may not be complete in the associated
Capital Logic designs.
To specify that the selected wires follow one of these routes, select that route in the table
and click Select Route; all other routes are removed from the table.
When an inline connector has been selected, this displays the routes for the wires that
have been identified as currently unrouted but whose route could be completed by
adding an instance of the selected inline connector to the associated Capital Logic
designs. All routes must be completed so the Select Route button is not displayed.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Routing Assistant
o Status
Indicates whether a route is completely implemented ( ) or not ( ).
o Length
The total length of the route (calculated as the sum of all bundle lengths along the
route).
o Inlines
The number of inline connectors along the route.
o Harnesses
The harnesses through which the route passes.
o Wires
The number of currently unrouted wires that are consumed by this route.
• To-Do List Table
Displays details for each stage of the possible route selected in the ‘Alternative Routes
Table / Route to Implement Table / Routes to Implement Table’.
The From cell in the top row indicates the connector where the wire starts and the To
cell in the bottom row indicates the connector where the wire ends. Both of these
connectors already exist in the associated Capital Logic designs and the wire already
starts and terminates at those points.
Any connectors in the other From and To cells do not currently exist for the selected/
identified wires in the associated Capital Logic designs. That means, instances of the
connector may or may not exist in those designs but the wires do not currently pass
through any of them.
You can reverse the order in which the stages of this route are displayed in this table by
clicking Reverse Route.
To complete the route, you must add an inline instance through which the wire passes.
o Status
Indicates whether this stage of the route is complete ( ) or not ( ).
o From
Displays the name of the connector at the start of this stage of the route. If the
connector is mated to a device, the device name is also displayed.
Red text indicates that an action is required. Either:
• The connector does not exist (is missing) and must be added to an associated

February 2016
Capital Topology
Routing Assistant
• There is at least one wire in this row of the table that does not terminate at the
connector yet.
If you click a connector cell in the table, a tooltip displays additional information
about it, including:
• links to any instances of that object in either the Capital Topology diagram or in
the associated Capital Logic diagrams. Click the link to jump to that instance in
the diagram window
• A Spec. table lists the gauges of the unrouted wires that could pass through this
connector. You can use the report to identify whether the selected connector is
big enough to house all of the wires.
Spec.
Cavities
The number of available cavities on the connector that support the gauge.
Wires
The number of unrouted wires with this gauge that could pass through the inline.
o Available Cavities
Displays the number of available cavities on the From connector. If the connector
does not currently exist, Missing is displayed.
o To
Displays the name of the connector at the end of this stage of the route. If the
connector is mated to a device, the device name is also displayed.
Red text indicates that an action is required. Either:
• The connector does not exist (is missing) and must be added to an associated
• There is at least one wire in this row of the table that does not terminate at the
connector yet.
If you click a connector cell in the table, a tooltip displays additional information
about it, including:
• links to any instances of that object in either the Capital Topology diagram or in
the associated Capital Logic diagrams. Click the link to jump to that instance in
the diagram window

February 2016
Capital Topology
Routing Assistant
• A Spec. table lists the gauges of the unrouted wires that could pass through this
connector. You can use the report to identify whether the selected connector is
big enough to house all of the wires.
Spec.
Cavities
The number of available cavities on the connector that support the gauge.
Wires
The number of unrouted wires with this gauge that could pass through the inline.
o Available Cavities
Displays the number of available cavities on the To connector. If the connector does
not currently exist, Missing is displayed.
o Wires to be Routed
A column is displayed for each selected or identified wire following the route. If the
wire has been assigned to a signal in the Capital Topology design, the signal name is
displayed as the column name. Otherwise, the wire name is displayed as the column
name.
The formatting of the cells in these columns offer guidance on what you need to do:
• No text and a white background indicates that, for a signal, no wire belonging to
that signal is connected to either connector in that stage of the route.
• Black text on a white background indicates that the wire is fully routed and
connected in that stage of the route.
• Red text indicates that only one end of the wire is connected in that stage of the
route. A colored background indicates that connecting this wire in this stage is a
suggested next step. A white background indicates that connecting this wire is
not a suggested next step, although it must be done at some point.
It is suggested that you work down and then across the columns when connecting the
wires.
When connectors and wires are created in Capital Logic, this table updates to reflect
the changes.
If you click a wire or connector cell in the table, a tooltip displays additional
information about it, including links to any instances of that object in either the
Capital Topology diagram or in the associated Capital Logic diagrams. Click the
link to jump to that instance in the diagram window.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Status Bar (Topology-Specific Buttons)
Related Topics
Status Bar (Topology-Specific Buttons)

The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Application Window and contains the following
additional button for a Capital Topology diagram.
See “Status Bar” on page 489 for details of other fields and buttons on the status bar.
• Click to toggle the visibility of Splice
Indicates that the splices are not visible in the diagram and will not be visible if you
print or output to PDF/DXF/CGM. Click this to make them visible.
Indicates that the splices are visible in the diagram. You can use style sets to
determine how their appearance is styled. See “Styling Objects” on page 68.
If you print to PDF, DXF or CGM with the diagram open, the splices are printed
exactly as seen on the diagram. If the diagram is closed when you print, the splices
are not printed.
Click this to hide them in the diagram.
Note
The toggle splice visibility state is not persisted.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Variant Tab (Edit Properties Dialog)
Variant Tab (Edit Properties Dialog)

To access: Right-click on a bundle in the Diagram Window or Design Browser, select
Properties and click the Variant tab.
Use this tab to specify different physical lengths for the selected bundle when different option
expressions are applied to it.
Note
Visible only when one bundle is selected. Not visible when multiple bundles are selected.
Objects
Table 17-30. Edit Properties: Variant Tab Contents

Field Description
Variant Bundle This table lists the different physical lengths of the selected bundle when
Length Table different option expressions are applied to it.
An additional blank row is added when all existing rows contain an option
expression.
Deletes the variant bundle length row from the table.
Option Specifies the option expression that must be applied to the bundle in order
Expression for the specified Variant Length to be used.
Either type the option expression manually or click the ellipsis (...) at the
right end of the field to display the Edit Option Expression Dialog where
you can create the option expression.
Different rows cannot contain identical option expressions.
Variant Length Specifies a variant physical length that is only used when the specified
Option Expression is applied to the bundle.
Different rows cannot contain identical lengths.
Related Topics
Wiring Browser
This tab, labelled Wiring and located on the lower-left side of the application window, is
displayed when a topology diagram is active in the diagram window.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Wiring Browser
Table 17-31. Wiring Tab Contents

Field Description
Associate Wiring Displays the Associate Wiring Designs Dialog Box that
Designs allows you to associated Capital Logic wiring designs with
the topology diagram. See “Logical Design Association” on
page 561.
Show Routing Opens the Routing Assistant. If wires are selected, this
Assistant button runs the assistant. If no wires are selected, the Routing
Assistant opens empty.
Set Rules and Displays the Edit Properties: Diagram Dialog where you can
Constraints set rule and constraints for the topology diagram. See
“Setting Constraints for an Entire Topology Diagram” on
page 631.
Associate Signals by Displays the Associate Signals By Attribute or Property
Attribute or Property Dialog that allows you to group wires into topology signals.
See “Grouping Wires into Signals” on page 622.
Refresh Wiring Synchronizes changes in the associated Capital Logic
designs with the Capital Topology design. See
“Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology
Design” on page 565.
When is displayed, this indicates that the topology and the
associated Capital Logic designs have become out-of-sync
and you need to synchronize them again. This may be
triggered by manually placing or unplacing devices and
renaming objects in the topology.

February 2016
Capital Topology
Wiring Browser
Table 17-31. Wiring Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Tree It lists all harness objects present on the associated Capital
Logic designs, grouped into folders by object type (wires,
multicores, devices, connectors and inlines).
To highlight an object in the Diagram Window, click on it in

the browser tree.
If an object is not associated with an object on the topology

diagram, it is grayed out. After an association is made, it is
no longer grayed out.
To select an object, first navigate through the folder structure

before clicking on the object name: if an association with a
topology object exists, the selected object is highlighted on
the topology diagram.
Each object entry in the design browser offers all of the right-
click options available to the object on the diagram.
Hovering your mouse over a device displays a tooltip that
indicates the Capital Logic design from which it comes.
Enter Filter String box Enter a series of characters. A filter is applied to the Wiring
Browser so that only objects with names containing that
series of characters are listed.
Show all objects / Show Show all objects
remaining objects / Show All harness objects present on the associated Capital Logic
completed objects designs are displayed in the Wiring Browser.
Show remaining objects
Only harness objects that are not yet associated with a an
object on the topology diagram are displayed in the Wiring
Browser.
Show completed objects
Only harness objects that are associated with a an object on
the topology diagram are displayed in the Wiring Browser.
Note
You can hide the Wiring Browser (and the Project Browser Window) by pressing Space Bar
and entering Toggle Browser Area. You can return it in the same way.

February 2016
Chapter 18
Bridges
Full details on how to bridge data in and out of Capital and use the bridges and their
functionality is contained within the Bridging Data In and Out of Capital User Guide.
Bridges are applications that permit the exchange of design data between Capital and other
enterprise design systems using either intermediate file transfer or by direct connection.
Bridges Overview
The Bridges provide two generic functions:
• Bridge Out - the exportation of Capital design or build list data in a format acceptable to
third party design systems.
• Bridge In - the re-importation of design or build list data, that was previously authored
and bridged out from Capital and since modified, using a third-party design system.
File translators, known as the Bridges (that are specific to each third-party design system),
automatically re-format the outgoing and incoming design data to the specific format required
by each system.
During the bridge out procedures, design data is initially extracted from Capital as an X2ML
formatted file. X2ML is the Capital 3D Wiring proprietary XML-based format that is used by
the bridges to create a suitably formatted design file for the various third-party design systems.
For example, when using the CATIA V5 Electrical Adaptor, the Capital design data is initially
(and invisibly) exported using the X2ML format before being automatically re-formatted to a
Dassault Systèmes iXF formatted XML file.
Conversely, whenever a third-party design system's design file is bridged into Capital, the
Bridges automatically convert the file to the X2ML format prior to importing the design data
into Capital.
Note
Before you can use Bridges the bridge types that you wish to utilize, and hence wish to
appear in the Files of Type list in the Bridge Data In/Bridge Data Out dialogs, must be
un-commented in the 1- Adaptors declarations section of the adaptors.xml file. Once un-
commented, the same adaptors will appear in all applicable Capital product bridge lists. For
guidance see the Usage Example - Modifying the Adaptors.xml File.
For further information, see the Bridging Data In and Out of Capital User Guide.

February 2016
Bridges
Bridges Overview

February 2016
Chapter 19
Troubleshooting
This chapter contains troubleshooting tips.

• “Troubleshooting Shared Multicores” on page 737
Troubleshooting Shared Multicores

This section includes the following troubleshooting tips:
• “Cannot add a Shield Termination” on page 737
Table 19-1. Cannot add a Shield Termination

Shield Termination cannot be added to a Shared Multicore.
Shield terminations can not be added to a multicore once it has been shared. The following
four points are steps you can take enable you to add a shield termination to a shared multicore.
1. Unshare the multicore, add the required shield termination and then re share the multicore.
2. In Capital Project, edit the shared multicore and define a shield termination. Re access
Capital Logic, the shield termination you have defined can now be added
3. Add a multicore with a library part that has a shield termination defined and then share the
multicore.
4. Create a new multicore and define a shield and then share

February 2016
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Shared Multicores

February 2016
Index
Associate
Index
—A— cavities with pins, 439

Add designs (Topology), 561
backshell, 228 logical designs, 561
bundle, 591 modular inserts, 226
device list tables, 125 Associate Logical Designs Dialog, 646
diagram list tables, 124 Associate Signals By Attribute or Property
highway, 318 Dialog, 645
highway branch, 319 Associated sub-connectors, 226
inline pair (Topology), 613, 614 Attributes
modular connectors, 224 editing, 423
multicores, 301 finding object by, 477
pins, 145, 148
properties, 411 —B—
rules to objects, 474 Background color, 125
shared conductor, 291 Backshell
shared multicore, 295 adding, 228
shared pins, 230 Backshells
skeleton (Topology), 576 overview, 227
slot (Topology), 577, 578 Batch Update Library Parts, 467
Symbols, 335 Blocked modular connector positions, 225
virtual connector to slot, 584, 585 Build list
Adding a Plug, 187 Setting active, 57
Adding a Receptacle, 187 Bundle length
Adding a Ring Terminal, 187 editing, 414
Adding a Shared Device, 187 Bundle regions
Adding an Inline Connector, 187 editing offset of nodes, 420
Adding Ring Terminals (Video), 188, 219 Bundle Wires report
Advanced naming, 455 Capital Topology, 635
Applicable options, 61 Bundles
Applied Constraints report adding, 591
Capital Topology, 637 Capital Topology, 591
Apply deleting, 597
constraint, 633 editing, 592
Assemblies moving, 596
viewing attributes, 628
Assign —C—
library description, 414 Capital AutoView Assist for Logic
Assign the Correct Ring Terminal for Wire and overview, 495
Stud Specifications (Video), 219 Capital Bridges

February 2016
Bridge In, 735 designs errors, 67
Bridge Out, 735 Checks
Overview, 735 design rule checks, 67
Capital Capture Close
Overview, 29 diagram, 125
Capital Devices, 485 diagram (Topology), 570
Capital Logic Compare
Overview, 26 designs (Topology), 567
Capital Project, 51, 559, 569 Component
Capital Topology selecting, 458
Applied Constraints report, 637 Component BOM report
bundle, 591 Capital Topology, 638
Bundle Wires report, 635 Composite symbols
Component BOM report, 638 updating blocks, 338
constraints, 629 Conductors, 540
Design Browser, 721 creating, 263
design rule checks, 641 disconnecting, 151
designs, 558 displaying name for multiple segments, 454
device connector, 590 promoting to shared, 276
diagrams, 568 routing, 274
enabling, 550 sharing, 276
flow, 551 Connect
Harness report, 634 pins, 153
inline pair, 613 Connectivity Between Pin Lists, 540
Material Statistics report, 635 Connectors
multicore, 610 promoting, 206
Multicore List report, 639 resizing, 213
overview, 545 shared, 186
physical scale, 575 connectors, 186
reports, 634 Constrain
signal, 622 routing of signals, 603
skeleton, 576 Constraining
slot, 577 association of connectors, 588
virtual connector, 584 splices on bundles, 599
virtual harness, 621 Constraints
wire, 603 applying, 633
Wiring Browser, 732 Assign Conductor/s to Hole by
Cavities Attribute/Property, 629
associating with pins, 439 Assign Connector by Attribute/Property,
Chain 629
shield conductors, 298 Capital Topology, 629
Change defining for objects, 471
background color, 125 Minimum Splice Separation, 629
home instance, 204 Place by Attribute/Property, 629
Check

February 2016
Place Inline Half by Attribute/Property, shared objects, 210
629 wire conductors, 266
Route by Attribute/Property, 629 Demote
Set Topology Attribute/Property on Object, shared objects, 448
629 Design Browser, 721
Convert Design Hierarchy, 243
net conductors, 308 Design rule checks
Convert Pins to Studs (Video), 219, 222 Capital Topology, 641
Copy Designs
designs, 100 associating, 561
objects, 129 checking for errors, 67
Create checks, 67
conductors, 263 copying, 100
design (Topology), 558 creating revisions, 60
design revisions, 60 deleting, 50
devices, 181 editing information, 48
diagram, 118 editing properties, 67
diagrams (Topology), 568 managing change synchronization, 70
multicores, 282 refreshing, 69
net conductors, 267 releasing, 70
notch, 270 saving, 56
overbraids, 282 Designs (Topology)
shield terminator, 228 associating, 561
shield terminators, 296 comparing, 567
splice, 277 creating, 558
wire conductors, 264 deleting, 559
Creating a Horizontal Connector, 182 editing, 559
Cross- reference Rules for Objects, 152 synchronizing, 565
Cross- reference Rules for Pins, 152 Device connectors
Cross references Capital Topology, 590
refreshing, 69 overview, 214
Cross-references, 199 viewing attributes, 590
editing graphical properties, 441 Device list tables
adding, 125
—D— Devices
Define constraining placement in slots, 579
constraint for object, 471 creating, 181
rules, 473 ground devices, 211
Delete promoting, 206
bundle, 597 resizing, 213
design (Topology), 559 shared
diagram (Topology), 569 Shared
diagrams, 120 devices, 186
highway, 322, 323 Diagram
inline pair (Topology), 617 closing, 125
net conductors, 270

February 2016
Diagram Browser Window, 481 New Topology Diagram Dialog, 719
Diagram list tables Directly Connected, 540
adding, 124 Disassociate
Diagram Window, 488 modular inserts, 227
Diagrams Disconnect
Capital Topology, 568 conductors, 151
changing background color, 125 Display
creating, 118 conductor name for multiple segments, 454
deleting, 120 option names descriptions, 492
editing properties, 119
generate filtered, 499 —E—
generate for project, 497 Edit
generating when importing project, 500 attributes, 423
setting constraints, 631 bundle, 592
Diagrams (Topology) bundle lengths, 414
closing, 570 design (Topology), 559
creating, 568 diagram (Topology), 569
deleting, 569 general properties, 406
editing, 569 graphical properties, 425
opening, 570 graphical properties of cross-references,
Dialogs 441
Associate Logical Designs Dialog, 646 highway, 321
Associate Signals By Attribute or Property inline pair (Topology), 615, 616
Dialog, 645 parameters, 444
Edit Design Dialog (Topology), 651 shared devices/connectors, 191
Edit Diagram Dialog, 654 slot (Topology), 579
Edit Physical Scale Dialog, 653 text attributes, 439
Edit Properties Bundle Dialog, 659 virtual connector, 586
Edit Properties Device Connector Dialog, virtual harness, 621
656, 665 Edit Design Dialog (Topology), 651
Edit Properties Diagram Dialog, 690 Edit Diagram Dialog, 654
Edit Properties Highway Dialog, 254, 330 Edit Physical Scale Dialog, 653
Edit Properties Inline Plug Connector Edit Properties Bundle Dialog, 659
Dialog, 674 Edit Properties Device Connector Dialog, 656,
Edit Properties Inline Receptacle 665
Connector Dialog, 681 Edit Properties Diagram Dialog, 690
Edit Properties Multicore Dialog, 687 Edit Properties Highway Dialog, 254, 330
Edit Properties Slot Dialog, 668, 692 Edit Properties Inline Plug Connector Dialog,
Edit Properties Virtual Connector Dialog, 674
698 Edit Properties Inline Receptacle Connector
Edit Properties Virtual Harness Dialog, 704 Dialog, 681
Edit Properties Wire Dialog, 710 Edit Properties Multicore Dialog, 687
Edit Skeleton Dialog, 713 Edit Properties Slot Dialog, 668, 692
Material Statistics Dialog, 714 Edit Properties Virtual Connector Dialog, 698
New Topology Design Dialog, 716 Edit Properties Virtual Harness Dialog, 704
Edit Properties Wire Dialog, 710

February 2016
Edit Skeleton Dialog, 713 Harness levels
Editing editing on which wire exists, 419
diagram properties, 119 specifying part numbers, 419
editing parameters, 444 Harness report
Editing shared modular connectors, 227 Capital Topology, 634
Effectivity, 98 Highways
Empty modular connector positions, 225 adding, 318
Enable adding branch, 319
Capital Topology, 550 conductor interface, 317
Equivalence sets definition, 316
overview, 292 deleting, 322, 323
Equivalent devices, 63 editing, 321
Errors interfacing a conductor, 324
checking designs, 67 moving, 320
Extend removing a conductor, 325
selection, 477 routing conductors into, 324
sharing, 327
—F— unrouting conductors, 326, 327
Fi ll patterns, 427 unsharing, 328
Filled modular connector positions, 225 Home instance, 204
Find Hot keys, 493
object by attribute or property, 477
object by name, 477 —I—
Freeze shared objects, 447 ICD, 485
ICD tab, 485
—G— ICDs, 485
General properties, 406 Icons, 491
Generate Import
diagrams for project, 497 project, 500
filtered diagram, 499 Independent connectors, 227
Generate Harness Connectors for Ring Indicators
Terminal (Video), 219 splitting, 285
Generating Inline pairs
harness connectors, 217 adding (Topology), 613, 614
Graphical properties Capital Topology, 613
editing, 425 deleting (Topology), 617
Ground devices, 211 editing (Topology), 615, 616
Group moving (Topology), 617
wires into signal, 622 toggling (Topology), 618
—H— Interface Control Document, 485
Harness —J—
specify attribute, 438 Join
Harness connectors Connector, 191
generating, 217 Device, 191
overview, 214 In-line Connector, 191

February 2016
—L— Multicores
Layout styling, 504 adding, 301
Library description Capital Topology, 610
assigning, 414 creating, 282
unassigning, 416 creating shared, 293
updating, 415 overview, 279
viewing, 416 promoting, 290
Library parts viewing attributes (Topology), 610
refreshing, 69 Multiple selection, 130
Line styles, 426, 427
Locate —N—
Names
source physical object (Topology), 566
advanced naming, 455
—M— specifying, 408
Manage Net conductors
design change synchronization, 70 converting to wire conductors, 308
Material Statistics Dialog, 714 creating, 267
Material statistics report deleting, 270
Capital Topology, 635 merging, 269
Merge modifying, 268
net conductors, 269 New Topology Design Dialog, 716
wire conductors, 265 New Topology Diagram Dialog, 719
Modify Notch
net conductors, 268 creating, 270
Modular connectors, 224, 227
adding, 224 —O—
Objects, 444
Modular housings, 224
Modular inserts, 224 copying, 129
finding by name, 477
associating, 226
select in diagrams, 127
disassociating, 227
selecting all in diagram, 129
Modular parents, 227
selecting by name, 477
Modular positions, 227
selecting parent object, 450
Modular shells, 224
Offsets of bundle region nodes, 420
Modular tab, 443
Open
Modular tab - Read only, 227
diagram (Topology), 570
Move
Options
bundle, 596
displaying names or descriptions, 492
highway, 320
refreshing, 69
inline pair (Topology), 617
Output Window, 489
pins, 149
Overbraids
text, 438
creating, 282
virtual connector, 587
creating shared, 293
wire conductors, 265
overview, 280
Multicore List report
promoting, 290
Capital Topology, 639
Overview

February 2016
backshells, 227 —R—
Capital AutoView Assist for Logic, 495 Reference pins
Capital Capture, 29 overview, 152
Capital Logic, 26 Release
device connectors, 214 designs, 70
equivalence sets, 292 Release levels, 51, 559, 569
ground devices, 211 Remove
harness connectors, 214 skeleton (Topology), 576
multicores, 279 Replace
overbraids, 280 composite symbols, 339
reference pins, 152 symbols, 341
Report
—P— Capital Topology, 634
Parameters Resize
editing for objects, 444 device/connector, 213
Parent connectors, 224 Revision
Part numbers shared objects, 197
specifying for harness levels, 419 Revisions
Physical scale creating, 60
Capital Topology, 575 Route
specifying, 575
conductors, 274
Pin list, 540 Rules
Pin Processor, 540 adding to objects, 474
Pins
defining, 473
adding, 145, 148
connect overlapping, 153 —S—
moving, 149 Save
Place Pins Dialog Box, 260 designs, 56
Placed Folder, 486 Save Design into Assembly, 433
Placed in other designs, 486 Select
Position List, 443 all objects in diagram, 129
Project Browser Window, 479 component, 458
Projects extending, 477
generating diagrams, 500 object by attribute or property, 477
importing, 500 object by name, 477
Promote objects in diagram, 127
conductor to shared, 276 parent object, 450
device/connector/splice, 206 Set
multicores, 290 constraints on diagram, 631
overbraids, 290 Set active
Properties Build list, 57
adding, 411 Share
editing for design, 67 conductors, 276
editing general, 406 highway, 327
finding object by, 477 Shared, 186

February 2016
adding shared pins, 230 part number for harness level, 419
create multicores, 293 slot types, 417
creating overbraids, 293 Specifying
cross-references on objects, 199 physical scale (Topology), 575
edit devices/connectors, 191 Splices
freeze objects, 447 automatic creation, 279
revisions of objects, 197 creating, 277
splices, 186 promoting, 206
unfreeze objects, 447 shared, 186
Shared conductor Split
adding, 291 indicators for multicores/overbraids, 285
Shared multicore Status Bar, 489
adding, 295 Styling
Shared Objects layout, 504
refreshing, 69 Sub-components, 224
Shared objects Sub-connectors, 224, 226, 227
deleting unused objects, 210 Symbol Browser Window, 482
demoting, 448 Symbol libraries
unsharing, 448 refreshing, 69
Shared Objects Browser Window, 483 Symbols
Sharing a Modular Connector, 206 adding, 335
Shield conductors replacing, 341
chaining, 298 replacing composites, 339
shield terminator, 228 updating, 337
Shield terminators updating blocks, 338
creating, 296 Synchronize
Short description, 410 change management, 70
Signal Tracer, 540 designs (Topology), 565
Signals
Capital Topology, 622 —T—
constraining routing, 603 Text
Skeletons editing attributes, 439
adding (Topology), 576 moving, 438
Capital Topology, 576 Toggle
removing (Topology), 576 inline pair (Topology), 618
Slots —U—
adding (Topology), 577, 578 Unallocated Folder, 486
Capital Topology, 577 Unassign
constraining device placement, 579 library descriptions, 416
editing (Topology), 579 Unfreeze shared objects, 447
specifying type, 417 Unplace Connector, 86
Snap To Object, 399 Unplace Device, 86
Specify Unplace Object, 86
harness attribute, 438 Unplace Pin, 86
name property, 408 Unplaced Folder, 485

February 2016
Unshare
highway, 328
objects, 448
Update
library descriptions, 415
symbol blocks, 338
symbols, 337
Updating a Symbol Instance in a Diagram, 337
—V—
Variants
refreshing, 69
View
assembly attributes, 628
device connector attributes, 590
library descriptions, 416
multicore attributes (Topology), 610
wire attributes (Topology), 607
Virtual connectors
adding to slot, 584, 585
editing, 586
moving, 587
Virtual harnesses
editing, 621
—W—
Window, 478
Wire conductors
creating, 264
deleting, 266
merging, 265
moving, 265
Wires
back annotate length, 608
editing harness levels, 419
grouping into signal, 622
viewing attributes (Topology), 607
Wiring Browser, 732

February 2016
February 2016
Third-Party Information
For full information on open source and third-party software that may be included in Capital products see the following:
Third-Party Information Section in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide. For last minute additions to
this information refer to the latest Capital Release Highlights document.
End-User License Agreement
The latest version of the End-User License Agreement is available on-line at:
www.mentor.com/eula
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
USE OF ALL SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCTS. USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES CUSTOMER’S COMPLETE
AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT.
ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY.
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”)
This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software (as defined in Section 2) and hardware (collectively “Products”)
between the company acquiring the Products (“Customer”), and the Mentor Graphics entity that issued the corresponding
quotation or, if no quotation was issued, the applicable local Mentor Graphics entity (“Mentor Graphics”). Except for license
agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by Customer and an authorized
representative of Mentor Graphics, this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties’ entire understanding
relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements. If Customer does not agree to these
terms and conditions, promptly return or, in the case of Software received electronically, certify destruction of Software and all
accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid.
1. ORDERS, FEES AND PAYMENT.
1.1. To the extent Customer (or if agreed by Mentor Graphics, Customer’s appointed third party buying agent) places and Mentor
Graphics accepts purchase orders pursuant to this Agreement (each an “Order”), each Order will constitute a contract between
Customer and Mentor Graphics, which shall be governed solely and exclusively by the terms and conditions of this Agreement,
any applicable addenda and the applicable quotation, whether or not those documents are referenced on the Order. Any
additional or conflicting terms and conditions appearing on an Order or presented in any electronic portal or automated order
management system, whether or not required to be electronically accepted, will not be effective unless agreed in writing and
physically signed by an authorized representative of Customer and Mentor Graphics.
1.2. Amounts invoiced will be paid, in the currency specified on the applicable invoice, within 30 days from the date of such invoice.
Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one-half percent per month
or the applicable legal rate currently in effect, whichever is lower. Prices do not include freight, insurance, customs duties, taxes
or other similar charges, which Mentor Graphics will state separately in the applicable invoice. Unless timely provided with a
valid certificate of exemption or other evidence that items are not taxable, Mentor Graphics will invoice Customer for all
applicable taxes including, but not limited to, VAT, GST, sales tax, consumption tax and service tax. Customer will make all
payments free and clear of, and without reduction for, any withholding or other taxes; any such taxes imposed on payments by
Customer hereunder will be Customer’s sole responsibility. If Customer appoints a third party to place purchase orders and/or
make payments on Customer’s behalf, Customer shall be liable for payment under Orders placed by such third party in the event
of default.
1.3. All Products are delivered FCA factory (Incoterms 2010), freight prepaid and invoiced to Customer, except Software delivered
electronically, which shall be deemed delivered when made available to Customer for download. Mentor Graphics retains a
security interest in all Products delivered under this Agreement, to secure payment of the purchase price of such Products, and
Customer agrees to sign any documents that Mentor Graphics determines to be necessary or convenient for use in filing or
perfecting such security interest. Mentor Graphics’ delivery of Software by electronic means is subject to Customer’s provision
of both a primary and an alternate e-mail address.
2. GRANT OF LICENSE. The software installed, downloaded, or otherwise acquired by Customer under this Agreement, including any
updates, modifications, revisions, copies, documentation, setup files and design data (“Software”) are copyrighted, trade secret and
confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors, who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not
expressly granted by this Agreement. Except for Software that is embeddable (“Embedded Software”), which is licensed pursuant to
separate embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer, subject to payment of
applicable license fees, a nontransferable, nonexclusive license to use Software solely: (a) in machine-readable, object-code form
(except as provided in Subsection 4.2); (b) for Customer’s internal business purposes; (c) for the term of the license; and (d) on the
computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics. A site is restricted to a one-half mile (800 meter) radius. Customer
may have Software temporarily used by an employee for telecommuting purposes from locations other than a Customer office, such as
the employee’s residence, an airport or hotel, provided that such employee’s primary place of employment is the site where the
Software is authorized for use. Mentor Graphics’ standard policies and programs, which vary depending on Software, license fees paid
or services purchased, apply to the following: (a) relocation of Software; (b) use of Software, which may be limited, for example, to
execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time (such limitations may be
technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices); and (c) support services provided, including
eligibility to receive telephone support, updates, modifications, and revisions. For the avoidance of doubt, if Customer provides any
feedback or requests any change or enhancement to Products, whether in the course of receiving support or consulting services,
evaluating Products, performing beta testing or otherwise, any inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments made
by Mentor Graphics (at Mentor Graphics’ sole discretion) will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics.
3. BETA CODE.
3.1. Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation (which may be either alpha or beta,
collectively “Beta Code”), which may not be used without Mentor Graphics’ explicit authorization. Upon Mentor Graphics’
authorization, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a temporary, nontransferable, nonexclusive license for experimental use to
test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics may
choose, at its sole discretion, not to release Beta Code commercially in any form.
3.2. If Mentor Graphics authorizes Customer to use the Beta Code, Customer agrees to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal
conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics. Customer will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during Customer’s use of the
Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements. Upon completion of Customer’s evaluation and testing,
Customer will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code, including its strengths, weaknesses and
recommended improvements.
3.3. Customer agrees to maintain Beta Code in confidence and shall restrict access to the Beta Code, including the methods and
concepts utilized therein, solely to those employees and Customer location(s) authorized by Mentor Graphics to perform beta
testing. Customer agrees that any written evaluations and all inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments
that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement, including those based partly or wholly on
Customer’s feedback, will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights, title and
interest in all such property. The provisions of this Subsection 3.3 shall survive termination of this Agreement.
4. RESTRICTIONS ON USE.
4.1. Customer may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. Each copy must include all notices
and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics. All copies shall
remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors. Except for Embedded Software that has been embedded in executable
code form in Customer’s product(s), Customer shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of
Software, including copies merged with other software, and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon
request. Customer shall not make Products available in any form to any person other than Customer’s employees and on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of
confidentiality. Customer shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Products and ensure that any person
permitted access does not disclose or use Products except as permitted by this Agreement. Customer shall give Mentor Graphics
written notice of any unauthorized disclosure or use of the Products as soon as Customer becomes aware of such unauthorized
disclosure or use. Customer acknowledges that Software provided hereunder may contain source code which is proprietary and
its confidentiality is of the highest importance and value to Mentor Graphics. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics
may be seriously harmed if such source code is disclosed in violation of this Agreement. Except as otherwise permitted for
purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law, Customer shall not reverse-assemble,
disassemble, reverse-compile, or reverse-engineer any Product, or in any way derive any source code from Software that is not
provided to Customer in source code form. Log files, data files, rule files and script files generated by or for the Software
(collectively “Files”), including without limitation files containing Standard Verification Rule Format (“SVRF”) and Tcl
Verification Format (“TVF”) which are Mentor Graphics’ trade secret and proprietary syntaxes for expressing process rules,
constitute or include confidential information of Mentor Graphics. Customer may share Files with third parties, excluding
Mentor Graphics competitors, provided that the confidentiality of such Files is protected by written agreement at least as well as
Customer protects other information of a similar nature or importance, but in any case with at least reasonable care. Customer
may use Files containing SVRF or TVF only with Mentor Graphics products. Under no circumstances shall Customer use
Products or Files or allow their use for the purpose of developing, enhancing or marketing any product that is in any way
competitive with Products, or disclose to any third party the results of, or information pertaining to, any benchmark.
4.2. If any Software or portions thereof are provided in source code form, Customer will use the source code only to correct software
errors and enhance or modify the Software for the authorized use, or as permitted for Embedded Software under separate
embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement. Customer shall not disclose or permit disclosure of source
code, in whole or in part, including any of its methods or concepts, to anyone except Customer’s employees or on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, with a need to know. Customer shall not copy or compile source code in
any manner except to support this authorized use.
4.3. Customer agrees that it will not subject any Product to any open source software (“OSS”) license that conflicts with this
Agreement or that does not otherwise apply to such Product.
4.4. Customer may not assign this Agreement or the rights and duties under it, or relocate, sublicense, or otherwise transfer the
Products, whether by operation of law or otherwise (“Attempted Transfer”), without Mentor Graphics’ prior written consent and
payment of Mentor Graphics’ then-current applicable relocation and/or transfer fees. Any Attempted Transfer without Mentor
Graphics’ prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may, at Mentor Graphics’ option, result in the
immediate termination of the Agreement and/or the licenses granted under this Agreement. The terms of this Agreement,
including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions, shall be binding upon Customer’s permitted successors in
interest and assigns.
4.5. The provisions of this Section 4 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
5. SUPPORT SERVICES. To the extent Customer purchases support services, Mentor Graphics will provide Customer with updates and
technical support for the Products, at the Customer site(s) for which support is purchased, in accordance with Mentor Graphics’ then
current End-User Support Terms located at http://supportnet.mentor.com/supportterms.
6. OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE. Products may contain OSS or code distributed under a proprietary third party license agreement, to
which additional rights or obligations (“Third Party Terms”) may apply. Please see the applicable Product documentation (including
license files, header files, read-me files or source code) for details. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement
(including any addenda) and the Third Party Terms, the Third Party Terms will control solely with respect to the OSS or third party
code. The provisions of this Section 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
7. LIMITED WARRANTY.
7.1. Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period its standard, generally supported Products, when properly installed,
will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual. Mentor Graphics does not
warrant that Products will meet Customer’s requirements or that operation of Products will be uninterrupted or error free. The
warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation, whichever first occurs. Customer must
notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty
applies only to the initial shipment of Software under an Order and does not renew or reset, for example, with the delivery of (a)
Software updates or (b) authorization codes or alternate Software under a transaction involving Software re-mix. This warranty
shall not be valid if Products have been subject to misuse, unauthorized modification, improper installation or Customer is not in
compliance with this Agreement. MENTOR GRAPHICS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND CUSTOMER’S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY SHALL BE, AT MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OPTION, EITHER (A) REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON
RETURN OF THE PRODUCTS TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR (B) MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE
PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WITH RESPECT TO: (A) SERVICES; (B) PRODUCTS PROVIDED AT NO CHARGE; OR (C) BETA CODE; ALL OF
WHICH ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.”
7.2. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 7 ARE EXCLUSIVE. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS
LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, WITH RESPECT TO
PRODUCTS PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY.
8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS) WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OR ITS LICENSORS’ LIABILITY UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED FROM CUSTOMER FOR THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE LICENSE OR
SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID, MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS
LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 8
SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.
9. THIRD PARTY CLAIMS.
9.1. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics has no control over the testing of Customer’s products, or the specific
applications and use of Products. Mentor Graphics and its licensors shall not be liable for any claim or demand made against
Customer by any third party, except to the extent such claim is covered under Section 10.
9.2. In the event that a third party makes a claim against Mentor Graphics arising out of the use of Customer’s products, Mentor
Graphics will give Customer prompt notice of such claim. At Customer’s option and expense, Customer may take sole control
of the defense and any settlement of such claim. Customer WILL reimburse and hold harmless Mentor Graphics for any
LIABILITY, damages, settlement amounts, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by or awarded
against Mentor Graphics or its licensors in connection with such claims.
9.3. The provisions of this Section 9 shall survive any expiration or termination of this Agreement.
10. INFRINGEMENT.
10.1. Mentor Graphics will defend or settle, at its option and expense, any action brought against Customer in the United States,
Canada, Japan, or member state of the European Union which alleges that any standard, generally supported Product acquired
by Customer hereunder infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in such jurisdiction. Mentor Graphics
will pay costs and damages finally awarded against Customer that are attributable to such action. Customer understands and
agrees that as conditions to Mentor Graphics’ obligations under this section Customer must: (a) notify Mentor Graphics
promptly in writing of the action; (b) provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance to settle or defend the
action; and (c) grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action.
10.2. If a claim is made under Subsection 10.1 Mentor Graphics may, at its option and expense: (a) replace or modify the Product so
that it becomes noninfringing; (b) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Product; or (c) require the return of the
Product and refund to Customer any purchase price or license fee paid, less a reasonable allowance for use.
10.3. Mentor Graphics has no liability to Customer if the action is based upon: (a) the combination of Software or hardware with any
product not furnished by Mentor Graphics; (b) the modification of the Product other than by Mentor Graphics; (c) the use of
other than a current unaltered release of Software; (d) the use of the Product as part of an infringing process; (e) a product that
Customer makes, uses, or sells; (f) any Beta Code or Product provided at no charge; (g) any software provided by Mentor
Graphics’ licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics’ customers; (h) OSS, except to the extent that
the infringement is directly caused by Mentor Graphics’ modifications to such OSS; or (i) infringement by Customer that is
deemed willful. In the case of (i), Customer shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its reasonable attorney fees and other costs
related to the action.
10.4. THIS SECTION 10 IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 8 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR
GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS, AND CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, FOR DEFENSE,
SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES, WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT
OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.
11. TERMINATION AND EFFECT OF TERMINATION.
11.1. If a Software license was provided for limited term use, such license will automatically terminate at the end of the authorized
term. Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement immediately upon
written notice if Customer: (a) exceeds the scope of the license or otherwise fails to comply with the licensing or confidentiality
provisions of this Agreement, or (b) becomes insolvent, files a bankruptcy petition, institutes proceedings for liquidation or
winding up or enters into an agreement to assign its assets for the benefit of creditors. For any other material breach of any
provision of this Agreement, Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement
upon 30 days written notice if Customer fails to cure the breach within the 30 day notice period. Termination of this Agreement
or any license granted hereunder will not affect Customer’s obligation to pay for Products shipped or licenses granted prior to
the termination, which amounts shall be payable immediately upon the date of termination.
11.2. Upon termination of this Agreement, the rights and obligations of the parties shall cease except as expressly set forth in this
Agreement. Upon termination of this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement, Customer shall ensure that
all use of the affected Products ceases, and shall return hardware and either return to Mentor Graphics or destroy Software in
Customer’s possession, including all copies and documentation, and certify in writing to Mentor Graphics within ten business
days of the termination date that Customer no longer possesses any of the affected Products or copies of Software in any form.
12. EXPORT. The Products provided hereunder are subject to regulation by local laws and European Union (“E.U.”) and United States
(“U.S.”) government agencies, which prohibit export, re-export or diversion of certain products, information about the products, and
direct or indirect products thereof, to certain countries and certain persons. Customer agrees that it will not export or re-export Products
in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local, E.U. and U.S. government agencies. If Customer
wishes to disclose any information to Mentor Graphics that is subject to any E.U., U.S. or other applicable export restrictions, including
without limitation the U.S. International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or special controls under the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR), Customer will notify Mentor Graphics personnel, in advance of each instance of disclosure, that such information
is subject to such export restrictions.
13. U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. The parties agree that all Software is
commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to U.S. FAR 48
CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. government or a U.S.
government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, which shall supersede any
conflicting terms or conditions in any government order document, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory
federal laws.
14. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. Mentor Graphics Corporation, Mentor Graphics (Ireland) Limited, Microsoft Corporation and
other licensors may be third party beneficiaries of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein.
15. REVIEW OF LICENSE USAGE. Customer will monitor the access to and use of Software. With prior written notice and during
Customer’s normal business hours, Mentor Graphics may engage an internationally recognized accounting firm to review Customer’s
software monitoring system and records deemed relevant by the internationally recognized accounting firm to confirm Customer’s
compliance with the terms of this Agreement or U.S. or other local export laws. Such review may include FlexNet (or successor
product) report log files that Customer shall capture and provide at Mentor Graphics’ request. Customer shall make records available in
electronic format and shall fully cooperate with data gathering to support the license review. Mentor Graphics shall bear the expense of
any such review unless a material non-compliance is revealed. Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all information
gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights
under this Agreement. The provisions of this Section 15 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
16. CONTROLLING LAW, JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION. The owners of certain Mentor Graphics intellectual
property licensed under this Agreement are located in Ireland and the U.S. To promote consistency around the world, disputes shall be
resolved as follows: excluding conflict of laws rules, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of
Oregon, U.S., if Customer is located in North or South America, and the laws of Ireland if Customer is located outside of North or
South America or Japan, and the laws of Japan if Customer is located in Japan. All disputes arising out of or in relation to this
Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Portland, Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply, or Dublin,
Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply, or the Tokyo District Court when the laws of Japan apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all
disputes in Asia (excluding Japan) arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration in Singapore before a
single arbitrator to be appointed by the chairman of the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (“SIAC”) to be conducted in the
English language, in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute, which rules are deemed to be
incorporated by reference in this section. Nothing in this section shall restrict Mentor Graphics’ right to bring an action (including for
example a motion for injunctive relief) against Customer in the jurisdiction where Customer’s place of business is located. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement.
17. SEVERABILITY. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void, invalid, unenforceable or
illegal, such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect.
18. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement contains the parties’ entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior
or contemporaneous agreements. Any translation of this Agreement is provided to comply with local legal requirements only. In the
event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this Agreement shall govern to the extent
not prohibited by local law in the applicable jurisdiction. This Agreement may only be modified in writing, signed by an authorized
representative of each party. Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent, waiver
or excuse.
Rev. 151102, Part No. 265968

Logic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Logic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Capital® Logic™ User Guide

Incorporating Capital® Autoview Assist for Logic™ and

© 2016 Mentor Graphics Corporation

Mentor Graphics Corporation

Send Feedback on Documentation: supportnet.mentor.com/doc_feedback_form

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 3

Setting an Active Build List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Project Folders Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 5

Redoing an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Help Button Landing Pages for Pins Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 7

Resizing a Device or Connector by Dragging a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

8 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Edit Properties: Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 9

Chaining Shield Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

10 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Update Symbol - Options Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 11

Editing the Graphical Properties of a Graphical Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

12 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Specifying the Name Property of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 13

Fill Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

14 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Bridge Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 15

Synchronizing Wiring Changes with a Capital Topology Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

16 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 17

Applied Constraints Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

18 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Edit Properties: Wire Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 19

20 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Figure 3-1. Design For Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 21

22 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Table 2-1. Release Level Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 23

Table 17-6. Connector Details Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

24 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 25

26 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Reporting on a Project's Connectivity

User Access Rights in Capital Logic

Object Model Integrity

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 27

The following line sets the level of validation:

Replace VALUE with one of the following options:

• NONE - no validation will be performed.

<validation level="HIGH" failureStopsExportValidation="true"

replacing attribute name with one of the following attributes:

28 Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1

Launching Capital Library from this

Launching Capital Symbol from this

Video Live Drive - Interactive Flow

The video is available in the Capital learning paths:

• Designer Connectivity (Foundation)

Capital® Logic™ User Guide, 2015.1 29